Yamaha v4 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: v4

Categorie: Software

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

How to Use This Reference Manual

The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you

to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.

Searching for terms

To search for a term, use the search function of the software

you’re using to view this document.

If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box

and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search

for occurrences of that term.

Displaying the next/previous view

If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next

view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back

to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different

page.

Using the Function Tree

A function tree for the CL series is provided on page 4 and

following. You can use this function tree to find the page that

explains an on-screen display or function.

Reference Manual

Contents

Reference Manual

Contents

How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1

Function Tree ............................................................................ 4

SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section ....................................................... 6

Centralogic section ................................................................. 13

Operations in the Centralogic section .................................................................... 13

Input and output patching..................................................... 18

CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... 18

Changing the input patching ................................................................................ 19

Changing the output patching .............................................................................. 20

Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................ 23

Directly outputting an INPUT channel ................................................................... 26

Input channels ........................................................................ 28

Signal flow for input channels................................................................................ 28

Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... 29

HA (head amp) settings ......................................................................................... 31

Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ................... 37

Added pan function (Monaural input channels only) ............................................. 40

Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. 42

Channel name display indication ........................................................................... 46

Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay).................................................. 47

Surround output for input channels....................................................................... 50

Channel library operations..................................................................................... 54

OUTPUT channels.................................................................... 55

Signal flow for output channels ............................................................................. 55

Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... 56

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. 57

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to

MATRIX buses............................................................................................. 59

Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)............................................... 62

Channel library operations..................................................................................... 63

EQ and Dynamics ..................................................................... 64

Using EQ ................................................................................................................ 64

Using dynamics ...................................................................................................... 67

Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries............................................................................. 70

Channel Job ............................................................................. 71

DCA group............................................................................................................. 71

DCA Roll-out function ............................................................................................ 74

Mute group............................................................................................................ 76

Using the Recall Safe function................................................................................. 79

Channel Link function ............................................................................................ 82

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel.............................................................. 87

About Mix Minus.................................................................................................... 91

Scene memory ......................................................................... 92

Storing and recalling scenes ................................................................................... 92

Editing scene memories.......................................................................................... 97

Using the Global Paste function.............................................................................. 99

Using the Focus Recall function ............................................................................ 102

Using the Fade function........................................................................................ 103

Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall

(GPI OUT) ................................................................................................. 105

Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall............................................. 106

Using Preview mode............................................................................................. 108

Monitor and Cue functions ................................................... 109

Using the Monitor function .................................................................................. 110

Using the Cue function......................................................................................... 116

Talkback and Oscillator......................................................... 125

Using Talkback ..................................................................................................... 125

Using the Oscillator function ................................................................................ 127

Meters.................................................................................... 130

Operations in the METER screen ........................................................................... 130

Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ..................... 134

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK..... 135

About the virtual rack ........................................................................................... 135

Virtual rack operations.......................................................................................... 136

Graphic EQ operations ......................................................................................... 139

About AUTOMIXER............................................................................................... 146

Editing the internal effects .................................................................................... 148

Effects and tempo synchronization ....................................................................... 155

Contents

Reference Manual

Using the Premium Rack...................................................................................... 156

Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries ............ 166

I/O devices and external head amps .................................... 167

Using an I/O device ............................................................................................. 167

Remotely controlling an R series unit ................................................................... 169

Third-party equipment’s HA control function....................................................... 173

Remotely controlling an amp............................................................................... 175

Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit..................................................................... 176

Using an external head amp ................................................................................ 178

MIDI....................................................................................... 183

MIDI functionality on the CL series console.......................................................... 183

Basic MIDI settings .............................................................................................. 183

Using program changes to recall scenes and library items.................................... 186

Using control changes to control parameters....................................................... 188

Using parameter changes to control parameters .................................................. 190

Recorder................................................................................ 191

About the USB memory recorder ......................................................................... 191

Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder ....................................... 191

Recording audio to a USB flash drive.................................................................... 193

Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 195

Editing the title list............................................................................................... 196

Recording or playing back using a computer DAW .............................................. 197

Using the CL console with Nuendo Live............................................................... 200

Setup ..................................................................................... 204

About the SETUP screen....................................................................................... 204

User settings ........................................................................................................ 206

Preferences .......................................................................................................... 213

USER DEFINED keys ............................................................................................. 215

Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ........................................ 217

USER DEFINED knobs........................................................................................... 222

Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ...................................... 223

Assignable encoders ............................................................................................ 225

Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders .................................. 226

GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder) functions ..................................... 227

Custom fader bank .............................................................................................. 227

Master fader ........................................................................................................ 228

Custom fader bank functions ............................................................................... 229

Console Lock ....................................................................................................... 229

Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive............................... 230

Formatting a USB flash drive................................................................................ 236

Word clock and slot settings................................................................................. 237

Using cascade connections ................................................................................... 239

Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.................................................... 243

Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off.............................................. 244

Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays,

and lamps ................................................................................................. 244

Setting the date and time of the internal clock ..................................................... 245

Setting the network address ................................................................................. 245

Dante audio network settings ............................................................................... 246

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) .................................................................. 257

Help function......................................................................... 263

Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 263

Viewing Help........................................................................................................ 263

Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly................................................... 264

Other functions ..................................................................... 265

Initializing the unit to factory default settings ....................................................... 265

Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) .............. 265

Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ........................................................... 266

Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ............................... 266

Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)................................................ 268

Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display .......................................... 268

Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display.............................................. 269

Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings........................ 269

Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware................................................... 270

Update function to Dante firmware ...................................................................... 270

Warning/Error Messages ...................................................... 271

Index...................................................................................... 274

Function Tree

Reference Manual

Function Tree

Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the

Owner’s Manual(booklet).

Main

SELECTED CHANNEL 6

OVERVIEW 14

FUNCTION ACCESS AREA (18)

CHANNEL PARAMETER

PATCH/NAME 20, 30, 56

GAIN/PATCH 32

1ch 32

8ch 33

CH1-48 35

CH49-72/ST IN 35

OUTPUT

Indication only

INPUT DELAY 47

8ch 47

CH1-48 48

CH49-72/ST IN 48

DELAY SCALE 47

INSERT/DIRECT OUT 24

1ch 24, 26

8ch 25, 27

HPF/EQ 64

1ch 64

8ch 66

CH1-48 66

CH49-72/ST IN 66

OUTPUT 66

DYNAMICS 67

1ch 67

KEY IN SOURCE SELECT 68

8ch 69

CH1-48 70

CH49-72/ST IN 70

OUTPUT 70

CHANNEL PARAMETER

MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND 44

TO STEREO/MONO 57

8ch 57

CH1-48 58

CH49-72/ST IN 58

OUTPUT 58

SURROUND 50

LIBRARY

CHANNEL LIBRARY 54

EQ LIBRARY 70

DYNAMICS LIBRARY 70

GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY 166

EFFECT LIBRARY 166

Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/

EQ-1A/DynamicEQ/Buss Comp 369/MBC4

LIBRARY

166

DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 168

RACK

VIRTUAL RACK 136

RACK MOUNTER 139

GEQ EDIT 140

RACK LINK 140

EFFECT RACK 150

EFFECT EDIT 150

EFFECT TYPE 150

PREMIUM RACK 156

PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER 156

PREMIUM RACK EDIT 157

AUTOMIXER 146

PARAMETRIC EQ 143

I/O DEVICE

DANTE PATCH 167

DANTE INPUT PATCH 168

OUTPUT PATCH 169

I/O 169

AMP 175

WIRELESS 176

EXTERNAL HA 180

EXTERNAL HA RACK 180

EXTERNAL HA EDIT 180

EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT 181

MONITOR

MONITOR 110

CUE 120

MONITOR 112

OSCILLATOR 128

TALKBACK 126

METER

INPUT METER 130

OUTPUT METER 130

RTA METER 132

SETUP

USER SETUP 204

PREFERENCE 213

USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP 215

USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List) 215

USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP 222

USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List) 222

ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP 225

CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER 228

FADER ASSIGN SELECT 227

USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY 207

CREATE KEY 208

SAVE KEY 211

SAVE/LOAD 230

I/O DEVICE

Function Tree

Reference Manual

NOTE

• The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5.

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show

channels and faders that do not exist on those models.

WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP 237

CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH 240, 242

OUTPUT PORT 62

MIDI/GPI 183, 257

MIDI SETUP 184

PROGRAM CHANGE 186

CONTROL CHANGE 189

GPI 258

FADER START 261

BUS SETUP 243

SURROUND SETUP 205

CONSOLE LOCK 229

DATE/TIME 245

NETWORK 246

DANTE SETUP 247

SCENE

SCENE LIST 94

GLOBAL PASTE 100

Fade time 104

SONG SELECT 107

FOCUS RECALL 102

RECORDER

USB 191

NUENDO LIVE 200

CH JOB

CH LINK MODE 83

DCA GROUP ASSIGN 72

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 72

RECALL SAFE MODE 80

CH COPY MODE 87

CH MOVE MODE 89

CH DEFAULT MODE 90

SETUP PATCH

PORT SELECT

25, 27, 113, 121,

168, 241

CH SELECT 22, 137, 192, 228

Others

CONFIRMATION 214

SOFT KEYBORD (21)

Startup Menu

MODE SELECT 265

INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES 265

INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES 265

TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 265

INPUT PORT TRIM 267

OUTPUT PORT TRIM 267

SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 267

FADER CALIBRATION 266

LED COLOR CALIBRATION 268

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

SELECTED CHANNEL section

The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a channel

module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel to set

all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.

Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL]

key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip,

either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels

will be linked.

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section

Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

NOTE

• To select a MIX or MATRIX channel, use the Bank

Select keys to recall the desired channel to the

Centralogic section, and then press the [SEL] key for

the desired channel.

• The number and name of the currently-selected

channel is shown in the channel select field located in

the Function Access Area of the touch screen.

• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been

assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch

between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same

[SEL] key.

• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel

select field located in the Function Access Area.

Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to

select the next channel.

• If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the

PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button),

pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1 ch).

• Even if a different screen is selected, the channel selected with the

[SEL] key can be set using the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL

section. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will

appear on screen when you operate a knob.

STEP

1. Use the [SEL] key in the top panel INPUT section, ST IN section, or the STEREO/

MONO section, to select the channel to control.

2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

3. Use the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons in the SELECTED

CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.

Channel number

Channel name

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen

 SEND field

In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel

to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the

send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in

the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels

(odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono

channels or a stereo channel.

1 Tabs

Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be

displayed in the SEND field.

• MIX1-16 tab............................ displays MIX buses 1-16.

• MIX17-24/MATRIX tab ........... displays MIX buses 17-24 and

MATRIX buses 1-8.

If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:

1 SEND knob

Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus.

2 PRE indicator

The type of the corresponding bus is indicated. If the type is VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE

FADER], and if the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, the type is

displayed.

3 ON button

Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.

If the destination bus is a stereo channel:

1 SEND/PAN knob

The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (even-

numbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the

same signal.

2 PRE indicator

The type of the corresponding bus is indicated.

3 ON button

Switches the send signal to the two buses on or off.

NOTE

• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers 2 and 3 mentioned above will not

be displayed.

• Press the SEND knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window.

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

When using CUE B

Indicates that channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX

bus are combined with CUE B.

NOTE

For details about how to use CUE B, see the

CUE screen (When configuring CUE B).

 GAIN/PATCH field

This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also

view the operational status of the head amp.

1 GAIN knob

Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp.

Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.

2 GC indicator

Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio

network if the Gain Compensation function is turned

on.

3 OVER indicator

Warns you when the signal is clipping.

4 Ø (Phase) indicator

Indicates the status of the phase setting.

5 +48V indicator

Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.

6 HPF ON indicator

Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.

7 AG-DG LINK indicator

Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp.

8 Digital/Analog gain value

If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital

gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here.

NOTE

• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7

will not be shown. For an output channel,

1 - 7 will not be shown.

• If a GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP  PREFERENCE

screen, the digital gain knob will appear for

1, and 2, 5, 6, and 7 will not be displayed.

For details, refer to “HA (head amp) settings” (page 31).

If patched to a wireless mic (SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen)

1 RX.GAIN knob

Sets the gain for the receiver. Press the knob to open the

GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.

2 OL indicator

Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the

overload point.

3 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active

antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

4 Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

5 MUTE indicator

Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.

6 Frequency

Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

 PAN/BALANCE field

This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel

to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.

The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the

selected channel.

When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:

1 TO STEREO PAN knob

Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the

STEREO bus.

Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch

window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can

specify whether to view the PAN knob or the

BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel,

the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the

signal is stereo.

NOTE

• For mono input channels, the pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or

right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.

• For ST IN channels, if the PAN knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left

or right and -3dB at center. If the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at

center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link

is used.

2 ST/MONO button

Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the

channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.

If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the

LCR button appears in location

2.The LCR button

is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from

the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.

When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:

1 BALANCE knob

If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the

BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust

the volume balance for the left and right channels.

If the channel signal is monaural, the BALANCE

knob is not shown and cannot be used.

Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch

window.

When using Surround mode (MIX1- MIX6)

3 DOWN MIX

This field enables you to view the downmix

coefficient and L/R button settings.

Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO

window.

 INPUT DELAY field

This field enables you to view the delay settings.

1 ON indicator

Indicates the on/off status of the delay.

2 Delay time

The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If

the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the

ms value appears in the middle row.

Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window.

 HPF field (input channels only)

This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel

is selected, a gray circle will appear in location

1, and 2

will not be displayed.

1 HPF knob

Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.

2 ON button

Switches the HPF on or off.

1 2

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

 EQ parameter field

This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. Press each

knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window.

1 Q knob

Specifies the Q for each band.

If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H.SHELF (high-

shelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L.SHELF (low-

shelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter

type name will be displayed.

NOTE

• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counter-

clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter

type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing

and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.

• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while

pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to low-

shelving.

• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW

band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter

type to HPF.

• You can also switch the filter type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.

2 FREQUENCY knob

Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.

3 GAIN knob

Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.

NOTE

• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN

knob on the panel.

• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN

knob on the panel.

NOTE

When the BYPASS button is on, the knobs turn gray.

 EQ graph field

This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open

the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ.

 DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field

This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.

1 OVER indicator

Warns you when the signal is clipping.

2 Level meter

Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange)

when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.

3 Threshold

Specifies the threshold.

4 Parameters

Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected

dynamics type.

Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can

make detailed parameter settings.

1 2 3

1 2

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

 INSERT field

This field enables you to make insert settings.

1 Popup button

Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT

1ch window.

2 ON button

Switches the insert on or off.

3 RACK EDIT button

Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit

screen for the inserted rack.

4 IN indicator

Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is

sent to the insert-in.

 DIRECT OUT field

This field enables you to make Direct Out settings.

1 Popup button

Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch

window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the

button.

2 ON button

Switches the Direct Out on or off.

 RECALL SAFE field

This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.

1 Popup button

Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE window.

2 ON button

Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.

3 PARTIAL indicator

Lights only if some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe.

 FADER field

This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off

status and the level.

1 Fader

Displays the current level.

Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.

2 Level indicator

Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If

the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the Σ

CLIP indicator will light.

3 ON button

Switches the channel on and off. The button is linked

with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel.

NOTE

For CL V2.0 and later, the TOUCH AND TURN function

assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs enables you

to control the fader in the FADER field of the SELECTED

CHANNEL VIEW screen.

4 CUE SETTINGS button

Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.

 DCA/MUTE field

This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the

channel is assigned.

1 Tabs

Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again

to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.

When the DCA group tab is selected:

2 DCA group select buttons

Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.

3 Mute group indicators

Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.

When two channels are

used for CUE, and

CUE OPERATION MODE

is set to CH

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Reference Manual

When the mute group tab is selected:

4 Mute group select buttons

Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.

NOTE

If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights

orange.

5 SAFE button

Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.

6 DCA group indicators

Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.

Centralogic section

Reference Manual

Centralogic section

The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously

control a set of eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press one of the

Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to

the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in

the Centralogic section.

Operations in the Centralogic section

NOTE

• When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW

screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1-8. This is convenient when you want to

quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups

selected for control.

• The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be

controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys of the Centralogic section.

• The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction

knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogic section.

Bank Select keys

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA

groups that you want to control.

2. Use the faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the (up

to) eight selected channels and switch them on/off.

3. Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the

parameters for the group of up to eight channels.

Centralogic section

Reference Manual

OVERVIEW Screen

 CHANNEL NAME field

This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number,

name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected

channel is highlighted.

NOTE

If you have retained a specific channel (that is controlled by the faders or knobs in the Centralogic

section) by pressing and holding down the corresponding Bank Select key, the channel name

display at the top of the channel strip graphic may differ from the name displayed at the bottom

of the same channel strip.

 GAIN/PATCH field

This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also

view the operational status of the head amp.

The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the

selected channel.

If the head amp is patched:

1 GAIN knob

Sets the analog gain of the head amp.

• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the

Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation

function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to

the audio network.

• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open

the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.

2 OVER indicator

Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.

This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.

3 +48V indicator

Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is

not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.

4 Ø (Phase) indicator (input channels only)

Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp

NOTE

• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be

displayed.

• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the DIGITAL

GAIN knob will appear instead of knob

1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed.

• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then

set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value

by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.

• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN  DIGITAL GAIN to a USER

DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then

adjusting the USER DEFINED knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while

ALTERNATE is on.

: Selected channel

: Unselected channel

Centralogic section

Reference Manual

If patched to a wireless mic (OVERVIEW screen)

1 RX.GAIN knob

Sets the gain for the receiver. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.

• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the

Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain.

• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open

the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.

2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown

on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

3 Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

4 OL indicator

Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.

NOTE

If the audio signal for the receiver is muted, 5 is displayed.

5 MUTE indicator

Displayed only if the audio signal for the receiver is muted.

NOTE

If the audio signal for the receiver is not muted, 4 is displayed.

 INPUT DELAY field (input channels only)

This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT

DELAY 8ch window.

1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator

Indicates the on/off status of the delay.

 INSERT/DIRECT OUT field

This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT/DIRECT

OUT 8ch window.

1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator

Indicates the insert on/off status.

2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)

Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.

1 2

3 4 5

If the slot is patched:

The slot name will appear.

If the rack is connected:

The patch and module name will appear.

If the output is connected:

Only the patch will appear.

Centralogic section

Reference Manual

 EQ field

This field graphically indicates the approximate response of

the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in

which you can set the HPF and EQ.

NOTE

If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.

 DYNAMICS 1/2 field

This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics

1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch window.

NOTE

If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.

 SEND field

This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post

settings for 16 buses.

To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1-16] key/[MIX 17-24/

MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

To adjust the send level for each bus, use the SEND knob of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section

This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.

If the destination bus is VARI (mono):

The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post

status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting,

the knob scale color turns black.

If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):

If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the

left-hand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will

function as the SEND knob.

If the destination bus is set to FIXED:

The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob.

Centralogic section

Reference Manual

 TO STEREO/MONO field

This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/

MONO bus.

This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.

When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:

1 TO STEREO PAN knob

Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.

Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected,

you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window.

For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE

knob will appear if the signal is stereo.

2 ST/MONO indicator

Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.

If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator

will be displayed.

When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:

The Σ CLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating

the balance of the left/right channels.

 DCA group field

A DCA group (1-16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row

in this field.

Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.

 Mute group field

A mute group (1-8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field.

If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the

third row. If a dimmer level has been specified for a mute group, the color of the characters will

change from red to orange.

Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

Input and output patching

This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect

inserts, and how to use direct outputs.

When the CL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to

each input channel.

For CL5

For CL3

For CL1

When the CL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following

output channels.

CL console internal patching and Dante audio

network patching

The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and

Dante audio network.

Input channels Input port (jack/port)

CH1-48 DANTE1-48

CH49-64 DANTE49-64

CH65-72 OMNI1-8

ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)

Input channels Input port (jack/port)

CH1-48 DANTE1-48

CH49-64 DANTE49-64

ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)

Input channels Input port (jack/port)

CH1-48 DANTE1-48

ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)

Output port (jack/port) Output channels

DANTE1-24 MIX 1-24

DANTE25-32 MATRIX1-8

DANTE33-34 STEREO L/R

DANTE35 MONO

DANTE36-37 MONITOR L/R

DANTE38 MONITOR C

DANTE39-40 CUE L/R

DANTE41-64 NO ASSIGN

SLOT1 (1)-(16) MIX1-16

SLOT2 (1)-(8) MIX17-24

SLOT2 (9)-(16) MATRIX1-8

SLOT3 (1)-(2) STEREO L/R

SLOT3(3) MONO

SLOT3 (4)-(5) MONITOR L/R

SLOT3(6) MONITOR C

SLOT3 (7)-(8) CUE L/R

SLOT3 (9)-(16) NO ASSIGN

OMNI OUT 1 - OMNI OUT 6 MIX 1-6

OMNI OUT 7 - OMNI OUT 8 STEREO L/R

FX1L(A), FX2L(A), FX3L(A),

FX4L(A), FX5L(A), FX6L(A),

FX7L(A), FX8L(A)

MIX17, MIX18, MIX19, MIX20, MIX21, MIX22, MIX23,

MIX24

DIGITAL OUT L/R STEREO L/R

RECORDER INPUT L/R STEREO L/R

Output port (jack/port) Output channels

8 16 16 16 64

Dante-MY16-AUD

ID #3

ID #1

ID #2

OMNI MY MY MY

INPUT PATCH

Dante Network

“Dante” (ports)

CL series

I/O Device

Dante

patching

CL series

internal

patching

I/O Device

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

Input patching

CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network

patching and CL console internal patching.

For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this

window, you can patch the CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be

input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels

from a maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/

O device (up to 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console.

Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen) to

channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1-64 in the

GAI N /PATCH s c re e n .

NOTE

By default, DANTE 1-64 are assigned to input channels 1-64.

Output patching

Use the OUTPUT PORT screen to patch the CL console’s output channels and Dante audio

network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1-64 ports.

NOTE

By default, MIX 1 - 24 are assigned to DANTE 1 - 24, MATRIX 1 - 8 are assigned to DANTE 25

- 32, STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35.

Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1-64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT SETUP

screen) to I/O rack outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH screen of the I/O RACK to make these

assignments.

Changing the input patching

NOTE

You can also select an input port from the GAIN/PATCH screen.

STEP

Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels that

you want to control.

2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and

use the port select buttons to select the input port.

OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

PATCH/NAME screen

1 PATCH button

Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an

icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.

2 Icon button

Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this

button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.

3 Channel name input box

Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this

field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear.

4 Category select list

Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input

ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.

• DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32

• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64

• OMNI/PB OUT .......OMNI 1 - OMNI 8, PB OUT (L), PB OUT (R)

• SLOT1 ....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)

• SLOT2 ....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)

• SLOT3 ....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)

• EFFECT RACK ......FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)

• PREMIUM RACK...PR1L(A) - PR2R(B)

5 Port select buttons

Select the input port that is assigned to the currently-selected channel.

6 Tabs

Enable you to switch between items.

7 Close button

Closes the screen.

Changing the output patching

To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination

of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for

each output port.

Selecting the output port for each output channel

2 73

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels.

2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and

use the port select buttons to select the output port.

OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

PATCH/NAME screen

1 PATCH button

Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when

another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.

2 Channel select button

Selects the channel to set.

NOTE

Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.

3 Channel icon button

Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.

When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or

sample name.

4 Channel number display box

Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.

5 Channel name input box

Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this

field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.

6 Category select list

Select the type of port.

7 Port select buttons

From the category, these buttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the

selection, press the button once again.

8 Tabs

Enable you to switch between items.

9 Close button

Closes the screen.

Selecting the output channel for each output port

NOTE

If PATCH CONFIRMATION in the PREFERNCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a

confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL

PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to

change a location that is already patched elsewhere.

3 54

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of

the SETUP screen.

3. In the tabs below the OUTPUT PORT screen, select the output port you want to

control.

4. Press the channel select button of the port you want to operate.

5. Use the category select list and the channel select buttons to select the send-source

channel.

SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

CH SELECT screen

1 Category select list

Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels.

They vary depending on the output port type.

• MIX/MATRIX .............................MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8

• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ..............STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), MONI L, MONI

R, MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON R,

SMON C, SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs, MMTX

L, MMTX R, MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX Ls, MMTX

• DIRECT OUT 1-32 ....................CH 1 - CH 32 Direct Outs

• DIRECT OUT 33-64 ..................CH 33 - CH 64 Direct Outs

• DIRECT OUT 65-72 ..................CH 65 - CH 72 Direct Outs

• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-CH32 Insert 1 Outs

• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-CH64 Insert 1 Outs

• INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-CH72 Insert 1 Outs

• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX1-MIX24, MATRIX1-MATRIX8 Insert 1 Outs

• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 1 Outs

• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-CH32 Insert 2 Outs

• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-CH64 Insert 2 Outs

• INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-CH72 Insert 2 Outs

• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX1–MIX24, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 2 Outs

• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 2 Outs

• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX ........... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8

• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ......STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L, CUE R

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

2 Channel select button

Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.

3 CLOSE button

Closes the screen.

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

Inserting an external device into a channel

You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port

used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for

each channel.

NOTE

• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must

synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (page 237).

• There is a limit to the sum of INSERT 1 and INSERT 2 for each channel group, as shown in the

table below. You can select any output or input ports.

* When using Surround mode

• If you exceed the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN limitation, the indicator will light up on the left.

• If the limit is exceeded, invalid ports will be marked with a strike-out line.

• If the limit is exceeded, the following ports will take priority per channel group (listed in the table

above).

1 INSERT 1 will take priority over INSERT 2.

2 Lower-number channel will take priority.

STEP

1. Connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an I/O card

installed in slots 1 - 3.

2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel to which

you want to assign the input source.

3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field.

4. Press the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button.

5. Select an output port or an input port.

6. Press the INSERT ON button.

CH1-16 CH17-32 CH33-48

CH49-64

(CL5 and

CL3

only)

CH65-72

(CL5

only)

MIX1-24/

ST/

MONO

MATRIX

1-8

INSERT

OUT

16 16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8

INSERT IN 16 16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8

OVERVIEW screen INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch)

 INSERT field

This field enables you to make insert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE EQ

(immediately before the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON

(immediately after the [ON] key) as the insert position.

NOTE

You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block.

1 INSERT OUT button

Displays the currently-selected output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to

open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.

2 INSERT IN button

Displays the currently-selected input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to

open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port.

3 INSERT ON/OFF button

Switches the insert on or off.

4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)

Specifies whether the insert position and direct out point setting will be applied to all

input channels.

5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)

Specifies whether the insert point setting will be applied to all output channels.

NOTE

Insert 1 and insert 2 are serial connections with fixed sequential numbers.

 INSERT IN HA field

This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the

insert-in.

6 +48V button

Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2)

on or off.

7 A.GAIN knob

Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2.

Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs.

NOTE

• If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console

as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the

INSERT IN HA field.

• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal

selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.

8 HA meter

Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert

9 Close button

Closes the screen.

0 Resource Meter

Displays the settings for each channel for INSERT IN and INSERT OUT.

NOTE

If surround mode is set on the CL series console, the INSERT resources for output channels

[MIX/ST MONO] are reduced from 30 to 24.

3 < < 9

86 7

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear.

2 INSERT ON/OFF button

Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above

the button.

3 INSERT OUT button

Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen,

in which you can select an output port.

4 INSERT IN button

Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen,

in which you can select an input port. You can also view the insert-in level by checking

the indicator located to the right of the this button.

PORT SELECT screen

Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel

or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for

insertion.

1 Category select list

Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The

displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.

• OMNI...................................... OMNI1 - OMNI8

• SLOT1.................................... SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)

• SLOT2.................................... SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)

• SLOT3.................................... SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)

• GEQ RACK............................ GEQ1L(A) - GEQ16R(B)

(MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only)

GEQ1L(A) - GEQ8R(B) (INPUT channels only)

• EFFECT RACK...................... FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)

• PREMIUM RACK................... PR1L(A) - PR8R(B)

2 Port select buttons

Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected

channel.

NOTE

If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or

insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode

will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in

which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be

defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.

3 CLOSE button

Closes the screen.

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

Directly outputting an INPUT channel

The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O

device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.

NOTE

If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must

synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (page 237).

INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch)

1 DIRECT OUT field

Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF

(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER

(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct

output position.

2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button

Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the

PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.

3 DIRECT ON button

Switches the Direct Out on or off.

4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob

Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using

the multifunction knob.

5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)

Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input

channels.

6 Close button

Closes the screen.

STEP

1. Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card

installed in slot 1-3.

2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel that

you want to output directly.

3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.

4. Press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen.

5. Select an output port.

OVERVIEW screen INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)

Input and output patching

Reference Manual

INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)

1 DIRECT ON button

Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated

above the button.

2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button

Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the

PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.

3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob

Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using

the multifunction knob.

4 Close button

Closes the screen.

PORT SELECT screen

Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eight-

channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output.

1 Category select list

Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output

ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.

• OMNI/REC .............OMNI1-OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R)

• SLOT1....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)

• SLOT2....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)

• SLOT3....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)

• DANTE1-32............DANTE1 - DANTE32

• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64

2 Output port select buttons

Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.

3 CLOSE button

Closes the screen.

Input channels

Reference Manual

Input channels

This chapter explains various operations for input channels.

Signal flow for input channels

The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O

devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1-3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus,

MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.

MONO channels

These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the

default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned.

STEREO channels

These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the

default state, the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1 - 8 is assigned.

•INPUT PATCH

Assigns input signals to the input channels.

• Ø (phase)

Switches the phase of the input signal.

• DIGITAL GAIN

Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.

• HPF (High Pass Filter)

Cuts the region below the specified frequency.

• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)

A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.

• DYNAMICS 1

This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating and ducking, or as an expander

or compressor.

• DYNAMICS 2

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.

•INPUT DELAY

Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.

• LEVEL/DCA 1-16

Adjusts the input level of the effect.

•ON (On/off)

Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.

MIX

12 23

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

12 78

INPUT PATCH

(C)

CUE (A)

CUE(A) L

CUE(A) R

CUE B R

CUE B L

TRIM

MIX

12 23

(C)

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

12 78 LR

INPUT PATCH

CUE(A) L

CUE(A) R

CUE B L

CUE B R

TRIM

CUE (A)

Input channels

Reference Manual

•Pan

Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the

STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter

adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the

STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP window so that the setting of

the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that

are set to stereo.

• LCR (Left/Center/Right)

Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal

that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel.

• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)

This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 - 24.

• MIX LEVEL 1-24 (MIX send levels 1-24)

Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 -

24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from

the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.

• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)

This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.

• MATRIX LEVEL 1 - 8 (MATRIX send levels 1 - 8)

Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.

As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from

the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.

• INSERT (MONO channels only)

You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an

effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose

immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON]

key.

• DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only)

This can be patched to any output port, and the input signal sent directly from that

output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before

the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after

the [ON] key.

• METER

Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is

detected (page 131).

Specifying the channel name/icon

On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel.

Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon.

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels.

2. Press the channel number/channel name field of the channel you want to specify on

the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Switch between items in the tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel

name and icon.

OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen

Input channels

Reference Manual

PATCH/NAME screen

 When selecting the PATCH tab

PATCH button

Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active,

a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.

2 Icon button

Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.

When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or

sample name.

3 Channel name input box

Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the

SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.

4 Tabs

Enable you to switch between items.

5 Close button

Closes the screen.

 When selecting the ICON tab

Channel color select buttons

Select a channel color.

2 Icon select buttons

Select a channel icon.

3 Sample name setup buttons

Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.

NOTE

• You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample

name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a

consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a

number.

• In CL V1.7 and later, you can set the channel color to black (OFF). The channel indicators on

channels for which black is selected will go off.

2 53

Input channels

Reference Manual

 When selecting the NAME tab

You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen.

HA (head amp) settings

You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the

input channel.

• To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL

section.

Setting the gain

Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window.

NOTE

• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and

+18 dB.

• Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold

output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

• The GAIN knob, +48V button, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned

input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is

connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels.

2. Press the HA/PHASE field in the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window.

4. Make settings for the head amp.

OVERVIEW screen GAIN/PATCH window (8 ch)

Input channels

Reference Manual

GAIN/PATCH window (1 ch)

1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator

Indicates the channel icon, number, and name.

2 HA section

Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.

NOTE

• If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed.

• If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed.

• +48V button

Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.

• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob

Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Adjust the gain by using the

multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an

indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the

function was turned on.

•HA meter

Displays the level of the HA input signal.

• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button

Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain

Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device

to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the

monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording

via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant

level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device

is changed. If the Gain Compensation button is turned off, the compensation gain will

be reset, while the analog gain will return to the level that was obtained before you

turned on the button. Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the

same.

• Gain compensation meter

Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.

2 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)

•Frequency

Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.

• RX.GAIN knob

Sets the HA gain for the receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the

knob indicates the input level.

• MUTE indicator

Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.

• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.

An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is

enabled by lighting up.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

• Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

3 INPUT PORT button

Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PORT

SELECT window, in which you can select a port to patch.

4 Icon / Channel name button

Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/

NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.

5 AG-DG LINK button

If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the

digital gain to the analog gain operation.

While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you

to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles.

32 4 5 6 7

01 8 9

Input channels

Reference Manual

6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob

Indicates the digital gain value. Adjust the digital gain by using the multifunction knobs.

If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the

level of the signal input to the input channels.

7 Digital gain meter

Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.

8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button

Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.

9 Ø (Phase) button

Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head

amp.

0 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons

You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels

simultaneously.

You can also view the link status in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.

GAIN/PATCH window (8ch)

1 Channel select button

Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the

corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL

section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.

2 PATCH button

Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the

input channel.

: Link is on.

: Link is off.

Input channels

Reference Manual

PORT SELECT window

• TAKE FROM PORT button

The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA

settings of the port will remain unchanged.

• TAKE FROM CHANNEL button

The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had

been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port.

If the channel’s HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from

the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that

does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be

specified.

NOTE

If you’re newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified

if the HA INFO field’s TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed.

3 HA section

Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.

NOTE

If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the

MY card will be displayed.

• +48V button

This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched.

Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.

• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob

Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob to control the

parameter values using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain

Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the

analog gain position at the time the function was turned on.

• Level meter

Indicates the input signal level .

• GC (Gain Compensation) button

Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.

3 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)

•Frequency

Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.

• RX.GAIN knob

Sets the HA gain for the receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the

knob indicates the input level.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

• MUTE indicator

Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.

• RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal.

An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is

enabled by lighting up.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

HA setting Default value

HA gain amount -6dB

HPF on/off Off

Phantom power on/off Off

Gain compensation on/off Off

TAKE FROM PORT button

TAKE FROM CHANNEL button

Input channels

Reference Manual

• Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

4 Ø (Phase) button

Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head

amp.

5 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob

Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the

multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will

be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels.

6 Digital gain meter

Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.

7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button

Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.

8 AG-DG LINK button

If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the

digital gain to the analog gain operation.

While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you

to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles.

NOTE

If it is patched to a wireless mic, the battery indicator is displayed here.

9 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons

You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels

simultaneously.

GAIN/PATCH window

(1-48, 49-72/ST IN (CL5), 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))

This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you

can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the

multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section.

1 Parameter select buttons

Switch parameters to view in the window.

• ANALOG GAIN...................... Analog gain

• DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain

• PATCH ................................... Patch selection

2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons

Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.

3 Channel select button

Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.

12 12

Input channels

Reference Manual

 If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:

GAIN knob

Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel,

and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation

function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time

the function was turned on.

2 OVER indicator

Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.

This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.

3 +48V indicator

Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.

4 Ø (Phase) indicator

Indicates the phase setting for each channel.

NOTE

If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not

recognized, the knob

1 will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. 3

will not be displayed.

If the input channel is patched to a rack, the knob

1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack.

If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob

1 will be replaced with a dotted line “----”.

 If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button:

GAIN knob

Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel,

and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob.

2 OVER indicator

Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.

This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.

3 Ø (Phase) indicator

Indicates the phase setting for each channel.

 If you press the PATCH parameter select button:

PATCH button

Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input

port to patch to the channel.

 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic)

RX.GAIN knob

Sets and displays and the gain for the receiver.

2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown

on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

3 Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

4 OL indicator

Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.

NOTE

When the receiver is muted, is displayed on the MUTE indicator.

Input channels

Reference Manual

Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain

Compensation is on

If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O

device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount.

Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the

digital domain.

For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain

Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to

+45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated

by -15 dB).

At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series console will be adjusted by the digital

gain parameter of the CL series console.

If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the

analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console,

because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level.

However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must

first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and

then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain

Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same

amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.

NOTE

You can perform this operation by assigning the Gain Compensation on/off function to one of the

USER DEFINED keys.

Sending the signal from an input channel to the

STEREO/MONO bus

The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are

two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR

mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as

follows.

 ST/MONO mode

This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus

independently.

• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be

switched on or off individually.

• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by

the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)

• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is

controlled by this knob.

If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals

sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (page 39).

 LCR mode

This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C))

simultaneously.

• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on

or off collectively.

• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an

input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.

• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.

NOTE

If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or

similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the

monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.

Input channels

Reference Manual

STEP

1. Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want

to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.

2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel from

which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.

3. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in

the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.

4. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/

MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.

5. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO

channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.

6. In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel

you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.

The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was

selected for the channel in step 4.

Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected

7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn on/off

the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.

8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel

to the STEREO bus.

Channels for which LCR mode is selected

7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the

input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.

8. Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.

9. Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input

channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.

OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window

Input channels

Reference Manual

TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)

Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from input

channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.

2 Mode LEDs

The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.

3 MODE select button

For a MONO channel, the mode can be switched between ST/MONO and LCR. For a

STEREO channel, the mode can be switched between PAN and BALANCE.

4 ST/MONO buttons

These buttons are on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the

STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.

5 Σ clipping indicator

Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of

signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also

as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the

STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the

corresponding multifunction knob.

7 Tabs

Enable you to switch between windows.

8 LCR button

If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of 4. This

button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and

MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input

channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.

9 CSR knob

Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and

to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to

select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (page 41).

ST/MONO mode LCR mode

Input channels

Reference Manual

Added pan function (Monaural input channels

only)

The pan setting for signals sent to the STEREO bus enables you to select PAN LAW settings.

You can select one of the following:

NOTE

The settings are also applied to the signals sent to the stereo MIX buses.

1 PAN LAW select button

This toggle button is used to set the PAN LAW for the Input Channel.

For CENTER NOMINAL For LR NOMINAL

NOTE

PAN LAW settings are also enabled in LCR mode. They are also enabled in Surround mode.

You can also check the status of PAN LAW settings in the window shown below. For channels

where the mark is on, PAN LAW is set to LR NOMINAL.

• TO STEREO/MONO window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST

IN(CL1))

• OVERVIEW window (STEREO/MONO field)

• SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window (PAN/BALANCE field)

CENTER NOMINAL

The pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned 100%

either left or right.

LR NOMINAL

The pan level is -3dB at center and nominal when panned 100%

either left or right.

STEP

1. Select a monaural input channel.

2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in

the OVERVIEW window, and then press the knob once again. Or, in the PAN/

BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the

SELECTED CHANNEL window, and then press the knob once again.

3. Use the PAN LAW select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to set the PAN

LAW for each channel.

Input channels

Reference Manual

TO STEREO/MONO window

(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN

(CL1))

Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/

MONO bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight

channels.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.

2 Σ clipping indicator

Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

Adjusts the panning or balance.

To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding

multifunction knob.

If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the

Σ indicator to the right of the knob will light.

4 ST/MONO indicator

If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/

off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.

If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.

The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the

STEREO bus/MONO bus.

Signal level when LCR mode is selected

If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus

will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob.

 When the CSR knob is set to 0% (MONO channel)

The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the

MONO (C) bus.

 When the CSR knob is set to 0% (STEREO channel)

The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is

sent to the MONO (C) bus.

CLR

TO ST PAN knob

Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the STEREO (L)

channel to the STEREO (L) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the STEREO (R)

channel to the STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

Input channels

Reference Manual

 When the CSR knob is set to 100%

 When the CSR knob is set to 100% (ST IN channel)

Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/

MATRIX bus

The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on

stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is

independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or

to a backstage monitoring system.

You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways.

 Using the Selected Channel section

With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send

levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input

channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.

 Using the Centralogic section

With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level

of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight

consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.

 Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)

With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the

faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When

using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be

adjusted simultaneously.

CLR

PAN k no b

Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus

Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus

Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to

the MONO (C) bus

Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to

the STEREO (L) bus

Signal level

CLR

TO ST BALANCE knob

Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to

the MONO (C) bus

Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to

the STEREO (R) bus

Signal level

Input channels

Reference Manual

Using the Selected Channel section

This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust

the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.

NOTE

• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select

keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then

press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.

MIX buses can be either a FIXED type whose send level is fixed, or a VARI type whose send

level is variable. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and

VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP

button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP window.

 If the MIX bus is a FIXED type

A gray circle is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot

adjust the send level.

 For a VARI type MIX bus or a MATRIX bus

The TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob is displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob

in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in

the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level.

 If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus

You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX

buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the

two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX

PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will

operate as a BALANCE knob).

NOTE

• For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX

buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating

the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal

sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount

sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.

• For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO

window, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the

left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX

buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the

amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it

clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX

bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, the left knob will function

as the PAN knob. The right knob function will be the same as in BALANCE mode.

STEP

1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,

and connect your monitor system, external effects processor, or other device to the

corresponding output port.

2. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals

to the MIX/MATRIX bus.

3. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.

4. Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.

5. Turn on the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MIX

bus.

6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust

the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.

SELECTED CHANNEL

VIEW screen

Input channels

Reference Manual

Using the Centralogic section

You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of

signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.

NOTE

• If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select

keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the

[CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel.

• In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/

MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX/MATRIX that you want to

adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.

MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND window

1 ALL PRE button

Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from

all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send

destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.

2 ALL POST button

Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from

all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send

destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.

3 Send destination indicator

Indicates the currently-selected send destination.

4 Send destination select buttons

Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.

5 Channel select button

Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,

number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the

button.

6 PRE/POST button

Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the

button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.

NOTE

• If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE

FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS

SETUP window (page 243).

• The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.

7 SEND ON/OFF button

Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.

STEP

1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,

and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the

corresponding output port.

2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you

want to control.

3. In the OVERVIEW scree, press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the

desired send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus, and then press it again.

4. Use the SEND ON/OFF button in the MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND screen to turn the

signal on/off and to adjust the send level.

OVERVIEW screen

13 32 1 2

8 8

Input channels

Reference Manual

8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob

Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send

destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.

If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.

If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting

in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE

will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode

selected here will appear.

9 SEND LEVEL knob

Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to

control the level using the multifunction knobs.

If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)

You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels

to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.

NOTE

• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The most recently

selected group of MIX/MATRIX buses will be assigned to the Centralogic section. The faders in

the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to indicate the send level of signals that

are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus.

• Alternatively, you can press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to

display a window from which you can select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.

• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the

Centralogic section. If you select the MIX buses or MATRIX buses by pressing the [SEL] keys,

the setting of the MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button will be changed automatically.

• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be

turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor

the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.

• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly

switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back

again.

STEP

1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals,

and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the

corresponding output port.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.

3. Use the MIX/MTRX ON select buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between

MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX.

4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the

send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.

5. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level

of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.

Function

access area

Input channels

Reference Manual

SENDS ON FADER mode

1 MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button

Use this button to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX for the bus

displayed in the Function Access Area.

2 MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons

Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders.

3 Close button

Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode.

Channel name display indication

In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON/OFF is indicated for the channel.

On the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is

shown if NAME DISPLAY is set to “NAME ONLY”.

CHANNEL ON

CHANNEL OFF

Channel number

display

Input channels

Reference Manual

Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)

This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using the Input Delay

function.

This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone

locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a

delay (a time gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for

broadcast on TV.

NOTE

If you are viewing the 8 ch INPUT DELAY screen, you can use the Bank Select keys in the

Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.

INPUT DELAY screen (8ch)

You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay.

1 DELAY SCALE button

Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit

for the delay time.

There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of

samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can

choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will

appear as the units in the channel name display.

2 Channel select button

The currently-selected input channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the

channel.

3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)

You can use the multifunction knob to adjust the delay. You can view the current value

immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown

using the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY

SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob.

4 Tabs

Enable you to switch between windows.

5 Close button

Closes the screen.

STEP

1. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals

to the MIX/MATRIX bus.

2. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.

3. Press the INPUT DELAY field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.

4. Press the 8 ch tab in the INPUT DELAY screen.

5. Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay.

SELECTED CHANNEL

VIEW screen

INPUT DELAY screen

1 5

Input channels

Reference Manual

INPUT DELAY (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),

CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))

1 DELAY SCALE button

Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit

for the delay time.

2 Channel select button

Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the

channel.

3 Delay setting knob (input channels only)

Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the

current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the

knob (shown using the currently-selected scale).

NOTE

If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of

the knob.

Additional functions for stereo input channels

With V3, you can temporarily set the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can

select from the following three settings.

 L-MONO

Only the L channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.

 R-MONO

Only the R channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.

STEREO IN Lch

STEREO IN Rch

STEREO R

STEREO L

PAN/BAL

STEREO IN Lch

STEREO IN Rch

STEREO R

STEREO L

PAN/BAL

Input channels

Reference Manual

 LR-MONO

Although the result is a monaural signal that is the summation of signals from both channels,

the R channel of the stereo input channel is muted.

NOTE

• When you set LR-MONO, the PAN mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the PAN knob

is set to the center position.

• When you set LR, L-MONO, or R-MONO, the BALANCE mode is selected at the same time. In

addition, the BALANCE knob is set to the center position.

 Setting procedure

If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as

shown below.

1 LR-MONO SELECT field

Select one of the four buttons. The button you select lights up, and the others go off.

If a stereo input channel is selected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below.

2 LR-MONO SELECT button

This a toggle button. The setting switches each time the button is pressed.

Normal STEREO setting

L-MONO

R-MONO

LR-MONO

Input channels

Reference Manual

Surround output for input channels

Setting Surround mode

You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode.

NOTE

When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6

change to MONO x2.

However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and

5/6 remain as MONO x2.

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen

appears as shown below.

1 L/R knob

This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

2 F/R knob

This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

3 Assign buttons for each bus

If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button

off.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button (page 205).

3. Press the 5.1 SURROUND button.

4. Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output.

5. Press the APPLY button.

6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.

SETUP screen

SURROUND SETUP screen

Input channels

Reference Manual

4 DIV knob

This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.

When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to

50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to

100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).

Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

5 LFE knob

This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

6 Surround position

The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position

is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting.

Hard pan: Red

Any other setting: Orange

7 Surround graph

This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH

screen.

OVERVIEW screen

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown

below.

1 Surround graph

This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH

screen.

2 L/R F/R switch button

Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for

adjusting F/R.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

3 LFE knob

This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

Adjusting L/R

Adjusting F/R

Input channels

Reference Manual

SURROUND PAN 1CH screen

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears

as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.

1 Surround graph

This graph shows the surround positions.

2 Surround position

You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph.

3 Assign buttons for each bus

All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not

want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.

4 L/R knob

This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

5 F/R knob

This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

6 DIV knob

This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.

When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to

50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to

100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).

Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

7 LFE knob

This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

8 DEFAULT button

Press this button to reset all parameters to the initial values.

9 COPY button

All parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.

0 PASTE button

Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current

settings. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

6 754

Input channels

Reference Manual

SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-

64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48,

CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) appears as shown below. This

screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW

screen or the OVERVIEW screen.

1 Surround graph

This graph shows the surround positions.

2 L/R F/R switch button

Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for

adjusting F/R.

Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.

Adjusting L/R

Adjusting F/R

Input channels

Reference Manual

TO STEREO/MONO screen

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for

MIX 1-8 appears as shown below. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes.

1 L/R buttons

Use these buttons to set the output destination.

2 Coefficient Setting fader

Use this fader to set the downmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator.

The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be

set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters.

Channel library operations

The “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters

(including the head amp settings) for input channels.

To recall a library item, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED

CHANNEL VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section

in the separate Owner’s Manual.

LIBRARY button

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

OUTPUT channels

This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels,

MONO channels).

Signal flow for output channels

The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various

buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other

buses. The following types of output channels are provided.

MIX channels

These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to

the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.

STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel

Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus

or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input

channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be

used together as a set of three output channels.

MATRIX channel

These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/

MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.

• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)

A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.

• DYNAMICS 1

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.

•LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the channel.

MIX

12 23

(C)

12 78

TRIM

CUE B ON

CUE(A) ON

KEY IN

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

CUE (A)

MIX

12 23

(C)

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

12 78

CUE (A)

TRIM

CUE B ON

CUE(A) ON

MIX

12 23

(C)

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

12 78

CUE (A)

MATRIX 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

CUE(A) ON 1-6

CUE B ON

TRIM

This section does not exist in MATRIX 7-8.

MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

• ON (On/off)

Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be

muted.

• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)

This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel,

or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.

• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)

This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R)

channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1 - 8. For the position from which

the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the

fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.

If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust

the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel

or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left

and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.

•INSERT

You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an

effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.

• METER

Indicates the level of the output channel.

You can switch the position at which the level is detected.

• KEY IN (MIX channels 21-24 only)

You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21 - 24 to Dynamics processors and

use them as key-in signals to control the Dynamics.

• RACK IN PATCH

Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.

• OUTPUT PATCH

Assigns an output port to an output channel.

• MONITOR SELECT

Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.

Specifying the channel name/icon

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels.

2. On the OVERVIEW screen, press the channel number/channel name field of the

channel for which you want to specify a channel name/icon.

3. Follow the steps for the input channels (page 29).

OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/

MONO bus

There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and

LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode

are the same as for input channels.

NOTE

Refer to “Signal level when LCR mode is selected” (page 41) for details on how the signal level

sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the

TO ST PAN knob.

TO STEREO/MONO window(8ch)

You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to

the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.

2 Mode LEDs

The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the MIX channel from

which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.

2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in

the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.

3. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/

MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.

4. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO

channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.

5. In the Centralogic section, press an OUTPUT bank select key so that the MIX

channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section.

6. Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Centralogic

section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.

The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was

selected for the channel in step 3.

Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected

7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent

from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off .

8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel

to the STEREO bus.

Channels for which LCR mode is selected

7. Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window.

8. Press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the level

difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to

the MONO (C) bus.

9. Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust

the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and

MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and

STEREO (L/R) bus.

OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window

ST/MONO mode LCR mode

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

3 MODE select button

Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR.

4 ST/MONO buttons

These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel

to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.

5 Σ clipping indicator

Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob

that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the

type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that

adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To

adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding

multifunction knob.

7 Tabs

Enable you to switch between windows.

8 LCR button

This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus

and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input

channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.

9 CSR knob

Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and

to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to

select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.

TO STEREO/MONO screen

(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3),

ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)

Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO/MONO

bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.

2 Σ clipping indicator

Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob

Adjusts the panning or balance.

To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding

multifunction knob.

If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that

channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.

4 ST/MONO indicator

If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/

off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.

If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.

The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the

STEREO bus/MONO bus.

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/

MONO channels to MATRIX buses

You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8 in the

following two ways.

 Using the Selected Channel section

With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send

levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent

from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.

 Using the Centralogic section

With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the

send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals

sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.

Using the Selected Channel section

Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent

from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.

NOTE

• You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO

channels.

• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys

in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the

appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.

STEP

1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and

connect an external device.

2. Using the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section, assign the desired MIX

channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.

3. Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to select the input channel that will

send signals to the MATRIX buses.

4. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.

5. In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF

button for the send-destination MATRIX bus.

6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust

the send levels to the MATRIX buses.

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW

screen

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

Using the Centralogic section

This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to

simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic

section to the desired MATRIX bus.

NOTE

• If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to

access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE]

key for that MATRIX channel.

• If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned

on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that

is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus.

• In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/

MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the TO MIX/MATRIX that you want to

adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.

MATRIX SEND screen

1 ALL PRE button

Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from

all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send

destination.)

2 ALL POST button

Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from

all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send

destination.)

3 Send destination indicator

Indicates the currently-selected send destination.

4 Send destination select buttons

Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.

5 Channel select button

Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon,

number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the

button.

6 PRE/POST button

Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the

button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.

7 SEND ON/OFF button

Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.

STEP

1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and

connect an external device to that output port.

2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you

want to control.

3. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the

desired send-destination MATRIX bus, and then press it again.

4. Set the SEND ON/OFF button to ON, and use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the

send level.

OVERVIEW screen

13 2

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob

Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send

destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.

If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.

If the send destination is stereo, this is fixed to BALANCE.

9 SEND LEVEL knob

Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to

control the level using the multifunction knobs.

Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)

You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and

STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.

NOTE

• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a

popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.

• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the

Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16

and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also change automatically.

• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be

turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor

the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.

• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly

switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back

again.

STEP

Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send

signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output

port.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.

The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip

section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from

each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change

to the SEND ON status.

In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons

that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX

ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX

buses.

Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-16 and

MIX 17-24/MATRIX

Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/

MATRIX buses.

Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the

send-destination MATRIX bus.

5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX

and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.

6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.

7. When you’re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the

Function Access Area.

The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit

SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.

Function

Access Area

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)

This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent

to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.

OUTPUT PORT screen

1 Slot number/Card type

If an output channel of slot 1 - 3 is selected for operations, this shows the slot number

and the type of I/O card installed in that slot.

2 DELAY SCALE button

Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for

the delay time.

3 Output Port

This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.

4 Channel select button

Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name

of the currently-selected channel is displayed.

5 Delay time knob

Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use

multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is

indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY

SCALE window is indicated below the knob.

NOTE

If the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the

SETUP screen.

3. Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button.

SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen

OUTPUT channels

Reference Manual

6 DELAY button

Switches the output port delay on or off.

7 Ø (Phase) button

Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase

(black) and reverse phase (yellow).

8 GAIN knob

Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob in the

screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1 - 8. Rotate the knob to set

the value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the

value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.

9 Level meter

Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.

0 Tabs

Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized

into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group,

press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.

Channel library operations

The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to

store and recall various parameters for output channels.

To recall a library item, select an output channel and

press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED

CHANNEL VIEW screen.

For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the

library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual.

PHONES OUT LR

[PHONES]

PHONES LEVE L

Tip

Ring

Sl ee ve

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

[SLOT]

ME TER

SLOT1OU T

ME TER

SLOT2OU T

ME TER

SLOT3OU T

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

[OMNI OUT] (1-8)

ME TER

OMNI OUT

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

TRIM

GAIN

OUTPUT

PATCH

DIT

[DIGITAL OUT]

AE S/EB U

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

ME TER

DIGITAL

OUT

TRIMGAIN

[DANTE OUT] (1-64)

ME TER

DANTE OUT

DELAY

(MAX:1000ms)

GAIN

OUTPUT

PATCH

DANT E

OUTPUT

MIX CASCADE OUT 1-24

STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-6,7-8

(CUE B L,R)

CUE(A) CA SCADE OUT L,R

DIRECT OUT 1-72{64,48}

MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8

(CUE B L,R)

MIX OUT 1-24

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MONI TOR OUT L,R,MONO(C)

CUE(A) OUT L,R

CH INSERT 1,2 OUT 1-72{64,48}

MIX INSERT OUT 1-24

STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-6,7-8(C UE B L,R)

RECORDER CUE

USB

GAIN

ME TER

RECORDER IN

OUTPUT

PATCH

ENCODER

[2TR RECORDER]

OUTPUT

PATCH

STEREO L

MONO(C)

STEREO R

SURR OUND MONITOR1-6

MONI TOR MAT RIX OUT1-6

OMNI OUT

OUTPUT

PATCH

LIBRARY button

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

EQ and Dynamics

Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and

dynamics.

EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided

immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the

GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass

filter that is independent of the EQ.

Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking

device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard

compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor,

which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.

Using EQ

This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output

channels.

NOTE

• The EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen,

you can edit the parameter settings by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take

advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.

• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (page 9).

• Even when the HPF/EQ window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section to control the EQ.

HPF/EQ window (1ch)

This lets you edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if

you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.

1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name

This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.

2 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button

Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.

3 HPF ON/OFF button (Output channels only)

Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a high pass filter.

NOTE

Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can

turn on the high-pass filter button on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you

want to control.

2. Press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window.

4. Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters.

OVERVIEW screen HPF/EQ window

98 < A B C D7

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

4 EQ type select button

Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.

The following EQ types can be selected.

5 ATT knob

Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH

AND TURN] knob to adjust this.

6 Tabs

Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.

7 EQ graph

Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter.

8 RTA button

If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal

after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph.

9 HOLD button

Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA.

0 LIBRARY button

Press this button to open the EQ Library window.

A DEFAULT button

Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.

B COPY button

All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.

C PAST E bu tton

Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data

has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

D COMPARE button

Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer

memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

NOTE

For details on how to use the ? - D buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate

Owner’s Manual.

E EQ FLAT button

Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.

F HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button

Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band.

G LPF ON/OFF button

Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.

H EQ ON/OFF button

Switches the EQ on or off.

I EQ IN/OUT level meters

Indicates the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these

meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.

J EQ parameter setting knobs

Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, GAIN parameters and BYPASS button for the LOW, LOW

MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust

this.

NOTE

• If the shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output

channel, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.

• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q

parameter will not appear.

• When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray.

K HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)

Switches the HPF on or off.

NOTE

Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the

HPF ON/OFF button, and use the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency.

L HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)

Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to

adjust this.

M HPF type select button (input channels only)

Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct.

N HA HPF ON indicator

Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.

PRECISE

This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to

precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music

production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that

allow knee adjustments.

AGGRESSIVE

This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to

create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic

expression.

SMOOTH

This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create

natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the

original sound.

LEGACY

This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as

the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch

between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and

TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

O FREQUENCY

Indicates the HPF cutoff frequency of the external head amp.

HPF/EQ window (8ch)

This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels

simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number

appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.

2 EQ graph

Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type

appears below the graph.

3 EQ ON/OFF button

Switches the EQ on or off. The Σ clipping indicator (located to the right above the

button) lights if the input signal is clipping.

4 HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)

Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. Press this button to make adjustments using

the multifunction knob.

5 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)

Switches the HPF on or off.

HPF/EQ window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),

CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)

This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously.

This window is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful

when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ

settings between distant channels.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The

current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.

2 EQ graph

This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ and filters.

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

Using dynamics

Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics

processor.

NOTE

• The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the

amount of gain reduction.

• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can

also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.

• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (page 10).

• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.

DYNAMICS 1/2 window (1ch)

All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you

want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.

1 LIBRARY button

Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library window.

2 DEFAULT button

Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.

3 COPY button

All dynamics parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.

4 PASTE button

Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no

valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

5 COMPARE button

Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in

buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will

happen.

NOTE

For details on how to use buttons 1 - 5, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s

Manual.

6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name

This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys to select the channel for which you want to control the

dynamics.

2. Press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field in the OVERVIEW screen.

3. Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window.

4. Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters.

OVERVIEW screen DYNAMICS 1/2 window

Dynamics 1

field

Dynamics 2

field

1 2 3 4 58

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

7 Dynamics type buttons

Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics

types.

• Dynamics 1 for an input channel

GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER

• Dynamics 2 for an input channel

COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER

• Dynamics 1 for an output channel

COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S

8 Dynamics graph

Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.

9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs

Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the

multifunction knobs. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently-

selected dynamics type.

•GATE or DUCKING:

• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:

• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:

• DE-ESSER:

0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter

These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics

processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters

indicate the level of both the L and R channels.

A KEY IN SOURCE select button

Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE window, in which you can select a key-

in signal that will trigger the dynamics.

• SELF PRE EQ ......... The pre-EQ signal of the same channel

• SELF POST EQ....... The post-EQ signal of the same channel

• MIX OUT 21-24 ........ Output signals of MIX channels 21-24

• CH 1-72 POST EQ, ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ, MIX 1-24 POST EQ,

MTRX 1-8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ

........ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel

*1 Choose from a group of eight channels.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input

channel)

Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.

• Filter select buttons ............. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To

disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.

• Q knob................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using

the multifunction knob.

• FREQUENCY knob ............... Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the

value by using the multifunction knob.

C KEY IN CUE button (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel)

Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE

signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature

this button, or if you move to a different screen.

NOTE

The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.

D Tabs

Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch)

This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8

channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or

certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number

appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.

2 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter

Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain

reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears,

indicating the open/close status of the gate.

If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:

3 Dynamics graph

Indicates the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears

below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that

channel.

4 THRESHOLD knob

Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the multifunction knobs to

operate this.

5 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button

Switches dynamics on or off.

Gate status

Red Yellow Green Off (dark)

On/Off status On On On Off

Open/Close

status

Close Open Open -

Amount of gain

reduction

30 dB or more less than 30 dB 0 dB -

Type = Any type other than GATE

Type = GATE

EQ and Dynamics

Reference Manual

DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-

64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)

This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the

corresponding channel.

1 Channel select button

Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number,

threshold, and color appear on the button.

2 Dynamics parameter area

This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the

DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel.

If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the

dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.

The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after

dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the

dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a

vertical line.

Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries

You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on

using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate

Owner’s Manual.

EQ library

There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ

settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that

lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels.

To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in

the /HPF/EQ window.

NOTE

You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty

(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are

read-only presets.

Dynamics library

Use the “Dynamics Library” to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics

processors on CL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will

differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s

Dynamics 1. You can’t recall a type that cannot be used.

To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS

1/2 window.

NOTE

You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only

presets.

LIBRARY button

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Channel Job

This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the

level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the

parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move

parameters between channels.

DCA group

CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple

channels simultaneously.

DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the

Centralogic section faders 1 - 8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group.

A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group

while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way

in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped.

Assigning channels to a DCA group

There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.

• You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the

group, or

• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be

assigned.

NOTE

• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.

• With CL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus master, Mix bus master, and

Matrix bus master channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups

were formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use

the DCA groups for output master channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous

controls.

 Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group

NOTE

• You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window by pressing the DCA/

MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen.

• You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the

sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.

• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which

each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field

indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the DCA GROUP button.

3. Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to

assign channels.

4. Use the [SEL] keys in the INPUT section or ST IN section to select the channels that

you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).

Function

Access Area

CH JOB

Channel Job

Reference Manual

DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window

Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group.

1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons

Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.

2 DCA group assign field

This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.

While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to

assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the on-

screen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you

want to remove the channel from the group.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

3 NAME EDIT button

Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group.

When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or

edit the text.

The DCA group name is displayed on the DCA group select button.

The registered group name is displayed on the PATCH/NAME tab in the RECALL SAFE

MODE popup window.

4 DCA group select button

Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.

5 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.

6 DCA ROLL-OUT button

Enter the DCA ROLL OUT mode.

This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA

fader in the Centralogic section, you can access (roll-out) and control the faders

(assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left

of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the

Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader

bank on the left.

7 PRE&POST button

Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as PRE and POST.

The PRE&POST indicator is shown below a DCA group that has this setting.

8 POST ONLY button

Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as POST only.

NOTE

• You can set the object of muting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group.

• If you mute any of the DCA groups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal

route for that channel (including sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted.

9 CLOSE button

Closes the window.

Channel Job

Reference Manual

 Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong

Controlling DCA groups

Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA groups.

NOTE

• You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1-8], or [DCA 9-16] key in the Channel Strip section to select

the DCA group that you want to control.

• In the DCA member display on the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the multifunction knob in the

Centralogic section to scroll through channels when there are 15 or more channels assigned.

 Using DCA groups

Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group.

• Level adjustment: Faders.... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group

can be adjusted while preserving the level differences

of each channel. The input faders will not operate at

this time.

• On/Mute switch: [ON] key.... When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section

to make the key indicator go dark, the channels

assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same

state as when the faders are lowered to the -∞ dB

position).

• Cue Monitor: [CUE] key ....... When you press the Centralogic section [CUE] key to

make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned

to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be

enabled. For more information about cue, refer to

“Using the Cue function” (page 116).

STEP

1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to

operate.

2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

3. Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select

the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple

selections are allowed).

STEP

1. Assign input and output channels to DCA groups.

2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel,

adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to

the DCA group you want to use.

Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the [DCA 1-8] key or the

[DCA 9-16] key.

4. Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group.

SELECTED CHANNEL

VIEW screen

DCA/MUTE

field

Channel Job

Reference Manual

DCA Roll-out function

You can now access all of the channels assigned to a DCA group simultaneously through the

fader banks.

This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader

in the Centralogic section, you can use the Roll-out function to access (roll-out) and control

the faders (assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the

left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the

Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank

on the left.

 DCA ROLL-OUT operation

NOTE

• You cannot turn Roll-out mode on while operating the DCA group (for example, while assigning

channels or editing the group name).

• Even if Roll-out mode is turned on while you are controlling a GEQ via faders, you cannot edit

the DCA group using the faders.

• If the number of channels assigned to the DCA group exceeds the number of faders in the block,

you can use the multifunction knob or the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob to scroll the content of the

block from left to right. While the knob is turned, the message “DCA ROLL-OUT: DCA members

scrolling.” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

• If, for example, the DCA group to be operated is in the Centralogic section and the HPF/EQ

window is displayed, the HPF/EQ parameters for the multifunction knob cannot be operated. To

operate a parameter that is not assigned, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.

• All bank select keys in the block (to which the displayed channels belong) will light up.

• If the faders are rolled out to the Centralogic section (block B), the IN/OUT select keys in the

Centralogic section will be disabled.

• Bank select keys in blocks in which no faders are rolled out will operate normally.

• When in DCA ROLL-OUT mode, you can exit this mode by pressing a Bank Select key. In that

case, the screen will switch to the bank for the key that was pressed.

 Setting the DCA Roll-out function

NOTE

You cannot turn DCA Roll-out mode on if one of the following popup windows is open. If DCA

Roll-out mode is already turned on, opening one of the windows will cause DCA Roll-out mode

to quit.

- DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window

- RECALL SAFE MODE popup window

STEP

Use a bank select key to select the DCA group that you want to control, then press the

[SEL] key for that DCA group.

DCA Roll-out mode is engaged, and the faders that have been assigned to the DCA group will be

rolled out.

2. If you press the [SEL] key for another DCA group, faders that have been assigned to that

DCA group will be rolled out.

3. Press the same [SEL] key again to exit DCA Roll-out mode.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup

window.

3. Press the DCA ROLL-OUT button.

4. Select a DCA group.

If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group other than the selected one, the group selection will change.

5. Select a block (in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders) and the alignment.

6. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.

Function

Access Area

ASSIGN MODE popup window

Channel Job

Reference Manual

DCA ROLL-OUT screen

1 ROLL-OUT BLOCK

Enables you to select a block in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders.

CL5 : Blocks A, B, C

CL3/CL1 : Blocks A, B

2 ALIGN button

Enables you to choose whether the DCA group is rolled out to the faders from the left

or right.

3 DCA group select button

Selects the DCA group that you want to control.

Using the temporary unmute function

If one of the DCA group buttons on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that

channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during

mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.

Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assigned to DCA GROUP 1.

Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigned to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1.

Operation Example 1

1. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.

The indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted.

2. Press the ON key for CH 1.

CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.

3. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp comes on.

DCA 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on.

Operation Example 2

1. Set MUTE MASTER 1 to ON (MUTE).

CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.

2. Press the ON key for CH 1.

CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.

3. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.

CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.

4. Press the ON key for CH 1.

CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.

5. Press the ON key for CH 1 again.

CH 1 is muted again, and the ON key flashes.

6. Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE MASTER 1 to OFF.

CH 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Mute group

CL series consoles feature eight mute groups.

Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] to mute or unmute multiple

channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.

Mute groups 1 - 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of

channels can exist in the same group.

Assigning channels to mute groups

As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.

• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to

the group, or

• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be

assigned.

 Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group

NOTE

• You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.

• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which

each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute

groups to which that channel belongs.

• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, these numbers will light orange.

For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (page 79) has been turned on, an “S” indicator

will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Use the mute group master buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE

window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.

4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate

(multiple selections are allowed).

Function

Access Area

CH JOB

Channel Job

Reference Manual

DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window

Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group.

1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons

Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.

2 Mute group assign field

This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.

While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to

assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the on-

screen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you

want to remove the channel from the group.

If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe

(that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel

mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or

from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.

3 NAME EDIT

Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group.

When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or

edit the text.

The mute group name is displayed on the mute group select button.

4 Mute group select button

Selects the mute group that you want to assign.

5 MUTE GROUP MASTER button

Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off.

6 DIMMER LEVEL knob

Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is

enabled.

NOTE

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP

MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange.

7 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.

8 MUTE SAFE button

Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute

groups. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are temporarily excluded

from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to “Using the Mute

Safe function” (page 79).

9 CLOSE button

Closes the window.

 Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong

STEP

1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to

operate.

2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

3. Use the mute group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select

the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned.

(Multiple selections are allowed.)

SELECTED CHANNEL

VIEW screen

DCA/MUTE

field

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Using mute groups

To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE

GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off

function for a mute group 1 - 8 to a USER DEFINED key.

 Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys

NOTE

The USER SETUP window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make

system-wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using

the tabs located at the bottom of the window.

 Turning mute groups on/off with USER DEFINED keys

To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute

On/Off function.

The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected

mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. You can

turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.

To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit.

NOTE

Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER

DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.

 Temporarily unmuting a channel

You can unmute a muted channel in the mute group temporarily.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.

4. Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute

On/Off function.

5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose“MUTE GROUP x”

(where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.

When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER

DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.

USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window

SETUP screen USER SETUP window

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Using the Mute Safe function

Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group

operations (Mute Safe). Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute

a mute group to which that channel belongs.

NOTE

The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel

will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once

again to make it go dark.

Using the temporary unmute function

If one of the mute group master buttons on a channel is ON, press the [ON] key for that

channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in PREVIEW mode, any operation

during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.

Using the Recall Safe function

“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from

Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function (page 102), which you can apply to

individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.

NOTE

• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off,

you must also perform the operation described in step 5.

• Channel Link (page 82) and bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe; they will always be

reproduced in the recalled scene.

This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or

one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of

the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the

next time it is operated.

You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.

• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus Recall function (

page 102). Channels

or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be

recalled.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Press the MUTE SAFE button in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.

4. Press a [SEL] key for the channel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple

selections are allowed).

DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

MODE window

CH JOB

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe

operations.

4. Use the Safe Parameter select button in the RECALL SAFE MODE window to select

the target for Recall Safe operations.

5. To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn the SAFE button on. (If you

selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)

6. To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL

RECALL SAFE field.

7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the

window. Then perform a Recall operation.

Function

Access Area

CH JOB

Channel Job

Reference Manual

• If you perform a Recall operation while holding down a [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings for the

corresponding channel will temporarily be enabled for that Recall operation.

RECALL SAFE MODE window

1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button

The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set

for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL

button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.

NOTE

If you press the CLEAR ALL button, the Recall Safe function will temporarily be disabled.

However, the parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.

2 Safe channel display section

Indicates the channels that are currently set to Recall Safe.

3 SET BY SEL button

Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by

the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the

channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same

[SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.

4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display section

Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by the Recall Safe function for

all scenes. Press this section to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window.

These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

NOTE

If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack

A and B individually. For other racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked.

5 Channel select button

Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.

NOTE

Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.

6 Selected channel display

This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.

2 4

7 0A 8

All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.

Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.

Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.

HA/ PATC H

INPUT PATCH All input patches

OUTPUT PATCH All output patches

CASCADE IN CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings

CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT PATCH settings

INPUT NAME All input channel names

OUTPUT NAME All output channel names

All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external

head amps

CUSTOM FADER

BANK

Custom fader bank settings

RACK

GEQ RACK

EFFECT RACK

PREMIUM RACK

Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 16, Effect racks 1 - 8,

Premium racks 1- 8 individually.

BUS SETUP

MIX

Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-24 in the BUS SETUP window.

This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered

channel and one even-numbered channel).

MATRIX

Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP

window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-

numbered channel and one even-numbered channel).

SURROUND

SETUP

Surround mode settings.

OTHERs

CH LINK All channel link group settings

MUTE GROUP

NAME

All Mute group names

FADER BANK

SELECT

FADER BANK selection status, MASTER FADER assign

status

Channel Job

Reference Manual

7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)

Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel

to all other input channels.

Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input

channels.

8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (shown only for output channels)

Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to

all other output channels.

Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output

channels.

9 Safe parameter select button (excluding DCA groups)

Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.

The button indication varies depending on the channel type.

• Input channel

NOTE

ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button.

• MIX channel

• MATRIX channel

• STEREO channel

• MONO channel

If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the

selected channel will light green, as follows.

This figure indicates that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT

parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings.

In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and

OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light

green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following

channels:

Button name Corresponding parameter

Input

channel

MIX

channel

MATRIX

channel

STEREO/

MONO

channel

WITH MIX SEND Send level to the MIX bus O

WITH MATRIX

SEND

Send level to MATRIX bus

ALL

All parameters O O O O

HA HA-related settings O

HPF HPF settings O

EQ EQ settings O OOO

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings O O O O

DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings O

MIX SEND Send level to MIX bus O

MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O O O

FADER Fader settings O O O O

CH ON [ON] key settings O O O O

TO ST

On/off setting for STEREO bus

assignment, PAN, etc.

MONO

On/off setting for MONO bus

assignment

INPUT PATCH Input patch settings O

Channel Job

Reference Manual

*1. The default setting is ALL on.

*2. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.

*3. When these buttons are turned on, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE.

Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the

current scene when the settings are made.

9 Safe parameter select button (DCA)

For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL

button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on,

Recall Safe will apply to the DCA master level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall

Safe will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON

button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL

button.

0 SAFE button (excluding DCA groups)

When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel.

NOTE

Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be

enabled if this button is off.

A CLOSE button

Closes the window.

Channel Link function

Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ

between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a “link

group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and

combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types

of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels

cannot coexist on the same link group.

The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.

For an input channel:

• Head amp settings

• Digital gain settings

• HPF settings

• EQ settings

• Dynamics 1 settings

• Dynamics 2 settings

• Insert on and insert point settings

• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings

• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses

• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses

• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses

• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses

• Fader operations

• [ON] key operations

• TO STEREO/MONO setting

•DELAY setting

• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings

For an output channel:

• EQ settings

• Dynamics settings

• Insert on and insert point settings

• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses

• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses

• Fader operations

• [ON] key operations

• TO STEREO/MONO setting

• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings

*1 MATRIX channel not applicable

DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings O

INSERT Insert on/off O

OOO

INSERT PATCH Insert patch settings O

OOO

DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings O

MIX ON MIX Send On/Off O

MATRIX ON MATRIX Send On/Off O O O

DELAY Delay settings O

NAME Channel name O O O O

OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings O O O

BAL BLANCE parameter settings O

(STEREO only)

DCA ASSIGN

Settings registered in DCA

group

OOOO

MUTE ASSIGN

Settings registered in MUTE

group

OOOO

Button name Corresponding parameter

Input

channel

MIX

channel

MATRIX

channel

STEREO/

MONO

channel

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Linking the desired input channels

This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.

NOTE

Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.

NOTE

• You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing

the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.

• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the

[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.

• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel

will be ignored.

CH LINK MODE window (input channels)

You can view the input channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.

1 Input channel display field

When you create a link group, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If

there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this

field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link input channels in this window.

NOTE

• Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.

• In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

2 Link indicator

If an input channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is

shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.

While you hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link

group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK

PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that

had been previously displayed.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the CH LINK button in the CH JOB menu.

3. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press

the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.

4. Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to

select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).

5. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in

step 4, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for

which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).

Function

Access Area

CH JOB

Channel Job

Reference Manual

3 LINK PARAMETER field

Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can

do this independently for each link group.

The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.

NOTE

• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked,

but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of

key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics”

(page 64).

* Units of 8ch refers to Ch 1-8/Ch 9-16/Ch 17-24/Ch 25-32/Ch 33-40/Ch 41-48/Ch 49-56/Ch 57-64/Ch 65-72/

ST IN 1L-ST IN 4R/ST IN 5L-ST IN 8R.

• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked.

• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same

relative level difference between the channels.

• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.

4 SEND PARAMETER field

If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons

in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination

bus(es).

NOTE

If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be

linked.

5 INPUT/OUTPUT button

Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels

screen.

 Channel link operations

• Linking three or more channels

Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each input

channel you want to add to the link group.

• Adding a new channel to an existing link group

Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add

to the group.

NOTE

If the link-destination input channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to

the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.

• Removing a channel from a link group

Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel

that you want to remove.

• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group

While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the

parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group

temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each

other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the

case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down

the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you

cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading”phase of a recalled scene.)

Head amp settings

However, for wireless devices, the GAIN parameter

for the receiver side is not included.

HPF HPF settings

DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings

EQ EQ settings

DYNAMICS 1, 2 Dynamics 1 and 2 settings

INSERT Insert settings

DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings

MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses

MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses

MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses

MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses

FADER Fader operations

DCA DCA group assignment

CH ON Channel on/off

MUTE Mute group assignment

TO STEREO

On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO

buses

DELAY Channel delay settings

MIX 1-24 MIX buses 1-24

MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8

Channel Job

Reference Manual

CH LINK MODE window (output channels)

You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be

linked.

1 Output channel display field

When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted.

If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this

field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

2 Link indicator

If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is

shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.

While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any

link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK

PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that

had been previously displayed.

3 LINK PARAMETER field

Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can

do this independently for each link group.

The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.

*1 MATRIX channel not applicable

NOTE

• If you link Dynamics for two or more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the

key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in

signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” (page 64).

* Units of 8ch refers to MIX 1 - MIX 8/MIX 9 - MIX 16/MIX 17 - MIX 24/MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8.

• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked.

• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.

4 SEND PARAMETER field

If you have turned on the MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER

field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).

NOTE

If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be

linked.

5 INPUT/OUTPUT button

Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels

screen.

EQ EQ settings

DYNAMICS Dynamics settings

INSERT Insert settings

MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1

MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1

FADER Fader operations

CH ON Channel on/off

TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1

DCA DCA group assignment

MUTE Mute group assignment

MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8

Channel Job

Reference Manual

 Channel link operations

• Linking three or more channels

Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output

channel you want to add to the link group.

• Adding a new channel to an existing link group

Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add

to the group.

NOTE

If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to

the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.

• Removing a channel from a link group

Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel

that you want to remove.

• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group

While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the

parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group

temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each

other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down

the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily

cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)

CH LINK SET window

Displayed when you press the channel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can

also link channels in this window.

1 Channel select button

Select a channel that you want to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in

blue, the selected output channel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical

character that indicates the link group will appear for linked channels.

2 LINK buttons

Link the channel selected in, 1.

3 UNLINK button

Cancels the link selected in

, 1.

4 UNSELECT ALL

De-selects all selected channels.

5 CLOSE button

Closes the window.

NOTE

If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be

shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.

2 3 5 4

When selecting a channel When linking channels

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel

You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a

specific channel to their default settings.

Copying the parameters of a channel

You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute

the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.

You can copy between the following combinations of channels.

• Between input channels

• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel

• Between MIX channels

• Between MATRIX channels

CH COPY MODE window

This window enables you to copy channel settings.

1 SOURCE CH field

Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on

the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field.

If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel.

4. Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are

allowed).

5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in

the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.

6. Press the COPY button to execute the copy.

Function

Access Area

CH JOB

1 4 2 3

Before selection After selection

Channel Job

Reference Manual

If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will

appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.

If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters

will be copied:

• MODULE PARAMETERS button

Selected channel module parameters

• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button

SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel

2 DESTINATION CHs field

Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify

the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination

channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its

[SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted.

If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination

channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those

models will not be shown.

3 COPY button

Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copy-

destination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.

4 CLOSE button

Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.

Moving the parameters of a channel

The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you

execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and

move-destination will move forward or backward by one.

You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.

• Between input channels

• Between ST IN channels

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the MOVE button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Press a [SEL] key to select the move-source channel.

4. Press the [SEL] key for the move-destination channel.

5. To execute the move, press the MOVE button.

1 2 3 4 5

1 5 2 3 4

Move by one.

Move

CH JOB

Function

Access Area

Channel Job

Reference Manual

CH MOVE MODE window

1 SOURCE CH field

Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on

the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this

field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field.

2 DESTINATION CH field

Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can

then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel.

When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you

want to change the move-destination channel, press the [SEL] key for the desired input

channel. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the

DESTINATION CH field.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

3 MOVE button

Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move-

destination channel, the channel settings move from the move-source to the move-

destination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and move-

destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel.

4 CLOSE button

Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.

1 2

Channel Job

Reference Manual

Initializing the parameters of a channel

You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be

performed on any channel(s).

NOTE

After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).

CH DEFAULT MODE window

Enables you to initialize parameters.

1 TARGET CHs field

Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a

[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The

field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-

select the channel.

NOTE

• If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected.

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

2 DEFAULT button

After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.

3 CLOSE button

Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.

2. Press the DEFAULT button in the CH JOB menu.

3. Press the [SEL] key of the channel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple

selections are allowed).

4. Press the DEFAULT button to execute the Initialization.

CH JOB

Function

Access Area

Channel Job

Reference Manual

About Mix Minus

The Mix Minus function removes a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/

MATRIX buses. You can use this function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or

announcer simply by removing his or her audio signal.

NOTE

This Mix Minus function is a shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between

modes. Therefore, even after using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window

without restrictions.

NOTE

You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the

Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button.

STEP

1. Hold the [SEL] key while pressing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

2. The MIX MINUS popup window will open.

3. If you wish to remove an additional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL]

key.

4. If necessary, in the DESTINATION field, select a bus.

You cannot select a FIXED bus.

5. Press the OK button to set the parameters as follows:

• The send level of the signals sent from the selected input channels is lowered to -∞dB.

• The send level of the signals sent from all other input channels is set to nominal

(0.0dB).

• Send to the destination bus is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST.

• For the stereo input channels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is

set to -∞ dB.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Scene memory

On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output

port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory)

as a “scene.”

Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000-300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene

used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001-300 are writable scenes.

Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the

following parameters.

• Input/output port patching

• Bus settings

• Head amp settings

• EQ settings

• Dynamics 1 and 2 settings

• Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings

• Pan/balance settings

• Insert/Direct Out settings

• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses

• On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses

• DCA group settings

• Mute group settings

• Channel link settings

The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function

Access Area.

SCENE field

You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, where you can view and

edit more detailed settings for the scene.

1 Scene number

Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene

number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number

is different than the currently-loaded scene number.

2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol

Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Write-

protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.

3 Scene title

Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.

4 E symbol (EDIT symbol)

This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.

This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the

changes you made.

NOTE

You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.

Storing and recalling scenes

To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys

in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST

window.

Storing a scene

 Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section

2 21

STEP

1. Use the pad controls of the top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the

mix parameters as desired.

2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene

number.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.

4. Assign a title or comment to the scene in the SCENE STORE window as desired.

5. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower

part of the SCENE STORE window.

6. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store

operation.

SCENE STORE windowSCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys

Scene memory

Reference Manual

NOTE

• If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number

will increment or decrement continuously.

• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field

indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene.

• You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (page 213). In

this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE

window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you

can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE

STORE window.

SCENE STORE window

1 SCENE TITLE field

Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).

2 COMMENT field

Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as

a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).

NOTE

For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.

 Using the SCENE LIST window

NOTE

• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI

SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the

multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.

• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all

selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the

same mix settings.

• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers.

1 2

STEP

1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the

mix parameters as desired.

2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-destination scene number.

4. Press the STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.

5. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.

6. Press the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window.

7. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store

operation.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

SCENE LIST window

Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you

press the SCENE field.

1 Scene list

This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.

2 NO./TITLE buttons

Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button

repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.

3 Scene number

Indicates the scene number.

4 Scene title

Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in

which you can edit the title.

5 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol

An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for

write-protected scenes.

To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the

selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol

repeatedly will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol.

• Protect (lock) symbol

You will be unable to overwrite the scene.

• R (READ ONLY) symbol

Not only will the scene be protected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded

from a USB flash drive. You can only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive

scene numbers starting with scene #001.

•No symbol

No scene will be protected.

NOTE

The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.

6 Current scene

The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list.

If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will

become the current scene.

7 SCENE SELECT knob

Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene

number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive

multiple scenes by pressing and rotating the multifunction knob.

8 MULTI SELECT button

You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the

multifunction knob.

9 LAST SCENE button

Selects the scene that was recalled most recently.

0 SCENE STORE button

Press this button to display the SCENE STORE window, which will enable you to assign

a name to a scene and store it.

A STORE UNDO button

Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an

Overwrite-store operation.

NOTE

• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.

• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key

(page 215).

B Page switching tabs

Switch the views for the right side of the SCENE LIST window.

C PREVIEW button

Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings

in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.

B9>A

C 1

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Recalling a scene

 Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section

 Using the SCENE LIST window

SCENE LIST window

1 RECALL SCENE button

Recalls the currently-selected scene.

2 RECALL UNDO button

Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a

Recall operation.

NOTE

• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key

(page 215).

• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (page 186).

STEP

1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number you want to

recall.

2. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.

3. Press the OK button to execute the recall.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number to recall.

3. Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window.

4. Press the OK button to execute the recall.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Using USER DEFINED keys to recall

You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or

to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a

USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED

key.

• INC RECALL

Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.

•DEC RECALL

Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.

NOTE

If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the

closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.

•DIRECT RECALL

Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you

press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be

recalled immediately.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.

4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to

assign a function.

5. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”

6. Selects the function you want to assign.

• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL

Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.

• To assign DIRECT RECALL

Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose“SCENE #xxx” (xxx

is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.

7. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.

8. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.

USER SETUP windowSETUP screen

USER DEFINED KEY SETUP

window

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Editing scene memories

This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and

copy and paste them.

Sorting scene memories and editing titles

SCENE LIST window

1 Sort button

The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.

•NO.

Sorted in order of scene number.

•TITLE

Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title.

• COMMENT

Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of comment.

• TIME STAMP

Sorts the list in order of date of creation.

NOTE

By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or

descending).

2 Write-protect

Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A

lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.

3 TITLE field

Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title

for the scene. You can edit titles in this window.

4 COMMENT field

Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter

comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window.

5 STATUS field

Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK

(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link

function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)

6 TIME STAMP field

Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.

7 CURRENT SETTING field

Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you

make here are immediately applied to the CL console.

8 Tabs

Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right

half of the window between four different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/

PLAYBACK LINK).

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.

3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select a scene.

4. Edit the scene.

1 11 2

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Scene memory editing

The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or

cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of

the SCENE LIST window.

1 COPY button

Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.

2 PAST E bu tton

Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.

3 CLEAR button

Press this button to erase the selected scene.

4 CUT button

Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory.

5 INSERT button

Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene

number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.

6 UNDO button

Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores

the previous state.

Copying and pasting a scene

You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.

NOTE

The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the

current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (page 99).

NOTE

• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene

will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.

• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.

• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to

turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while

pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.

• A copied scene can also be inserted (page 99).

• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.

Clearing a scene

NOTE

• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn

it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while

pressing and holding it down.

• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.

1 2 3 4 5 6

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and

then press the COPY button in the SCENE LIST window.

3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy.

4. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene number,

and then press the PASTE button.

5. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste

operation.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to

clear, and then press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window.

3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear

operation.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

Cutting a scene

This section explains how to cut a scene.

When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented

accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort

the scene list in order of scene number.

NOTE

• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.

• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or

cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.

Inserting a scene

You can insert a scene copied to buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert

a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.

NOTE

• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the

selected number of times.

• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available.

• The INSERT button will also be unavailable if the Insert operation would cause the number of

stored scenes to exceed 300.

• When you insert a scene, scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location

will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.

Using the Global Paste function

“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or

parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed).

This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to

multiple scenes that have already been stored.

NOTE

The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT

parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.

NOTE

• A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.

• During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to

abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo

the operation.

• You cannot select different parameters from different channels.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area.

2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to

cut, and then press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window.

3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation.

4. If desired, you can paste (page 98) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the

buffer memory).

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Copy (page 98) or cut the scene you want to insert.

3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene number,

and then press the INSERT button in the SCENE LIST window.

4. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert

operation.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window.

3. Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy.

4. Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel , and then

press the button in the window to select a parameter.

5. Use multifunction knobs 7 and 8 to select the range of paste-destination scenes.

6. Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation.

GLOBAL PASTE windowSCENE LIST window

Scene memory

Reference Manual

100

GLOBAL PASTE window

1 SET BY SEL button

Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.

2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button

The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all

channels simultaneously.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

3 SEND PARAMETER field

Press this field to open the SEND PARAMETER screen. In the SEND PARATMER screen, set

whether to enable global paste for bus selection and send level.

4 Tabs

Enable you to switch between items.

•INPUT tab

Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left

area.

You can select the following parameters.

*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.

*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.

• OUTPUT tab

Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left

area.

You can select the following parameters.

ALL All input channel parameters

INPUT PATCH Input patch settings

NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color

HA Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel

DELAY Input delay settings

HPF HPF settings

DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel

EQ EQ settings

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)

DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)

MIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus

MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus

FADER Fader level

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

INSERT

Insert on/off status and insert point

INSERT PATCH

Insert in/out patch settings

DIRECT OUT Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings

MIX ON Send on/off to a MIX bus

MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus

TO STEREO Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings

MONO TO MONO on/off

DCA ASSIGN

Settings registered in DCA group

MUTE ASSIGN

Settings registered in MUTE group

ALL All output channel parameters

OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings

NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color

EQ EQ settings

Scene memory

Reference Manual

101

*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.

*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.

• BUS SETUP tab

You can select the following parameters.

•RACK tab

Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can

select an individual rack for each effect used in dual mode.

•PATCH/OTHERs tab

You can select the following parameters.

*1. While in PREVIEW mode, changes that are made in CL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied

after PREVIEW mode is exited.

•DCA tab

You can select ALL, LEVEL/ON, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will

be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will

be copied. If NAME is selected, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the

copy-source channels individually for each DCA group 1-16.

For DCA, although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button,

they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.

DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)

INSERT

Insert on/off status and insert point

INSERT PATCH

Insert in/out patch settings

FADER Fader level

CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys

TO ST/BAL

Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings (MIX 1-24

only)

MONO TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only)

MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus

MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus

WITH SEND FROM

SOURCE CHs

SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel

DCA ASSIGN

Settings registered in DCA group

MUTE ASSIGN

Settings registered in MUTE group

MIX1/2 - 23/24

Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-24 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is

applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one even-

numbered channel).

MATRIX1/2 - 7/8

Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is

applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one even-

numbered channel).

SURROUND

SETUP

Surround mode settings.

INPUT PATCH All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches

OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches, insert in/out patches

INPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels

OUTPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels

HA Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation settings

CH LINK Channel link settings

MUTE GROUP

NAME

Setting a MUTE group name

CUSTOM FADER

BANK

Custom fader bank settings

CASCADE IN CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings

CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT PATCH settings

Scene memory

Reference Manual

102

Using the Focus Recall function

“Focus Recall” is a function that lets you specify the parameters that will be updated when you

recall a scene. For example, it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input

channel settings of a certain scene.

NOTE

In contrast to Focus, the CL series console also features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you

to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However, while the Focus

Recall function is specified individually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied to all

scenes.

NOTE

• The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field

correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window.

• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS

field of the SCENE LIST window.

• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or

parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be

recalled.

• For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator.

FOCUS RECALL window

Sets the parameters that will be recalled.

1 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all the settings.

2 Focus channel display section

Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as

that in the RECALL SAFE window.

3 SET BY SEL button

Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add

channels as the target, turn on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys

for the channels you want to add.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.

3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.

4. Follow the procedure starting with step 3 in the “Using the Recall Safe function”

(page 79) to make settings.

5. If you want to cancel the specified restrictions so that all parameters will be subject

to recall, turn on the ALL button.

6. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings.

SCENE field SCENE LIST window

All parameters are affected by Recall on these

Some parameters are affected by Recall on

Recall has been canceled on these channels.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

103

4 FOCUS PARAMETER display section

Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any

scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE

window (page 80).

5 Channel select button

Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function.

NOTE

Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.

6 Selected channel display

This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.

7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)

Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel

to all other input channels.

This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all

input channels.

8 Recall parameter select button

Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel.

Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall

operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE window

(page 80).

NOTE

• If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for

that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously.

• DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene.

9 FOCUS button

Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.

0 CLOSE button

Closes the window.

Using the Fade function

“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups

to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade

function are made independently for each scene.

NOTE

• Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a “FADE” indication in the STATUS field

of the SCENE LIST window.

• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.

• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving

fader.

• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups

will move immediately to their target positions.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.

3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.

4. Press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA

groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).

5. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the fade time.

6. Press the OK button to close the FADE TIME window.

7. Press the FADE button in the SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function.

8. Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.

The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values

of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.

SCENE LIST window

(FADE TIME field)

SCENE field

Scene memory

Reference Manual

104

SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field)

1 SET button

Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for

which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time

over which the fader will reach its new value).

2 FADE button

Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.

3 FADE TIME display

This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.

4 CURRENT SETTING field

Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you

make here are immediately applied to the CL console.

FADE TIME window

You can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display

this window, press the SET button in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window.

1 Channel display field

The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the

channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels

or DCA groups. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.

2 FADE TIME knob

Sets the fade time. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.

The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.

NOTE

The fade time is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display field.

3 SET ALL button

Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.

4 CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to cancel the Fade function for all faders of that scene.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

Scene memory

Reference Manual

105

Outputting a control signal to an external device

in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)

A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL

series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.

NOTE

For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” (page 259).

SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field)

1 Output control signal select buttons

These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.

Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.

• ---- (OFF).................. Nothing will be output.

• TRIGGER................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.

• TALLY ...................... A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.

2 CURRENT SETTING field

Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you

make here are immediately applied to the CL console.

STEP

1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

2. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.

3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT

port.

4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.

SCENE LIST window

(GPI OUT field)

Scene memory

Reference Manual

106

Playing back an audio file that links to a scene

recall

You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a

specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be

played automatically in a specific scene.

NOTE

• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the

root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio

file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.

• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.

• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.

• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file

name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified

file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.

NOTE

• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in

the Function Access Area.

• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is

recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.

SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field)

1 PLAY button

Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene.

2 Song select button

Press this button to open the SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and

set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the

title of the selected song will appear on the button.

3 Offset time display

Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified

audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT window.

4 CURRENT SETTING field

Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you

make here are immediately applied to the CL console.

STEP

1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.

2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.

3. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.

4. Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file.

5. Press a list in the SONG SELECT window or use the multifunction knobs to select a

file that you want to link to a scene.

6. Use the corresponding multifunction knob to set the offset (the time duration until

the start of audio file playback).

7. Press the OK button.

8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.

9. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.

SCENE LIST window

(PLAYBACK LINK field)

Scene memory

Reference Manual

107

SONG SELECT window

You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This

window will appear when you press the song select button.

1 Change directory button

Press this button to move to the next higher folder level.

NOTE

You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.

2 PATH indicator

This area indicates the current directory path. It will show only the \YPE\SONGS\ level.

3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons

Switch between the song title list and the file name list.

4 SONG TITLE list button

5 ARTIST list button

Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title

and artist name respectively.

6 List

Displays the name of the folder or audio file, artist name, and audio file time duration.

You can select an audio file by pressing the folder name or audio file name.

7 OFFSET knob

You can use the multifunction knob 8 to set the time interval from scene recall until the

start of audio file playback. The offset time can be adjusted in the range of 0.0-99.0 in

0.5 sec steps.

8 Scroll knob

Use the multifunction knob to scroll the list.

2 3

Scene memory

Reference Manual

108

Using Preview mode

Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting

the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings

of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal

processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the

settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current

scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be

convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make

minor changes to a scene and then store it.

NOTE

• PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in

the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.

• RECALL SAFE and FOCUS RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode.

Functions in Preview mode

The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.

• CL Editor

• StageMix

•MIDI Rx

• GPI IN

Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external

devices.

• CL Editor

• StageMix

•MIDI Tx

•GPI OUT

The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.

Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.

If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not

occur while in Preview mode.

The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.

• Synchronization with CL Editor

• Switching users

• Changing the User Level

• Load/Save functions

• Cue changes

• USER DEFINED KEY operations

• USER DEFINED KNOB operations

• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display

• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings

• Changing or viewing the recorder

• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings

• FADE TIME

• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording

• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects

• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-

2A, U76 and Buss Comp 369)

In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.

• While pasting scene or EQ settings

• While executing Global Paste

• While synchronizing with CL Editor

• While saving/loading a file

NOTE

The scene titles shown in StageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store

operation on a CL series console operated in PREVIEW mode.

STEP

1. Press the [PREVIEW] key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.

2. Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys, multifunction knobs, or [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs in the

SCENE MEMORY section to operate the SCENE SELECT knob in the SCENE LIST

window, and select the scene number that you want to recall.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. Or, press the RECALL SCENE button in the

SCENE LIST window. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.

4. If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.

5. If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in

which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. Or,

press the SCENE STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.

6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the

PREVIEW key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

109

Monitor and Cue functions

The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or

headphones. Below the front pad of the CL series console is a PHONES out jack which

always outputs the monitor source signal that you’ve selected for monitoring. By assigning the

MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same

signal through external speakers.

You can select the following signals as the monitor source.

• STEREO channel output signal

• MONO channel output signal

• STEREO + MONO channel output signal

• OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 channel input signal (for monitoring each two channel pair)

• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal

• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output

signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 input

signals

The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel/DCA group by temporarily

monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top

panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output

from the selected output port. There is also the Solo function. (Refer to page 121.)

NOTE

The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this

reason, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the

Monitor function. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES output jack.

The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.

• MONITOR SELECT

Selects the monitor source.

• METER

Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.

• DIMMER

Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.

CUE(A)

CUE(A) L

CUE(A) LOGIC

CUE(A)

CUE(A) L

CUE(A)

CUE(A) LOGIC

CUE(A)

CUE(A) OUT

LEVEL

CUE(A)

CUE(A) R

CUE(A)

CUE(A) OUT

LEVEL

CUE(A)

CUE(A) OUT L

CUE(A) OUT R

CUE(A) R

CUE(A)

CUE(A) L

CUE(A) R

MAXTRIX OUT

1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)

MAXTRIX OUT

1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R)

CUE(A) L

CUE(A) R

CUE(A) OUT L

CUE(A) OUT R

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

110

• MONITOR LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK

is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.

• MONITOR FADER

Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the

MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with

MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at

the PHONES Out jack.

• ON (On/off)

Switches the Monitor function on or off.

• DELAY (Monitor delay)

Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.

• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)

Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack.

• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)

If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals

sent to the PHONES Out jack.

• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)

If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue

signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output

from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned

on.

Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers.

Using the Monitor function

This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the

PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers.

NOTE

Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also

be assigned to USER DEFINED keys. (page 215)

STEP

1. Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on

the rear panel. To monitor through headphones, connect your headphones to the

PHONES Out jack below the front panel.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.

3. Press the MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.

4. Use the source select buttons in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source.

5. Press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify

the port that will be the output destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple

selections are allowed).

6. Turn the OUTPUT button on to enable monitoring.

7. To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE

MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.

8. Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired.

MONITOR screen

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

111

MONITOR screen

In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and

turn monitoring on/off.

1 MONITOR display button

When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make

detailed monitor settings.

2 SOURCE SELECT field

Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the

MONITOR window to specify the source channel.

3 DIMMER field

Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates

monitor signals.

• DIMMER LEVEL knob

Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer

is on.

• DIMMER ON button

Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.

4 MONITOR FADER field

Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.

• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob

Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the

multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.

• FADER ASSIGN display

This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader.

Indicator assignments are as follows.

• ---- .......................................... No assignment

• MASTER A ............................ Master A only

• MASTER A+ .......................... Master A, Master B, Custom fader bank

• MASTER B ............................ Master B only

• MASTER B+ .......................... Master B, Custom fader bank

• CUSTOM................................ A single fader in the Custom fader bank

• CUSTOMs.............................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank

5 Meter field

Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open

the MONITOR window.

6 MONITOR OUTPUT button

Switches Monitor Out on or off.

7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button

If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the

PHONES Out jack.

8 MONO MONITOR button

Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.

2 3 4 5

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

112

MONITOR window

You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This window appears when you press the

MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen.

 SOURCE SELECT field

This field enables you to select the source signal for the MONITOR bus.

1 Source selection buttons

Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.

 DIMMER field

This field enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates

monitor signals.

2 DIMMER knob

Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when the Dimmer

function is on.

3 DIMMER ON/OFF button

Switches the Dimmer function on or off.

4 TALKBACK DIMMER knob

Adjusts the amount by which the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on.

5 TALKBACK ON indicator

Indicates the talkback on/off status.

6 PHONES LEVEL LINK button

Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level.

Turn on this button to adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack by using

the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob

0 or the fader A to which this knob function has

been assigned.

NOTE

If the PHONES LEVEL LINK button is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader,

as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through

headphones.

7 CUE INTERRUPTION button

Press this button to interrupt the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on

and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the

factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue

signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.

8 MONO MONITOR button

Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.

9 MONITOR OUTPUT button

This button turns the monitor output on/off. When this button is turned on, the monitor

source selected in

1 is sent to output destination E.

NOTE

The PHONES output jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the

OUTPUT button is on or off.

STEREO L/R STEREO L/R channel signals

MONO (C) MONO channel signal

LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals

OMNI 1-2 - 7-8 OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 signals (per two channels)

PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals

DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field

24 7

6 8

5 A 0 C

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

113

 MONITOR FADER field

MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob

Indicates the monitor level. Press this knob to adjust the monitor level using the

multifunction knob. Or, press the Centralogic section bank select [STEREO] key, and

then use the monitor fader to adjust the level.

A FADER ASSIGN indicator

Indicates the fader(s) to which the monitor level is assigned. Indicator assignments are

as follows:

 MONITOR DELAY field

This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is

delayed.

B AUTO BYPASS button

Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.

C MONITOR DELAY knob

Indicates the currently-specified delay time. The millisecond value is indicated above the

knob, and the delay time value in currently-selected units and the currently-selected

scale type are indicated below the knob. However, if the scale is set to ms, the delay time

value is not shown above the knob.

Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.

 Meter field

Indicates the monitor output level.

D Meters

This field indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.

E MONITOR OUT PATCH button

Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output

port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels.

NOTE

• You can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.

• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or

LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be

distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.

F ASSIGN field

If you have selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field

to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that

you can select in the ASSIGN field.

NOTE

You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight

monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources.

MASTER A MASTER A fader only

MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank

MASTER B MASTER B fader only

MASTER B+ MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank

CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders

CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders

DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network

OMNI1-8 OMNI OUT jacks 1-8

DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit

SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3

MIX 1-24 Output signals of MIX channels 1-24

MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1 - 8 output signals

STEREO STEREO L/R channel output signals

MONO (C) MONO channel output signal

OMNI 1-2 - OMNI 7-8

OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 input signals (per two

channels)

PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

114

MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode)

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen

appears as shown below.

1 SURROUND MONITOR display button

When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which

you can make detailed surround monitor settings.

2 SOURCE SELECT field

Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field,

use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel.

3 Speaker Mute field

You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.

4 DOWNMIX field

Select in which field to perform downmixes.

•STEREO button

Downmix in stereo mode.

• MONO button

Downmix in mono mode.

5 Meter field

Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is

the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.

SURROUND MONITOR window (Surround mode)

You can make detailed settings for surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus

settings in BUS SETUP, this window appears when you press the MONITOR display button

or meter field in the MONITOR screen.

1 SOURCE SELECT field

Select one of the following as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR

bus.

2 MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button

Use this button to open the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and

names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EXTERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO).

2 3 54

MIX1-6 Surround signals in the current mix

EXT5.1-1-3 Surround signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels)

2CH MONITOR Stereo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP

342

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

115

3 DOWNMIX field

Select in which field to perform downmixes.

•STEREO button

Downmix in stereo mode.

•MONO button

Downmix in mono mode.

4 DOWNMIX SETUP button

Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for

downmixes.

5 Meter field

Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is

the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.

6 Speaker Mute field

You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.

7 SOLO button

Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker

buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the

speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a

different speaker button, the other buttons go off.

NOTE

If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT

screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 62.)

MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen

Press the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open

this screen.

1 NAME field

Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter

the source name in the Keyboard screen.

2 PATCH field

Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select

the port to patch.

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

116

DOWNMIX SETUP screen

Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this

screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP

screen.

1 Output channel field

Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/

off.

2 Downmix parameter field

Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the master channel monitors.

3 APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button

Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix

parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO).

Using the Cue function

About Cue groups

Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.

1 INPUT CUE group

The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group,

press the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on.

NOTE

If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the

[CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.

2 DCA CUE group

The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, assign

the DCA groups to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic

section to turn Cue on.

Input channel [CUE] key

[CUE] key in the Centralogic section

(When using DCA groups)

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

117

3 OUTPUT CUE group

The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To switch Cue on or off for this

group, press the [CUE] key in the Master section, or assign MIX channels or MATRIX

channels to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.

NOTE

If STEREO/MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE]

keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.

4 Other CUE group

These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the

touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE

button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or

if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1

window. This group will automatically be disabled when

you exit the corresponding window.

NOTE

You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group

to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs

will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.

However, if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the

previously-selected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated.

The following illustration shows the

priority order of the [CUE] keys. After

you have switched groups from lower

to upper levels, if you then defeat cue

for the upper group, the previous

[CUE] key status of the group

immediately below will be restored.

For example, if you switch groups in

the order of OUTPUT CUE group 

DCA CUE group  INPUT CUE group

 Other CUE group, you can then

successively defeat the [CUE] keys

(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to

successively restore the [CUE] key

status of the previously-selected group.

[CUE] key in the Master section

[CUE] key in the Centralogic section

(When operating the MIX channel or

MATRIX channel)

On-screen CUE button

Other CUE group

INPUT CUE group

DCA CUE group

OUTPUT CUE group

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

118

Operating the Cue function

This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue

signals.

NOTE

The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this

reason, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the

Monitor function. However, the PHONES Out jack below the front pad will always output cue

signals regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor function” (page 110) for

details about the Monitor function.

NOTE

• The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the

CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output

if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack,

regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.

• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can

press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel

(page 45).

• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP

window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on [CUE]  [SEL] LINK (page 214).

• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215).

• If PHONES LEVEL LINK (page 111) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when

monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the

PHONES LEVEL knob.

• To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output

port that is patched to it.

• If you turn on the [CUE] key or the CUE button on the display, the CUE meter is displayed in the

Function Access Area, indicating the CUE output level. The upper part of the cue meter shows

an abbreviation indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations displayed

for the cue meters have the following meaning.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.

2. Press the CUE display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR

screen.

3. Use the CUE MODE button in the CUE screen to specify what will happen when

multiple [CUE] keys within the same CUE group are turned on.

4. Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify

the output position and output level for each CUE group.

5. Press one of the CUE OUT PATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port

as the output destination for cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed).

6. Press the [CUE] key of the channel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on.

7. Adjust the Cue signal level by using the [MONITOR LEVEL] knob located in the

SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.

8. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue

selections, press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field.

MONITOR screen

IN INPUT CUE group

DCA DCA CUE group

OUT OUTPUT CUE group

EFFECT

CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows

(Other CUE groups)

KEY IN

KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window

(Other CUE groups)

REC/PB

RECORDER INPUT CUE button or PLAYBACK OUT CUE button

(Other CUE groups)

CUE meter

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

119

• If CUE is set to 2 channels, the CUE meter is displayed as shown below.

MONITOR screen

The CUE field of the MONITOR screen lets you check the current Cue settings, and turn Cue

on/off.

1 CUE display button

When you press this button, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make

detailed cue settings.

2 CUE MODE buttons

Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued),

or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).

3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE section

Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open

the CUE window.

4 CUE OUTPUT button

Switches the cue output on or off.

5 CLEAR CUE button

Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the

selected channels will be cleared.

CUE A&B

Only CUE A

Only CUE B

2 3

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

120

CUE window

You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the

INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field.

1 CUE MODE buttons

Select one of the following two cue modes:

• MIX CUE

All selected channels will be mixed and monitored.

•LAST CUE

Only most recently selected channel will be monitored.

NOTE

All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in

the CUE MODE section.

 INPUT CUE field

This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.

2 Cue point select button

Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or

POST PAN (immediately after PAN).

NOTE

Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to

the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.

3 PFL TRIM knob

Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the

multifunction knob.

You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.

 DCA CUE field

This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.

4 Cue point select button

Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST

PAN (immediately after PAN).

5 DCA TRIM knob

Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level

using the multifunction knob.

You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.

6 UNITY button

Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when

the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).

 OUTPUT CUE field

This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.

7 Cue point select button

Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL

(immediately after fader).

8 PFL TRIM knob

Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the

multifunction knob.

You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.

 Meter field

ACTIVE CUE indicator

Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow,

output: orange).

0 CLEAR CUE button

Cancels all cue selections simultaneously.

NOTE

If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.

A Meter section

This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.

BA74

D >965 8

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

121

B CUE OUTPUT button

Switches the cue output on or off.

C CUE LEVEL knob

Indicates the output level of the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the

multifunction knobs.

D CUE OUT PATCH button

Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output

port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.

 FADER CUE RELEASE field

Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for

releasing the cue.

E ON button

Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.

F THRESHOLD knob

Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with

this knob, the cue is released.

 SOLO field

Determines the Solo function parameters.

With the Solo function, only the signal of the input/output channel or DCA for which the [CUE]

key is pressed is output from MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO on each bus. All other channels or

DCA are muted.

G SOLO SAFE popup button

When the SOLO SAFE popup button is pressed, the SOLO SAFE popup window (which

specifies soloed channels that are not muted) appears.

Here you can specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can

specify more than one.) The channels that are selected here will not be muted when

SOLO mode is enabled. This function is convenient if, for example, you want to protect

certain channels from being set to SOLO mode accidentally, such as the main STEREO

channels and MIX channels that send signals to an external recorder.

DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network

OMNI1-8 OMNI OUT jacks 1-8

DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit

SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

122

H SOLO ON button

Turns Solo operation on or off. A popup window will ask you to confirm Solo operation.

To execute Solo operation, press the OK button. The button will light up and SOLO

mode will be enabled. To use the Solo function, make sure this button is on, and then

turn on the [CUE] key of the desired channel or DCA. Only the corresponding channel

or DCA will be output to the buses and output jacks;

the remaining channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same signal will also be

output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks.

When you press this button, the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area will flash

as shown.

NOTE

If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal will be sent only to the corresponding

bus.

To defeat Solo, press the currently-on SOLO ON button once again.

NOTE

If you press [LAST CUE] to switch the CUE MODE from LAST to MIX (or vice versa), all

previously-enabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated.

 CUE B field

USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button

When this button is pressed, channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined and

used as a two-channel CUE.

 CUE screen (When configuring CUE B)

When the USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button is pressed, a confirmation popup window

appears. If you press the OK button, the screen expands so you can configure the CUE A/B

settings.

1 USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button

When this button is pressed to turn it off, the CUE will be only a single channel.

 CUE A field

Configures the settings for CUE A.

If the CH/REMOTE switch button (

2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will

be linked with CUE A/B.

In Surround mode, a 5.1 SOLO button is added to the CUE MODE field.

CUE A field

CUE OPERATION

MODE field

CUE B field

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

123

 CUE B field

Configures the settings for CUE B.

If the CH/REMOTE switch button (

2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will

be linked with CUE A/B.

 CUE OPERATION MODE field

CH/REMOTE switch buttons

This section explains how to use a two-channel CUE.

For example, when a single operator wants to use two separate CUEs, they can be set

separately to an in-ear monitor signal and a floor monitor signal. If a single operator

wants to use a two-channel CUE, select the “CH.” Select the desired CUE SETTINGS for

each channel. You can select from A, B, or A+B. To use one CUE each for the console

and CL Editor/StageMix, select the “REMOTE.” The console is fixed to CUE A, while the

CL Editor/StageMix is fixed to CUE B.

NOTE

When “REMOTE” is selected, the device where CUE is actually turned on and the corresponding

targets are shown in the table below.

3 CUE SETTINGS button

Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen.

1 CUE A ALL button

Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE A only. However, if

the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE A only.

2 CUE B ALL button

Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE B only. However, if

the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE B only.

3 A/B switch button

Use this button to switch A and B on/off. However, both cannot be turned off at the

same time.

4 Tab

Use these to select the desired edit operation.

NOTE

If the ALTERNATE function is assigned to a USER DEFINED key and the [CUE] key is pressed

while ALTERNATE is on, the channel settings will toggle between A

 B  A+B each time the

key is pressed.

Device Target

Console CUE A

Cascaded console CUE A

MIDI CUE B

CL Editor CUE B

StageMix CUE B

GPI CUE A

Monitor and Cue functions

Reference Manual

124

 MONITOR screen (When using CUE B)

When CUE B is enabled by setting, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown

below.

In Surround mode, the CUE field appears as shown below.

MONITOR screen (CUE field in Surround mode)

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen

appears as shown below.

1 5.1. SOLO Button

Used to cue only the input channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs,

PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.

CUE screen (Surround mode)

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make

detailed cue settings) appears as shown below.

1 5.1. SOLO Button

5.1 SOLO is only for input channels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be

cued.

Talkback and Oscillator

Reference Manual

125

Talkback and Oscillator

Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the

desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer

to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack

on the I/O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback.

CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the

desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical

response of the room or hall.

The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.

Using Talkback

The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.

NOTE

• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and

+18 dB.

• Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold

output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom

power.

• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case,

you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only

while you continue holding down the key) (page 215).

• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the

talkback signal (page 112).

CUE(A)

MATRIX

(USE 7-8

AS CUE B)

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.

2. Press the TALKBACK display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.

3. Connect a mic to the front panel TALKBACK jack, and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob

to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic.

4. Press a button in the ASSIGN field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es)

to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).

5. To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.

MONITOR screen

Talkback and Oscillator

Reference Manual

126

MONITOR screen

In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback

settings, and turn talkback on or off.

1 TALKBACK display buttons

When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make

detailed talkback settings.

2 TALKBACK IN field

• +48V indicator ........................ Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power

supplied to the TALKBACK jack.

• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain at the

TA L KBACK jac k .

3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field

• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button

........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in

which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.

The selected port name will appear on the button.

• INPUT GAIN knob................. Sets the input gain of the selected port.

• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.

4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field

An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback

signal.

5 TALKBACK ON button

Switches talkback on or off.

TALKBACK window

You can make detailed settings for talkback. This window appears when you press the

TALKBACK display button in the MONITOR screen.

 TALKBACK IN field

This field enables you to make settings for the TALKBACK jack on the front panel.

1 +48V button

Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack.

2 TALKBACK level meter

This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack.

 INPUT TO TALKBACK field

This field enables you to route a signal from a mic (connected to a normal input jack) to

talkback. If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary

input for talkback, select an input port here and set the input level.

3 INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button

Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input

port.

1 2 3 4 5

3 4 6 8 975

Talkback and Oscillator

Reference Manual

127

4 +48V button

This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input

port.

NOTE

This button will not appear if no input port is selected.

5 ANALOG GAIN knob

Indicates the analog gain value for the selected input port. Press this knob to control the

level using the multifunction knobs.

6 Level meter

Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.

7 GC button

Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will

appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.

8 Level meter

Indicates the level after gain compensation. This will appear if the input jack of an I/O

device is patched.

9 TALKBACK ON/OFF button

This switches talkback on/off. While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack

selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the send-destination bus.

 ASSIGN field

Channel select buttons

These buttons enable you to select a channel on which the talkback signal is sent.

A CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to clear all selections.

Using the Oscillator function

You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.

2. Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.

3. Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select

the type of signal you want to output.

4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.

5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which

the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).

6. Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator.

MONITOR screen

Talkback and Oscillator

Reference Manual

128

MONITOR screen

In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings,

and turn the oscillator on or off.

1 OSCILLATOR display button

When you press this button, the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make

detailed oscillator settings.

2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field

Indicates the frequency and level of the currently-selected oscillator. A meter in this field

indicates the output level of the oscillator. Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator

level using the multifunction knob.

3 OSCILLATOR MODE field

Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly

will switch modes.

4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field

An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input

channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button

Turns the oscillator output on or off.

OSCILLATOR window

You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the

OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen.

1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons

Select one of the following four operating modes when the oscillator is turned on:

2 Parameter field

Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this

field vary depending on the selected mode.

Mode = SINE WAVE

• LEVEL knob..........Indicates the output level of the sine wave. You can adjust the

value by using the multifunction knob.

• FREQ knob ...........Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. You can adjust the value

by using the multifunction knob.

SINE WAVE A sine wave will be output continuously.

SINE WAVE 2CH

Two sine waves of different frequencies will be output

separately.

PINK NOISE Pink noise will be output continuously.

BURST NOISE Pink noise will be output intermittently.

Talkback and Oscillator

Reference Manual

129

Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH

• LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ........ Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L

side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction

knob.

• FREQ knob (ODD/L) .......... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L

side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction

knob.

• LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) ...... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/

R side. You can adjust the value by using the

multifunction knob.

• FREQ knob (EVEN/R)........ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R

side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction

knob.

By default, ODD(L) is set to 1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are

two meters (L and R).

Mode = PINK NOISE

• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can adjust the

value by using the multifunction knob.

• HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink

noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.

Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.

• LPF knob...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink

noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.

Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.

Mode = BURST NOISE

• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob

....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode.

• WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can

adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.

• INTERVAL .............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can

adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.

3 ASSIGN section

Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of

the three tabs below to select the type of channels displayed, and then press the

button(s) for the desired channel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED”

indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection.

If the mode is set to SINE WAVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side)

or even (EVEN(R) side) of the selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L)

is output in MIX1, and the signal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2.

You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

4 Meter section

Indicates the oscillator output level.

5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button

Turns the oscillator output on or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will be

sent to the input channel or bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press

the button again, the oscillator will turn off.

INTERVAL

WIDTH

Level

Time

Pink noise output

Turn BURST NOISE button on.

Meters

Reference Manual

130

Meters

This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all

channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge.

Operations in the METER screen

By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on

the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which

the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function

Access Area.

INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab

Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and

RTA screen.

INPUT METER screen

This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

OUTPUT METER screen

This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.

Meters

Reference Manual

131

Fader level and meter display

This area displays the meter and fader for each channel.

1 Channel number

Indicates the channel number.

2 Σ clipping indicator

Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.

3 OVER indicator

Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section of the channel.

4 Meters

Indicates the input or output level of the channel.

5 Faders

The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that

appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns

gray.

NOTE

Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic

section.

Centralogic fader display

This area displays the level of faders that are currently set in the Centralogic section.

METERING POINT field

Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. The

metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and

output channels.

 For INPUT METER

• PRE GC .................Immediately before GAIN

COMPENSATION

• PRE D.GAIN ..........Immediately before DIGITAL GAIN

• POST D. GAIN.......Immediately after DIGITAL GAIN

• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader

(Immediately before INPUT DELAY)

• POST ON...............Immediately after the [ON] key

 For OUTPUT METER

• PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader

• POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key

NOTE

On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional

meter bridge (MBCL).

PEAK HOLD button

Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this

button to clear the peak hold indication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations

will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter

bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indication that had been

held will be cleared.

NOTE

You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (page 215).

When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and

the [ON] key for channel 8 is OFF

Meters

Reference Manual

132

SHOW SEND LEVEL button

If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and

position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send

destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status.

 For INPUT METER

Fader color

The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MASTER).

The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus.

The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF.

 For OUTPUT METER

Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color.

RTA METER screen

This is the real time analyzer screen. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected

source are shown in the 1/6 octave band (61 band).

1 Frequency Response graph

A graph of a frequency analysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band.

2 Source selection buttons

Use these buttons to specify the output channel whose frequency response you want to

see.

3 OVER display

Data that exceeds 0dB is shown the same as the OVER indicator.

4 Cross-hair cursor display

The frequency and level at the point you touch on the graph are displayed.

Meters

Reference Manual

133

5 CUE OVERRIDE button

If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time

analyzer, and an analysis is displayed.

• If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is

a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen.

• If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the

frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel.

• If CUE is set to 2 channels, buttons will be as shown below.

6 BALLISTICS field

• BALLISTICS button

Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph.

• FAST/SLOW switch button

Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW).

7 HOLD button

Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response.

METER screen (Surround mode)

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown

below.

1 MONITOR

Meters for MIX1-6. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the

SURROUND SETUP screen.

2 SURROUND METER select button

Selects the meters displayed in the Function Access Area.

•MIX1-6

Source for MIX1-6.

• MONITOR

Source selected in SURROUND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1,

but with meters only for L and R.

GEQ RACK 1-16 OUT

EFFECT RACK 1-8 OUT

CH 1-72{64,48} POST EQ

72{64,48}

ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ

MIX1-24 POST EQ

RTA

STEREO L,R,MONO(C) POST EQ

MATRIX 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) POST EQ

MIX OUT 1-24

STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C)

MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

CUE(A) OUT L,R

RTA

1 2

Meters

Reference Manual

134

METER screen (when using 2-channel CUE)

1 CUE

Meters for CUE A and CUE B.

Function Access Area screen

If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access

Area appears as shown below.

The display specifications are as follows.

• The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the

STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the

same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.

When cue is operating

• EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual.

• The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to

5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible.

• Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.

Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3

or CL1 console

If an optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be

able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels, in the

same way as in the meter section of CL5.

The MBCL meters indicate the MIX channel and MATRIX channel output levels in 12-segment

steps (OVER, -3dB, -6dB, -9dB, -12dB, -15dB, -18dB, -24dB, -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, -60dB).

You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following

choices. For information on how to change the metering point, refer to “Operations in the

METER screen” (page 130).

• PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ

• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader

• POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

135

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and

PREMIUM RACK

This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effects, and Premium

Rack.

About the virtual rack

CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as

“GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to

modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely

adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any

fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency

regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters.

You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature Premium Rack,

which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component

level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers seven types of

processors.

In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect,

or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the

desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal

processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can

mount a GEQ or PEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1-16 and EFFECT, an effect rack

instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight

racks 1-8.

Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However, if the

“31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)

The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.

NOTE

• In addition to the virtual racks for GEQ, PEQ, effects and Premium Rack, the CL console also

provides racks for mounting an I/O device (such as an R series) or external head amps (Yamaha

AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.). For details, refer to “I/O devices and external head amps” (page 167).

• With CL V1.7 and later, you can use the [SEL] key to switch channels in the EFFECT popup

window, GEQ popup window, and PREMIUM RACK popup window.

Pressing a top panel [SEL] key in the EFFECT popup window while operating the effect

parameter will switch to the window of the effect that is inserted in that channel. The same applies

to the GEQ popup window and the PREMIUM RACK popup window. You can also switch from

the EFFECT popup window to the GEQ popup window or PREMIUM RACK popup window. The

following items change according to the target channel.

• Selected channel display in the Function Access Area

• Operated channel in synchronized CL Editor

If there are no insert settings on a channel that has been selected, a notification dialog box will

be displayed.

MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R)

MATRIX 1-6,7-8

(CUE B L,R)

MATRIX 1-6,7-8

(CUE B L,R)

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

136

Virtual rack operations

This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the

input and output of the rack as an example.

NOTE

• In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear

(page 214).

• The type of GEQ, PEQ, or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input-

source and output-destination settings are saved as part of the scene.

VIRTUAL RACK screen

1 Rack tabs

Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1-8, GEQ

9-16 (GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), or PREMIUM (Premium Rack).

2 Rack mount button

Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type

of the rack you want to mount.

3 SAFE button

Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the

contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more

information on Recall Safe, refer to “Using the Recall Safe function” (page 79).

The Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that

rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or output-

destination channel.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.

2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or

EFFECT tab.

3. To mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that

rack.

4. Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to

select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.

5. Press the INPUT PATCH button.

6. In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button.

7. Press the OUTPUT PATCH button.

8. In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK

button.

Function

Access Area

VIRTUAL RACK window

23 4 6 5

23 4 56

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

137

4 INPUT PATCH button

If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or

8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will

appear.

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of

the signal patched to the rack input.

The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.

• OUT CH ....................................MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8

• ST/MONO .................................STEREO L/R, MONO

• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-32

• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-64

• INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-72

• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8

• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L/R, MONO

• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 .................CH1-32

• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ...............CH33-64

• INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ...............CH65-72

• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX....MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8

• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........STEREO L/R, MONO

*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK.

NOTE

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

• In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically

assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched

on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point

will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.

• For effects, if you select “DYNAMICS&EQ” for EFFECT TYPE, the operation is the same as for

GEQ above.

• For PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as for GEQ above.

• For more information on insert-in/out, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel”

(page 23).

5 OUTPUT PATCH button

If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or

8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will

appear.

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of

the signal patched to the rack output.

The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.

• CH1-32................................... CH1-32

• CH33-64................................. CH33-64

• CH65-72................................. CH65-72

• INSERT 1 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32

• INSERT 1 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64

• INSERT 1 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72

• INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8

• INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO

• INSERT 2 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32

• INSERT 2 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64

• INSERT 2 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72

• INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8

• INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO

*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK.

NOTE

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

• If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be

shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

138

6 Rack container

Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you

selected in the RACK MOUNTER window.

• If nothing is mounted:

Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ

or effect that will be mounted in the rack.

• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:

This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level.

Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ

settings.

• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:

This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and

output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in

which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.

•If 8BandPEQ is mounted:

This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and

output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in

which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B.

• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):

This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status,

and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which

you can modify the effect settings.

• If 16ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-8):

• If 8ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-4):

Press this area to open the AUTOMIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the automixer

settings.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

139

7 Link indicator

Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A

and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other.

RACK MOUNTER window

Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount

button in the VIRTUAL RACK window.

1 Rack number

Indicates the number for the selected rack.

2 Virtual rack

This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.

3 MODULE SELECT field

Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following

function.

• BLANK button....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the

rack; the rack will be empty.

• 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.

• Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.

• 8BandPEQ button................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack.

• EFFECT button (only for EFFECT rack)

........................ Mounts an effect in the rack.

• 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)

........................ Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack.

• 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)

........................ Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack.

NOTE

• Input/output patching will be defeated when you change the item mounted in a rack.

• The 16ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 8, and the 8ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 4.

4 CANCEL button

Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.

5 OK button

Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.

NOTE

Be aware that if you remove a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the

RACKMOUNTER window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be

discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by

mounting the same GEQ, PEQ, or effect once again.

Graphic EQ operations

The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the

insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a STEREO/

MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insert-

out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of

each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys.

The following two types of GEQ are provided.

 31BandGEQ

This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3

octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and

the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.

If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of

input and output can be used for that rack.

 Flex15GEQ

This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3

octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB.

The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for

any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands

of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you have used up fifteen

bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a

previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.)

A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and

“B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output.

43 5

INPUT

31BandGEQ

OUTPUT

Rack

INPUT

Flex15GEQ (B)

Flex15GEQ (A)

OUTPUT

Rack

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

140

Inserting a GEQ in a channel

This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.

NOTE

• If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units

in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later

step.

• You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.

• For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” (page 141)

or “Using the Flex15GEQ” (page 142).

GEQ EDIT window

NOTE

The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the

Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.

1 Rack select tabs

Switch among GEQ 1-8 or among GEQ 9-16. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is

mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).

2 INPUT button

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input

source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the

GEQ field.

3 OUTPUT button

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output

destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button

in the GEQ field.

4 RACK LINK button

Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ units.

In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same

rack will be linked.

•GEQ x

y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and

alphabetical character A or B)

The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.

•GEQ y

x button

The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.

• RESET BOTH button

The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.

• CANCEL button

Cancels the link and closes the window.

NOTE

The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link

GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.

5 FLAT button

Returns all bands of the currently-selected GEQ to 0 dB.

6 GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.

STEP

1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount a GEQ in a rack

and set its input source and output destination.

2. In the GEQ field, press the rack container in which you mounted the GEQ.

3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ

units.

4. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.

2 3 4 5

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

141

For GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ)

1 RTA button

Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.

2 HOLD button

Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.

Using the 31BandGEQ

You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.

NOTE

• When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key

will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower

the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been

modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately

return to the flat state.

• With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted

gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key

for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the

adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB.

• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic

section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the faders will

automatically move to the group of bands you had previously been controlling.

• When you close the GEQ EDIT window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically

turn off.

GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ)

1 EQ graph

Indicates the approximate response of the current 31Band GEQ.

2 Faders

Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual

values are shown in the numerical boxes below.

Faders can be controlled by the TOUCH AND TURN function. The area of a fader you

touched will turn pink as shown below.

STEP

1. In the GEQ field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the

31BandGEQ.

2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.

3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you

will control.

4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.

5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN

field.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

142

3 FADER ASSIGN field

In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic

section’s faders. The buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following

groups of bands.

When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will

turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will

be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the

bands.

NOTE

The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the

button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.

4 Tool buttons

Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or

initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool

buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.

• GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.

Using the Flex15GEQ

You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.

A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B)

in the VIRTUAL RACK window.

NOTE

If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.

However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.

NOTE

• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that

the corresponding band is being modified.

• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in

the Centralogic section to make it go dark.

• With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted

gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key

for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the

adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB.

• If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section

will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands

you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.

• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.

GEQ EDIT window (Flex 15GEQ)

This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS

parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that

can be controlled in the current GEQ.

For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and

xB (x is the rack number).

20-100 The eight bands 20.0 Hz--100 Hz

63-315 The eight bands 63.0 Hz--315 Hz

200-1k The eight bands 200 Hz--1.00 kHz

630-3.15k The eight bands 630 Hz--3.15 kHz

2k-10k The eight bands 2.00 kHz--10.0 kHz

4k-20k The eight bands 4.00 kHz--20.0 kHz

STEP

1. Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ.

2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.

3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you

will control.

4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.

5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN

field.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

143

Parametric EQ operations

In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, CL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric

EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch

it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a

STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it

to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel.

The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys.

The following type of PEQ is provided.

8BandPEQ

This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters.

Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and

therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack.

 Inserting a PEQ in a channel

This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use.

NOTE

• You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field.

• For details on PEQ operations, refer section “PEQ EDIT window” (page 143).

PEQ EDIT window

1 PEQ graph

Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filter.

2 INPUT button

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input

source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the

GEQ field.

3 OUTPUT button

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output

destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button

in the GEQ field.

4 LIBRARY button

Press this button to open the PEQ Library window.

5 DEFAULT button

Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.

STEP

1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount a PEQ in a rack

and set its input source and output destination.

2. In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you

mounted the PEQ.

3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units.

4. Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on.

4 31 2 76 8

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

144

6 COPY button

All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.

7 PAST E bu tton

Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If

no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

8 COMPARE button

Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer

memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.

9 RACK LINK button

Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ

units.

In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.

•GEQ x

y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and

alphabetical character A or B)

The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.

•GEQ y

x button

The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.

• RESET BOTH button

The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.

•CANCEL button

Cancels the link and closes the window.

NOTE

The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol

will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.

0 PEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off.

A PEQ FLAT button

Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.

All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off.

All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset.

B PEQ IN/OUT level meters

Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the PEQ.

C Rack select tabs

Switch among GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is

mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).

NOTE

For details on how to use the buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s

Manual.

D RTA button

Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.

E HOLD button

Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.

F EQ type select button

Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY.

The following EQ types can be selected.

PRECISE

This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to

precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music

production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that

allow knee adjustments.

AGGRESSIVE

This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to

create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic

expression.

SMOOTH

This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create

natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the

original sound.

LEGACY

This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as

the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch

between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and

TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

145

PEQ EDIT window (8PEQ)

1 BYPASS button

You can bypass each band.

When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn

gray.

2 HPF/LPF NOTCH button

Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters.

3 EQ parameter setting knobs

Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You

can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.

PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH)

1 Attenuation select button

There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave

between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct.

2 8PEQ button

Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ.

3 HPF/LPF frequency knob

This knob is used to adjust the HPF/LPF frequency.

4 ON button

There is an ON button for the HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters.

5 Notch Filter Q knob

Adjusts the Q of the notch filter.

6 Notch Filter frequency knob

Adjusts the frequency of the notch filter.

313

56565 4 4 4 6

1 1

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

146

About AUTOMIXER

Automixer is included as a standard feature on the CL series. Automixer searches for enabled

mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts.

This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer

from making constant fader adjustments.

Automixer operating principle

With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the automix

gain for up to 16 mics used for speeches.

The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When

multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust the each level using the faders as

normal. Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically

distributes gain. Therefore, faders can be left in their raised positions.

Inserting Automixer in channels post-fader

This section explains how to mount Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and

output into channels (excluding ST IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on

Automixer operations, refer to the following section “Using Automixer.”

Using Automixer

Channel display

The auto mix gain meter for each channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red)

settings are shown for channels 1-8 and channels 9-16.

If you select the channel 1-8 or 9-16 region, the display channel for the channel control field

will switch to 1-8 or 9-16.

(For 8ch Automixer, only channels 1-8 are shown.)

When 1 person speaks on multiple mics When 2 people speak on multiple mics

When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic

being used is immediately increased and the gain

on all other mics is reduced. The same operation

occurs even if another person is speaking.

If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is

automatically distributed so that the total gain is

consistent across both mics, and the gain on the

remaining mic is reduced.

Gain (dB) in

Automix

Mic input audio

(dB)

Gain (dB) in

Automix

Mic input audio

(dB)

STEP

1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount Automixer in

rack 1 and set its input source and output destination.

2. Refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (page 23) to insert Automixer

in post-fader (POST ON field).

Master field

Channel control field

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

147

 Channel control field

Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel

mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET

button in the master field.

1 Level indicator

Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix.

NOTE

• If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain.

• If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain.

2 Meter indicator

There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch

modes.

NOTE

Meters should normally be set in gain mode.

3 weight

Adjusts the correlative sensitivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust

the weight setting so that all auto mix gain meters are at about the same level. For

example, if you can hear noise near one mic (such as noise from a computer ventilation

fan or an air conditioner), you can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for

that channel.

To change the channel weight settings, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the

weight slider.

Automixer calculates the ratio of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in the

group. The following example explains the weight control mechanism.

 When increasing the weight setting in one channel

• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the

values for other channels are reduced.

• Channels with high weight setting values receive a higher automix gain than other

channels.

 When reducing the weight setting in one channel

• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel decreases, while the

values for other channels are increased.

• When speaking into multiple mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between

different mics.

4 group

Each channel can be assigned to three groups (a/b/c).

This group function is convenient for the following uses.

• Using multiple rooms: Assign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a

different Automixer for each.

• Stereo pan: Assign mics panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to

maintain a stable stereo field.

5 override

If you turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field, the channel will switch to man

mode or mute mode according to the settings for that channel’s override button.

• When the channel’s override button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man

when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.

• When the channel’s override is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when

the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.

• When the master OVERRIDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous

mode.

The override function is convenient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to

control the system.

Follow the instructions below to change the settings.

1. Turn on the override button on the moderator’s channel.

2. Turn off the override button on all other channels.

3. Turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field as needed.

gain Displays the gain for Automixer. Green

input Displays the input level. Yellow

output Displays the output level. Blue

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

148

6 Channel number

Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted.

7 man/auto/mute

Toggles between man/auto/mute.

man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for

singing with a mic.

auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations.

mute: Mutes channels.

8 preset

Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field

is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.

 Master field

OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE

Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only

the selected group.

• OVERRIDE

When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will

fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be

muted.

• PRESET

When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the

mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.

•MUTE

When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds).

2 meters

Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input,

and output each time you press the button.

NOTE

Meters should normally be set in gain mode.

3 reset

Initializes the Automixer settings.

Editing the internal effects

The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1-8, and

patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For

each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.

With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17-24 are input to racks 1-8, and from

the racks are then output to ST IN 1-8 (L/R).

NOTE

Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.

To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input

of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the

corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input

channel is used as an effect return channel.

Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a

desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.

The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process

the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the

two channels before processing them.

If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R

channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is

selected, as follows.

OUTPUT PATCH

INPUT PATCH

EFFECT

Rack 2

Rack 7

Rack 8

Output of the

output

channel

Input of the input

channel

Rack 1

EFFECT

Insert-out of a

desired channel*

Insert-in of a

desired channel*

* Excluding a ST IN channel

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

149

 STEREO type effects

 MIX type effects

If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/

stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However,

please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,

EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.

Using an internal effect via send and return

This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an

effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.

NOTE

• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow

you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.

• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the send-

destination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to page 57.)

NOTE

• If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs

of the rack.

• If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected

in step 3 to the R output of the rack.

• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.

• For more information on setting the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect

parameters” (page 150).

 Adjusting the effect send level of a input channel

In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the OVERVIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX SEND

LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set as the input source for the rack, and use the multifunction

knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to that MIX bus.

NOTE

• If a MATRIX bus is shown in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field, use the [MIX 1-16] key or the [MIX 17-

24/MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the MIX bus at the input source

for the rack.

• When adjusting the effect send level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you

selected as the output destination for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If you

raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect,

possibly causing oscillation.

• If you press the knob once again, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus

will appear. This window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the

corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) (page 44 ).

STEP

1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136), to mount an

effect in a rack.

2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX

channel as the input source for the rack (page 136).

3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L

input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack (page 136).

4. Adjust the send level from each channel in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the

OVERVIEW screen.

5. Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the

input source for the rack.

6. Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output

destination for the rack.

INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN

INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN

INPUT L L RETURN

INPUT R

EFFECT

R RETURN

L RETURN

EFFECT

R RETURN

INPUT L

or R

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

150

 Adjusting the master level of the effect send

To adjust the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack, first call it up to the

Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader.

Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload

point.

NOTE

The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right

of the EFFECT EDIT window.

 Adjusting the effect return level

To adjust the effect return level, first call up the ST IN channel you specified as the output

destination for the rack to the Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating

the fader.

Inserting an internal effect into a channel

This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of

the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For

details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.”

NOTE

• If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel

insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output of the effect in the same way as step 3.

• For more information about how to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “Inserting

an external device into a channel” (page 23).

• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right

of the EFFECT EDIT window.

• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach

the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.

Editing the internal effect parameters

This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in

which an effect is mounted, the following information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window.

1 Effect title/type

Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number

of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.

2 Input/output meters

Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.

STEP

1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136), to mount an

effect in a rack.

2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insert-

out for one of the channels as the input source for the rack (page 136).

3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the

insert in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack (page 136).

4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen

for the channel into which you inserted the effect.

5. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.

6. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for

the channel into which you inserted the effect.

7. Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect

parameters.

8. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step

3, adjust the level as appropriate.

STEP

1. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.

2. To change the effect type, press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and

select the effect type in the EFFECT TYPE window.

3. Press a knob in the effect parameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it,

and turn the multifunction knob to edit the effect parameters.

4. Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.

1 2

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

151

EFFECT EDIT window

Allows you to adjust the effect parameters.

NOTE

For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.

1 INPUT L/R buttons

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.

2 OUTPUT L/R buttons

Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.

3 Effect type field

Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number

of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.

Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type.

NOTE

• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.

• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you

copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.

4 EFFECT CUE button

Cue-monitors the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only

while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch

to a different screen.

NOTE

If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be

monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the

EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily

defeated.)

The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.

5 Special parameter field

Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.

3 24 5

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

152

 TEMPO

This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.

• MIDI CLK button

If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that

effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing

clock being input from the MIDI port.

 PLAY/REC

This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.

• PLAY button/REC button

Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using

the freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “Using

the Freeze effect” (page 155).

 SOLO

This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is

selected as the effect type.

• HIGH/MID/LOW buttons

Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple

selections are allowed).

• Gain reduction meters

Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.

 Gain reduction meter

This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is

selected as the effect type.

• Gain reduction meters

Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the

compressor.

 Type

This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect

type.

•Type

Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.

DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits,

creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion.

CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits,

creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.

• FLAT button

This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.

6 BYPASS button

Temporarily bypasses the effect.

7 Input/output meters

Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.

8 Effect parameter field

This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a

knob in this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the

corresponding horizontal row of knobs.

You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it

down.

9 MIX BAL. knob

Adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output

signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using

the corresponding multifunction knob. If you are using the effect via send and return,

set this to 100% (effect sound only).

0 Tool buttons

Copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the

settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in

the separate Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library.

A Rack select tabs

Enable you to switch between EFFECT 1–8.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

153

Using the Tap Tempo function

“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation

speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function

can be used for delay-type and modulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is

included, and specify the delay time or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must

assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.

NOTE

For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.

 Assigning the Tap Tempo function to a USER DEFINED key

NOTE

• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY

SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).

• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1-8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY

SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).

• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “USER DEFINED keys” (page 215).

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.

3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.

4. On the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to

which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function.

5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the

PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK

button.

USER SETUP windowSETUP screen

USER DEFINED KEY SETUP windowUSER DEFINED KEYS page

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

154

 Using the Tap Tempo function

The average interval (BPM) at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated,

and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter.

NOTE

• If the average value is outside the range of 20-300 BPM, it will be ignored.

• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will

change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.

NOTE

• If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not

displayed.

• With CL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.

2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.

3. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to control is mounted.

4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window.

5. In the EFFECT TYPE window, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter.

6. Set the SYNC parameter ON in the effect parameter field.

7. At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you

assigned the Tap Tempo function, to set the BPM parameter.

ab c

The average interval will be input to the parameter.

(the average of a, b, and c)

First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap

Tap Tempo pop-up window

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

155

Effects and tempo synchronization

Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types

of effect: delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time

will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the

modulation signal will change according to the tempo.

Parameters related to tempo synchronization

The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.

1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.

SYNC: ..............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.

NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.

DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation

signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will

change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is

relevant only for modulation-type effects.

How the parameters are related

Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value

from the TEMPO and

NOTE.

Turn SYNC ON

Change NOTE DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

Change TEMPO DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec

FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz

Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from

8th note to quarter note

DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)

= 0.5 (sec)

= 500 ms

Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.

Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO

from 120 to 121

DELAY= NOTE x 4 x (60/new TEMPO)

= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)

= 0.2479 (sec)

= 247.9 (ms)

Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.

*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.

Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter

The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.

• Value shared with all effects (However, this applies only if SYNC is ON and if the MIDI CLK

button is ON when MIDI clock is input to the MIDI IN jack.)

• You cannot store it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from

a Scene.)

This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled

as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.

Store the effect: TEMPO=120  Change TEMPO to 60  TEMPO=60 

Recall the effect: TEMPO=60

Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly.

However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when

recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between

store and recall, the CL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect

is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.

* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.

Using the Freeze effect

This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality

of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen

to record (sample) and play back a sound.

NOTE

Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.

NOTE

• The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time

has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.

• You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for

recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play

back. For details on the parameters, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.

2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.

3. Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.

4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE

window, and select “FREEZE.”

5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY

button.

6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.

= 1/48

= 3/16

= 1/24

= 1/4

= 1/16

= 3/8

= 1/12

= 1/2

= 3/4

= 3/32

= 1/8

= 1/1

= 2/1

= 1/6

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

156

• The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off

the power to the CL unit.

EFFECT EDIT window (when FREEZE is selected)

If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will

appear in the special parameter field.

1 PLAY button

2 REC button

3 Progress bar

NOTE

As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall settings that use the “FREEZE”

effect type from the effect library.

Using the Premium Rack

In addition to the graphic EQ and the internal effects, the CL series provides “Premium Rack”

processors that faithfully emulate carefully selected vintage analog processors as well as

newly developed processors. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models

analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog

sounds.

The Premium Rack offers eight types of processors.

Using the Premium Rack

The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack

(page 148).

NOTE

• If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel

insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and 6.

• For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack

parameters.”

• Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the

overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.

Name Outline

Portico 5033 Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ.

Portico 5043 Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter.

U76 Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.

Opt-2A Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.

EQ-1A Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.

Dynamic EQ

Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to

control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.

Buss Comp 369 Models a 1970s compressor/limiter with discrete circuitry.

MBC4 Four-band compressor with intuitive controls

1 32

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.

2. Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window.

3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in

the PREMIUM RACK field.

4. Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT

field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button.

5. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the

input source.

6. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the

insert-in of the same channel as the output destination.

7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel into which

you inserted the effect.

8. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.

9. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for

the channel into which you inserted the processor.

10. Adjust the processor parameters.

11. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step

6, adjust the level as appropriate.

PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER

window

VIRTUAL RACK window

(PREMIUM RACK field)

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

157

 Mounting a processor

There are two ways to mount each processor:

• DUAL .....................The processor is used on two mono channels.

• STEREO ................The processor is used on one stereo channel.

The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by

the Premium Rack processor.

The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a

two-space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more

processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an

even-numbered rack.

Editing the Premium Rack parameters

Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:

1 ASSIST button

Press this button to indicate the numbers of the multifunction knobs that control each

parameter.

2 LIBRARY button

Press this button to display the Library window for each Premium Rack.

3 DEFAULT button

Restores the default parameter setting.

4 Multifunction knob access field

Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction

knobs.

To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window.

NOTE

• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently

available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.

• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and

holding it down.

 Portico 5033

Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve

Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of

the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve.

Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output

transformer that was designed by Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model

produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique

effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting

is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears.

1 2 3

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

158

1 ALL BYPASS button

Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through

the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.

2 TRIM knob

Adjusts the input gain of the effect.

3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs

Adjust the frequency for each band.

4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs

Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.

5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs

Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range

in which you can control the gain for the band.

6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button

Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.

7 LF/HF IN button

Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.

8 Graph

Indicates the graphical EQ response.

 Portico 5043

Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor. The

actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the

5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range

of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio

sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can

switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type

(which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in

vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as

appropriate for your applications.

1 IN button

Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button

indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass

through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.

2 INPUT meter

Indicates the input signal level.

One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.

3 FB button

Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-

Back) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.

The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you

want to apply consistent compression while maintaining a consistent tonal color.

The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to

apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such

devices.

4 GAIN REDUCTION meter

Indicates the amount of gain reduction.

5 THRESHOLD knob

Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.

6 RATIO knob

Adjusts the compression ratio. If you rotate the knob fully clockwise, the unit will operate

as a limiter.

7 ATTACK knob

Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.

8 RELEASE knob

Adjusts the compressor’s release time.

1324

56789

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

159

9 GAIN knob

Adjusts the output gain.

 U76

U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of

situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on

conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the

balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO

parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It

produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones.

1 INPUT knob

Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.

2 ATTACK knob

Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest

attack time.

3 RELEASE knob

Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest

release time.

4 RATIO switch buttons

Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.

A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL

button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression

with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive

sound.

5 METER switch buttons

Switch the meter display.

• GR.................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.

• +4/+8.............Each meter uses -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and

indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or

+8 dB.

• OFF...............Turns off the meter display.

6 OUTPUT knob

Adjusts the output level.

If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the

level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust

the volume level.

 Opt-2A

Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. To

control the level, it uses optical components such as a CdS cell and an EL panel to apply

smooth compression, with beautiful high-range overtones generated by warm-sounding

vacuum tube distortion, delivering an elegant and sophisticated sound.

1 GAIN knob

Adjusts the output level.

2 PEAK REDUCTION knob

Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.

3 RATIO knob

Adjusts the compression ratio.

4 METER SELECT knob

Switches the meter display.

GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.

With -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT

+4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to

be shown as “0VU” on the meter.

3645

2134

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

160

 EQ-1A

EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique

style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency

ranges (high and low). Its frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ,

producing a unique character that is distinctive of this model. The input/output circuits and

vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.

1 IN switch

Turns the processor on or off.

When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the

input/output transformer and amp circuits.

2 LOW FREQUENCY knob

Sets the frequency of the low range filter.

3 (LOW) BOOST knob

Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW

FREQUENCY knob.

4 (LOW) ATTEN knob

Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW

FREQUENCY knob.

5 BAND WIDTH knob

Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.

As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the

peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.

6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob

Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.

7 (HIGH) BOOST knob

Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH

FREQUENCY knob.

8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob

Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN

SEL knob.

9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob

Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.

 Dynamic EQ

Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of

equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This

allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a

specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific

frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use

this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only

when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a

natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs

are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.

1 BAND ON/OFF button

Turns each band on or off.

2 61

3 4 5 7 8 9

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

161

2 SIDECHAIN CUE button

Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time,

the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.

3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button

Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus

(such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent.

At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.

4 FILTER TYPE buttons

Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and

sidechain filter will link as follows:

5 FREQUENCY knob

Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.

6 Q knob

Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.

As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or

sidechain filter is applied will become wider.

7 THRESHOLD knob

Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect.

8 RATIO knob

Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.

Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut.

Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.

9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons

Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression

or boost.

Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and

slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending

on the frequency ranges.

0 MODE buttons

Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the

threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).

A EQ GAIN meter

Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.

B THRESHOLD meter

Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.

C Graph area

Displays the equalizer response.

In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and

intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ

responses.

If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter

response.

FILTER TYPE

(Low Shelf) (Bell) (Hi Shelf)

Main EQ Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf

Sidechain filter LPF BPF HPF

Dynamic EQ graph

Reference EQ graph

Sidechain filter graph

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

162

 Buss Comp 369

Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios

and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression

that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive

compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can

use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich

overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete

Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality.

STEREO mounting

DUAL mounting

1 INPUT ADJUST

Used to adjust the input gain. However, the output gain is linked to change in the

opposite direction, to prevent changes in pass-through volume (the volume when

COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain

is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB.

See below for more information about how to use INPUT ADJUST.

• If the level of the input signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold, increase

the input gain.

• Adjust the sound quality by changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio

transformer and Class A amplifier).

INPUT ADJUST structure

2 LINK (STEREO mounting)

Stereo link on/off

3 COMP IN

Compressor on/off

4 COMP THRESHOLD

Compressor threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.

5 COMP RECOVERY

Compressor release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change

automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes

automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.

8>AB C

42567

AB C

43567

COMP THRESHOLDLIMIT THRESHOLD

Buss Comp 369

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION

INPUT

CIRCUIT

OUTPUT

CIRCUIT

OUTPUT GAININPUT GAIN

INPUT ADJUST

COMPRESSOR LIMITER

OUT

IN IN

Since there are substantial changes in threshold, the changing display values are

linked. However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/LIMITER

SECTION do not actually change.

Linked in reverse

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

163

6 COMP GAIN

Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter.

7 COMP RATIO

Compressor ratio

8 METER SELECT (STEREO mounting)

Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain

reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the

meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU.

When“METER” is IN

When“METER” is GR

When“METER” is OUT

9 VU SELECT (DUAL mounting)

Selects the signal source for the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level.

0 LIMIT IN

Limiter on/off

A LIMIT ATTACK

Limiter attack time. FAST: 2ms, SLOW: 4ms

B LIMIT THRESHOLD

Limiter threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.

C LIMIT RECOVERY

Limiter release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change

automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes

automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

164

 MBC4

This high-quality four-band compressor utilizes VCM technology and features a GUI that

offers operability and visibility. All of the advantages of the musical behavior of analog

compressors have been built into the gain reduction circuitry of the MBC4. This allows smooth

control of dynamics while keeping the sound image. You can also use the graphical display

to visually manipulate the sound image.

1 GAIN LINE

This horizontal red line indicates the GAIN parameter for each band.

2 MAXIMUM GR GUIDELINE

This horizontal orange line is a guideline for maximum gain reduction. This is only a

guideline, and not a strict limitation for maximum gain reduction.

3 GR ZONE

This red area changes according to the amount of gain reduction for each band.

4 CROSSOVER LINE

These vertical lines indicate the CROSSOVER parameters for each band.

5 CROSSOVER ZONE

These areas, in the color of the band, change according to the CROSSOVER parameter

for each band.

6 CROSSOVER RANGE

This horizontal bar for the band color indicates the range for the CROSSOVER parameter

for each band.

7 CROSSOVER BAND WIDTH

This horizontal bar for the band color changes according to the CROSSOVER parameter

for each band.

8 INPUT meter

Indicates the level of the input signal.

One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.

9 OUTPUT meter

Indicates the level of the output signal.

One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO.

1 GAIN

Adjust the output gain for each band.

2 THRESH

Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied for each band. This

value is also indicated by a red marker in the

0 INPUT meter.

3 RATIO

Adjusts the compression ratio for each band.

4123 756

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

165

4 ATTACK

Adjusts the compressor’s attack time for each band.

5 RELEASE

Adjusts the compressor’s release time for each band.

6 LINK knob

Links and adjusts the four bands for the selected parameter. However, if a parameter in

any frequency region reaches its maximum or minimum value, the link operation is

disabled. Parameters that can be linked and adjusted are displayed in band colors as

shown below.

7 CROSSOVER

Adjusts the crossover frequency when splitting the frequency range into multiple bands.

8 CUE button

Cue-monitors the corresponding band output for each band. When the CUE button is

on, the button changes to the color shown below.

If the IN button is off, the uncompressed sound is cue-monitored. The CUE buttons for

multiple bands can be turned on at the same time.

9 MASTER GAIN knob

Adjusts the gain for the final output signal.

0 INPUT meter

Indicates the input level for the audio signals sent to each band.

A KNEE knob

Adjusts the compressor’s knee.

B IN button

Turns each band on or off. When this button is off, the band color for the selected area

changes to gray as shown below.

Also, when this button is off, the COMPRESSOR field for the selected band turns gray.

You can adjust each parameter even when this button is off.

C FLAVOUR button

Switches the type of compressor between accurate VCA operation and natural OPTO

operation.

D HARMONICS button

Switches on/off the analog circuitry that emulates musical overtones.

Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK

Reference Manual

166

Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and

Premium Rack libraries

 GEQ/PEQ library

Use the “GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ

and PEQ units used in the CL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library.

Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall

items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen

bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.

200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the

remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.

To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the

GEQ EDIT window.

Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top

of the PEQ EDIT window.

NOTE

• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store

and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B.

• To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ

field.

 Effect library

Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the

effect library. Library items 1-27 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect types 1-27

respectively. The remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.

To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the

EFFECT EDIT window.

 Premium Rack library

You can use the Premium Rack library to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The library

contains 101 items (from #000 through #100). Item #000 is a preset. All library items other

than #000 can be freely read and written.

To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top

of the window for the corresponding type.

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

167

I/O devices and external head amps

This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to

the CL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices

that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network”

(page 251).

Using an I/O device

CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such

as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector.

I/O device patching

Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante

audio network.

I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page)

1 I/O device list

This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.

Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from

the console’s output ports to the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not

currently exist on the Dante audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at

the lower left of that device. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs

but share the same ID, a red “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the

device. If multiple devices share the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will

appear to the right, below the device.

2 DANTE SETUP button

Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings

for the audio network.

3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button

Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the

64 channels that will be input from the I/O device to the console.

4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button

Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where

you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console’s output ports to

I/O devices.

STEP

1. Connecting CL series consoles and I/O devices

2. In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button.

3. Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.

4. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH

page).

5. Press the AUTO SETUP button.

If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button.

6. Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).

7. Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window.

8. In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port.

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

168

DANTE INPUT PATCH window

Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen

(DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the

console.

1 LIBRARY button

Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library.

You can store ten sets of settings in the library.

2 AUTO SETUP button

The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the

console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are

registered in the I/O device list.

When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to

confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching.

Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen.

3 Port select buttons

Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window.

“Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number

(decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button.

The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel

Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.

If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate“---” and the lower row will

indicate nothing.

NOTE

• If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper

line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-” , and the channel

number (decimal).

• If a CL series console is mounted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “CL#X” (where

X is the ID number of the mounted CL unit).

• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will

be displayed in the lower row.

• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the

latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

PORT SELECT window

Displayed when you press the port select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or

OUTPUT PATCH window. When you change a patch, select the I/O port.

1 Category select list

Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.

2 Port select buttons

Select the input port.

3 CLOSE button

Completes the settings and closes the window.

1 2

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

169

OUTPUT PATCH window

Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set

the output patch.

1 Port select buttons

Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.

Remotely controlling an R series unit

This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that’s connected to the Dante

connector.

I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page)

1 Display switch buttons

Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold

down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.

For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this

button, refer to

1 on P.167, “I/O device list”.

2 ID/Model name display

This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.

If the WITH RECALL button is turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “w/RECALL”

is displayed. If the +48V MASTER switch for the mounted device is turned ON,“+48V

MASTER” is displayed.

3 DANTE SETUP button

Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings

for the audio network.

4 SYSTEM/SYNC indicators

Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Refer to the list (page 271) for

detailed information about messages.

STEP

1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O

DEVICE screen (I/O page).

2. Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted.

3. Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device.

4. To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.

5. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH

window will appear.

6. Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window.

7. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window.

8. Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted.

9. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.

Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167).

1 2

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

170

 HA display

This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA

window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.

If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not

light for external CL series consoles.)

5 Analog GAIN knob

Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be

edited.

6 +48V indicator

Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.

7 OVER indicator

Warns you when the input signal is clipping.

8 HPF indicator

Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port.

 INPUT display

This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN.

If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not

light for external CL series consoles.)

 OUTPUT display

This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH

window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.

If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not

light for external CL series consoles.)

 RMio64-D display

Displays the RMio64-D panel. You can press the buttons to change settings.

1 MADI SRC ON indicator

MADI SRC ON button

Switches the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) on and off.

2 MADI SRC WCLK IN indicator

MADI SRC WCLK IN button

Use this button to select whether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word

clock input from the MADI WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D

as a standard clock for SRC.

3 MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1kHz indicator

MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator

Automatically detect and indicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

Both indicators remain off if there is no valid MADI input signal.

4 MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs indicator

MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs indicator

MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs indicator

MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2Fs/4Fs button

Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For

example, if the MADI input signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT

RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is on and then select “4Fs”.

NOTE

When “2Fs” is selected, the unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of

the MADI input signal.

5421 3

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

171

5 MADI STATUS INPUT status

MADI STATUS OUTPUT status

Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/

number of channels).

6 WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator

WORD CLOCK MADI indicator

WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator

WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons

Used to select the word clock source.

7 WORD CLOCK Fs indicator

Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not

synchronized.

8 EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator

This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only

externally by remote control.

Refer to “Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner’s Manual for details about

parameters that can be operated by remote control.

9 OUTPUT PATCH button

Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output

port settings for RMio64-D.

 RSio64-D display

CARD NAME

This indicates the names of the cards installed in slots 1 to 4. If nothing is installed,

“----” will appear.

2 IN/OUT PORT

This indicates the number of input and output ports for the cards installed in slots 1 to

4. If no card is installed, “--” will appear.

WCLK IN

Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on

the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock

input.

MADI

Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no

valid word clock input.

DANTE Uses the word clock of the Dante network.

15243 B

0 A67 8 9

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

172

3 SLOT 1 - 4 LOCK indicators

This indicates the word clock status for slots 1 to 4. If the word clock is operating

normally, this indicator will be green.

4 SLOT 1 - 4 SRC indicators

Indicate the Sampling Rate Converter (SRC) status for slots 1 to 4.

NOTE

Use the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D to set the SRC clock sent to the Mini-YGDAI

card inserted in the slot.

5 SLOT 1 to 4 SRC buttons

Used to turn SRC on/off at both IN and OUT for each slot.

6 WORD CLOCK select button

Used to select the word clock source for the RSio64-D.

• WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator

• WORD CLOCK SLOT1 1/2 indicator

• WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator

Indicates the word clock source status for the RSio64-D.

*1 When flashing, Dante word clock

input/output is used.

*2 If you are using MY8-AEB, set the AERSVD switch for the card to RSVD.

*3 If you make changes to the frequency of the Dante word clock, use Dante Controller.

7 CURRENT PATTERN button

If you press this button, the currently selected routing pattern on the RSio64-D is

displayed. If you switch the routing pattern on the RSio64-D, it will be applied in 3

seconds.

Off There is no card in the slot. Or, an unsupported card is in the slot.

Green (On)

LOCK

Indicates that a clock synchronized with the clock source selected with the

[WORD CLOCK] select key is being input from the card. If an external device is

connected to the corresponding slot, input/output is occurring properly between

that device and the RSio64-D. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may

be displayed even if not synchronized.

Green

(Flashing)

SYNC

ERROR

A valid clock is being input from the card, but is not synchronized with the clock

source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key. If an external device is

connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between

that device and the RSio64-D. Turn SRC ON for correct input/output.

Red (On)

UNLOCK

A valid clock is not being input from the card. If an external device is connected to

the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device

and the RSio64-D.

Red

(Flashing)

WRONG

WORD

CLOCK

The frequency of the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key is

outside of the operating frequency range for the card inserted in the slot. Either

set the frequency of the clock source within the operating range for the card, or

turn [SRC] ON. For an analog card, if you turn [SRC] ON, the frequency is set to

the 48kHz built into the RSio64-D.

Off SRC is off.

Green (On)

SRC is on, and the clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the

RSio64-D is being input correctly.

Red (On)

SRC is on, but an appropriate clock is not being input. The clock selected with the

SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D is either not being input or is not

within the operating range. Either turn SRC off, or change the DIP switch settings.

WCLK IN

On when using the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK

IN connector on the rear panel of the RSio64-D. Flashes

if there is no

valid word clock input.

SLOT1 1/2

On when using the word clock for channels 1/2 of slot 1 for the RSio64-D.

Flashes

if there is no valid word clock input. When using MY8-AEB

, the

word clock for channels 7/8 is used.

DANTE

On when using the word clock for the Dante network

. (If there is no valid

Dante signal input, the internal Dante module will generate a clock.)

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

173

8 USER PATTERN button

Press this button to open the window for setting the audio routing user pattern in the

RSio64-D. Patch to the desired output ports of the slots and Dante.

NOTE

Patching from one slot to another is also available (including patching to the same slot). However,

you cannot patch from Dante to Dante.

9 OUTPUT PATCH button

Press this button to open the OUTPUT PATCH window, in which you can set the 64

Dante channels that will be output from the console to the RSio64-D.

0 POWER INT indicator

Indicates the status of the AC IN power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power switch is

off, no power is supplied to AC IN and the indicator remains off.

A POWER EXT indicator

Indicates the status of the EXT DC INPUT power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power

supply is on, this indicator will be on. This indicator is not affected by the status of the

power switch.

B Control status indicator

Indicates the control status of the device.

Third-party equipment’s HA control function

It is possible to control supported third-party equipment’s head amps (HA) from the console.

You can control HA by registering supported devices in the DANTE SETUP window.

NOTE

While in PREVIEW mode, changes made to HA parameters from the console are not applied to

the device.

You can turn “WITH RECALL” on and off in the REMOTE HA ASSIGN window.

You can store/recall scene libraries and save/load files.

You can register up to 8 devices, including R series units. You can also register a device that

has the same UNIT ID as a device that is already registered, including R series units. You can

adjust HA parameters in advance, even when a connection is not established with the device

to be controlled.

You can control the following parameters.

1 HA phantom power (+48V) on/off

2 HA gain

3 Head amp HPF on/off

Searching for device to be controlled

Connecting to device

Synchronizing with device

Device can be controlled

Found device to be controlled, but connection refused

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

174

NOTE

The indicator on the right side of the rack indicates the control status of the device.

You can perform the following operations from input channels patched to the target device:

• Store/recall input channel library

• Channel jobs (channel link, etc.)

• HA controls at user level (only when operating HA from an input channel)

• AG-DG LINK

NOTE

You cannot perform this operation on devices that do not support Gain Compensation.

I/O DEVICE HA window

Displayed when you press the rack in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted.

In this window, you can remotely control the head amp of the I/O device from the CL series

console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs.

1 +48V MASTER

Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s master phantom power. (Switching this on

or off is performed on the I/O device itself.)

2 +48V button

These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.

3 GAIN knob

Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob

to select it, and use the multifunction knobs. The level meter located at the immediate

right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.

4 GC button

Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal

level on the audio network.

5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button

These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O

device, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it,

you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.

6 Displayed port switch tabs

These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window.

7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button

Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.

8 GC indicator

Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation

function is turned on.

Searching for device to be controlled

Connecting to device

Synchronizing with device

Device can be controlled

Found device to be controlled, but connection

refused

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

175

 Remotely controlling from the input channels

To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the CL series console,

operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control.

Remotely controlling an amp

This section explains how to remotely control an AMP unit that’s connected to the Dante

connector.

I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page)

1 Display switch buttons

Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.

For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this

button, refer to

1 on P.167, “I/O device list”.

2 ID/Model name display

This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.

3 DANTE SETUP button

Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings

for the audio network.

STEP

1. Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.

2. Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page).

3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.

Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167).

1 2

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

176

Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit

This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that’s connected to the Dante

connector.

NOTE

The following two products are supported by CL series V4:

• Shure ULXD4Q

• Shure ULXD4D

For both of these products, use V1.6.6 or later for both the receiver and the microphone. SPLIT

mode cannot be used with Dante network mode. Use the CL series settings. Also note that

remote operation is not possible if the REDUNDANT connection is used and the SECONDARY

network is in operation.

I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page)

1 Display switch buttons

Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold

down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.

For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this

button, refer to

1 on P.167, “I/O device list.”

2 ID/Model name display

This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.

3 DANTE SETUP button

Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings

for the audio network.

 Shure ULXD4Q/ULXD4D display

NOTE

The number of channels varies according to model.

1 Channel name

Indicates the channel name that is set on the receiver. Only the first 4 characters are

shown.

2 Frequency

Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.

3 RX.GAIN knob

Displays the gain for the receiver. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be

edited.

4 OL indicator

Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point.

5 MUTE indicator

Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver.

STEP

1. Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.

2. Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page).

3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.

Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167).

1 2

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

177

6 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown

on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength

of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.

7 Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

8 Control status indicator

Indicates the control status of the device.

NOTE

When control on the receiver side is possible, the parameter values for the receiver are sent to

the console.

 WIRELESS DEVICE screen

This screen is displayed when you select the desired wireless device in the I/O DEVICE

screen (WIRELESS page). Here you can set the channel name and HA. You cannot set when

the device is offline. Note that when the device is online, the settings on the device are

applied.

1 Channel name button

Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the receiver

side. Up to 8 characters can be set.

2 Frequency

Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal.

NOTE

To change the frequency of the RF signal, change directly in the wireless device.

3 GAIN knob

Sets the HA gain for the receiver. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press the

knob to select it, and use the multifunction knobs. The level meter located at the

immediate right of the knob indicates the input level.

4 MUTE button

Mutes the audio signal.

5 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter

Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown

on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up.

6 Battery indicator

Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power.

NOTE

For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation

time, refer to the manual from Shure.

Searching for device to be controlled

Connecting to device

Synchronizing with device

Device can be controlled

Found device to be controlled, but connection refused

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

178

Using an external head amp

If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head

amp in the CL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters

of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V)

on/off status, gain, and HPF.

For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the Owner’s Manual for the I/O card.

Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR

To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64

EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit

to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA

REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection

enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console.

To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL

OUT A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a

D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the

CL series console via the MY16-ES64 card.

Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units

simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second

AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six

AD8HR units. In this case, to input AD8HR’s audio signals into the CL series console, install

two MY16-EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel

signals. Then, connect each two of the third and subsequent AD8HRs to each AES/EBU

connector using a D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable.

CL5

AD8HR 1

NAI48-ES

AD8HR 2

AD8HR 3

MY16-EXMY16-EX MY16- ES64

DIGITAL OUT

A connector

DIGITAL OUT

A connector

DIGITAL

OUT A

connector

HA REMOTE connector

HA REMOTE 1 connector

HA REMOTE 2 connector

Up to six units

Audio signal

Remote signal

HA REMOTE 2 connector

HA REMOTE 1 connector

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

179

Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES

To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64

EtherSound card in Slot 1 of the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the

SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series

console.

Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX

expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units

simultaneously.

NOTE

Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the CL series console.

 Daisy chain network

 Ring connection

NOTE

Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/

MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.

SB168-ES

MY16-

ES64

MY16-

CL5

OUT

Audio signal

Remote signal

OUT

SB168-ES

CL5

MY16-

ES64

MY16-

Audio signal

Remote signal

OUT

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

180

Remotely controlling an external head amp

An external head amp ( “external HA” ) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be

remotely controlled from the CL series console. For details on how to connect a CL series

console with an external head amp, refer to “Using an external head amp” (page 178) and the

external head amp’s operating manual.

VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page)

1 EXTERNAL HA field

This displays the state of the connected external HA.

2 ID/Model name/+48V master

This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is

automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 6. This field also

enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power.

3 Virtual racks

These are up to six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be

mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN

setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the

EXTERNAL HA window for that rack.

4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button

Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input

port for the external head amp mounted in the rack.

NOTE

If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an

appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected

correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.

STEP

1. Connect the CL series console to an external HA.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.

3. Press the EXTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK screen.

4. Press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the

VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page).

5. Use the PORT SELECT buttons in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select

the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected.

6. Press the CLOSE button to close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window.

7. In the VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the

external HA you want to control is mounted.

8. Remotely control the external head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window.

VIRTUAL RACK screen

(EXTERNAL HA page)

2 3 4

5 6

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

181

5 VIEW switch buttons

Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that’s

appropriate for the connected device.

6 COMM PORT switch buttons

Specify whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select

“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.

EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window

Select the input port for the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the

EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).

1 PORT SELECT buttons

Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.

EXTERNAL HA window

Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in

the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).

1 +48V MASTER

If an external HA is connected, the master phantom power on/off status is shown here.

(The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.)

2 +48V button

These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.

3 GAIN knob

These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you

can make adjustments to gain using multifunction knobs 1-8. The level meter located

at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.

4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button

These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and

adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able

to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.

5 Rack select tabs

These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window.

NOTE

• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used.

These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not

connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.

• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable

to set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions.

I/O devices and external head amps

Reference Manual

182

 Remotely controlling an external HA from the input channels on a CL

series console

You will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or

on the CL console. For details on the GAIN/PATCH window, refer to “HA (head amp) settings”

(page 31).

STEP

1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen

that includes the channel for the head amp that you want to control.

2. Press the HA/PHASE field of the channel whose external HA you want to adjust.

3. Press the PATCH button in the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port

assigned to the external HA.

4. Remotely control the external head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window.

OVERVIEW

screen

GAIN/PATCH window

MIDI

Reference Manual

183

MIDI

This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series

console to control the CL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the

CL console as you operate the unit.

The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to

transmit and receive MIDI messages.

MIDI functionality on the CL series console

The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.

 Program Change transmission and reception

When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a

Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an

external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program

Change message is received from an external device.

 Control Change transmission and reception

When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console,

the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device.

Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an

external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or

other external device, and play them back later.

 Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception

When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user

settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be

transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter

Changes are received from an external device.

Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer

or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and

executed by another CL console.

NOTE

As the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear

panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described

in this section will be available on the port you select.

Basic MIDI settings

You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the

MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.

NOTE

• For details on Program Change operations, refer to the following section “Using program changes

to recall scenes and library items” (page 186).

• For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “Using control changes to control

parameters” (page 188).

CL5

MIDI OUTMIDI IN MIDI OUTMIDI IN

External device

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the MIDI/GPI button in the center of the SETUP screen.

3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.

4. Press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI

SETUP page.

5. In the MIDI SETUP window for port selection, select the port type and port number

that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.

6. Press the channel select button in the MIDI SETUP page.

7. In the MIDI SETUP window for channel selection, select the channel that will

transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.

8. In the MIDI SETUP page, turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI

message.

SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen

(MIDI SETUP page)

MIDI

Reference Manual

184

MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)

You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose

the port that will be used.

1 PORT/CH field

Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive

MIDI messages.

• Tx PORT/Tx CH..................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can

respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit

MIDI messages.

• Rx PORT/Rx CH.................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can

respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive

MIDI messages.

NOTE

When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used

as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).

2 PROGRAM CHANGE field

Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or

off.

• Tx ........................................... Switches program change transmission on/off.

• Rx........................................... Switches program change reception on/off.

• ECHO..................................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change

messages. (If this function is on, Program Change

messages received from an external device will be

retransmitted without modification.)

3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field

Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.

• SINGLE.............. If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and

received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).

• MULTI ................ If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on

multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).

• OMNI.................. If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be

received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception and

Single mode transmission are disabled.

• BANK................. If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and

received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group

of Program Change messages to be used.)

4 CONTROL CHANGE field

Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or

off.

• Tx....................... Switches control change transmission on/off.

• Rx ...................... Switches control change reception on/off.

• ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages. (If this

function is on, Control Change messages received from an external

device will be retransmitted without modification.)

5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field

This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.

• NRPN button..... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/

received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).

• TABLE button ... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/

received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel

(TABLE mode).

6 PARAMETER CHANGE field

Enables you to turn transmission/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or

off. (These are special messages used to control the parameter of the CL console.)

• Tx....................... Switches parameter change transmission on/off.

• Rx ...................... Switches parameter change reception on/off.

• ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages. (If

this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an

external device will be retransmitted without modification.)

7 OTHER COMMAND field

Switches on or off echo output of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other

MIDI messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without

modification.)

MIDI

Reference Manual

185

MIDI SETUP window (for port selection)

Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This

window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx)

in the PORT/CH field.

1 TERMINAL field

Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.

You can choose from the following items.

2 PORT NO. field

If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1-8 in this field. (The

number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The

currently-available card is valid only for port 1.

3 OK button

Confirms the settings and closes the window.

MIDI SETUP window (for channel selection)

This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission

and reception. This window appears when you press the channel select button in the PORT/

CH field.

1 CH field

Enables you to select CH1-CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI

messages.

2 OK button

Confirms the settings and closes the window.

NONE No port will be used.

MIDI MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel

SLOT1

A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on

the rear panel

1 2

MIDI

Reference Manual

186

Using program changes to recall scenes and library

items

The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to

each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a

Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external

device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change

message is received from an external device.

NOTE

Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than

for individual scenes.

MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page)

In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted

and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned

to each program number.

1 PROGRAM CHANGE field

Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked

with the PROGRAM CHANGE section of the MIDI SETUP page.

• Tx..................If this is on, the corresponding Program Change messages will be

transmitted when events on the list are executed.

• Rx .................If this is on, the corresponding events will be executed when Program

Change messages are received.

• ECHO............If this button is on, Program Change messages received from an

external device will be retransmitted without change.

2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field

Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked

with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page.

• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):

Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/

receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program

Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program

number in the list will be executed.

When you execute a specific event on a CL series console, the Program Change of the

corresponding program number will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the

list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on multiple MIDI

channels/multiple program numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on

each MIDI channel will be transmitted.)

STEP

1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.

2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels

that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.

3. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.

4. In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on

or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output.

5. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event

in the list and select an event type and the recall target.

MIDI/GPI screen

(PROGRAM CHANGE page)

MIDI

Reference Manual

187

• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):

Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the

MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx

channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding

channel in the list will be executed.

When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of

the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the

list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel,

the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)

• When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode:

Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI

channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of

the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the

operation for Program Change transmission.

• When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode

The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select

(Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and

received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single

MIDI channel.

When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on

the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the

list will be executed.

When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program

Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will

be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the

list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)

NOTE

• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.

• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received,

the last-selected bank number will be used.

• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,

Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.

3 List

Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI

Program Change number. The list shows the following items.

• CH/BANK...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1-16) on

which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program

Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the

BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical

value in this column will correspond to the bank number (1-128).

• NO..........................Indicates the program number 1-128.

• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT

.........................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each

channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual

event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE

window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.

4 Scroll knob

Press this knob to scroll the list upward or downward using the multifunction knob.

5 CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to erase all events from the list.

6 INITIALIZE ALL button

Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.

MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window

You can specify the event assigned to each program number. Display this window by pressing

the list in the PROGRAM CHANGE page in the MIDI/GPI screen.

1 TYPE field

Enables you to select the type of event.

The following table lists the events you can select.

NO ASSIGN No assignment

SCENE Scene memory recall operations

EFFECT Effect library recall operations

PREMIUM RACK Recall operations for the corresponding Premium Rack library

1 2 3

MIDI

Reference Manual

188

2 DESTINATION field

Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall. If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is

selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will

indicate - - -, and is not used.

3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field

Enables you to choose the library that you want to recall.

If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM

RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown.

4 OK button

Confirms the settings and closes the window.

Using control changes to control parameters

You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob

operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be

used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and

play back this data later.

You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.

 Using Control Changes

This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1-31, 33-95, 102-119). You can

freely assign an event to each control number.

 Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)

This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.

NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte)

and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted

Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of

that parameter.

The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be

changed.

NOTE

For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the data list at the end of this

manual.

NOTE

Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for

individual scenes.

STEP

1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.

2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels

that will be used to transmit/receive control changes.

3. Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.

4. Switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/

reception mode, and set echo output.

5. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the desired event

in the list and select an event type and the recall target.

MIDI/GPI screen

(CONTROL CHANGE page)

MIDI

Reference Manual

189

MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page)

You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event

(fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.

1 CONTROL CHANGE field

Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify

whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL

CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.

• Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.

• Rx button............................... Switches control change reception on/off.

• ECHO button......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be

echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.

2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field

This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This

setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.

• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):

Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a

single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the

list will be ignored.

• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):

Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a

single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the

list.

NOTE

The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/

CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (page 184).

3 List

Shows the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to

each control number.

• NO..........................This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers 1-

31, 33-95, and 102-119.

• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT

.........................Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to

each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI

CONTROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change

the control number assignment.

4 CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.

5 INITIALIZE ALL button

Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.

6 Scroll knob

Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.

MIDI

Reference Manual

190

MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window

Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window,

you can specify the event assigned to each control number.

1 MODE field

Enables you to select the type of event.

2 PARAMETER 1/2 field

In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.

3 OK button

Confirms the settings and closes the window.

NOTE

• The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will

indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.

• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this

window are ignored.

• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the data list at the end

of this manual.

Using parameter changes to control parameters

On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called

“Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off

operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or

NRPN messages.

For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to the data

list at the end of this manual.

NOTE

• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.

The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used

as the device number.

• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does

not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored.

• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.

Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other

problems.

STEP

1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.

2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels

(device number) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes.

3. Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI

SETUP page to turn on parameter change transmission/reception.

Recorder

Reference Manual

191

Recorder

This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.

About the USB memory recorder

The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record

internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash

drive.

As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-

3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-

4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.

By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be

recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash

drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.

 Signal flow for the USB memory recorder

* CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48

NOTE

• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.

• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.

Assigning channels to the input/output of the

recorder

Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB

memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT

channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input

channel.

NOTE

• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in

monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to

the same channel.

• You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.

• In steps 4 and 8, if you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box

will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

MIX1-24

MATRIX1-8

STEREO L/R

MONO

INPUT1-72*

DIRECT OUT

RECORDER

INPUT

PLAYBACK

OUT

INPUT1-72*

ST IN 1L1R-8L8R

USB

memory

recorder

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.

2. Press the USB tab in the RECORDER screen.

3. Press the RECORDER INPUT L or R button.

4. Use the category list and the port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select

the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input.

5. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.

6. Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.

7. Press the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button.

8. Use the category list and the channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to

select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.

9. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.

10. Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.

RECORDER screen

Recorder

Reference Manual

192

RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)

In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder,

and perform recording and playback operations.

1 RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons

Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals

patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels.

2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob

Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.

3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button

When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder.

NOTE

You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.

The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.

4 Meters

Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.

5 PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons

Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals

patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback.

6 PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob

Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder.

7 PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button

Press this button to monitor the signal output from the recorder.

NOTE

You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.

The cue monitoring does not support CUE B.

8 Meters

Indicate the level of the signals output to the recorder.

CH SELECT window

Display this window by pressing the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK

OUTPUT L or R button.

1 Category List

Enables you to select the type of channel.

2 Channel select button

Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs and

outputs. The channels that can be patched at input or output are different.

Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s inputs

• MIX 1-24................................. MIX channels 1-24

• MTRX 1-8 ............................... MATRIX channels 1-8

• ST L/R.................................... STEREO channel L/R

• ST L+C................................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel

• ST R+C .................................. STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel

• MONO.................................... MONO channel

• CH1-72................................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1-72

Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s outputs

• CH1-72................................... INPUT channels 1-72

• STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R ........ ST IN channels 1-8L/R

1 2 3 4 8765

Recorder

Reference Manual

193

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

Recording audio to a USB flash drive

You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB

flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.

NOTE

• The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive.

• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).

• The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder.

If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the

recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports

from the corresponding output channel.

• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE

folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS

folder.

• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.

RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)

 TRANSPORT field

This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.

1 Current song

Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following

indicators will appear during playback or recording.

2 Elapsed time display

Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the

elapsed recording time during recording.

3 Remaining time display

Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback, and the

available recording time during recording.

4 Current song format

Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back).

STEP

1. Refer to “Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder” (page 191) to

assign channels to the input/output of the recorder.

2. Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.

3. To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are

patched to the input of the recorder.

4. Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select

the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.

5. Press the REC () button located at the bottom of the screen.

6. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button in the lower part of the

screen.

7. To stop recording, press the STOP () button.

8. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.

8-1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the recording.

8-2. To stop playback, press the STOP () button.

3 4A0987 5 6

The unit is currently playing back.

The unit is currently recording.

Recorder

Reference Manual

194

5 REC RATE button

Switches the recording rate.

You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio

quality, but will increase the size of the data.

NOTE

The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be

selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.

6 Display Switch Button

Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT

fields at the bottom of the song list.

7 REW button

Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If

the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of

the preceding song that has been selected for playback.

If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this

button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.

If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which

the button was released.

8 STOP button

The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.

9 PLAY button

Changes the recorder mode as follows.

Stop mode

Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current

song.

Playback modePlayback-pause mode

Playback pause mode

Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.

Recording standby mode

Recording mode

Recording mode

Recording-pause mode

Recording-pause mode

Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.

0 FF button

Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY

check symbol.

The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE() button will light.

A REC button

Places the recorder in recording standby mode.

NOTE

You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215).

 Directory structure of a USB flash drive

When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder

within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.

The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the

currently-selected folder below that level.

Song

(audio file)

Songs folder

YPE folder

Root directory

Recorder

Reference Manual

195

Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive

You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files

that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from

your computer to the USB flash drive.

The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA

(Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz

and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.

NOTE

• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder,

or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of

unsupported formats will not be recognized.

• The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.

If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.

• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories

can be managed.

NOTE

• Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling

rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically

convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.

• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.

RECORDER screen

 Title list

This list enables you to perform operations related to the songs and directories that are saved

on the USB flash drive.

1 Selected song

The currently selected song will appear in a blue frame.

2 Status indicator

Displays a symbol to indicate whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused.

: Playing, : Paused

3 Track number

Indicates the file number in the title list.

STEP

1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.

3. You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon

in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.

4. Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file.

5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode.

6. If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song

you want to play.

7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the song.

8. To stop playback, press the STOP () button.

6 7 8 9

3 5 4 1

Recorder

Reference Manual

196

4 Sub-directory

Indicates each song’s track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a

sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected).

• Upper level............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than

the current one.

• Sub-directory................Press this to move to that sub-directory.

NOTE

• If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination.

• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and

folders located below the SONGS folder.

5 PLAY check symbol

Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.

6 SELECT knob

Use the multifunction knob to select a song.

7 NOW PLAYING button

Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list.

8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons

Change the order of the selected song in the list.

9 Display switch buttons

Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display.

0 SAVE LIST button

Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist.

A RELOAD button

Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current

playlist you are editing back to the previous state.

 PLAY MODE field

Sets the playback method of the currently selected song.

B SINGLE button

If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete.

If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the

current song is complete.

C REPEAT button

If this button is on, after playback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play

the first song on the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no

subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol).

If this button is off, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete

(unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One

of the following playback methods is selected according to the on/off settings of the

SINGLE button and the REPEAT button.

Editing the title list

You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist

names.

NOTE

• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be

converted into ? for display.

• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.

SINGLE

button

REPEAT

button

Mode

On On

The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop

playback.

On Off The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.

Off On

Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,

starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are

played again from the first song in the title list. The currently-

selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.

Off Off

Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order,

starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in

the title list is played, playback stops.

STEP

1. Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.

3. Press the No. button and the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view

a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.

4. If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT

button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.

5. Edit the title or artist name, and press the OK button.

6. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,

and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.

7. When editing is complete, press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes.

Recorder

Reference Manual

197

RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)

1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button

Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list.

2 ARTIST EDIT button

Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.

NOTE

A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the

title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, scroll horizontally.

3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button

Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title.

4 ARTIST SORT button

Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name.

5 SAVE LIST button

Saves the order of the list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on the USB flash

drive.

6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button

Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/

FILE NAME field.

Recording or playing back using a computer DAW

If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes

a CL console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software.

DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and

an audio network (that includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be

able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were

made a day earlier for a virtual sound check.

This section explains the steps required when adding DAW software to an audio network.

Required devices and software

• CL series console and I/O devices

• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit

Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software

• A GbE-compatible network switch

•CAT5e cable

• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software

• Dante Controller control software

NOTE

• You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed

to acquire the license ID is included in the CL unit package.

• The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at

the following website:

http://proaudio.yamaha.co.jp

3 4

Recorder

Reference Manual

198

Word clock settings

In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the

network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device

will automatically take over as the clock master.

To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD

CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window.

Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard

Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and

Dante Controller in the computer that you

want to use for audio recording.

Make the following settings before turning

DVS on.

• Connect the GbE-compatible network port

of the computer to a GbE-compatible

network switch.

• Configure the computer to obtain an IP

address automatically

(this is the default setting).

• Set the audio format.

(Example: 48kHz, 24 bit)

• Set the Dante latency. (Use a high setting to

ensure stability when using multiple

channels.)

• In the Advanced settings, select the number

of channels to be used for recording and

playback (the default is 8 x 8).

NOTE

Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User’s Guide for more information on ASIO settings

(Windows).

Dante Accelerator settings

After mounting a Dante Accelerator card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver

and make the following settings. For information about how to install the driver, refer to the

Installation Guide included with the driver.

• Use a network cable to connect the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante

network, and then connect the computer’s network port to the same network.

• Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).

NOTE

For more information about selecting a computer for remote control from a CL series console,

refer to “Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator” in “When setup method selection button =

SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS” (page 202).

V3.7 and earlier

V3.7

Recorder

Reference Manual

199

Setting up Dante Controller

Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the

computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).

You must make the following settings for Dante Controller.

• For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante

Accelerator card.

• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the

computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console.

(page 168).

The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1-16 of an I/O

device are patched to DVS.

In this case, you’ll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console

depending on whether you’re performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you’ve

saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (page 168),

you’ll be able to switch between them conveniently.

NOTE

Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings

of the Dante Controller.

Setting up DAW software

You must make driver settings in your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your

DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante”

for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output.

Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For

more information, refer to the DAW software manual.

 Setting up Nuendo Live

If you install the “Yamaha Console Extension” software for linking Nuendo Live to a console,

and then start up Nuendo Live and create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number

of channels specified in DVS will be created automatically, and the channel names and colors

from the CL series console will automatically be assigned as each track name.

Audio recording and playback

After you have made driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back

audio.

For multi-track recording, set the input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports

that receive audio signals from the I/O devices.

For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the

CL console. To do so, use Dante Controller to patch the signals so that the signals will be

output from the DAW software to DANTE 1-64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you

later if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for

routing audio signals from the I/O devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW

software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante

Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the I/

O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.

Recorder

Reference Manual

200

Using the CL console with Nuendo Live

The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live

DAW software.

The “Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live

can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series

console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.

Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console.

Preparing the project

Refer to “Recording or playing back using a computer DAW” (page 197) to make the following

settings.

• Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard

• Setting up Dante Controller

• Setting up Nuendo Live

Recording into a project

RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)

1 Nuendo meter display field

This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.

2 PEAK CLEAR button

Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.

3 Marker list field

Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.

The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction

knobs.

When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to edit the marker

information will appear.

4 Nuendo Live SETUP button

Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with

Nuendo Live. (page 201).

5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button

Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH window (page 168).

6 Location information display

This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can

press the button at the right to switch the time display format.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.

2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen.

3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.

4. When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP

button.

RECORDER screen

(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)

HEDCBA0987

Recorder

Reference Manual

201

 Transport field

Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live.

7 GO TO PROJECT START button

Returns the location to the start of the project.

8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button

Returns the location to the previous marker.

9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button

Advances the location to the next marker.

0 GO TO PROJECT END button

Advances the location to the end of the project.

A CYCLE button

Turns repeat on/off for the project.

B STOP button

Stops playback/recording of the project.

C PLAY button

Starts playback of the project.

D RECORD button

Starts/stops recording of the project.

E EASY RECORDING button

Immediately starts recording on all tracks.

When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will

be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the

panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively.

(Default setting: 10 seconds)

F ADD MARKER button

Adds a marker to the project at the current location.

G RECALL LINK button

Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is

turned on, the button will be lit.

H Record lock button

Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally

stopped during recording.

NOTE

Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys (page 215).

I DVS information display

Shows the device label of the selected DVS.

Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator

Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For

details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” (page 251).

NOTE

• You can specify either DVS or Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window.

• However, do not select the same DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple CL series consoles.

NUENDO LIVE SETUP window

In this window, specify the device that the console will use for communication when working

with Nuendo Live.

STEP

1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.

2. In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP screen, press the setting method select button.

3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.

4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.

Recorder

Reference Manual

202

1 Setup method select buttons

Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator.

• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned

• DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list

• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of

the computer

 When setup method selection button = DVS

To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to

display the DEVICE LIST field.

1 DEVICE LIST

Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.

From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.

2 DEVICE LIST select knob

Operate the multifunction knob to choose the DVS that you want to select.

 When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS

When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP

ADDRESS field. Since the IP address of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used

by Yamaha Console Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.

1 IP ADDRESS knobs

Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address.

NOTE

• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live.

• Set the address of that computer in the range of 169.254.0.0 - 169.254.255.255, and set the

subnet mask as 255.255.0.0.

• For the computer in which Dante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as

well as the Ethernet port of the computer must both be connected to the same network.

Refer to the illustration below.

Computer

(Primary)

(Secondary)

Ethernet

Dante Accelerator

Dante

Recorder

Reference Manual

203

NOTE

• Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking.

Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware

supports redundant networking.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Playing a multi-track project

NOTE

If you save the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the CL series console

can be switched conveniently (page 168).

STEP

1. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page).

2. In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to

which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live.

3. In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you’re using with

Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to.

4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and

assign a DVS port to it in the same way.

5. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the

window.

6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close

it.

7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.

8. Operate the channels so that sound is output.

9. To stop playback, press the STOP button.

RECORDER screen

(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)

DANTE INPUT PATCH window

PORT SELECT window

Setup

Reference Manual

204

Setup

About the SETUP screen

The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console.

To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The

screen contains the following items.

 CURRENT USER field

This field enables you to make various user-related settings.

1 USER SETUP button

Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various

settings for each user.

2 CURRENT USER button

Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users.

3 COMMENT EDIT button

Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter

comments that will be displayed in the comment area.

4 PASSWORD CHANGE button

Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change

the password.

5 SAVE KEY button

Press this button to open the SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the

user authentication key (page 211).

 STORAGE field

This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.

6 CREATE USER KEY button

Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new

user authentication key.

7 SAVE/LOAD button

Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user

authentication keys and console files.

 SYSTEM SETUP field

This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL series console.

8 +48V MASTER button

Switches the console’s master +48V master phantom power on or off. When this button

is off, +48V phantom power for all the head amps turns off.

NOTE

If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel

is on.

9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button

Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window, in which you can

make word clock settings and various settings for each slot.

0 CASCADE button

Press this button to open the CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings

for cascade connections.

A OUTPUT PORT button

Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output

port settings.

B MIDI/GPI button

Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPI-

related settings.

C DANTE SETUP button

Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make

various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality

setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; DANTE device ID and device type settings for

devices controlled via the I/O RACK screen).

1 6 72543

I J K

Setup

Reference Manual

205

 BUS SETUP field

This field enables you to make bus-related settings.

D BUS SETUP button

Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/

MATRIX bus-related settings.

E SURROUND SETUP button

Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch

the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus

settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch

to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6.

Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to

open the CONFIRMATION dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround

mode.

NOTE

• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6

change to MONO x2.

• When you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6

remain as MONO x2.

• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are

turned off.

For Stereo mode

For Surround mode

Setup

Reference Manual

206

If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below.

 DATE/TIME button

Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.

 NETWORK button

Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address.

 Indicator field

This field displays various information about the console.

F BATTERY indicator

Indicates the status of the internal battery.

NOTE

The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact

your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual

(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.

G POWER SUPPLY indicator

Indicates the currently-running power supply.

• INT .........................Internal

• EXT ........................PW800

H Version indicator

Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and Dante module.

 CONSOLE LOCK button

This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set,

pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to

execute Console Lock.

If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock

immediately.

 CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field

This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.

I BANK A/BANK B buttons

Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can

save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.

J CONTRAST NAME knob

Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.

K BRIGHTNESS NAME knob

Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.

BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob

Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.

BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob

Adjusts the brightness of the display.

BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob

Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.

BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob

Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.

User settings

User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or

to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user.

Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or

together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in

the following situations.

• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.

• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be

limited.

• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc.

can be locked to prevent unintended operations.

• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.

Setup

Reference Manual

207

User types and user authentication keys

There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in

as a user.

• Administrator.... The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality.

Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the

console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for

other users.

•

Guest

...... A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator.

Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console.

• User ........A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the

Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as

user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal

memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name.

A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user

authentication keys with a specified user level.

When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the

following information.

• Password (except for Guest)

• User Level settings (except for Administrator)

•Preferences

• USER DEFINED keys

• USER DEFINED knobs

• Assignable encoders

• Custom fader bank

• MASTER fader

Privileges for each user are as follows.

Setting the Administrator password

With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log

in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the

operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password.

NOTE

• The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the

Administrator password will be set.

• For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual.

Creating a user authentication key

You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s

internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power

User. The user level can be specified when the authentication key is created, but the USER

DEFINED key settings and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is

currently logged-in.

NOTE

• You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory.

• The file name of the user authentication key will be specified as the current user name, and its

location will be specified as the root directory.

Logged-in user

Editing user setup

data, such as

USER DEFINED

keys and

Preferences

Editing User

Level settings

Password

setting

Editing

commen

User authentication key

Create

new

Overwrite-save

Administrator

Available

(Can edit the

settings for

Administrator

and for Guest.)

Available

(Cannot edit the

user level, since

the administrator

can always

perform all

operations. Can

edit the settings

for Guest.)

Available - Available -

User

Power user Available Available Available Available Available Available

Normal user

(User without

Power User

privileges)

Available

N/A

(Viewing only)

Available Available -

Available

(Excluding User

Level settings)

Guest Available

N/A

(Viewing only)

- Available - -

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.

3. In the keyboard window, enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then

enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and

finally press the OK button.

SETUP screen Keyboard window

Setup

Reference Manual

208

CREATE USER KEY window

1 USER NAME

Displays the user name. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can

enter a user name of up to eight characters.

2 COMMENT

Displays a comment about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in

which you can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.

3 PASSWORD

Enables you to specify a password. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which

you can enter a password of up to eight characters.

4 POWER USER

Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.

5 ACCESS PERMISSION

These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on

each item, refer to page 211.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

STEP

1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive

to the USB connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button.

4. In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment,

password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.

5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory,

press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY

window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive,

press the PATCH button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.

6. Press the CREATE TO button.

7. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.

SETUP screen CREATE USER KEY window

CREATE KEY window

2 3 4

Setup

Reference Manual

209

Logging-in

To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.

User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log

in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the

USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user

authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you

remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. If you use a user authentication key on a USB

flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after

logging-in.

NOTE

If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state

in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter

the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.

 Logging-in as Administrator

NOTE

• If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press

the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to

enter the password.

• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom

of the screen.

 Logging-in as Guest

 Logging-in as a User

To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB

flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key

created on a different CL series console.

With a user authentication key stored in the console

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.

3. In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button.

4. Enter the password and press the OK button.

SETUP screen LOGIN window

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.

3. In the LOGIN window, press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.

3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user

authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button.

4. Enter the password and press the OK button.

SETUP screen LOGIN window

Setup

Reference Manual

210

NOTE

• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN

button.

• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom

of the screen.

With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive

NOTE

• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD

button.

• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom

of the screen.

• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console,

a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series

console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not

appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will

appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user

authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to

“Editing a user authentication key” (page 211).

• For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from a USB flash

drive” (page 233).

Changing the password

Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account

does not have a password.

NOTE

After you change the password, if you log out from the console without saving the user

authentication key, the changed password will be discarded.

STEP

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.

4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU

FILE) button.

5. In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want

to log in.

6. Press the LOAD button.

7. Enter the password and press the OK button.

SETUP screen LOGIN window

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.

3. In the keyboard window, enter the current password and press the OK button.

4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same

password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK

button.

5. Refer to “Editing a user authentication key” (page 211) to overwrite the user

authentication key.

Setup

Reference Manual

211

Editing a user authentication key

If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your USER DEFINED keys, preference settings,

comments and password, and save them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged-

in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.

NOTE

• If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.

• If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before

removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button,

load the user authentication key again.

Changing the user level

You can view or change the user level.

• Administrator................The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can

change the user level setting of the Guest account.

• Guest.............................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest

account. It cannot be changed.

• Normal user ..................A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her

User account. It cannot be changed.

• Power User ...................A power user can view and change his or her User account.

STEP

1. Log-in as a user, and edit the USER DEFINED keys (page 215) and Preference settings

(page 213).

2. Close the USER SETUP window.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button.

4. In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the

SAVE TO button.

5. If you selected the same location as the current user authentication key, press the

OK button in the dialog box that asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite that

user authentication key.

SETUP screen SAVE KEY window

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the

Administrator, press the FOR GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest

page.)

4. Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.

5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP

button in the Function Access Area.

SETUP screen USER SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

212

USER SETUP window (USER LEVEL page)

1 CH OPERATION

Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input

channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currently-

selected channel. Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the

CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the

Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings.

The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.

• INPUT channel................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]

• MIX/MATRIX channel......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]

• STEREO/MONO channel

......................... ............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]

• DCA group ......................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]

• HA ....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that

channel.

• PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters

for that channel (excluding the fader, [ON] key, and send

level).

• FADER/ON.......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, [ON] key, and

send level.

• WITH SEND........................ Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters.

(From MIX, From MATRIX)

• DCA MASTER .................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader,

ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.

• DCA GROUP ASSIGN........ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.

• SET BY SEL ....................... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of

a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned

operating restrictions for that channel.

2 CURRENT SCENE

Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.

• INPUT PATCH/NAME ......... Restricts operations for input channel patching and

names.

• OUTPUT PATCH/NAME ..... Restricts operations for output channel patching and

names.

• BUS SETUP ....................... Restricts operations for bus setup.

• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK

..................... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open

the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set

this restriction.

However, there will be no restriction on operating the

MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and

modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button

displayed for the FREEZE effect.

• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MASTER

..................... Operations for mute group assignment and mute group

master will be restricted.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

3 SCENE LIST

Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.

• STORE/SORT operations

• RECALL operations

4 LIBRARY LIST

Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.

• STORE/CLEAR operations

• RECALL operations

Setup

Reference Manual

213

5 FILE LOAD

Specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB flash drives. The user

authentication key contains the user level, USER DEFINED keys, and Preference settings.

Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings

of the Administrator and the Guest.

• USER SETUP (USER DEFINED keys and Preferences settings)

• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP

• CURRENT SCENE

• SCENE LIST

• LIBRARY LIST

6 MONITOR SETUP

Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.

•OSCILLATOR

• TALKBACK

•SOLO

7 SYSTEM SETUP

Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.

• MIXER SETUP

• OUTPUT PORT

• MIDI/GPI

• DANTE SETUP

NOTE

• The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below.

• Changing the CONSOLE ID

• Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting

• Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE CONTROLLER)

• Changing BIT DEPTH

• Changing LATENCY

• Changing DEVICE MOUNT

• Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN

• Changing the Dante Input Patch

• Changing the Dante Output Patch

• Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name)

• If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the

bottom of the screen.

• With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions).

8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button

Permits/clears all items.

Preferences

Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment,

such as how windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These

settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the

Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.

NOTE

If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account.

USER SETUP window (PREFERENCE page)

1 STORE/RECALL field

Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the PREFERENCE tab.

4. Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.

5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP

button in the Function Access Area.

Setup

Reference Manual

214

• STORE CONFIRMATION

• RECALL CONFIRMATION

If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a

Store or Recall operation respectively.

2 PATCH field

Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.

• PATCH CONFIRMATION

If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch

or output patch.

• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION

If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or

output patch item that is already patched to a port.

3 LOCALE SETUP field

Enables you to select the language used in Help files. Select “EN” to display Help files in

English.

4 ERROR MESSAGE field

Enables you to specify whether certain error messages should be displayed.

• DIGITAL I/O ERROR

If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs.

• MIDI I/O ERROR

If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI I/O error occurs.

5 PANEL OPERATION field

Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.

• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT

Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the

[ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input

channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).

•[CUE][SEL] LINK

Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK

button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.

•[FADER BANK][SEL] LINK

Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set

this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and

CUSTOM (Custom fader bank).

If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in

that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.

• IDENTIFY I/O RACK PORT BY [SEL]

Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port

connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.

If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator

to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by

the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings.

• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED

Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while

the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear.

If the ON button is lit, a window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.

NOTE

If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a window (8ch) will open.

• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION

Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section on the panel. When ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust

analog gain on the head amp. When DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital

gain on the console.

•SCENE UP/DOWN

Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the

SCENE windows.

When the SCENE +1/-1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or

decrement the scene number.

When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list

upward or downward.

• LIST ORDER

Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.

When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When

the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.

•NAME DISPLAY

Specifies the content of the name display in the Channel Strip section.

When the NAME ONLY button is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear.

Select GR METER to display the GR meter and fader level value.

Select ENCODER INFO to display the information of a function that has been assigned

to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the channel fader strip. This option is the same as

the FULL FUNCTION option in CL version 1.7 or earlier.

NOTE

• You can now view the gain reduction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information,

on the channel name display.

• In addition, if a channel is off during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be

highlighted.

• The GR meters function enables you to easily view the movement of the gain reduction.

Setup

Reference Manual

215

USER DEFINED keys

This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the

USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the

defined function.

If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you

are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for

the Guest account.

NOTE

For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be

assigned to USER DEFINED keys” (page 217).

NOTE

• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest

account.

• The 16 buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16]

on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the

right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “---” is

shown.

• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL

series.

For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does

not exist on that model.

• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the

key is operated.

Using the Alternate function

If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you

will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.

The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key

to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).

The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.

• UNLATCH..............Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and

holding down the USER DEFINED key.

• LATCH ...................Each press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode

on or off. You do not need to hold down the key.

NOTE

• If you select LATCH for the Alternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when

you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW

screen, or when you open a window.

• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.

GR meter indicator

Highlighted display

- The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER

mode.

- The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and

that DCA [ON] key is off.

- The channel is assigned to a mute group, and

that mute group master is on.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.

4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to

assign a function.

5. In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function

you want to assign.

6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move

the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.

7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.

8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[16]

key on the panel.

USER SETUP screen

(USER DEFINED KEYS page)

USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

216

In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.

• [GAIN] knob

Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for

HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this

knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.

• [MIX/MATRIX] knob

Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal.

Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off.

•[HPF] knob

Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off.

•[DYNAMICS 1] knob

Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.

•[DYNAMICS 2] knob

Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.

•[CUE] key

Each time this key is pressed, the channel’s CUE SETTING switches as follows: A

 B 

A+B.

NOTE

In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs

mentioned above will be disabled.

Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings

You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (16 keys for CL series consoles) to a

maximum of four banks.

Use the four BANK SELECT buttons on the left to select a bank.

The selected bank name is displayed in the field in the bottom right side of the Function

Access Area.

You can press the CLEAR ALL button on the top right side to clear the content of the selected

bank.

Setup

Reference Manual

217

Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

NO ASSIGN - - No assignment.

ALTERNATE

FUNCTION

LATCH -

Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is

pressed.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

UNLATCH -

Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while

pressed.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

AUTOMIXER

group a OVERRIDE ON -

Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a

where the override button is on, until the level

drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all

channels with the button turned off.

group a PRESET ON -

Switch the channels in group a to the mode

indicated by the mode button (man/auto/

mute) next to the lit preset indicator.

group b OVERRIDE ON -

Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b

where the override button is on, until the level

drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all

channels with the button turned off.

group b PRESET ON -

Switch the channels in group b to the mode

indicated by the mode button (man/auto/

mute) next to the lit preset indicator.

group c OVERRIDE ON -

Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c

where the override button is on, until the level

drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all

channels with the button turned off.

group c PRESET ON -

Switch the channels in group c to the mode

indicated by the mode button (man/auto/

mute) next to the lit preset indicator.

BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE -

Toggle between the brightness settings stored

in A and B.

CH ON SPECIFIC CH *4) Switch the CH ON/OFF.

CH SELECT

INC

Increment or decrement the selected channel

number.

DEC

SPECIFIC CH *1) Select a channel from list 1).

CUE

OUTPUT - Switch CUE on/off.

CLEAR CUE

A This clears the CUE for CUE A.

B This clears the CUE for CUE B.

A+B This clears the CUE for CUE A and CUE B.

SPECIFIC CH *2) CUE the channel selected from list 2).

CUE MODE

Switches the CUE MODE for CUE A. In Surround

mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST, and 5.1

SOLO with each press. When set to MIX, the

lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp is on.

When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes.

B Switches the CUE MODE for CUE B.

CUE INTERRUPTION -

Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on

or off.

FADER CUE RELEASE -

Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or

off.

CUE

INPUT CUE POINT

Selects the cue point for the input channel for

CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL

(immediately before fader), AFL (immediately

after fader), and POST PAN (immediately after

PAN) with each press.

DCA CUE POINT

Selects the cue point for DCA for CUE A or CUE

B. It toggles between PRE PAN (immediately

before PAN) and POST PAN (immediately after

PAN) with each press.

OUTPUT CUE POINT

Selects the cue point for the output channel for

CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL (before

fader) and AFL (immediately after fader) with

each press.

CUE SETTING

For CUE A or CUE B, press the [CUE] key while

holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for

the selected channel to A or B, and to turn on

the CUE.

A+B

Press the [CUE] key while holding this key to

switch the CUE SETTING for the selected

channel to A and B, and to turn on the CUE.

DANTE

INPUT

PATCH LIB

DIRECT RECALL LIBRARY #000-#010

Directly recalls the desired number of the

DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does

not function during a scene recall.

DCA ROLL-

OUT

LAST DCA SEL - This function rolls out or retracts the selected

DCA group.

DCA1 -

DCA16 -

EDITOR

CONTROL

MASTER -

Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.

SENDS ON FADER -

OVERVIEW

CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1}

CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1}

CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1}

CH49-64 {CL5/CL3}

CH65-72 {CL5}

ST IN

MIX1-16

MIX17-24

MATRIX

STEREO/MONO

DCA

CUSTOM FADER BANK

A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}

A2 {CL5/CL3}

A3 {CL3}

B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

Setup

Reference Manual

218

EDITOR

CONTROL

CUSTOM FADER BANK

B2 {CL3/CL1}

Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.

B3 {CL1}

B4 {CL1}

C1 {CL5}

C2 {CL5}

C3 {CL5}

C4 {CL5}

C5 {CL5}

C6 {CL5}

SELECTED CHANNEL -

LIBRARY

DYNAMICS LIBRARY

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

EFFECT LIBRARY

GEQ LIBRARY

INPUT CH LIBRARY

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

PEQ LIBRARY

PREMIUM RACK

LIBRARY

Portico5033 LIBRARY

Portico5043 LIBRARY

U76 LIBRARY

Opt-2A LIBRARY

EQ-1A LIBRARY

DynamicEQ LIBRARY

Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY

MBC4 LIBRARY

PATCH EDITOR

INPUT PATCH

OUTPUT PATCH

INPUT INSERT PATCH

OUTPUT INSERT PATCH

DIRECT OUT PATCH

PATCH LIST

RACK EDITOR

RACK

GEQ 1-16

EFFECT 1-8

PREMIUM 1A

PREMIUM 1B

PREMIUM 8A

PREMIUM 8B

METER

INPUT METER

OUTPUT METER

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

EDITOR

CONTROL

GROUP/LINK

DCA GROUP

Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.

MUTE GROUP

CHANNEL LINK

OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK

SCENE

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL SAFE

FADE TIME

FOCUS RECALL

EFFECT

BYPASS

EFFECT RACK 1-8 -

Turns BYPASS for each RACK on and off. Lit

when ON.

PREMIUM RACK 1A -

PREMIUM RACK 1B -

PREMIUM RACK 8A -

PREMIUM RACK 8B -

FADER BANK

SNAPSHOT

Takes a snapshot of the bank settings for all A, B,

and C blocks (hold down the key for two

seconds or longer), or displays the last bank for

which a snapshot was taken (press and release

the key within two seconds).

GAIN KNOB

FUNCTION

LATCH -

Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG

GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is

selected.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

UNLATCH -

Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG

GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while

held down.

* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is

switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE

screen etc., this will remain lit until the next

time it is pressed.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

GEQ FREQ

BANK

INC

Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ

EDIT screen.

DEC

GPI OUT

LATCH

PORT1-PORT5

Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.

UNLATCH Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.

HELP - -

Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating

the controllers on the panel (excluding faders),

or controllers on the screen, while holding

down this key will display the related

information.

HOME

SELECTED CH VIEW - Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.

OVERVIEW - Displays the OVERVIEW screen.

TOGGLE -

Each press of the key will alternately display the

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the

OVERVIEW screen.

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

Setup

Reference Manual

219

METER

PEAK HOLD ON -

Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit

when ON.

SURROUND METER -

For Surround mode, toggle between the

content to be shown in meters displayed in the

Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 1-

6, and on for SURROUND MONITOR.

MIDI

PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 1-128

Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.

For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is

switched.

CONTROL CHANGE CC 1-31, 33-95, 102-119

NOTE ON

NOTE ON C-2 (0)

NOTE ON G 8 (127)

MONITOR

OUTPUT - Switch the monitor output on/off.

SELECTED CH ASSIGN -

While holding down this key, press the SEL key

of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the

assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]

LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

The assignment setting made while holding

down this key will be stored. Pressing the key

again will recall the stored setting. Settings can

be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid

assignment switching.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

DIMMER ON -

Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor

signal.

SOURCE SELECT

STEREO L/R

Recall the selected signal to the monitor.

MONO (C)

LCR

PB OUT

OMNI1-2

OMNI3-4

OMNI5-6

OMNI7-8

DEFINE

SURROUND SOURCE

SELECT

*6)

Recall the selected signal to the surround

monitor.

SURROUND DOWN-

MIX

STEREO MONO

When this function is off (the lamp is off), the

setting returns to 5.1 monitor.

SURROUND SPEAKER

SOLO

When this function is on (the lamp is on), the

SURROUND MONITOR screen opens. When this

function is off (the lamp is off), the SURROUND

MONITOR screen closes.

L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE

This functionality is the same as the SPEAKER

MUTE function in the SURROUND MONITOR

screen. When the SOLO button is on, it

functions as a SOLO key.

MUTE

MASTER

MUTE GROUP 1

- Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.:

MUTE GROUP 8

ALL MUTE -

Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off

together.

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

NUENDO

LIVE

TRANSPORT

GO TO PROJECT START

Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.

GO TO PREV MARKER

REWIND

FAST FORWARD

GO TO NEXT MARKER

GO TO PROJECT END

Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.

CYCLE

STOP

START

REC

EASY RECORDING

PEAK CLEAR -

Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live

screen.

ADD MARKER -

This function executes ADD MARKER of

NUENDO Live.

OSCILLATOR

OSCILLATOR ON - Switch the OSC on/off.

SELECTED CH ASSIGN -

While holding down this key, press a SEL key of

a channel to switch the assignment on/off.

During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if

assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

DIRECT ASSIGN *1)

Assign the oscillator to the channel selected

from list 1).

PAGE

CHANGE

BOOKMARK -

Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold

down the key for two seconds or longer), or

display the last-memorized screen (Hold down

the key, then release it within two seconds).

Popup windows can also be memorized. In the

case of a rack, the number of that rack is also

memorized.

BOOKMARK with “SEL” -

Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the

addition of the SEL status.

- Display the previous/next page.

CLOSE POPUP - Close the displayed window.

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

Setup

Reference Manual

220

RECORDER

TRANSPORT

PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,

FF/NEXT,

REW/PREVIOUS, REC

Recorder transport functions.

AUTO REC

Shortcut function for STOP  REC  PLAY.

Recording will be initiated in a single action. If

this is executed during recording, the file being

recorded will first be closed, and then recording

will continue with a new file.

REC & START

Start recording immediately without entering

record-ready mode.

DIRECT PLAY

NO ASSIGN The specified audio file will be played once from

the beginning.

Audio files to be played should be saved in the

SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note

that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the

root directory or in any other folder. When you

execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST

screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\.

(TITLE 1)

SCENE

INC RECALL - Recall the scene of the next existing number.

DEC RECALL - Recall the scene of the previous existing number.

DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000-#300 Directly recall the scene of the specified number.

RECALL UNDO - Execute RECALL UNDO.

STORE UNDO - Execute STORE UNDO.

INC - Select the scene of the next existing number.

DEC -

Select the scene of the previous existing number.

RECALL -

This function recalls the currently-selected scene.

STORE - Store the current settings.

SEND MODE

MIX1-16/MIX17-24,

MTRX

If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function

of the Selected Channel section’s send encoders

from TO MIX1-16, TO MIX17-24, and MATRIX.

SENDS ON

FADER

MIX1-MIX24

NORMAL/WITH CUE

This function switches between the normal

function on/off (NORMAL), and the function

with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH

CUE option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON

FADER mode is engaged or if you switch mode

during SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the

WITH CUE option, cue for all output channels

will be canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is

disengaged.

MTRX 1-MTRX 8

MIX ON FADER

MATRIX ON FADER

SENDS ON FADER

SET BY SEL

+48V

Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it

on/off.

During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or

dark if off.

If [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON FADER”

mode is engaged while you are holding down

the [SEL] key.

Press SEL to switch between auto/man if

[AUTOMIXER AUTO/MAN] is selected. It goes

OFF when the bank is switched.

INSERT ON

DIRECT OUT ON

PRE SEND

TO STEREO

TO MONO

TO LCR

GAIN COMPENSATION

AUTOMIXER AUTO/

MAN

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

SET DEFAULT

VALUE

Press and hold this key, and then press any of

the following knobs on the panel to reset that

knob to its default value: a knob in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section, a knob in the

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or a knob in

the Centralogic section.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

SET NOMI-

NAL VALUE

While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key

to set the fader of that channel to nominal level.

You can also push a knob in the SEND field of

the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the

send level to nominal level.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

SOLO SOLO ON - Switches solo mode on/off.

SURROUND

PAN

L ON

*5)

In Surround mode, this is used to switch the bus

assign on and off for the channel selected in list

5).

R ON

C ON

LFE ON

Ls ON

Rs ON

PANNING L

*5)

In Surround mode, this is used to set hard

panning for the channel selected in list 5).

PANNING R

PANNING Front Center

PANNING Ls

PANNING Rs

PANNING Back

PANNING Side L

*5)

In Surround mode, this is used to set hard

panning for the channel selected in list 5).

PANNING Side R

PANNING Center

PANNING TOGGLE *5)

In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the

settings for hard panning for the channel

selected in list 5).

With each press, the setting is toggled in the

following order: Center  L  Front Center  R

 Side R  Rs  Back, Ls  Side L  (Center).

TALKBACK

TALKBACK ON

LATCH Switch TALKBACK on/off.

UNLATCH

Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

SELECTED CH ASSIGN -

While holding down this key, press a SEL key of

an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment

on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit

if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.

The assignment setting made while holding

down this key will be stored. Pressing the key

again will recall the stored setting. Settings can

be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid

assignment switching.

It goes OFF when the bank is switched.

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

Setup

Reference Manual

221

*1) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST

R, MONO

*2) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,

MONO(C)

*3) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO

*4) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,

MONO(C), DCA1-DCA16

*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R

*6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6,

MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MIX17/18, MIX19/20, MIX21/22, MIX23/24, MATRIX1/2,

MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO, MONO, PB OUT

TALKBACK

DIRECT ASSIGN *3)

The operations performed when this key is

pressed are as follows.

- Toggle assignment of channel selected in list

3) ON and OFF.

At this time, the LED display is as shown below.

- If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on.

Otherwise, the LED will be off.

DIRECT ASSIGN WITH

*3)

The operations performed when this key is

pressed are as follows.

- Assignments other than for the channel

selected in list 3) are removed.

- If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON

at the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF

and the channel assignment is removed.

- Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the

channel assignment will be ON.

At this time, the LED display is as shown below.

- If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON

at the same time, the LED will be on.

- Otherwise, the LED will be off.

TAP TEMPO

CURRENT PAGE -

Use the tap tempo function in the displayed

screen.

EFFECT RACK 1-8

WITH POPUP

Use the tap tempo function for the specified

effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap

Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP

is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not

displayed.

WITHOUT POPUP

USER

DEFINED

KEYS

BANK SELECT

BANK A

When selected, the lamp for the corresponding

key comes on.

BANK B

When selected, the lamp for the corresponding

key comes on.

BANK C

When selected, the lamp for the corresponding

key comes on.

BANK D

When selected, the lamp for the corresponding

key comes on.

PREVIOUS BANK

Switches to the previous bank. If the current

bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D.

NEXT BANK

Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is

BANK D, it switches to BANK A.

FUNCTION

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

Setup

Reference Manual

222

USER DEFINED knobs

This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the

USER DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the

defined function.

If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If

you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings

for the Guest account.

NOTE

For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be

assigned to USER DEFINED knobs” (page 223).

NOTE

• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make USER

DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.

• The 4 knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page correspond to

USER DEFINED knobs [1]-[4] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned

to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button,

an indication of “---” is shown.

• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL

series.

For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” you specify a parameter that does not

exist on that model.

• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED knob, nothing will occur when the

knob is operated.

About TOUCH AND TURN

The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4]

knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED

knobs, you can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then

immediately use the USER DEFINED knob to operate it.

At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen,

indicating that you can operate that knob.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.

4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to

assign a function.

5. In the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is

enclosed by a frame, then select the function that you want to assign.

6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move

the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.

7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.

8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4]

knob on the panel.

USER SETUP screen

(USER DEFINED KNOBS page)

USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

223

Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED

knobs

Function

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

NO ASSIGN - -

AUTOMIXER WEIGHT *1)

BRIGHTNESS

LAMP -

PANEL -

SCREEN -

CH COLOR -

NAME -

CUE

INPUT PFL TRIM

DCA TRIM

OUTPUT PFL TRIM

CUE LEVEL -

DIRECT OUT LEVEL LEVEL *14)

DYNAMICS 1

THRESHOLD *2)

RANGE *4)

RATIO

*2)

ATTACK

HOLD

*4)

DECAY

RELEASE

*2)OUTGAIN

KNEE

WIDTH *13)

DYNAMICS 2

THRESHOLD

*4)

RATIO

FREQUENCY

ATTACK

RELEASE

OUTGAIN

KNEE

WIDTH

EFFECT

Displays the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for

the target operation as well as the

name of the mounted EFFECT TYPE or

the name of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a).

Displays the names of the 32 parame-

ters for the EFFECT TYPE *b). Displays

“----” if a GEQ/PEQ is mounted.

ATT

*2)

LOW Q

LOW FREQUENCY

LOW GAIN

LOW MID Q

LOW MID FREQUENCY

LOW MID GAIN

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID FREQUENCY

HIGH MID GAIN

HIGH Q

HIGH FREQUENCY

HIGH GAIN

EXTERNAL HA GAIN1-GAIN8 *10)

HPF FREQUENCY *4)

I/O DEVICE GAIN1-GAIN32 *11)

INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME *3)

INPUT GAIN

ANALOG GAIN

*4)

DIGITAL GAIN

MIDI CONTROL CHANGE

CTRL 1-CTRL 31 -

CTRL 33-CTRL 95 -

CTRL 102-CTRL 119 -

MONITOR

DIMMER LEVEL -

TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL -

MONITOR DELAY -

MONITOR FADER -

OSCILLATOR

LEVEL -

FREQUENCY -

LEVEL(EVEN) -

FREQUENCY(EVEN) -

HPF -

LPF -

WIDTH -

INTERVAL -

OUTPUT LEVEL LEVEL *6)

OUTPUT PORT

DELAY TIME

*12)

GAIN

PREMIUM RACK

Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A-

8B) for the corresponding operation, as

well as the name of the mounted PRO-

CESSOR *a).

Displays the names of the 64 parame-

ters for the PROCESSOR *b).

Function

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Setup

Reference Manual

224

*1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16

*2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-

MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)

*3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R

*4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8

*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24

*6) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO

*7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, ST L, ST

R, MONO

*10) # 1-# 6

*11) REMOTE HA #1-#8

*12) DANTE 1-DANTE64, OMNI 1-OMNI 8, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1-SLOT3 16, DIGITAL

OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R

*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)

*14) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48

*a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is displayed.

*b) If there are no parameters, “----” is displayed.

RECORDER

INPUT GAIN -

OUTPUT GAIN -

SCENE SELECT -

TO MIX LEVEL MIX1-MIX24 *3)

TO MATRIX LEVEL MTRX1-MTRX8 *7)

TO MIX PAN MIX1/2-MIX23/24 *3)

TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX1/2-MATRIX7/8 *7)

TO ST/MONO

PAN/BAL

*5)

CSR

TOUCH AND TURN - -

Function

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Setup

Reference Manual

225

Assignable encoders

You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each

channel, and control the function using the knob. For details on the assignable functions and

their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders”

(page 226).

NOTE

• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make

assignable knob settings for the Guest account.

• SELECTED SEND is the default setting. If SELECTED SEND is selected, you can use the

assignable encoders to adjust the send level to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for

SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area.

• The CL3 and CL1 have only one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key, so the function

of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously. On the CL5,

you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and block C/Master

fader section (right side) independently by using the corresponding [GAIN/

PAN/ASSIGN] keys.

• This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the

Centralogic section, since these knobs are used to control on-screen

parameters.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.

4. Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field on the USER DEFINED KNOB

page.

5. In the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window, select the function you want to

assign.

6. Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window.

7. Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN.

8. Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each channel strip.

USER SETUP screen

(USER DEFINED KNOBS and

ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page)

ASSIGNABLE ENCODER

SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

226

Functions that can be assigned to the assignable

encoders

*1 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or

digital gain.

*2 The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected.

*3 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST

setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed.

*4 The state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off.

*5 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on/off.

*6 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on/off.

*7 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to F/R.

*8 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to L/R.

PAN GAIN ASSIGN

Function

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

O PAN/BALANCE

PAN

BAL

O ANALOG GAIN A.GAIN *1

O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN *1

ONO ASSIGN

(Nothing will be

displayed.)

O SELECTED SEND

MIX1-MTRX8

Depends on

status

OMIX1 SEND MIX1 *3

OMIX2 SEND MIX2 *3

OMIX3 SEND MIX3 *3

OMIX4 SEND MIX4 *3

OMIX5 SEND MIX5 *3

OMIX6 SEND MIX6 *3

OMIX7 SEND MIX7 *3

OMIX8 SEND MIX8 *3

OMIX9 SEND MIX9 *3

O MIX10 SEND MIX10 *3

O MIX11 SEND MIX11 *3

O MIX12 SEND MIX12 *3

O MIX13 SEND MIX13 *3

O MIX14 SEND MIX14 *3

O MIX15 SEND MIX15 *3

O MIX16 SEND MIX16 *3

O MIX17 SEND MIX17 *3

O MIX18 SEND MIX18 *3

O MIX19 SEND MIX19 *3

O MIX20 SEND MIX20 *3

O MIX21 SEND MIX21 *3

O MIX22 SEND MIX22 *3

O MIX23 SEND MIX23 *3

O MIX24 SEND MIX24 *3

O MATRIX1 SEND MTRX1 *3

O MATRIX2 SEND MTRX2 *3

O MATRIX3 SEND MTRX3 *3

O MATRIX4 SEND MTRX4 *3

O MATRIX5 SEND MTRX5 *3

O MATRIX6 SEND MTRX6 *3

O MATRIX7 SEND MTRX7 *3

OMATRIX8 SEND MTRX8 *3

O HPF FREQUENCY HPF *4

O DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD THRE1 *5

O DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD THRE2 *6

O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN

OEQ ATT ATT

OINPUT DELAY DELAY

Units of scale

are m, ms, ft,

and fr. No

description for

samples.

O DIRECT OUT LEVEL D.OUT

OSURROUND L-R PAN L/R *7

OSURROUND F-R PAN F/R *8

O SURROUND ROUND PAN L/R and F/R

OSURROUND DIV DIV

O SURROUND LFE LFE

PAN GAIN ASSIGN

Function

PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Setup

Reference Manual

227

GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder)

functions

In CL V1.7 and later, the following functions have been added to SENDS ON FADER mode.

 When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select

ASSIGN

Use assignable encoders to adjust the level of channels.

Channel name display indication

 When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select

PAN

Use assignable encoders to adjust PAN sent from channels to the MIX/MATRIX bus (bus set

for Stereo send in the BUS SETUP screen).

Channel name display indication

Custom fader bank

Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.”

There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader

banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types.

This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank.

NOTE

• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank

settings for the Guest account.

• You can also press the fader assign select buttons to assign channels to faders.

Channel levels

Adjust with assignable encoder.

Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus

Adjust with the fader on the top panel.

PAN sent from channel to MIX/MATRIX bus

Adjust with assignable encoder.

Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus

Adjust with the fader on the top panel.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.

4. Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels

you want to add to the custom fader bank.

5. In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the bank select button for

the custom fader bank you want to set up.

6. In the FADER field, press the select button for the fader you want to set up.

7. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected

in step 6.

8. To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.

USER SETUP window (CUSTOM

FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)

Setup

Reference Manual

228

USER SETUP screen

(CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)

 CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER field

Bank select buttons

Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of

channels.

The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console

model.

CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6

CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2

CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4

2 MASTER button

Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader

section.

3 Block indicators

Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for

editing.

The graphics vary depending on the console model.

CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER

CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER

CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER

 FADER field

Fader select button

Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top

panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.

5 Fader assign select button

Opens the Fader assign select window, in which you can change the channel assigned

to the fader.

6 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a

confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to

return to the previous screen without changing the setting.

Master fader

You can set the channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section.

NOTE

If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access

the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings

for the Guest account.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.

3. In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.

4. In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the MASTER button.

5. In the FADER field, press the number button for the fader you want to set up.

6. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected

in step 5.

USER SETUP window (CUSTOM

FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)

Setup

Reference Manual

229

Custom fader bank functions

Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes.

Custom fader bank settings are stored in scene data in separate regions for each model.

NOTE

Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, custom

fader bank settings included in scenes stored in CL5 cannot be reproduced if that same scene is

recalled in CL3 or CL1. You must create and store custom fader bank settings in CL3 and CL1.

Precautions for when Loading Console Data

In V2.0 and later, custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in

scene data as well. The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the

logged-in user, the type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points:

• If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings

for the saved Administrator are called up.

If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved

current scene are called up.

• If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include

custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the

load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we

recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired

setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank.

Console Lock

You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This

setting disables operations of the panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an

accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.

If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console

Lock function. When the Console Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will

appear and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable.

NOTE

• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to factory default settings”

(page 265).

• The Guest cannot set a password.

• Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor will still

operate as usual.

CL5

CL5 console

Recall Store Recall Store Recall Store

CL3 CL1

CL3 console CL1 console

Custom fader bank settings

Setup

Reference Manual

230

Locking the console

Unlocking the console

NOTE

If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when

you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen.

Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image

If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the

CONSOLE LOCK screen.

In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it

from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to

“Loading a file from a USB flash drive” (page 233).

NOTE

Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be

converted into 16-bit for display.

Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB

flash drive

You can connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to

the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL

series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.

CAUTION

An ACCESS indicator is shown in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved,

loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the CL unit.

Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.

NOTE

• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.

• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this

does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32

formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in

FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.

 Basic operation

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the CONSOLE LOCK button.

3. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the

user.

4. Press the OK button to enable Console Lock function.

STEP

1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.

2. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the

user, then press the OK button.

SETUP screen

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.

3. Save/load/edit the data.

SETUP screen

Setup

Reference Manual

231

SAVE/LOAD window

The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.

1 COPY button

Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area).

2 PAST E bu tton

Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory.

3 DELETE button

Deletes the currently selected file.

NOTE

A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear.

4 MAKE DIR button

Creates a new directory.

5 PATH

Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next

higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.

6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE

Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the

USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME

field.

7 File list

This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The

highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.

The file list contains the following items. When you press an item name, it will turn

orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the

sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.

• FILE NAME.................Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon

indicating its type.

• COMMENT .................The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed

here. You can press this area to open a keyboard window,

allowing you to enter a comment for the file.

• READ ONLY ............... A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding

file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable

the protect setting.

Protected files cannot be overwritten.

• TYPE...........................Indicates the file type.

ALL: File containing CL internal settings

KEY: User authentication key

XML: Help file

BMP: Bitmap image file

MP3: MP3 file

[DIR]: Directory

NOTE

• If the file format version is earlier than V1.70, “old” is displayed in the

second line of this field. Data can be loaded even if “old” is displayed.

• If the console version is V2 or later, data from any version can be

loaded.

• TIME STAMP ..............Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most

recently.

8 File selection knob

Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob.

9 SAVE button

Saves all of the CL console internal settings together (page 232).

0 LOAD button

Loads the selected CL setting file (page 233).

A CREATE USER KEY button

Creates a user authentication key (page 207).

B FORMAT button

Initializes the USB flash drive (page 236).

If an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB

REMOUNT button. Press this button to remount a USB flash drive (page 237).

C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK button

If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will

be omitted when a settings file is loaded.

1 2 3 45 6

8 9 0 A BC

Setup

Reference Manual

232

NOTE

The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even

if the “WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK” button is on.

Saving the CL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive

All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file.

The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF”.

SAVE SELECT screen

1 TYPE field

Specifies the types of data to be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending

on the tab you select.

•ALL tab

This button selects all the items.

•SCENE tab

This button selects scene memories.

• INPUT/OUTPUT tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

• EFFECT/GEQ tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

• PREMIUM tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

STEP

1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button.

2. In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save

destination.

3. In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button.

4. Enter a file name and comment.

5. Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.

47654

Button Data content

IN CH LIB Input channel library

OUT CH LIB Output channel library

IN EQ LIB Input EQ library

OUT EQ LIB Output EQ library

DYNA LIB Dynamics library

Button Data content

EFFECT LIB Effect library

GEQ LIB GEQ library

8PEQ LIB 8Band PEQ library

Button Data content

5033 LIB Portico 5033 library

5043 LIB Portico 5043 library

U76 LIB U76 library

Opt-2A LIB Opt-2A library

EQ-1A LIB EQ-1A library

DynaEQ LIB DynamicEQ library

BussComp LIB Buss Comp 369 library

MBC4 LIB MBC4 library

Setup

Reference Manual

233

• SETUP tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

NOTE

When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be

saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel

assignment as well.

2 SOURCE field

Indicates the internal data of the CL series console.

3 DESTINATION field

Indicates the save destination.

4 Data selection knob

This knob selects the data shown in the field.

5 MULTI SELECT button

Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.

6 SELECT ALL button

Press this button to select all items.

7 CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to clear all selections.

NOTE

• To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory

icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field.

• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog

will ask you to confirm the overwrite.

• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.

• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name,

and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable

to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the

bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.

Loading a file from a USB flash drive

Follow the steps below to load a CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into

the CL series console.

You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as settings files.

CAUTION

Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after

the data is loaded. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the CL

series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem

even if a signal is output from the CL console.

NOTE

• When the file has finished being loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading

operation and the type of data will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data

up to the cancellation point will still be loaded.

• Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load

operation.

Button Data content

MIXER SETUP Mixer setup

OUTPUT PORT Output port

MONITOR CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK

MIDI SETUP MIDI setup

MIDI PGM MIDI program changes

MIDI CTL MIDI control changes

Dante In Patch Dante input patch library

Extension Type Contents of file

.CLF ALL CL console internal setting file

.CLU KEY CL console user authentication key

.XML XML XML file for displaying Help

.TXT TEXT Text file for displaying Help

.BMP BMP

Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more

colors, uncompressed bitmap format)

STEP

1. To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file

list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.

2. If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL

settings file (file name extension .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to

the CL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.

3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the LOAD button.

4. In the LOAD SELECT screen, select the data to load, the data type, and the load

destination.

5. Press the LOAD button to load the selected file.

Setup

Reference Manual

234

LOAD SELECT screen

1 TYPE field

Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you

select.

NOTE

The console version at the time when the data was saved is displayed on the top right side. If no

data has been saved, “NO DATA” will be displayed. If data has been saved but the version cannot

be determined, “later than V4.00” will be displayed.

• ALL tab

This button selects all the items.

•SCENE tab

This button selects scene memories.

• INPUT/OUTPUT tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

• EFFECT/GEQ tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

• PREMIUM tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

• SETUP tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

NOTE

When the output port items are loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be

applied. To prevent this, load and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the

channel assignment.

Button Data content

IN CH LIB Input channel library

OUT CH LIB Output channel library

IN EQ LIB Input EQ library

OUT EQ LIB Output EQ library

DYNA LIB Dynamics library

47654

Button Data content

EFFECT LIB Effect library

GEQ LIB GEQ library

8PEQ LIB 8Band PEQ library

Button Data content

5033 LIB Portico 5033 library

5043 LIB Portico 5043 library

U76 LIB U76 library

Opt-2A LIB Opt-2A library

EQ-1A LIB EQ-1A library

DynaEQ LIB DynamicEQ library

BussComp LIB Buss Comp 369 library

MBC4 LIB MBC4 library

Button Data content

MIXER SETUP Mixer setup

OUTPUT PORT Output port

MONITOR CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK

MIDI SETUP MIDI setup

MIDI PGM MIDI program changes

MIDI CTL MIDI control changes

Dante In Patch Dante input patch library

Setup

Reference Manual

235

• ADMIN tab

The following table lists the items that you can select.

2 SOURCE field

This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive.

3 DESTINATION field

Indicates the load destination.

4 Data selection knob

This knob selects the data shown in the field.

5 MULTI SELECT button

Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.

6 SELECT ALL button

Press this button to select all items.

7 CLEAR ALL button

Press this button to clear all selections.

Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive

Follow the steps below to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories

on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.

 Sorting files

To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”

“TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will

be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.

1 FILE NAME

Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.

2 COMMENT

Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.

3 READ ONLY

Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.

4 TYPE

Sort the list by file type.

5 TIME STAMP

Sort the list by date and time of update.

NOTE

By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or

descending order) in which the list is sorted.

 Editing file names/comments

NOTE

You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.

Type Data content

ADMIN PREF PREFERENCE (for the Administrator)

ADMIN UDEF

USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the

Administrator)

ADMIN FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator)

GUEST PREF PREFERENCE (for the Guest)

GUEST UDEF USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest)

GUEST FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest)

GUEST LEVEL USER LEVEL (for the Guest)

STEP

1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each

file.

2. Enter a file name or comment in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME

button or SET button.

1 2 3 4 5

Setup

Reference Manual

236

 Copying and pasting a file

Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a

different file name.

NOTE

You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.

 Deleting a file

NOTE

You cannot delete a protected file.

 Creating a directory

NOTE

You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.

Formatting a USB flash drive

Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.

A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash

drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.

STEP

1. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY

button in the SAVE/LOAD window.

2. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the

directory into which you want to paste the file.

3. Press the PASTE button.

4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.

STEP

1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE

button in the SAVE/LOAD window.

2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.

STEP

1. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/

LOAD window to change the directory.

2. Press the MAKE DIR button.

3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.

3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FORMAT button.

4. Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.

5. To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.

SAVE/LOAD window

Setup

Reference Manual

237

Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port

Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition

occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the

console power off and back on.

 Recovery procedure

After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows

“USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window.

Remount function to USB flash drives

If USB flash drive is not mounted, the FORMAT button will become a USB REMOUNT button.

Press this button to mount a USB flash drive. Use this button if a USB flash drive is not

recognized after it has been removed and reinserted.

Word clock and slot settings

“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal

processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must

be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an

unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may

be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.

Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the

entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock

slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master.

If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word

clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the

port through which the word clock is obtained).

This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT

SETUP button.

3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window,

select a clock source.

4. Press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.

SETUP screen WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

238

WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window

 MASTER CLOCK SELECT field

Master clock frequency display

Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If

the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.

NOTE

• If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante

Controller application, this area indicates the change in the

sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and

+4.1667%.

• To change the master clock when sample rate pull-up/down has been specified, disable the pull-

up/down in the Dante Controller, change the master clock, then specify pull-up/down again.

2 Master clock select buttons

Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master

from the following options:

• INT 48 k

• INT 44.1 k

The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock

source.

• WORD CLOCK IN

The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console

will be used as the clock source.

• DANTE 48 k

• DANTE 44.1 k

The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be

used as the clock source.

NOTE

With CL V2.03 and later, if you initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the

word clock is set to DANTE 48k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using

multiple CL and QL consoles at their default settings.

•SLOT 1-3

The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as

the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.

3 Clock status Indicator

Indicates the console’s status as a master or a slave in the Dante audio network.

NOTE

When is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized

with a device acting as a Dante master, the audio might cut out.

4 Clock status display

Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each

indicator is explained below:

• LOCKED (light blue)

Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an

external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is

occurring properly between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling

frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.

• LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow)

A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an

external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot

occur correctly between that device and the CL series console.

• SRC ON (green)

This is a special status that applies only to SLOT1-3. It indicates that SCR (Sample Rate

Converter) is enabled for the corresponding channel. This means that even if the signal

is not synchronized, normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring.

• UNLOCKED (red)

A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding

connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series

console.

Master

Slave

Setup

Reference Manual

239

• UNKNOWN (black)

This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is

connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this

connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is

established.

NOTE

• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device

is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.

• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your

speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock

setting.

• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will

appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.

 SLOT SETUP field

This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the

console.

5 Card name

Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.

6 SRC buttons

The SCR (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which

an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of

card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.

7 FREQUENCY display

Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the

substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,

or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.

8 EMPHASIS STATUS display

Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the

substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed,

or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.

Using cascade connections

Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as

a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enables buses to be shared among the devices.

This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.

This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL

units are connected in a cascade configuration.

About cascade connections

To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate

slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports

of the receiving unit (the cascade master).

The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for

each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The

DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving

unit.

In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1-24, MATRIX bus 1-8,

STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals

transmitted from the cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all

buses can be shared among the devices.) When the required settings are made for the

cascade slave and for the cascade master, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent

via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will

be output from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified

operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series console will be followed by

the other CL console.

You must specify bus assignments for each slot or channel on each CL unit. The procedure

below is given separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master.

CL BCL A

DIGITAL

OUT

DIGITAL

Audio signals of

A + B

Audio signals of

unit A

Digital I/O card

(Cascade slave) (Cascade master)

Setup

Reference Manual

240

NOTE

• In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses1-6. In addition, if you have

selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade slave at the

cascade master.

• If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL

unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However,

only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.

• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.

• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at

the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master.

Operations on a cascade slave CL unit

NOTE

• You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a

signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.

• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select

a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask

whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.

CASCADE window (CASCADE OUT PATCH page)

You can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.

1 OUT PATCH buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)

Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1-24,

MATRIX 1-8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the

PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port.

2 CASCADE LINK buttons

Used to select the operations to be linked when making cascade connections between

CL series consoles. Multiple selection is possible.

•DCA 1-8

The following parameters related to DCA 1 to 8 will be linked.

• DCA 1 - 8 level

• DCA 1 - 8 on/off

• DCA 1 - 8 cue

• DCA 1 - 8 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)

NOTE

Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time

for consoles linked by cascade connections.

•DCA 9-16

The following parameters related to DCA 9 to 16 will be linked.

•DCA 9 - 16 level

• DCA 9 - 16 on/off

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.

3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab.

4. In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which

you want to assign the port.

5. Use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output ports

that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.

6. In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive

control signals for cascade link.

7. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.

Setup

Reference Manual

241

• DCA 9 - 16 cue

• DCA 9 - 16 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets)

NOTE

Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time

for consoles linked by cascade connections.

•MUTE MASTER

Links ON/OFF for mute masters.

NOTE

The settings of Dimmer function are not linked. Make these settings individually on each

console.

• SENDS ON FADER

Links SENDS ON FADER behavior.

• SENDS ON FADER mode

• The send destination bus

• CUE

The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.

• Cue enable/disable

• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE, 5.1 SOLO)

NOTE

Regarding 5.1 SOLO, no links are made if the console at the cascade destination is set to

Stereo mode.

• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels

• Solo mute

NOTE

Solo operation is used for all cascaded consoles (MASTER and SLAVE).

•OTHERS

The following parameters will be linked.

• Scene recall operations

• Scene store operations

• Edit scene titles

• DIMMER (MONITOR window) operations

• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP window) operations

3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons

Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information

when cue operations or scene store/recall operations are linked on the CL series consoles

in a cascade connection.

• NONE.....................No link operation

• MIDI........................Use MIDI port

• SLOT1 ....................Use SLOT1

4 Tabs

Switches between pages (CASCADE IN PATCH, CASCADE IN ATT, and CASCADE OUT

PATCH).

PORT SELECT window

Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window.

1 Slot select list

This list selects slots 1-3.

2 Port select buttons

These buttons select the port of the specified slot.

Setup

Reference Manual

242

CASCADE window (CASCADE IN ATT page)

1 ATT knobs

Display the attenuator values (-96.0dB to 0.0dB) for cascade input signals. You can

adjust these values using multifunction knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogic section or the

[TOUCH AND TURN] knob.

NOTE

You can use these knobs as SUB IN with adjustable input level. Doing so allows you to sum the

signals from other consoles to a bus, without using up inputs and buses.

Operations on the cascade master CL unit

NOTE

• You can assign the same input port to two or more buses.

• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select

a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask

whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.

3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab.

4. In the CASCADE IN PATCH page, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you

want to assign the port.

5. In the PORT SELECT screen, use the slot select list and the port select buttons to

select the slot and input ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE

button.

6. As described in step 6 of “Operations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 240), in the

CASCADE LINK PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control

signals for cascade link.

7. As described in step 7 of “Operations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 240), in the

CASCADE COMM LINK field, select the same item as the cascade slave.

Setup

Reference Manual

243

Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses

Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such

as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the

signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are

saved as part of the scene.

BUS SETUP window

You can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.

1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons

Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO

(stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).

2 Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)

For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send

point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.

3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)

Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the

following parameters.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button.

3. Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the MIX bus or MATRIX bus.

4. Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as

STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).

5. Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position

from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.

6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.

SETUP screen BUS SETUP window

Button Bus type Pre-fader send point

VARI [PRE EQ] VARI Immediately before the EQ

VARI [PRE FADER] VARI Immediately before the fader

FIXED FIXED ---

Button Pre-fader send point

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

1 42 1 43

MIX 1-16 page MIX BUS 17-24/MATRIX BUS page

Setup

Reference Manual

244

4 PAN LINK button

This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and VARI is set. If the button is on,

the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will

link with the STEREO bus pan setting.

5 Tabs

Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses.

Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off

NOTE

This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/

O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.

Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,

LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps

Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel

name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two

different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.

NOTE

You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch

between banks A and B.

SETUP screen (brightness setting field)

1 BANK A/B buttons

Switch between the brightness settings.

 CONTRAST field

NAME

Adjusts the contrast of the characters of the channel name displays on the top panel.

 BRIGHTNESS field

NAME

Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.

This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR

brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.

4 CH COLOR

Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel.

This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without

changing the channel name display brightness.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.

2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field’s ON button or OFF

button.

If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an

OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.

SETUP screen

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the

BANK A or BANK B button.

3. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the brightness of each item.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Setup

Reference Manual

245

5 SCREEN

This knob adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

If you have set the brightness to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with

a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.

6 PANEL

Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is

installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge.

NOTE

If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change.

7 LAMP

This knob adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.

Setting the date and time of the internal clock

This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how

to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the

time stamp used when saving a scene.

DATE/TIME window

Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window.

1 DATE

This field specifies the date of the internal clock.

2 TIME

This field specifies the time of the internal clock.

3 FORMAT (Display format)

Specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.

You can select from the following display formats.

•Date

MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)

DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)

YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)

•Time

24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0-23)

12-Hour (hours shown from 0am-11am, and 0pm-11pm)

Setting the network address

This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the

NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer.

If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we

recommend that you use the following default values.

IP Address: 192.168.0.128

Gateway address: 192.168.0.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other

device on the network.

NOTE

• Only the Administrator can change network settings.

• For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.

3. In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several

times to select the desired format for date and time display.

4. Use multifunction knobs 1-6 in the Centralogic section to specify the current date

and time.

5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.

1 2 3

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

2. Press the NETWORK button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.

3. Press a knob in the NETWORK screen to select it, and use the multifunction knobs in

the Centralogic section to specify the address.

4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.

5. Restart the CL series console.

Setup

Reference Manual

246

NETWORK window

1 IP ADDRESS

Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.

2 GATEWAY ADDRESS

Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between

different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.

3 SUBNET MASK

Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the

network address that distinguishes the network.

4 MAC ADDRESS

Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a

network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.

5 UNIT NAME

Sets the name to be shown on the network.

6 PIN for MonitorMix

Sets the PIN (4-digit numeric password) to be entered when using the MonitorMix

application to connect to a CL series console. MonitorMix is an iOS application that

musicians can use on stage to adjust their own monitor balance.

You can register a PIN with all 4 digits blank. In that case, PIN authentication with

MonitorMix is not required. However, you cannot leave only 1, 2, or 3 of the PIN digits

blank.

NOTE

The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX

(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).

Dante audio network settings

You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself

and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section

explains how to make Dante audio network settings.

STEP

1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.

2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to

open the DANTE SETUP window.

3. Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.

SETUP screen DANTE SETUP window

Setup

Reference Manual

247

DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)

1 STATUS indicators

Show the operating status of the CL series console and the Dante network.

2 CONSOLE ID select buttons

Set the IDs for the CL series consoles.

If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to

some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.

3 SECONDARY PORT select buttons

Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.

4 CANCEL button

When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button

to cancel the changes you made.

5 APPLY button

After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to

apply the changes you made.

6 BIT select buttons

Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.

• 24bit................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series

unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this

setting.

• 32bit................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data

(when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data

being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit.

7 LATENCY select buttons

Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms,

or 5.0 ms.

The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For

details, refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” (page 248).

8 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons

If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT

PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console.

If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante

patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE

PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network.

9 PREFERRED MASTER button

If this button is turned ON, the console’s status as a master is given greater priority in

the Dante audio network.

If this button is turned OFF, the console’s status as a master is given less priority in the

Dante audio network.

• If there is only one CL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the

master.

• If there are multiple CL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become

the master.

• If this button is turned OFF for all CL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O

devices, will become the master.

NOTE

• Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of

the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.

• If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you

attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not

Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.

• DANTE patch information is applied to the device if the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF)

is loaded under the following conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current

state will be maintained.

• In the SAVE/LOAD window (page 230), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is

on.

• Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CONSOLE ID select button is on.

• The THIS CONSOLE button of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on.

• With CL V2.03 and later, when settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or

a firmware update is installed, the Preferred Master setting is turned on. This setting is not

changed when console settings are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned

off using the Dante Controller, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word

clock settings for anything other than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock master for

the Dante network to prevent clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller

to clearly specify the master by turning on only Preferred Master for the device that will always be

running (off for all other devices).

Setup

Reference Manual

248

Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT

DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)

The button you switched is shown in red.

When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return

to its original appearance.

NOTE

• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between

the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the

REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will

become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you

change the setting.

• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the

CL series console.

• When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a CL series console, the console’s BIT/

LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window

for the CL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1.

• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE

CONTROLLER.” Also, patching cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window.

• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “virtual.”

You can edit HA GAIN and other settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not

be sent to the device. This is the same as when the devices are not connected.

Setting the Dante audio network latency

An appropriate latency setting for signals transmitted over a Dante audio network varies

depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an

appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices

that are connected to the CL series console.

 Relationship between the switches and the number of hops

An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of

hops in the network. One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the

number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all

devices are connected in series).

Switches mean switching hubs as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles

and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table

shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops.

NOTE

• Depending on network conditions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of

hops is small.

• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting

is the cause of the problem.

STEP

1. In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the

SECONDARY PORT.

2. Press the APPLY button.

3. In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button.

Number of hops Latency (ms)

Up to 3 0.25

Up to 5 0.5

Up to 10 1.0

Up to 20 2.0

21 or more (or if a problem occurs) 5.0

Setup

Reference Manual

249

 Connection examples and latency settings

Daisy chain connections

Simple 64-in/48-out

Daisy chain connections

FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.

Redundant connections

Simple 64-in/48-out

Redundant connections

FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.

3 hops = 0.25 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms

4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms

4 hops = 0.5 ms

Setup

Reference Manual

250

Daisy chain connections

256-ch HA remote (maximum size)

Redundant connections

Two CL series consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)

9 hops = 1.0 ms 4 hops = 0.5 ms

5 hops = 0.5 ms

Setup

Reference Manual

251

Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network

Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be

mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console.

DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page)

1 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.

2 REFRESH button

Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.

3 I/O device select buttons

Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the

button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and

the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will

indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.

For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,

refer to P.167, (1) “I/O device list.”

DANTE SETUP window

1 Setup method select buttons

Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.

• NO ASSIGN........................ Not mounted

• DEVICE LIST...................... Select and mount from the device list

• SUPPORTED DEVICE ....... Select and mount a supported device

• DVS..................................... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)

• MANUAL............................. Enter a device label and mount

STEP

1. Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.

2. Press the I/O device select button.

3. In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button.

4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.

5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.

1 2

Setup

Reference Manual

252

 When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST

To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the

DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.

1 DEVICE LIST

Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.

From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.

2 DEVICE LIST select knob

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.

3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the

Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the inputs

and outputs will be entered and displayed automatically.

 When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE

If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the

SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be

made even when not connected to a Dante audio network.

1 DEVICE TYPE

This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series.

From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.

2 DEVICE TYPE select knob

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to

mount.

3 I/O device indication

This area shows the selected I/O device.

The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.

The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.

4 UNIT ID knob

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the UNIT ID.

The indicator shows the UNIT ID.

Setup

Reference Manual

253

NOTE

• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1.”

• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between

devices.

• For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned

to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since

the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish

between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers

to overlap.

• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit

screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that

device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.

• An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as

follows.

Y###-**********

# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 - 9 and uppercase A to F (000 -

FFF)

* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen)

may be used)

• If you are controlling the CL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the

R unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting,

since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system

setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”

With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings

that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.

• A single CL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units.

If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between

multiple CL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series

units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to

“RESUME.”

 When the setup method select button is DVS or MANUAL

If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL

button to access the DVS/MANUAL field.

1 DEVICE LABEL

Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.

2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the

Dante audio network.

3 Device label entry keyboard

Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.

NOTE

• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.

• If DEVICE LABEL is left blank, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted.

• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will

be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.

Setup

Reference Manual

254

REMOTE HA settings

Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be

mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console.

DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page)

1 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.

2 REFRESH button

Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.

3 HA device select buttons

Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of

the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name

and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row

will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.

For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,

refer to P.167, (1) “I/O device list.”

REMOTE HA SELECT window

1 DEVICE LIST

Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.

2 WITH RECALL button

If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA

device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.

3 DEVICE LIST select knob

Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.

NOTE

• Do not specify “WITH RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and

settings have already been made on a different CL series console.

• The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.”

STEP

1. Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.

2. Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window.

3. Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button.

If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a

confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button.

13 2

Setup

Reference Manual

255

Displaying the device status

You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected CL series or R-series unit

(except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from

the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP.

 CL series

The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the CL

series console and the Dante network.

 R-series

The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE screen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units

and the Dante network.

For firmware that predates support for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the

indicator will be unlit.

Messages

Error, warning, and information messages are displayed.

Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field.

Each indicator lights or flashes as described below:

No call-out Unlit

Lit The indicator remains lit steadily.

Blinking The indicator continues to flash.

Flash x2 The indicator flashes twice cyclically.

Flash x3 The indicator flashes three times cyclically.

Setup

Reference Manual

256

 Error messages

The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been

resolved.

If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the CL5/CL3/CL1

Owner’s Manual.

 Warning messages

The indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically until the problem has been resolved.

If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.

If the green indicator is blinking, the unit is operating as the word clock master.

If the green indicator lights, the unit is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the

word clock.

[SYSTEM] indicators Meaning Possible solution

An internal error has occurred.

The device has failed. Contact

your Yamaha dealer for repair.

The MAC address setting has

been corrupted and no

communication can occur via

Dante.

The internal memory has

been corrupted.

If the problem persists after

setting START UP MODE back to

RESUME and turning the power

on again, consult your Yamaha

dealer.

UNIT ID is not unique.

Set a unique UNIT ID number for

the Dante network.

The DIP switches are not set

correctly.

Check the DIP switch settings,

and set them correctly.

Dante flow number limit was

exceeded.

Examine the Dante network

routing.

Flash x2

Flash x3

Lit

flash

Blinking

Lit

[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution

The word clock is not set

correctly.

Set the word clock master and the

sampling frequency correctly on

the CL5/CL3/CL1-native device or

in Dante Controller.

Dante Network circuit is

broken.

Make sure that the Ethernet

cables are not removed or short-

circuited.

Dante Network is connected

incorrectly. Other Dante

devices cannot be found.

Make sure that the Ethernet

cables are connected correctly.

[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution

A non-GbE-compatible device

is connected.

If audio is transmitted over the

Dante network, use a GbE-

compatible device.

The SECONDARY connector

has taken over

communications during

redundant network operation.

Check the circuit connected to the

PRIMARY connector.

Blinking

Flash x2

Flash x3

Lit

Lit or

blinking

Blinking

Lit or

blinking

Setup

Reference Manual

257

 Information messages

The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status.

If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly.

If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined.

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output

connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example

you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to

switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console

can send control signals to an external device.

For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer

to “Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)”

(page 105).

Using GPI IN

You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series

console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL

series console’s Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.

An abnormality has occurred

on the circuit connected to the

SECONDARY connector

during redundant network

operation.

Check the circuit connected to the

SECONDARY connector.

[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution

Syncing the Dante network

Please wait until started has

completed or until the unit has

finished synchronization. It may

take up to 45 seconds for

completion.

Waiting to receive setting data

Use REMOTE HA ASSIGN in the

system to sync with a console or

R Remote set to “WITH RECALL.”

For an R series console with the

START UP MODE set to

REFRESH, after startup both

input and output are muted until

the setting data is received.

For a single R series console, do

not set “WITH RECALL” from

multiple consoles.

The device is operating

correctly as a word clock

master.

This indicates that the device is

operating as a word clock master.

The device is operating

correctly as a word clock

slave.

This indicates that the device is

operating as a word clock slave

and synching to the word clock.

Flash x2

Lit or

blinking

Lit

Blinking

Lit

STEP

1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.

4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.

5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of

the external device you’re using.

6. To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN

SETUP button.

7. In each field of the GPI IN SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter,

then press the OK button.

SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen

Setup

Reference Manual

258

NOTE

• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is

input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of

external switch.

• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch

is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type

of external switch as appropriate for your needs.

• Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved

as SETUP data.

MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)

1 GPI IN status indicator

This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.

2 POLARITY MODE select button

This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.

............... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will

become active when the switch is grounded.

............... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will

become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level

voltage is input.

3 GPI IN SETUP button

The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this

button to display the GPI IN SETUP window.

NOTE

The items that can be selected in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER

DEFINED keys (page 215).

4 Switch attribute select button

This button selects the switch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication

will alternate between LATCH and UNLATCH.

................. LATCH (a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed)

is selected.

................. UNLATCH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when

released) is selected.

Setup

Reference Manual

259

Using GPI OUT

The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by

performing operations on the CL series console.

MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)

1 GPI OUT status indicator

This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.

2 POLARITY MODE select button

This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.

............... (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.

............... (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.

STEP

1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.

4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.

5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of

the external device you’re using.

6. To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT

SETUP button.

7. In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and

parameter, then press the OK button.

SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen

234

Setup

Reference Manual

260

3 GPI OUT SETUP button

The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this

button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window.

You can assign the following functions.

4 TEST button

While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control

signal.

Using FADER START

Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate

in tandem with fader operations.

Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description

NO ASSIGN - - No assignment

CUE ACTIVE CUE ON - Turn on the [CUE] key of the

selected channel

DCA ONLY - Turn on the DCA [CUE] key

INPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an input

channel

OUTPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an output

channel

DANTE REDUNDANCY

IND.

PRIMARY This function activates when the

unit is operating on the primary

Dante audio network with a star

connection (redundancy network).

SECONDARY This function activates when the

unit is operating on the secondary

Dante audio network with a star

connection (redundancy network).

GPI IN ACTIVE

IND.

SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN

port 1 - 5 becomes active

POWER ON - - The power of the CL series

console is turned on

USER DEF.

KEY ACTIVE

IND.

SPECIFIC

NUMBER

USER DEFINED

KEY 1 to USER

DEFINED KEY 16

The function assigned to the

USER DEFINED key becomes

active

STEP

1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.

4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the FADER START tab.

5. For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to

operate, and the type of operation.

SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen

Setup

Reference Manual

261

MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page)

1 CLEAR ALL button

Clears all selections.

 OUTPUT DESTINATION field

GPI OUT1 to GPI OUT5 buttons

Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.

3 Fader indicator

This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader.

NOTE

In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.

 THRESHOLD field

UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE

These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger

signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls

below the DOWNSTROKE level. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.

NOTE

• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all

channels (faders) and all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader)

for each GPI OUT port.

• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the

DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER

TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.

 MODE field

Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from

the GPI OUT port.

You can choose from the following fader modes.

5 FADER START

A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel

moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to+10.0 dB) from a point

below it.

6 FADER STOP

A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel

reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB).

7 FADER TALLY

A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward

through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal

will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB)

or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger. This signal will be held until the

fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT

port receives a different trigger.

8 NO ASSIGN

Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.

8 5 6 7

Setup

Reference Manual

262

The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change

in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the

THRESHOLD field is set to -60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to -∞. (This illustration shows

the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is ,

the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.)

NOTE

At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high

level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited;

For details, refer to the control I/O specification in the CL data list (at the end of this manual).

FADER

START

FADER

TALLY

FADER

STOP

250 msec

Help function

Reference Manual

263

Help function

You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on

help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft

Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*.

* We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files

created by a third party other than Yamaha.

Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive

NOTE

A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the

help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you

press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the

help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently

pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.

NOTE

By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding

a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force

recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code

set when using your text editor to save the text file.

The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets /languages).

• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)

• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)

• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set

Viewing Help

 Operation in the HELP window

You can use the multifunction knob or screen buttons to access the HELP window.

• Turn multifunction knobs 1 and 2.

.............Scrolls the index area at the left.

• Turn multifunction knobs 3 - 8.

.............Scrolls the main area at the right.

• Pressing a link (underlined text) in the text

.............Scrolls to the linked destination.

• Pressing a window link (a location with an

 symbol and underlined text)

.............Closes the HELP window and opens the corresponding window.

• Pressing the button ........ Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently-

displayed location.

• Pressing the button ........ Returns to the preceding item in the history of links

you pressed.

• Pressing the button ........ Advances to the next item in the history of links you

pressed.

STEP

1. Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash

drive.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.

4. To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in

the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the multifunction knob in the

Centralogic section.

5. Press the LOAD button.

6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file.

SAVE/LOAD window

STEP

1. Load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the (Help) button.

3. To close the HELP window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access

Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP window.

Help function

Reference Manual

264

Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly

 Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys

 Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key

Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will

appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help

function is assigned.

 Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller

While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,

press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is

available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.

To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is

assigned.

NOTE

• Panel controllers (other than the faders and the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will not function as long

as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.

• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to

successively display these explanations.

 Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen

While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function,

press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available

for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.

To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is

assigned.

NOTE

• The on-screen controllers will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER

DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.

• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to

successively display these explanations.

STEP

1. Load the Help file from your USB flash drive.

2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.

3. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.

4. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.

5. In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER

DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.

6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.

7. Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.

8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.

SETUP screen USER SETUP window (USER

DEFINED KEYS page)

Other functions

Reference Manual

265

Other functions

This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other

chapters.

Initializing the unit to factory default settings

If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot

operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.

There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below.

INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES

The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default

settings.

INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES

The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its

factory default settings.

CAUTION

The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation

only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory.

However, the settings in DANTE SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to

“Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings” (page 269).

NOTE

• Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.

• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead

of pressing the EXIT button.

Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen

(Calibration function)

Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch

screen.

NOTE

• If you are unable to start calibration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you

can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and

then press the [STORE] key to start.

• To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and

posture in which you normally operate the unit.

• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead

of pressing the EXIT button.

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the

power to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method.

3. Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization.

4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization.

5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button

on the startup menu screen.

Startup menu screen

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the

power to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.

3. Press the START button in the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen.

4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start calibration.

5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each

location at which it appears.

6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

Startup menu screen TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

MODE screen

Other functions

Reference Manual

266

Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)

Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may

occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these

discrepancies.

NOTE

The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be

semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader

settings while the CL is starting up.

NOTE

• Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3.

• If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute

calibration once again.

• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead

of pressing the EXIT button.

Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration

function)

If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.

NOTE

• If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset

to 0 dB.

The factory settings are also 0 dB.

• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead

of pressing the EXIT button.

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the

power to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button.

3. Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate.

4. Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen.

5. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.

6. Each of the specified faders will move to -∞ (all the way down). If the fader positions

are not correct, move them manually to -∞ (all the way down).

7. After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button.

8. Repeat steps 6 to 7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB (all the way

up).

When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts.

9. When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button.

10. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

Startup menu screen

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the

power to the CL unit.

2. In the MODE SELECT field on the startup menu screen, press the button for the item

you want to adjust.

3. Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction

knob to adjust the value.

4. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

Startup menu screen

Other functions

Reference Manual

267

• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)

Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the

specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.

• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)

Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the

specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.

• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)

Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the

output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.

Other functions

Reference Manual

268

Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)

If necessary, you can adjust the channel colors. Adjust the channel colors one by one.

NOTE

• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on

those models will not be shown.

• You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously.

• The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB

values.

• To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default

setting, press the RESET ALL button.

• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation

by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT

button.

Adjusting the brightness of the channel name

display

If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.

NOTE

Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the

EXIT button.

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the

power to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.

3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust

the color.

4. Press one of the color buttons in the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen

to select the desired color.

5. While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the

other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use multifunction

knobs 6, 7, and 8 to adjust the color.

6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the

right of the screen to confirm the change.

7. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION

MODE screen

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power

to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.

3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.

Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will

decrease the brightness.

4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the

right of the screen to confirm the change.

5. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

Other functions

Reference Manual

269

Adjusting the contrast of the channel name

display

If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.

NOTE

• The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.

• Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the

EXIT button.

Initializing the console settings and Dante audio

network settings

It is possible for Dante-related settings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error

occurs on the Dante audio network.

CAUTION

When you initialize, all console settings including the Dante audio network settings that had

been previously saved in memory will be lost.

Disconnect all connections from the Dante audio network before initializing.

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power

to the CL unit.

2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.

3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multifunction knob 1 in the Centralogic

section.

Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward

the right will darken the contrast of all channels.

4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels,

hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key.

Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast.

5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the

right of the screen to confirm the change.

6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal

operating mode.

STEP

1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key and [INC] key on the panel,

turn on the power to the CL unit.

2. A message indicates that initialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button.

Other functions

Reference Manual

270

Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware

If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the NAME

SUB CPU firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “CL5/CL3/CL1 Firmware

Update Guide”.

Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.

To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.

Update function to Dante firmware

If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the Dante

module firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “CL5/CL3/CL1 Firmware

Update Guide”.

Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding.

To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button.

Warning/Error Messages

Reference Manual

271

Warning/Error Messages

Message Meaning

5.1SOLO : Only input cue is enabled.

If switched to Surround mode, only the input channel can be cue-

monitored when CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO. (Attempted to cue-

monitor a different channel.)

xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.

xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized.

xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.

xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy

Buffer.

Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.

ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off! ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.

Cannot Assign!

In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to

edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.

Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked.

Cannot Mount This Type of Device in

This Position.

You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot

be mounted.

Cannot Open This Page. This window cannot be opened.

Cannot Paste to Different Parameter

Type!

The parameter cannot be pasted to a different type.

Cannot Paste! Cannot paste the character string.

Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library.

Cannot Select This Channel.

You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your

user level or some other reason.

Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library.

Cannot Undo! You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available.

Channel Copied. Channel settings have been copied.

Channel Moved. Channel settings have been moved.

Channel Returned to Default Settings. Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.

Console initialized due to memory

mismatch.

All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup

memory has been lost, due to an update or failure of the backup

battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service

center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document).

Corrupted data fixed! The data was fixed.

Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.

Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.

Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx].

DANTE audio resource overflow. There are insufficient audio resources on the Dante audio network.

DANTE Connection Error!

The primary and secondary connections are incorrect in the daisy

chain connections.

DANTE is not working by GIGA bit. GIGA bit is not working on the Dante audio network.

DANTE is working at Secondary. The Dante audio network is working on a secondary port.

DANTE module Error! An error has occurred in a Dante module.

DANTE switched to secondary port.

Only the SECONDARY PORT is used, even though a CL series

console is being used via a redundancy connection.

DCA ROLL-OUT : DCA members

scrolling.

In DCA ROLL-OUT mode, the content is scrolled left to right in the

block.

Different File Format! Some Data was

not Loaded.

Data in an unsupported format was loaded.

Directory Not Empty!

You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files

remaining in the directory.

Editor: Data Framing Error!

Editor: Data Overrun!

Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor.

Editor: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at CL Editor’s input port.

Editor: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from CL Editor’s output port.

EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.

CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup

window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.

Error occurred at Secondary Port.

The network cable of a redundant secondary port has been

disconnected.

External HA Connection Conflict!

External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of

connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was

stored.

External Power Supply is Cut Off!

The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console

has stopped operating.

Fader Bank Snapshot is Done. A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings.

File Access is Busy!

The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB

flash drive is being accessed.

File Already Exists!

The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same

name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.

File Error [xx]! Internal file access error

File Protected!

Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is

write-protected.

Flash Memory Initializing Finished. Memory initialization has been completed.

Help File Not Found! The help file has not been loaded.

Illegal Address! The IP address or gateway address settings are invalid.

Illegal DIP Switch Setting. The R series DIP switch settings are invalid.

Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use

Ethernet.

Communication via the Network connector is not possible because

the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason.

Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the

Owner’s Manual (separate document).

Illegal MAC Address! The MAC Address is invalid.

Illegal Storage Format!

The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is

invalid or unsupported.

Message Meaning

Warning/Error Messages

Reference Manual

272

Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!

The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively,

some other problem has occurred. Please contact your Yamaha

service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate

document).

Internal Power Supply is Turned On. The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally.

Invalid value

The MonitorMix application PIN that is set on the CL series console

must be a 4-digit numeric password.

KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.

KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the

DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen.

LIBRARY #xxx is Empty! No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall.

Loading Aborted. Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.

Loading Finished. Finished loading from USB flash drive.

Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low.

Maximum Number of Audio Files

Exceeded!

The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory

recorder has been exceeded.

Memory Error. The R series backup memory is corrupted.

MIDI: Data Framing Error!

MIDI: Data Overrun!

An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.

MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.

MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.

Monitor Assignment is Restricted to

Max. 8 Sources!

The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be

selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.

No Access From Recorder!

In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher

than \YPE\SONGS\.

No Channel Selected.

A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE

screen.

No Copy Item Selected.

In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having

selected an item to paste.

No Corresponding Help Items. The corresponding section was not found in the Help file.

No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit. The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.

No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR.

No Response from I/O DEVICE. The I/O devices not responding.

Operating as the word clock master. This console is the Clock Master.

Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.

Parameter out of range!

Some data could not be loaded because the parameters do not

match.

Password Changed. The password has been changed.

PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!

Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in

progress.

PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.

CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from

the RECORDER screen to another screen.

Please use Dante Controller. The Dante Patch settings from the console are not valid.

Message Meaning

Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding

now.

You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when

patching was not possible.

Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!

The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please

contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s

Manual (separate document).

PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This

Function.

The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used

during Preview.

PREVIEW Mode : Disabled Preview was disabled.

PREVIEW Mode : Enabled Preview was enabled.

Processing Aborted. Processing was interrupted.

Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!

The button operation was canceled because recorder processing

required time.

RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] ! A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.

RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.

CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from

the RECORDER screen to another screen.

Re-Enter Password!

When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a

second time.

REMOTE: Data Framing Error!

REMOTE: Data Overrun!

Invalid signals are being input to the Remote connector.

REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the Remote connector.

REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the Remote connector.

Removed from the Channel Link group. The channel was removed from the link group.

Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.

Saving Finished. Finished saving to USB flash drive.

SCENE #xxx is Empty!

No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the

data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.

SCENE #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.

SCENE #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.

Scene Playback Link Canceled! The audio playback link for the scene was canceled.

SLOT x: Data Framing Error!

SLOT x: Data Overrun!

Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port.

Some Song Files Are Unidentified.

Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified

might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK.

Song File Not Found!

The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a

USER DEFINED key does not exist.

STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!

STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!

Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.

STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.

STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.

Message Meaning

Warning/Error Messages

Reference Manual

273

STEREO Mode : Cannot Use This

Function.

You cannot use this function in Stereo mode.

STEREO MODE ON. The console has switched to Stereo mode.

Storage Full!

The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the

USB flash drive.

Storage Not Found! The USB flash drive could not be recognized.

Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.

SURROUND Mode : Cannot Use This

Function.

You cannot use this function in Surround mode.

SURROUND MODE ON. The console has switched to Surround mode.

Sync Error! [xxx] The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.

Tap Operation Ignored.

Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not

displayed in the screen.

Target device is in WGM Mode.

Operation Denied.

Attempted to operate RMio64-D when the mounted RMio64-D is in

WGM mode (RMio64-D operating as a member of the NUAGE

Workgroup).

This Operation is Not Allowed.

This operation has been ignored because the current user does not

have permission.

This Operation is Not Allowed in This

View.

This function is not allowed in this screen.

Too Large File! Loading Failed.

Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The

maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.

Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The

maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes.

Too Many Bands Used! Cannot

Compare.

Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed

because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.

Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to

Flex15GEQ.

Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because

more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.

Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!

Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has

exceeded the rated value.

Unassigned Encoder.

Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that

corresponds to the knob you operated.

Unit Fan has Malfunctioned The fan in the R series console has malfunctioned.

Unit ID Duplicated! The UNIT ID is duplicated on the Dante audio network.

Unsupported File Format!

The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an

unsupported format.

USB Currently Active for Recorder

function!

Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory

recorder is recording or playing.

USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!

The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library

data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.

USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!

Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash

drive processing.

USB Memory Full !

Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free

space on the USB flash drive.

Message Meaning

USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.

Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive

capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.

USB Memory is Protected! The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on.

USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder

Stopped.

Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was

disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.

USB over current Error! Disconnect USB

device.

The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB

current.

USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x].

The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B,

C, or D.)

Version Changed. All Memories were

Initialized.

The current memory was initialized when the version was updated.

Version mismatch. The versions of this console and the R series console do not match.

Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!

Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was

lost.

Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio file is invalid.

Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect.

Wrong Word Clock!

The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source

selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen

is not appropriate.

You Cannot Create User Key.

The current user does not have permission to create a user

authentication key.

Message Meaning

Appendices

Reference Manual

274

Index

Numerics

8BandPEQ .................................................. 143

Assignable encoders ................................... 225

Audio file (links to a scene recall)................ 106

AUTOMIXER ............................................... 146

Automixer .................................................... 146

BUS SETUP window ................................... 243

Calibration ................................... 265, 266, 268

Cascade connections .................................. 239

Centralogic section........................................ 13

Channel color ........................................ 30, 268

Channel colors ............................................ 244

Channel Job .................................................. 71

Channel library ........................................ 54, 63

Channel Link ................................................. 82

Console Lock............................................... 229

Control change

control parameters................................... 188

Copying, moving, or initializing a channel ..... 87

Cue...................................................... 109, 116

Operating................................................. 118

Custom fader bank ...................................... 227

Dante audio network ................................... 246

Dante audio network ..................................... 18

DAW ............................................................ 197

DCA group..................................................... 71

Directly outputting.......................................... 26

Dynamics................................................. 64, 67

Libraries..................................................... 70

Effect ........................................................... 135

Libraries................................................... 166

Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 155

EQ.................................................................. 64

Libraries ..................................................... 70

External head amps ............................. 167, 178

Factory set ................................................... 265

Fade function ............................................... 103

Focus Recall function................................... 102

Function Tree................................................... 4

Functions that can be assigned to

the assignable encoders............................. 226

Gain ............................................................... 31

Analog gain ................................................ 31

Gain Compensation ....................................... 37

Global Paste function..................................... 99

GPI............................................................... 257

Graphic EQ .......................................... 135, 139

Libraries ................................................... 166

HA .................................................................. 31

Head Amp ...................................................... 31

Help function ................................................ 263

I/O devices ................................................... 167

Initializing ..................................................... 265

INPUT channels

Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ..................... 42

Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 37

Input channels................................................ 28

Channel library ........................................... 54

Specifying channel name and icon ............ 29

Input Delay..................................................... 47

Input patch ..................................................... 19

Inserting ......................................................... 23

Internal clock................................................ 245

Internal effects ............................................. 148

Lamp brightness .......................................... 244

LED .............................................................. 244

Libraries ................................................. 70, 166

Library .......................................................... 186

Master fader ................................................ 228

MATRIX buses ...................................... 59, 243

MBCL (option) ............................................. 134

Meter bridge (option) ................................... 134

METER screen ............................................ 130

Meters.......................................................... 130

MIDI ............................................................. 183

MIX buses.................................................... 243

MIX channels

Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 59

Sending to STEREO/MONO bus............... 57

MIX MINUS.................................................... 91

MIX/MATRIX buses ....................................... 42

Monitor................................................. 109, 110

Mute group .................................................... 76

Name displays ............................................. 244

Network address.......................................... 245

Nuendo Live ................................................ 200

Oscillator.............................................. 125, 127

Output channels ............................................ 55

Channel library........................................... 63

Specifying channel name and icon ............ 56

Output Delay.................................................. 62

Output patch .................................................. 20

OVERVIEW Screen....................................... 14

Patching......................................................... 18

Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)................ 222

Preferences ................................................. 213

PREMIUM RACK......................................... 156

Premium Rack

Libraries ................................................... 166

Using........................................................ 156

PREVIEW mode .......................................... 108

Program change

recall operation ........................................ 186

Recall Safe function....................................... 79

Scene

Editing ....................................................... 97

SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6

SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ............. 7

Setup........................................................... 204

SETUP screen............................................. 204

Slot .............................................................. 237

Solo function................................................ 121

STEREO/MONO bus............................... 37, 57

STEREO/MONO channels

Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 59

Surround...................................................... 114

SURROUND SETUP screen....................... 205

Talkback ...................................................... 125

Title list ........................................................ 196

TOUCH AND TURN .................................... 222

Touch screen............................................... 244

USB flash drive

Formatting ............................................... 236

Help/text file

loading..................................................... 263

Loading a file ........................................... 233

Playing back audio files........................... 195

Recording ................................................ 193

Saving and loading setup data ................ 230

USB memory recorder................................. 191

Assigning channels ................................. 191

USER DEFINED keys ................................. 215

Functions that can be assigned............... 217

Recalling Help ......................................... 264

USER DEFINED knobs ............................... 222

Functions that can be assigned............... 223

User settings ............................................... 206

Viewing Help ............................................... 263

Virtual rack .................................................. 135

operations................................................ 136

Appendices

Reference Manual

275

Warning/Error Messages............................. 271

WIRELESS.................................................. 176

Word clock................................................... 237

Table of Contents

EQ Library List.................................................................... 2

DYNAMICS Library List ...................................................... 3

Dynamics Parameters......................................................... 5

Effect Type List.................................................................... 7

Effects Parameters.............................................................. 8

Premium Rack Processor Parameters ................................ 20

Parameters That Can Be Assigned to

Control Changes ............................................................. 23

NRPN Parameter Assignments .......................................... 26

Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability........................... 30

MIDI Data Format ............................................................... 36

Input/output characteristics................................................. 43

Electrical Characteristics .................................................... 45

Mixer Basic Parameters...................................................... 46

Pin Assignment Chart......................................................... 47

MIDI Implementation Chart................................................. 48

Data List

EQ Library List

• Libraries created by the user also include type parameters

and BYPASS parameters (ON/OFF) for each band.

• The type parameter for all read-only presets is “LEGACY

(TYPE1).”

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

01 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB -3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 1.25 10.0 0.90 -

02 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 -

03 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 -

04 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q - 10.0 0.70 0.10

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

Q 1.4 10.0 1.25 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

Q - 8.0 0.90 -

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q -0.501.0 -

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q - 4.5 0.56 -

09 E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q -5.04.5-

10 E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q 0.10 5.0 6.3 -

11 Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 0.10 8.0 4.5 -

12 Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.6 8.0 2.2 -

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q -8.00.90-

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 5.6 10.0 0.70 -

15 E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 0.18 10.0 6.3 -

16 E. G. Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0

17 E. G. Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

Q 8.0 0.40 0.16 -

18 E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q -9.010.0-

19 E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +6.0 dB -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q - 10.0 4.0 -

20 A. G. Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 -

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

21 A. G. Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

Q -9.04.5-

22 A. G. Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q -4.54.50.125

23 A. G. Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

Q -7.04.5-

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING

G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

25 Male Vocal 1

PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

26 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 -

27 Female Vo. 1

PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING

G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

28 Female Vo. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q -0.160.20-

29 Chorus & Harmo

PEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKINGPEAKING

G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0

30 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

Q 7.0 2.2 5.6 -

31 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 -

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Data List

DYNAMICS Library List

32 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

Q - 0.28 0.70 -

33 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40

34 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q -4.52.80.10

35 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q - 4.5 1.25 -

36 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 -

37 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 -

38 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10

39 Fine-EQ Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q -4.51.8-

40 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 -

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

# Title Type Parameter Value

1Gate GATE

Threshold (dB) -26

Range (dB) -56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

2Ducking DUCKING

Threshold (dB) -19

Range (dB) -22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

3A. Dr. BD GATE

Threshold (dB) -11

Range (dB) -53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

4A. Dr. SN GATE

Threshold (dB) -8

Range (dB) -23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

5De-Esser DE-ESSER

Threshold (dB) -8

Frequency (kHz) 2.00

Type HPF

Q1.6

6Comp COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 30

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

7Expand EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

8Compander (H)COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

9Compander (S)COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) -11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) -1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) -20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) -3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

# Title Type Parameter Value

Data List

* At fs=44.1 kHz

18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 s

# Title Type Parameter Value

26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) -2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

# Title Type Parameter Value

34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

35 Chorus COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

36 Click Erase EXPANDER

Threshold (dB) -33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

37 Announcer COMPANDER-H

Threshold (dB) -14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) -2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) -3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.90 s

39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR

Threshold (dB) -16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

# Title Type Parameter Value

Data List

Dynamics Parameters

Dynamics Parameters are the following types.

 GATE

A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).

 DUCKING

Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is

reduced automatically when an announcer speaks.

When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is

attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).

Input channels Output channels

DYNAMIC section 1 DYNAMIC section 2 DYNAMIC section 1

Type

GATE COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR

DUCKING

COMPANDER-H

(Compander Hard)

EXPANDER

COMPRESSOR

COMPANDER-S

(Compander Soft)

COMPANDER-H

(Compander Hard)

EXPANDER DE-ESSER

COMPANDER-S

(Compander Soft)

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) -72 to 0 (73 points)

This determines the level at which the gate

effect is applied.

RANGE (dB) -∞, -69 to 0 (71 points)

This determines the amount of attenuation

when the gate closes.

ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)

This determines how fast the gate opens when

the signal exceeds the threshold level.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points)

This determines how long the gate stays open

once the trigger signal has fallen below the

threshold.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how fast the gate closes once

the hold time has expired. The value is

expressed as the duration required for the level

to change by 6 dB.

Input Level

Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)

This determines the level of trigger signal

(KEY IN) required to activate ducking.

RANGE (dB) -70 to 0 (71 points)

This determines the amount of attenuation

when ducking is activated.

ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is ducked

once the ducker has been triggered.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points)

This determines how long ducking remains

active once the trigger signal has fallen below

the THRESHOLD level.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the ducker returns

to its normal gain once the trigger signal level

drops below the threshold. The value is

expressed as the duration required for the level

to change by 6 dB.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Data List

 COMPRESSOR

The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified

RATIO.

The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the

level to the threshold. This means that the limiter's output level never actually exceeds the

threshold.

 EXPANDER

An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)

This determines the level at which

compression is applied.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of compression,

that is, the change in output signal level

relative to change in input signal level.

ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal will be

compressed once the compressor has been

triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor

returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level drops below the threshold. The

value is expressed as the duration required for

the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)

This sets the compressor's output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1-5 (6 points)

This determines how compression is applied

at the threshold. For higher knee settings,

compression is applied gradually as the signal

exceeds the specified threshold, creating a

more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard,

OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)

• Time Series Analysis

(RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)

This determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the expander.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of expansion.

ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the expander

returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level exceeds the threshold.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the signal is

expanded once the signal level drops below

the threshold. The value is expressed as the

duration required for the level to change by 6

dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)

This sets the expander's output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1-5 (6 points)

This determines how expansion is applied at

the threshold. For higher knee settings,

expansion is applied gradually as the signal

exceeds the specified threshold, creating a

more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard,

OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)

• Time Series Analysis

(RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

Data List



COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)

The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.

The companders function differently at the following levels:

1 0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter.

2 Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor.

3 Below the threshold and width ..........Functions as an expander.

The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an

expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to

maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.

* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.

* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and

expansion processes.

 DE-ESSER

This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the

vocal.

Effect Type List

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)

This determines the level at which compression is

applied.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)

This determines the amount of compression.

ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is compressed or

expanded once the compander has been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor or

expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger

signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold

respectively. The value is expressed as the duration

required for the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) -18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level.

WIDTH (dB) 1-90 (90 points)

This determines how far below the threshold

expansion will be applied. The expander is activated

when the level drops below the threshold and width.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD -54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied.

FREQUENCY 1kHz-12.5kHz (45 points)

Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high

frequencies.

TYPE HPF, BPF Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.

Q 10.0-0.10 (41 points) Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.

0dB

Input Level

Output Level

WIDTH

THRESHOLD

Title Type Description

REV-X Hall REV-X HALL New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay,

and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.

Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X HALL,

REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.

REV-X Room REV-X ROOM

REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE

Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate

Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate

Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb

Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb

Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections

Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections

Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay

Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay

Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation

Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay

Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback

Chorus CHORUS Chorus

Flange FLANGE Flanger

Symphonic SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation

than normal chorus

Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter

Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger

Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter

HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results

Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter

Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo

Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner

Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation

Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator

Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter

Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter

Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

RevChorus REVCHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel

RevFlange REVFLANGE Reverb and flanger in series

Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel

RevSympho. REVSYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series

RevPan REVPAN Reverb and auto-pan in series

Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel

DelayEr. DELAYER. Delay and early reflections in series

Data List

Effects Parameters

 REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE

Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich

reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the

original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X

HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.

 REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.

Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

DelayRev DELAYREV Delay and reverb in series

DistDelay DISTDELAY Distortion and delay in series

Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)

Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler

Distortion DISTORTION Distortion

Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation

Comp276 COMP276

This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has

become a sought-after classic in recording studios.

Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of COMP276.

Comp260 COMP260

This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter

1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.

Comp260S COMP260S This is a stereo model of the COMP260.

Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601

This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It

can be used to obtain a sense of drive.

OpenDeck OPENDECK

This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by

two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.

M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor

M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor

Title Type Description

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.28-27.94 s

*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending

on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.

Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1-1.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz-18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting

DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

ROOM SIZE 0-28 Size of room

DECAY 0-53 Gate closing speed

HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 1.00 kHz-18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0-100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb

E/R BAL. 0-100%

Balance of early reflections and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0-120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

*1. 0.02 ms-2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms-1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

*2. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Data List

 STEREO REVERB

Two input, two output stereo reverb.

 EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reflections.

 GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.

 MONO DELAY

One input, one output basic repeat delay.

 STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type

INI. DLY 0.0-100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

E/R BAL. 0-100%

Balance of early reflections and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing

LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0-10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density

ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections

FB GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing

LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0-10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections

FB GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0-2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo

setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L -99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R -99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

Data List

 MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.

 DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).

 ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.

 CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0-2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0-2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE C

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L -99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R -99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LR FBG -99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

RL FBG -99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FBL

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback

DELAY

NOTE FBR

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback

DELAY

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Data List

 FLANGE

Two input, two output flange effect.

 SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

 PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

 DYNA.FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0-100 Delay time offset

FB.GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Data List

 DYNA.PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.

 HQ.PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.

 DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

 TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source:

input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

FB.GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Parameter Range Description

PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine

DELAY 0.0-1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1-10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine

LEVEL 1 -100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse

phase)

PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1 0.0-1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1 -99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1-10 Pitch shift precision

PITCH 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine

LEVEL 2 -100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse

phase)

PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2 0.0-1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2 -99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay

NOTE 2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Data List

 AUTOPAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

 ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

 RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

 MOD.FILTER

Two input, two output modulation filter.

 DYNA.FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. LR, LR, LR , Tu rn L, Tur n R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST

Rotation speed

(see SLOW and FAST parameters)

SLOW 0.05-10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05-10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE 0-100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0-10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW 0-100 Low-frequency filter

HIGH 0-100 High-frequency filter

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0-5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM DEPTH 0-100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

FM NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET 0-100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0-20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0-100 Output level

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source:

input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay speed

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET 0-100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0-20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0-100 Output level

Data List

 REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

 REVCHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.

 REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.

 REVFLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV/CHO 0-100%

Reverb and chorus balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0-100%

Reverb and chorused reverb balance

(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV/FLG 0-100%

Reverb and flange balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0-100%

Reverb and flanged reverb balance

(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Data List

 REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.

 REVSYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.

 REVPAN

This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.

 DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV/SYM 0-100%

Reverb and symphonic balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0-100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb balance

(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

REV.BAL 0-100%

Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all

reverb)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY/ER 0-100%

Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early

reflections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing

LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density

ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections

SYNC OFF/ON

Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY

Data List

 DELAYER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.

 DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.

 DELAYREV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY.BAL 0-100%

Delay and early reflected delay balance

(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reflection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing

LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density

ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY/REV 0-100%

Delay and reverb balance

(0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

DLY.BAL 0-100%

Delay and delayed reverb balance

(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency

REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread)

DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY

Parameter Range Description

Data List

 DISTDELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.

 MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).

 FREEZE

One input, two output basic sampler.

 DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0-100 Master volume

TONE -10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo

setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth

DLY.BAL 0-100%

Distortion and delay balance

(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

LEVEL 1 0-100 Filter 1 level

RESO. 1 0-20 Filter 1 resonance

TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

LEVEL 2 0-100 Filter 2 level

RESO. 2 0-20 Filter 2 resonance

TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 3 0-100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 3 0-20 Filter 3 resonance

Parameter Range Description

REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY

buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the

REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.

REC DLY -1000 to +1000 ms

Recording delay.

For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus

values, recording starts before the trigger is received.

PLY MODE

MOMENT, CONTI.,

INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is

pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has

been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP

NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.

TRG LVL -60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or

playback)

TRG MASK 0-1000 ms

Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the

duration of the TRG MASK time.

START

*1. 0.0-5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms-5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)

Playback start point in milliseconds

END

Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP

Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP

NUM

0-100 Number of times the sample plays

PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift

FINE -50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine

MIDI TRG OFF, C1-C6, ALL The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.

START

[SAMPLE]

0-131000 Playback start point in samples

END

[SAMPLE]

0-131000 Playback end point in samples

LOOP

[SAMPLE]

0-131000 Loop start point in samples

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0-100 Master volume

TONE -10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction

Data List

 AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

 COMP276

This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in

recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You

can control two monaural channels independently.

 COMP276S

This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in

recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You

can link and control the L and R channel parameters.

 COMP260

This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard

for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several

parameters via stereo links.

 COMP260S

This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard

for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0-100 Master volume

BASS 0-100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0-100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0-100 High tone control

N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction

CAB DEP 0-100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

Parameter Range Description

INPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level

OUTPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain

RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor

ATTACK 1 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor

RELEASE1 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH1 compressor

MAKE UP1 OFF, ON

Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is

applied

SIDEHPF1 OFF, ON

When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the

compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing

the low range.

INPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level

OUTPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain

RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor

ATTACK 2 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor

RELEASE2 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor

MAKE UP2 OFF, ON

Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is

applied

SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON

When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the

compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing

the low range.

Parameter Range Description

INPUT -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the input level

OUTPUT -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the output gain

RATIO 1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor

ATTACK 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor

RELEASE 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of the compressor

MAKE UP OFF, ON

Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is

applied

SIDE HPF OFF, ON

When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the

compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing

the low range.

Parameter Range Description

THRE.1 -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH compressor

KNEE1 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH1 compressor

ATTACK1 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor

RELEASE1 6.2-999 ms Release time of CH1 compressor

RATIO1 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio for CH1 compressor

OUTPUT1 -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain

THRE.2 -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH2 compressor

KNEE2 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH2 compressor

ATTACK2 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor

RELEASE2 6.2-999 ms Release time of CH2 compressor

RATIO2 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio of CH2 compressor

OUTPUT2 -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain

ST LINK OFF, ON

Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and

RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked

Parameter Range Description

THRE. -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor

KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of the compressor

ATTACK 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of the compressor

RELEASE 6.2-999 ms Release time of the compressor

RATIO 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio of the compressor

OUTPUT -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the output gain

Data List

 EQUALIZER601

This effect emulates the characteristics of 70's analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion

of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.

 OPENDECK

It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck

and a playback deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such

as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc.

 M.BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamically controlled processor, with individual solo and gain

reduction metering for each band.

Parameter Range Description

LO TYPE HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2 Type of EQ1

LO F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Cut-off frequency of EQ1

LO G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ1

MID1 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ2

MID1 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ2

MID1 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ2

MID2 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ3

MID2 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ3

MID2 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ3

INPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB Input gain

OUTPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB Output gain

MID3 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ4

MID3 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ4

MID3 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ4

MID4 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ5

MID4 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ5

MID4 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ5

HI TYPE LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2 Type of EQ6

HI F

16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz

*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)

Cut-off frequency of EQ6

HI G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6

LO SW OFF, ON Switches EQ1 on/off

MID1 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ2 on/off

MID2 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ3 on/off

MID3 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ4 on/off

MID4 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ5 on/off

HI SW OFF, ON Switches EQ6 on/off

TYPE CLEAN, DRIVE

Selects the equalizer type.

The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound,

emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The

DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog

flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.

Parameter Range Description

REC DEC

Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,

Amer70

Selects the recording deck type

REC LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB

Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape

compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts

the sound.

REC HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck

REC BIAS -1.00 to +1.00 Adjusts the bias of the recording deck

REPR DEC

Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,

Amer70

Selects the playback deck type

REPR LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the output level of the playback deck

REPR HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck

REPR LO -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck

MAKE UP Off, On

When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change,

maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of

distortion without changing the output level.

TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips Selects the tape speed

TP KIND Old, New Selects the tape type

Parameter Range Description

L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands

M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands

SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope

LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain

MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain

HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain

TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain

CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level

CMP.THRE -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor

CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the compressor

CMP.ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the compressor

CMP.REL

Release time of the compressor

CMP.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the compressor

CMP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor

EXP.THRE -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB Threshold of the expander

EXP.RAT 1:1 to 5:1 Ratio of the expander

EXP.REL

Release time of the expander

EXP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the expander

LIM.THRE -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the limiter

Data List

 M.BAND COMP

Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for

each band.

Premium Rack Processor Parameters

 Portico5033

This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.

 Portico5043

This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.

LIM.ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the limiter

LIM.REL

Release time of the limiter

LIM.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the limiter

LIM.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the limiter

PRESENCE -10 to +10

Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the

threshold of the low band. Negative (-) values do the opposite. If this is

set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.

LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay

MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level

*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Parameter Range Description

L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands

M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands

SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope

LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain

MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain

HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain

TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain

CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level

LOW THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the low band compressor

LOW RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the low band compressor

LOW ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the low band compressor

LOW REL

*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Release time of the low band compressor

LOW KNEE 0-5 Knee of the low band compressor

LOW BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the low band compressor

MID THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the mid band compressor

MID RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the mid band compressor

MID ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the mid band compressor

MID REL

Release time of the mid band compressor

MID KNEE 0-5 Knee of the mid band compressor

MID BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the mid band compressor

HI. THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the high band compressor

HI. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the high band compressor

HI. ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the high band compressor

HI. RAT

Release time of the high band compressor

HI. KNEE 0-5 Knee of the high band compressor

HI. BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the high band compressor

LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay

MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level

Parameter Range Description

ALL BYPASS OFF, ON

Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will

pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.

TRIM -12.0 to 12.0 dB Input gain

LF FREQ 30.00 to 300.0 Hz Center frequency of the LF band

LF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LF band

LMF IN OFF, ON Switches the LMF band on/off

LMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the LMF band

LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz Center frequency of the LMF band

LMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LMF band

MF IN OFF, ON Switches the MF band on/off

MF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the MF band

MF FREQ 330.0 to 2500 Hz Center frequency of the MF band

MF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the MF band

HMF IN OFF, ON Switches the HMF band on/off

HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the HMF band

HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz Center frequency of the HMF band

HMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HMF band

LF/HF IN OFF, ON Switches the LF/HF bands on/off

HF FREQ 2.50k to 25.0k Hz Center frequency of the HF band

HF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HF band

Parameter Range Description

IN OFF, ON

Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will

be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through

the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.

FB OFF, ON Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type

THRESHOLD -50.0 to 0.0 dB Threshold level

RATIO 1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio

ATTACK 20 to 75 ms Attack time

RELEASE 100 ms to 2.50 sec Release time

GAIN -6.0 to 20.0 dB Output level

Data List

 U76

This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.

 Opt-2A

This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.

 EQ-1A

This processor emulates a vintage EQ that's considered a classic example of a passive EQ.

 Dynamic EQ

This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the

input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or

expander.

 Buss Comp 369

Parameter Range Description

INPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Input level

OUTPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Output level

ATTACK 5.50 to 0.10 ms

Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right

produces the fastest attack.

RELEASE 1100.0 to 56.4 ms

Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right

produces the fastest release.

RATIO ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20

Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest

effect.

METER OFF, +4, +8, GR Switches the meter display

Parameter Range Description

GAIN -56.0 dB to 40.0 dB Output level

PEAK REDUCTION -48.0 dB to 48.0 dB Amount of gain reduction

RATIO 2.00 to 10.00 Compression ratio

METER SELECT

OUTPUT+10,

GAIN REDUCTION,

OUTPUT+4

Switches the meter display

Parameter Range Description

LOW FREQUENCY 20, 30, 60, 100 Hz Frequency range of the low range filter

(LOW) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the low range filter

(LOW) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter

HIGH FREQUENCY 3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter

(HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the high range filter

(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0 Band width of the high range filter

(HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter

(HIGH) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter

IN OFF, ON

Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section

will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the

input/output transformers and the amp circuit.

Parameter Range Description

BAND ON/OFF OFF, ON Turns the corresponding band on/off

SIDECHAIN CUE OFF, ON

If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will

be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.

SIDECHAIN LISTEN OFF, ON

If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics

will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/

MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.

FILTER TYPE Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter

FREQUENCY 20.0 to 20.0k Hz Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter

Q 15.0 to 0.50 Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter

THRESHOLD -80.0 to 10.0 dB Threshold value at which processing begins to apply

RATIO ∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50 Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal

MODE BELOW, ABOVE

Specifies whether the processor will operate when the

sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or

when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)

ATTACK/RELEASE FAST, SLOW, AUTO

Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is

applied

Parameter Range Description

INPUT ADJUST -15.0 to +15.0dB

Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there

is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if

INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output

gain is -5dB.

LINK ON, OFF Stereo link function (STEREO only)

METER IN, GR, OUT Meter switch (STEREO only)

VU IN, OUT Meter switch (DUAL only)

COMP IN ON, OFF Compressor on/off

COMP RATIO 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1 Ratio of the compressor

COMP GAIN 0.0 to +20.0dB Compressor gain

COMP RECOVERY

100ms, 400ms, 800ms,

1500ms, a1, a2

Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2

(auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically

between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically

between 50 ms and 5 sec.

COMP THRESHOLD -40 to -5dBFS Threshold of the compressor

LIMIT IN ON, OFF Limiter on/off

LIMIT ATTACK FAST, SLOW Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms

LIMIT RECOVERY

50ms, 100ms, 200ms,

800ms, a1, a2

Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto

2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between

100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms

and 5 sec.

LIMIT THRESHOLD -16 to -5 dBFS Threshold of the limiter

Data List

 MBC4

 Automixer Parameters

Parameter Range Description

LOW CROSSOVER 20 to 500Hz Crossover frequency between the low and low mid bands

MID CROSSOVER 80 to 10kHz Crossover frequency between the low mid and high mid bands

HIGH CROSSOVER 1k to 15kHz

Crossover frequency between the low high mid and high

bands

LOW GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB Low band gain

LOW THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of low band

LOW RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of low band

LOW ATTACK 0.1 to 120ms Attack time of low band

LOW RELEASE 5 to 1000ms Release time of low band

LOW COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of low band on/off

LOW CUE ON ON, OFF

If this is on, the low band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for

monitoring.

LOW MID GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB Low mid band gain

LOW MID

THRESHOLD

-80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of low mid band

LOW MID RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of low mid band

LOW MID ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of low mid band

LOW MID RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of low mid band

LOW MID COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of low mid band on/off

LOW MID CUE ON ON, OFF

If this is on, the low mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus

for monitoring.

HIGH MID GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB High mid band gain

HIGH MID

THRESHOLD

-80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of high mid band

HIGH MID RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of high mid band

HIGH MID ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of high mid band

HIGH MID RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of high mid band

HIGH MID COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of high mid band on/off

HIGH MID CUE ON ON, OFF

If this is on, the high mid band signal will be sent to the CUE

bus for monitoring.

HIGH GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB High band gain

HIGH THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of high band

HIGH RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of high band

HIGH ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of high band

HIGH RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of high band

HIGH COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of high band on/off

HIGH CUE ON ON, OFF

If this is on, the high band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for

monitoring.

MASTER GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB Master gain

KNEE HARD, 1, 2, 3, SOFT Knee of compressor

FLAVOUR VCA, OPTO Compressor type

HARMONICS ON, OFF Switches the harmonics on/off

LINK GAIN - Links and controls the gain of the four bands

LINK THRESHOLD - Links and controls the threshold of the four bands

LINK RATIO - Links and controls the ratio of the four bands

LINK ATTACK - Links and controls the attack time of the four bands

LINK RELEASE - Links and controls the release time of the four bands

Parameter Range Description

Group a, b, c Channel control field group

Override OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field

ChMode man, auto, mute Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute)

ChModePreset man, auto, mute Preset setting of the channel control field

Weight -100 to 15

Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel

control field

MeterType gain, input, output Meter type of the master field

MasterOverride OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the master field

MasterMute OFF, ON Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field

Gain 0 to 127

Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter

button of the master field is set to “gain”

InputLevel 0 to 127

Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button

of the master field is set to “input”

OutputLevel 0 to 127

Output level displayed for each channel when the meter

button of the master field is set to “output”

PostWeightingFilter 0 to 127 Level indicator of the channel control field

Parameter Range Description

Data List

Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

NO ASSIGN — —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-STEREO R

CH ON

INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

OUTPUT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

CUE

OUTPUT —

CUE MODE —

SURROUND CUE MODE —

FADER CUE RELEASE ON —

INPUT CUE POINT —

DCA CUE POINT —

OUTPUT CUE POINT —

DCA UNITY —

OUTPUT LEVEL H —

OUTPUT LEVEL L —

ACTIVE CUE —

CLEAR CUE —

SPECIFIC CH

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

DCA 1-DCA16

DCA

DCA 1-DCA 16FADER H

FADER L

DIRECT OUT ON

CH 1-CH 72

EFFECT

BYPASS

RACK1-8MIX BALANCE

PARAM 1 H - PARAM 32 L

FADER H

INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

OUTPUT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

FADER L

INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

OUTPUT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

GEQ

ON A

GEQ RACK1-GEQ RACK16

EFFECT RACK1- EFFECT

RACK8

ON B

GAIN 1A-GAIN 31A

GAIN 1B-GAIN 31B

INPUT ATT INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

INPUT DYNAMICS1

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RANGE

HOLD H

HOLD L

DECAY/RELEASE H

DECAY/RELEASE L

RATIO

KNEE

GAIN H

GAIN L

INPUT DYNAMICS2

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO/TYPE

GAIN H

GAIN L/Q

KNEE/WIDTH

FILTER FREQ

INPUT EQ

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

LOW Q

LOW FREQ

LOW GAIN

LOW MID Q

LOW MID FREQ

LOW MID GAIN

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID FREQ

HIGH MID GAIN

HIGH Q

HIGH FREQ

HIGH GAIN

LPF ON

LOW TYPE

HIGH TYPE

INPUT HPF

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

FREQ

INSERT

INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

OUTPUT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Data List

LCR

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

MIX 1-MIX 24

CSR

MIX/MATRIX SEND

MIX 1 ON - MIX24 ON

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON

MIX 1 POINT - MIX 24 POINT

MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT

MIX 1 H - MIX24H

MATRIX1 H - MATRIX8 H

MIX 1 L - MIX24L

MATRIX1 L - MATRIX8 L

MIX 1/2 PAN - MIX 23/24 PAN

MATRIX1/2 PAN - MATRIX7/8 PAN

MIX TO MATRIX

MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON

MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H

MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L

MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN

MIX TO STEREO

TO STEREO ON

MIX 1-MIX 24TO MONO ON

PAN

MONITOR

OUTPUT

—

SOURCE SELECT

DEFINE ASSIGN

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

OMNI 1-2-OMNI 7-8

PB OUT

DIMMER ON

—

PHONES LEVEL LINK

CUE INTERRUPTION

MONO MONITOR

MONITOR FADER H

MONITOR FADER L

DELAY AUTO BYPASS

DELAY ON

MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1-MASTER 8

OUTPUT ATT OUTPUT

MIX1-MIX24

MATRIX1-MATRIX8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

OUTPUT DYNAMICS1

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN H

GAIN L

KNEE/WIDTH

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

OUTPUT EQ

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

LOW Q

LOW FREQ

LOW GAIN

LOW MID Q

LOW MID FREQ

LOW MID GAIN

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID FREQ

HIGH MID GAIN

HIGH Q

HIGH FREQ

HIGH GAIN

LOW TYPE

HIGH TYPE

LOW HPF ON

HIGH LPF ON

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

PEQ

A/B LINK

GEQ RACK 1A-16B

EFFECT RACK 1A-8B

BAND1 BYPASS

BAND1 GAIN H

BAND1 GAIN L

BAND1 FREQ

BAND1 Q

BAND2 BYPASS

BAND2 GAIN H

BAND2 GAIN L

BAND2 FREQ

BAND2 Q

BAND3 BYPASS

BAND3 GAIN H

BAND3 GAIN L

BAND3 FREQ

BAND3 Q

BAND4 BYPASS

BAND4 GAIN H

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Data List

PEQ

BAND4 GAIN L

GEQ RACK 1A-16B

EFFECT RACK 1A-8B

BAND4 FREQ

BAND4 Q

BAND5 BYPASS

BAND5 GAIN H

BAND5 GAIN L

BAND5 FREQ

BAND5 Q

BAND6 BYPASS

BAND6 GAIN H

BAND6 GAIN L

BAND6 FREQ

BAND6 Q

BAND7 BYPASS

BAND7 GAIN H

BAND7 GAIN L

BAND7 FREQ

BAND7 Q

BAND8 BYPASS

BAND8 GAIN H

BAND8 GAIN L

BAND8 FREQ

BAND8 Q

HPF ON

HPF FREQ

HPF SLOPE

LPF ON

LPF FREQ

LPF SLOPE

NOTCH A ON

NOTCH A FREQ H

NOTCH A FREQ L

NOTCH A Q

NOTCH B ON

NOTCH B FREQ H

NOTCH B FREQ L

NOTCH B Q

NOTCH C ON

NOTCH C FREQ H

NOTCH C FREQ L

NOTCH C Q

PHASE INPUT

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

PREMIUM EFFECT A

BYPASS

RACK1-8

PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L

PREMIUM EFFECT B

BYPASS

RACK1-8

PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

RECALL SAFE ON

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

MIX 1-MIX 24

MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8

STEREO L-MONO(C)

GEQ RACK 1A-16B

EFFECT RACK 1A-8B

PREMIUM RACK 1A-8B

DCA 1-DCA16

STEREO TO MATRIX

MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT

STEREO L-MONO(C)

MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON

MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H

MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L

MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN

SURROUND MONITOR

SOURCE SELECT

—

2CH MONITOR ASSIGN

DOWNMIX

SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO

SURROUND SPEAKER L

SURROUND SPEAKER R

SURROUND SPEAKER C

SURROUND SPEAKER LFE

SURROUND SPEAKER Ls

SURROUND SPEAKER Rs

SURROUND PAN

LR PAN

SELECTED CH

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

FR PAN

FR PAN REVERSE

DIV

L ON

R ON

C ON

LFE ON

Ls ON

Rs ON

LFE LEVEL H

LFE LEVEL L

TO MONO ON

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

TO STEREO ON

CH 1-CH 72

STIN1L-STIN8R

*1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48

Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2

Data List

NRPN Parameter Assignments

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

FADER

INPUT 0000 0057

MIX1-20, MATRIX,

STEREO LR

0060 007D

INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL

MIX9 SEND 007E 00D5

MIX10 SEND 00DE 0135

MIX11 SEND 013E 0195

MIX12 SEND 019E 01F5

MIX13 SEND 01FE 0255

MIX14 SEND 025E 02B5

MIX15 SEND 02BE 0315

MIX16 SEND 031E 0375

INPUT to MATRIX1 - 4

LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 037E 03D5

MATRIX2 SEND 03DE 0435

MATRIX3 SEND 043E 0495

MATRIX4 SEND 049E 04F5

MIX1-20, STEREO LR to

MATRIX LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 04FE 0513

MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529

MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F

MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555

MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B

MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581

MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597

MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD

INPUT 05B6 060D

MIX1-20, MATRIX,

STEREO LR

0616 0633

INPUT to MIX9-16 ON

MIX9 SEND 0634 068B

MIX10 SEND 0694 06EB

MIX11 SEND 06F4 074B

MIX12 SEND 0754 07AB

MIX13 SEND 07B4 080B

MIX14 SEND 0814 086B

MIX15 SEND 0874 08CB

MIX16 SEND 08D4 092B

INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON

MATRIX1 SEND 0934 098B

MATRIX2 SEND 0994 09EB

MATRIX3 SEND 09F4 0A4B

MATRIX4 SEND 0A54 0AAB

MIX1-20, STEREO LR to

MATRIX ON

MATRIX1 SEND 0AB4 0AC9

MATRIX2 SEND 0ACA 0ADF

MATRIX3 SEND 0AE0 0AF5

MATRIX4 SEND 0AF6 0B0B

MATRIX5 SEND 0B0C 0B21

MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0B37

MATRIX7 SEND 0B38 0B4D

MATRIX8 SEND 0B4E 0B63

MIX1-8 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B

PHASE INPUT 0B6C 0BC3

INSERT ON

INPUT 0BCC 0C13

MIX1-20, MATRIX,

STEREO LR

0C2C 0C49

INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/

POST

MIX9 SEND 0C4A 0CA1

MIX10 SEND 0CAA 0D01

MIX11 SEND 0D0A 0D61

MIX12 SEND 0D6A 0DC1

MIX13 SEND 0DCA 0E21

MIX14 SEND 0E2A 0E81

MIX15 SEND 0E8A 0EE1

MIX16 SEND 0EEA 0F41

INPUT to MATRIX1-4

PRE/POST

MATRIX1 SEND 0F4A 0FA1

MATRIX2 SEND 0FAA 1001

MATRIX3 SEND 100A 1061

MATRIX4 SEND 106A 10C1

INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8

LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 10CA 10D1

MIX2 SEND 10D2 10D9

MIX3 SEND 10DA 10E1

MIX4 SEND 10E2 10E9

MIX5 SEND 10EA 10F1

MIX6 SEND 10F2 10F9

MIX7 SEND 10FA 1101

MIX8 SEND 1102 1109

INPUT57-64 to

MATRIX5-8 LEVEL

MATRIX5 SEND 110A 1111

MATRIX6 SEND 1112 1119

MATRIX7 SEND 111A 1121

MATRIX8 SEND 1122 1129

INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8

MIX1 SEND 112A 1131

MIX2 SEND 1132 1139

MIX3 SEND 113A 1141

MIX4 SEND 1142 1149

MIX5 SEND 114A 1151

MIX6 SEND 1152 1159

MIX7 SEND 115A 1161

MIX8 SEND 1162 1169

INPUT57-64 to

MATRIX5-8 ON

MATRIX5 SEND 116A 1171

MATRIX6 SEND 1172 1179

MATRIX7 SEND 117A 1181

MATRIX8 SEND 1182 1189

INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8

PRE/POST

MIX1 SEND 118A 1191

MIX2 SEND 1192 1199

MIX3 SEND 119A 11A1

MIX4 SEND 11A2 11A9

MIX5 SEND 11AA 11B1

MIX6 SEND 11B2 11B9

MIX7 SEND 11BA 11C1

MIX8 SEND 11C2 11C9

INPUT57-64 to

MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST

MATRIX5 SEND 11CA 11D1

MATRIX6 SEND 11D2 11D9

MATRIX7 SEND 11DA 11E1

MATRIX8 SEND 11E2 11E9

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

INPUT57-64 EQ

LOW TYPE 11EA 11F1

HIGH TYPE 11F2 11F9

INPUT57-64 HPF FREQ 11FA 1201

INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-

7/8 PAN

MIX1/2 1202 1209

MIX3/4 120A 1211

MIX5/6 1212 1219

MIX7/8 121A 1221

INPUT57-64 to

MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN

MATRIX5/6 1222 1229

MATRIX7/8 122A 1231

INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON 1232 1239

INPUT57-64 RECALL

SAFE

ON 123A 1241

INPUT57-64 to MONO ON 1242 1249

INPUT49-64

DYNAMICS1

RATIO 124A 1259

KNEE/WIDTH 125A 1269

GAIN 126A 1279

INPUT49-64

DYNAMICS2

reserved 127A 1289

FILTER FREQ 128A 1299

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8

RECALL SAFE

ON 129A 12A9

EQ INPUT, MIX1-20,

MATRIX, STEREO LR

ON 1304 1381

LOW Q 1382 13FF

LOW FREQ 1400 147D

LOW GAIN 147E 14FB

LOW MID Q 14FC 1579

LOW MID FREQ 157A 15F7

LOW MID GAIN 15F8 1675

HIGH MID Q 1676 16F3

HIGH MID FREQ 16F4 1771

HIGH MID GAIN 1772 17EF

HIGH Q 17F0 186D

HIGH FREQ 186E 18EB

HIGH GAIN 18EC 1969

ATT 196A 19C1

HPF ON 19E8 1A65

LPF ON 1A66 1AE3

INPUT DYNAMICS1

ON 1AE4 1B3B

ATTACK 1B44 1B9B

THRESHOLD 1BA4 1BFB

RANGE 1C04 1C5B

HOLD 1C64 1CBB

DECAY/RELEASE 1CC4 1D1B

INPUT DYNAMICS2 ON 1D24 1DA1

MIX1-20, MATRIX,

STEREO LR DYNAMICS1

ATTACK 1DA2 1E1F

THRESHOLD 1E20 1E9D

RELEASE 1E9E 1F1B

RATIO 1F1C 1F99

GAIN 1F9A 2017

KNEE/WIDTH 2018 2095

PAN/BALANCE INPUT 2096 20ED

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

Data List

INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16

PAN

MIX9/10 20F6 214D

MIX11/12 2156 21AD

MIX13/14 21B6 220D

MIX15/16 2216 226D

INPUT to MATRIX1/2,

3/4 PAN

MATRIX1/2 2276 22CD

MATRIX3/4 22D6 232D

MIX1-20, STEREO LR to

MATRIX PAN

MATRIX1/2 2336 234B

MATRIX3/4 234C 2361

MATRIX5/6 2362 2377

MATRIX7/8 2378 238D

MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 238E 2395

BALANCE

MIX1-20, MATRIX,

STEREO LR

2396 23B3

MIX, STEREO LR, MONO

to MATRIX PRE/POST

MATRIX1 SEND 23B4 23CE

MATRIX2 SEND 23D0 23EA

MATRIX3 SEND 23EC 2406

MATRIX4 SEND 2408 2422

MATRIX5 SEND 2424 243E

MATRIX6 SEND 2440 245A

MATRIX7 SEND 245C 2476

MATRIX8 SEND 2478 2492

MIX21-24, MONO to

MATRIX ON

MATRIX1 SEND 2494 2498

MATRIX2 SEND 249A 249E

MATRIX3 SEND 24A0 24A4

MATRIX4 SEND 24A6 24AA

MATRIX5 SEND 24AC 24B0

MATRIX6 SEND 24B2 24B6

MATRIX7 SEND 24B8 24BC

MATRIX8 SEND 24BE 24C2

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MIX1-8 LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 24C4 24D3

MIX2 SEND 24D4 24E3

MIX3 SEND 24E4 24F3

MIX4 SEND 24F4 2503

MIX5 SEND 2504 2513

MIX6 SEND 2514 2523

MIX7 SEND 2524 2533

MIX8 SEND 2534 2543

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MIX1-8 ON

MIX1 SEND 2544 2553

MIX2 SEND 2554 2563

MIX3 SEND 2564 2573

MIX4 SEND 2574 2583

MIX5 SEND 2584 2593

MIX6 SEND 2594 25A3

MIX7 SEND 25A4 25B3

MIX8 SEND 25B4 25C3

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MIX1-8 PRE/POST

MIX1 SEND 25C4 25D3

MIX2 SEND 25D4 25E3

MIX3 SEND 25E4 25F3

MIX4 SEND 25F4 2603

MIX5 SEND 2604 2613

MIX6 SEND 2614 2623

MIX7 SEND 2624 2633

MIX8 SEND 2634 2643

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MIX1/2-7/8 PAN

MIX1/2 2644 2653

MIX3/4 2654 2663

MIX5/6 2664 2673

MIX7/8 2674 2683

EFFECT RACK1-8

BYPASS 26B4 26BB

MIX BALANCE 26BC 26C3

PARAM1 26C4 26CB

PARAM2 26CC 26D3

PARAM3 26D4 26DB

PARAM4 26DC 26E3

PARAM5 26E4 26EB

PARAM6 26EC 26F3

PARAM7 26F4 26FB

PARAM8 26FC 2703

PARAM9 2704 270B

PARAM10 270C 2713

PARAM11 2714 271B

PARAM12 271C 2723

PARAM13 2724 272B

PARAM14 272C 2733

PARAM15 2734 273B

PARAM16 273C 2743

PARAM17 2744 274B

PARAM18 274C 2753

PARAM19 2754 275B

PARAM20 275C 2763

PARAM21 2764 276B

PARAM22 276C 2773

PARAM23 2774 277B

PARAM24 277C 2783

PARAM25 2784 278B

PARAM26 278C 2793

PARAM27 2794 279B

PARAM28 279C 27A3

PARAM29 27A4 27AB

PARAM30 27AC 27B3

PARAM31 27B4 27BB

PARAM32 27BC 27C3

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

GEQ RACK1A-3B

ON 27C4 27C9

GAIN1 27CA 27CF

GAIN2 27D0 27D5

GAIN3 27D6 27DB

GAIN4 27DC 27E1

GAIN5 27E2 27E7

GAIN6 27E8 27ED

GAIN7 27EE 27F3

GAIN8 27F4 27F9

GAIN9 27FA 27FF

GAIN10 2800 2805

GAIN11 2806 280B

GAIN12 280C 2811

GAIN13 2812 2817

GAIN14 2818 281D

GAIN15 281E 2823

GAIN16 2824 2829

GAIN17 282A 282F

GAIN18 2830 2835

GAIN19 2836 283B

GAIN20 283C 2841

GAIN21 2842 2847

GAIN22 2848 284D

GAIN23 284E 2853

GAIN24 2854 2859

GAIN25 285A 285F

GAIN26 2860 2865

GAIN27 2866 286B

GAIN28 286C 2871

GAIN29 2872 2877

GAIN30 2878 287D

GAIN31 287E 2883

FADER MIX21-24, MONO 28E4 28E8

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MIX1-8 LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929

MIX2 SEND 292A 2969

MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9

MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9

MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29

MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69

MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9

MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MATRIX5-8 LEVEL

MATRIX5 SEND 2AEA 2B29

MATRIX6 SEND 2B2A 2B69

MATRIX7 SEND 2B6A 2BA9

MATRIX8 SEND 2BAA 2BE9

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

Data List

MIX21-24, MONO to

MATRIX LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEE

MATRIX2 SEND 2BF0 2BF4

MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFA

MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C00

MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C06

MATRIX6 SEND 2C08 2C0C

MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C12

MATRIX8 SEND 2C14 2C18

ON MIX21-24, MONO 2C2A 2C2E

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MIX1-8 ON

MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F

MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF

MIX3 SEND 2CB0 2CEF

MIX4 SEND 2CF0 2D2F

MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F

MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF

MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF

MIX8 SEND 2DF0 2E2F

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MATRIX5-8 ON

MATRIX5 SEND 2E30 2E6F

MATRIX6 SEND 2E70 2EAF

MATRIX7 SEND 2EB0 2EEF

MATRIX8 SEND 2EF0 2F2F

MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST 2F36 2F45

INSERT MIX21-24, MONO 2F46 2F4A

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MIX1-8 PRE/POST

MIX1 SEND 2F4C 2F8B

MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB

MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B

MIX4 SEND 300C 304B

MIX5 SEND 304C 308B

MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB

MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B

MIX8 SEND 310C 314B

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST

MATRIX5 SEND 314C 318B

MATRIX6 SEND 318C 31CB

MATRIX7 SEND 31CC 320B

MATRIX8 SEND 320C 324B

DCA13-16

ON 324C 324F

FADER 3252 3255

BALANCE MIX21-24 (,MONO) 3258 325C

MIX21-24, MONO EQ

ON 325E 3262

LOW Q 3264 3268

LOW FREQ 326A 326E

LOW GAIN 3270 3274

LOW MID Q 3276 327A

LOW MID FREQ 327C 3280

LOW MID GAIN 3282 3286

HIGH MID Q 3288 328C

HIGH MID FREQ 328E 3292

HIGH MID GAIN 3294 3298

HIGH Q 329A 329E

HIGH FREQ 32A0 32A4

HIGH GAIN 32A6 32AA

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

MIX21-24, MONO EQ

HPF ON 32AC 32B0

LPF ON 32B2 32B6

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ

LOW TYPE 3440 347F

HIGH TYPE 3480 34BF

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO

LR, MONO EQ

LOW TYPE 34C0 34E2

HIGH TYPE 34E4 3506

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ

LOW TYPE 3508 3517

HIGH TYPE 3518 3527

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8

HPF

FREQ 3528 3537

DIRECT OUT INPUT65-

ON 3538 353F

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MATRIX5-8 LEVEL

MATRIX5 SEND 3540 354F

MATRIX6 SEND 3550 355F

MATRIX7 SEND 3560 356F

MATRIX8 SEND 3570 357F

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MATRIX5-8 ON

MATRIX5 SEND 3580 358F

MATRIX6 SEND 3590 359F

MATRIX7 SEND 35A0 35AF

MATRIX8 SEND 35B0 35BF

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST

MATRIX5 SEND 35C0 35CF

MATRIX6 SEND 35D0 35DF

MATRIX7 SEND 35E0 35EF

MATRIX8 SEND 35F0 35FF

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to

MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN

MATRIX5/6 3600 360F

MATRIX7/8 3610 361F

MONITOR

SURROUND MONITOR

FADER 3620 3620

SPEAKER MUTE

SOLO

3621 3621

SPEAKER MUTE L 3622 3622

SPEAKER MUTE R 3623 3623

SPEAKER MUTE C 3624 3624

SPEAKER MUTE LFE 3625 3625

SPEAKER MUTE Ls 3626 3626

SPEAKER MUTE Rs 3627 3627

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ 3640 367F

MIX21-24, MONO

DYNAMICS1

ON 3680 3684

ATTACK 3686 368A

THRESHOLD 368C 3690

RELEASE 3692 3696

RATIO 3698 369C

GAIN 369E 36A2

KNEE/WIDTH 36A4 36A8

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MIX1/2-7/8 PAN

MIX1/2 36AA 36E9

MIX3/4 36EA 3729

MIX5/6 372A 3769

MIX7/8 376A 37A9

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to

MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN

MATRIX5/6 37AA 37E9

MATRIX7/8 37EA 3829

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

MIX21-24, MONO to

MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN

MATRIX1/2 382A 382E

MATRIX3/4 3830 3834

MATRIX5/6 3836 383A

MATRIX7/8 383C 3840

MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST 3842 3851

GEQ RACK4A-6B

ON 3852 3857

GAIN1 3858 385D

GAIN2 385E 3863

GAIN3 3864 3869

GAIN4 386A 386F

GAIN5 3870 3875

GAIN6 3876 387B

GAIN7 387C 3881

GAIN8 3882 3887

GAIN9 3888 388D

GAIN10 388E 3893

GAIN11 3894 3899

GAIN12 389A 389F

GAIN13 38A0 38A5

GAIN14 38A6 38AB

GAIN15 38AC 38B1

GAIN16 38B2 38B7

GAIN17 38B8 38BD

GAIN18 38BE 38C3

GAIN19 38C4 38C9

GAIN20 38CA 38CF

GAIN21 38D0 38D5

GAIN22 38D6 38DB

GAIN23 38DC 38E1

GAIN24 38E2 38E7

GAIN25 38E8 38ED

GAIN26 38EE 38F3

GAIN27 38F4 38F9

GAIN28 38FA 38FF

GAIN29 3900 3905

GAIN30 3906 390B

GAIN31 390C 3911

LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,

MIX1-16

ON 3912 3969

CSR 396A 39C1

DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON 39C2 3A01

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO

STEREO

ON 3A02 3A41

DCA1-12

ON 3A42 3A4D

FADER 3A4E 3A59

MUTE MASTER ON 3A5A 3A61

RECALL SAFE ON 3A66 3B05

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

Data List

EXTERNAL GAIN1 3B06 3B0B

INPUT GAIN 1 3B0F 3B15

EXTERNAL GAIN2 3B16 3B1B

INPUT GAIN 2 3B1F 3B25

EXTERNAL GAIN3 3B26 3B2B

INPUT GAIN 3 3B2F 3B35

EXTERNAL GAIN4 3B36 3B3B

INPUT GAIN 4 3B3F 3B45

EXTERNAL GAIN5 3B46 3B4B

INPUT GAIN 5 3B4F 3B55

EXTERNAL GAIN6 3B56 3B5B

INPUT GAIN 6 3B5F 3B65

EXTERNAL GAIN7 3B66 3B6B

INPUT GAIN 7 3B6F 3B75

EXTERNAL GAIN8 3B76 3B7B

INPUT GAIN 8 3B7F 3B85

EXTERNAL +48V 1 3B86 3B8B

INPUT +48V 1 3B8F 3B95

EXTERNAL +48V 2 3B96 3B9B

INPUT +48V 2 3B9F 3BA5

EXTERNAL +48V 3 3BA6 3BAB

INPUT +48V 3 3BAF 3BB5

EXTERNAL +48V 4 3BB6 3BBB

INPUT +48V 4 3BBF 3BC5

EXTERNAL +48V 5 3BC6 3BCB

INPUT +48V 5 3BCF 3BD5

EXTERNAL +48V 6 3BD6 3BDB

INPUT +48V 6 3BDF 3BE5

EXTERNAL +48V 7 3BE6 3BEB

INPUT +48V 7 3BEF 3BF5

EXTERNAL +48V 8 3BF6 3BFB

INPUT +48V 8 3BFF 3C05

EXTERNAL HPF1 3C06 3C0B

INPUT HPF1 3C0F 3C15

EXTERNAL HPF2 3C16 3C1B

INPUT HPF2 3C1F 3C25

EXTERNAL HPF3 3C26 3C2B

INPUT HPF3 3C2F 3C35

EXTERNAL HPF4 3C36 3C3B

INPUT HPF4 3C3F 3C45

EXTERNAL HPF5 3C46 3C4B

INPUT HPF5 3C4F 3C55

EXTERNAL HPF6 3C56 3C5B

INPUT HPF6 3C5F 3C65

EXTERNAL HPF7 3C66 3C6B

INPUT HPF7 3C6F 3C75

EXTERNAL HPF8 3C76 3C7B

INPUT HPF8 3C7F 3C85

INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO

MONO

ON 3C86 3CC5

MIX1-16 TO MONO ON 3CC6 3CD5

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

SLOT OUT DELAY

ON 3CD6 3D05

TIME HIGH 3D06 3D35

TIME LOW 3D36 3D65

OMNI OUT DELAY

ON 3D66 3D6D

TIME HIGH 3D76 3D7D

TIME LOW 3D86 3D8D

DIGITAL OUT DELAY

ON 3D96 3D97

TIME HIGH 3D98 3D99

TIME LOW 3D9A 3D9B

INPUT1-48, STIN1-4

DYNAMICS1

RATIO 3D9C 3DD3

KNEE/WIDTH 3DD4 3E0B

GAIN 3E0C 3E43

INPUT1-48, STIN1-4

DYNAMICS2

reserved 3E44 3E7B

FILTER FREQ 3E7C 3EB3

GEQ RACK7A-8B

ON 3EB4 3EB7

GAIN1 3EB8 3EBB

GAIN2 3EBC 3EBF

GAIN3 3EC0 3EC3

GAIN4 3EC4 3EC7

GAIN5 3EC8 3ECB

GAIN6 3ECC 3ECF

GAIN7 3ED0 3ED3

GAIN8 3ED4 3ED7

GAIN9 3ED8 3EDB

GAIN10 3EDC 3EDF

GAIN11 3EE0 3EE3

GAIN12 3EE4 3EE7

GAIN13 3EE8 3EEB

GAIN14 3EEC 3EEF

GAIN15 3EF0 3EF3

GAIN16 3EF4 3EF7

GAIN17 3EF8 3EFB

GAIN18 3EFC 3EFF

GAIN19 3F00 3F03

GAIN20 3F04 3F07

GAIN21 3F08 3F0B

GAIN22 3F0C 3F0F

GAIN23 3F10 3F13

GAIN24 3F14 3F17

GAIN25 3F18 3F1B

GAIN26 3F1C 3F1F

GAIN27 3F20 3F23

GAIN28 3F24 3F27

GAIN29 3F28 3F2B

GAIN30 3F2C 3F2F

GAIN31 3F30 3F33

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

MIX, MATRIX, STEREO

LR, MONO EQ

ATT 3F34 3F56

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO

STEREO

ON 3F58 3F67

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8,

MIX17-24 TO MONO

ON 3F68 3F7F

LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8,

MIX17-24

ON 3F80 3F97

CSR 3F98 3FAF

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8

DYNAMICS1

RATIO 3FB0 3FBF

KNEE/WIDTH 3FC0 3FCF

GAIN 3FD0 3FDF

INPUT65-72, STIN5-8

DYNAMICS2

reserved 3FE0 3FEF

FILTER FREQ 3FF0 3FFF

Parameter From (HEX) To (HEX)

Data List

Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability

This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.

It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.

 Input channels

Parameter Stereo

CHANNEL LINK

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

USER LEVEL

Channel

Library

ALL Parameter Select button

Gain

*10

O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O

Gain Compensation O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O

+48V

O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O

Phase

O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O

AG-DG Link O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O

Digital Gain

*10

DIGITAL GAIN

*10

O DIGITAL GAIN HA O

Name, Icon, Color

O INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUT NAME O

Input Patch

O INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH

LR-MONO

SELECT

* ST IN channels only O

ALL INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING O

Insert1,

Insert2

Out Patch

O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH

In Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH

+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA HA

On INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O

Point

INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O

Direct Out

Out Patch

O INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH

On, Level DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O

Point

DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O

HPF O INPUT HPF O INPUT HPF INPUT PROCESSING O

Att O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O

EQ O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O

Dynamics1

Key-In Source

O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING

Key-In Filter O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O

Others O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O

Dynamics2

Key-In Source

O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING

Others O INPUT DYNAMICS2 O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING O

To Mix

On O

INPUT MIX ON

INPUT FADER/ON

Level O

INPUT MIX SEND

INPUT FADER/ON

Pan/Balance

*11

INPUT MIX SEND

INPUT FADER/ON

Pre/Post O

INPUT MIX SEND

INPUT PROCESSING

Surround

Pan

O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O

Divergence O

O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O

LFE O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O

Data List

*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1-8.

*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1-24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.

*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1-8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.

*4 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.

*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.

*6 Applicable only to On/Off.

*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.

*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.

*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.

*10 Operates differentially

*11 Balance only

*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.

To Matrix

On O

INPUT MATRIX ON

INPUT FADER/ON

Level O

INPUT MATRIX SEND

INPUT FADER/ON

Pan/Balance

*11

INPUT MATRIX SEND

INPUT FADER/ON

Pre/Post O

INPUT MATRIX SEND

INPUT PROCESSING

DELAY

*10

INPUT DELAY

*10

O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O

ON O INPUT DELAY O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O

To Stereo O TO STEREO O INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING O

To Mono O TO STEREO O INPUT TO MONO INPUT PROCESSING O

Pan/balance

*11

O INPUT TO ST INPUT FADER/ON O

Pan Mode O

INPUT PROCESSING O

LCR

On O TO STEREO O

INPUT PROCESSING O

CSR O TO STEREO O

INPUT PROCESSING O

Mode O TO STEREO O

INPUT PROCESSING O

On O INPUT CH ON O INPUT CH ON INPUT FADER/ON O

Fader

*10

INPUT FADER

*10

O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER/ON O

Mute Assign O INPUT MUTE O INPUT MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O

DCA Assign O INPUT DCA O INPUT DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O

Fade Time, On

STORE

Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK

Cue O

Key In Cue

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER

Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER

Global Paste O

Parameter Stereo

CHANNEL LINK

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

USER LEVEL

Channel

Library

ALL Parameter Select button

Data List

 MIX Channels

*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.

*6 Applicable only to On/Off.

*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.

*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.

Parameters

Linked for

a stereo

pair

CHANNEL LINK

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

*8, *12

USER LEVEL

Channel

Library

ALL Parameter Select button

Name, Icon, Color

O MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O

Output Patch

O MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

Insert1,

Insert2

Out Patch

O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

In Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MIX PROCESSING

On O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O

Point O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O

Att O EQ O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O

EQ O EQ O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O

Dynamics1

Key-In Source

O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING

Others O DYNAMICS O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING O

To Matrix

On O TO MATRIX ON O

MIX MATRIX ON

MIX FADER/ON

Level

*13

TO MATRIX SEND O

MIX MATRIX SEND

MIX FADER/ON

Pan/Balance O TO MATRIX SEND O

MIX MATRIX SEND

MIX FADER/ON

Pre/Post O TO MATRIX SEND O

MIX MATRIX SEND

MIX PROCESSING

To Stereo O TO STEREO O MIX TO ST MIX PROCESSING O

To Mono O TO STEREO O MIX MONO MIX PROCESSING O

Pan/Balance

*11

O MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MIX FADER/ON O

LCR

On O TO STEREO O

MIX PROCESSING O

CSR O TO STEREO O

MIX PROCESSING O

Mode O TO STEREO O

MIX PROCESSING O

On O CH ON O MIX CH ON MIX FADER/ON O

Fader O FADER O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON O

From Input

On O

WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MIX SEND

Level O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MIX SEND

Pan/Balance

*11

WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MIX SEND

Pre/Post O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MIX SEND

Mute Assign O MUTE O MIX MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O

DCA Assign O DCA O MIX DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O

Fade Time, On

STORE

Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER

Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER

Global Paste O

Data List

*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.

*11 Balance only

*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.

*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX

*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.

 MATRIX Channels

*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.

*6 Applicable only to On/Off.

Parameters

Linked for

a stereo

pair

CHANNEL LINK

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

*8, *12

USER LEVEL

Channel

Library

ALL Parameter Select button

Name, Icon, Color

O MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O

Output Patch

O MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

Insert1, Insert2

Out Patch

O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

In Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

+48V, Gain, Gain

Compensation

O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MATRIX PROCESSING

On O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O

Point O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O

Att O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O

EQ O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O

Dynamics1

Key-In Source

O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING

Others O DYNAMICS O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING O

To Matrix

On TO MATRIX ON

Level TO MATRIX SEND

Pan/Balance TO MATRIX SEND

Pre/Post TO MATRIX SEND

Balance O

O MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MATRIX FADER/ON O

On O CH ON O MATRIX CH ON MATRIX FADER/ON O

Fader O FADER O MATRIX FADER MATRIX FADER/ON O

From Input

From Mix

From Stereo/Mono

On O

WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MATRIX SEND

Level O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MATRIX SEND

Pan/Balance

*11

WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MATRIX SEND

Pre/Post O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs

WITH MATRIX SEND

Mute Assign O MUTE O MATRIX MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O

DCA Assign O DCA O MATRIX DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O

Fade Time, On

STORE

Channel Link O GLOBAL CH LINK

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER

Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER

Global Paste O

Data List

*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.

*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.

*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.

*11 Balance only

*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.

*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.

 STEREO, MONO Channels

*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.

*6 Applicable only to On/Off.

*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.

*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.

*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.

*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.

*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.

Parameter

Linked for

a stereo

pair

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

*8, *12

USER LEVEL

Channel

Library

ALL Parameter Select button

Name, Icon, Color

O STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME O

Output Patch

O STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

Insert1, Insert2

Out Patch

O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

In Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH

+48V, Gain, Gain

Compensation

STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING

On O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O

Point O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O

Att O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O

EQ O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O

Dynamics1

Key-In Source

O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING

Others O O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O

To Matrix

On O O

STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON

STEREO, MONO FADER/ON

Level

*13

STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND

STEREO, MONO FADER/ON

Pan/Balance O O

STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND

STEREO, MONO FADER/ON

Pre/Post O O

STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND

STEREO, MONO PROCESSING

Balance O O STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O

On O O STEREO, MONO CH ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O

Fader O O STEREO, MONO FADER STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O

Mute Assign O O STEREO, MONO MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O

DCA Assign O O STEREO, MONO DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O

Fade Time, On

STORE

Cue O

Mute Safe O

Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O

Data List

 DCA

*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.

 BUS SETUP

 SURROUND BUS

 MUTE

Parameters

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

USER LEVEL

ALL Parameter Select button

Name, Icon, Color O DCA NAME DCA MASTER

On O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER

Fader O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER

Fade Time, On O

STORE

Input DCA Assign

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

Parameters

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

USER LEVEL

ALL Parameter Select button

Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan

Link

MIX 1/2, …, MATRIX 7/8 BUS SETUP

Parameters

RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE

USER LEVEL

ALL Parameter Select button

Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan

Link

SURROUND SETUP BUS SETUP

Parameters

RECALL SAFE

USER LEVEL

ALL

Name O MUTE GROUP MASTER

MUTE GROUP MASTER

Dimmer

MUTE GROUP MASTER

MUTE Assign

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

Data List

MIDI Data Format

This section explains the format of the data that the CL series

is able to understand, send, and receive.

1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.2 NOTE ON (9n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]

(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110)

messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.

If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]

is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings

of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be

assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”

(page 23).

If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx]

is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,

63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the

specified parameter.

Transmission

If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a

parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these

messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can

be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes”

(page 23).

If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a

specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and

DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.

For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be

Assigned to Control Changes” (page 23).

CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because

there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.

(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)

CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.

If [TABLE] is selected

Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data

paramSteps = paramMax-paramMin + 1;

add = paramWidth / paramSteps;

mod = paramWidth-add * paramSteps;

curValue = paramSteps * add + mod / 2;

(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps

paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;

(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps

paramWidth = 16384;

(2-1) When High and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);

(2-2) When only Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);

(2-3) When only High data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);

(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152

steps

paramWidth = 2097152;

(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);

(3-2) When only Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);

(3-3) When only Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;

(3-4) When only High data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;

(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);

(3-6) When only High and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);

(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128;

if ( rxValue > paramWidth)

rxValue = paramWidth;

param = ( rxValue-mod / 2) / add;

If [NRPN] is selected

1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

Reception

If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed

from MIDI OUT.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx]

is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are

received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene

memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the

settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].

Transmission

If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to

the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and

premium rack library are recalled.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.

If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been

assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered

PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.

PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because

there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.

(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)

You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.

If SINGLE is selected

You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.

You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.

A bank of up to 16 can be specified.

If MULTI is selected

The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.

The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select

messages will not be added.

You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note off message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note on message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 00

Control number (00)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 20

Control number (32)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,

102-119) *

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

* Numbers 0, 32, and 96-101 cannot be used.

* Control number 6, 38 can be used.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 01100010 62

NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number LSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 01100011 63

NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00000110 06

Data entry MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00100110 26

Data entry LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data LSB

* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not

be added during transmission.

Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is

omitted.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program number (0-127)

Data List

2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

2.1 SONG SELECT (F3)

Reception

Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory

recorder.

2.2 TIMING CLOCK (F8)

Reception

This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four

times per quarter note.

Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.

2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Reception

Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized

(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of

400 ms.

This message is not subject to echoing.

2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF)

Reception

When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,

Running Status will be cleared).

This message is not subject to echoing.

3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

3.1 MMC

< MMC STOP >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.

< MMC PLAY >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.

< MMC DEFERED PLAY >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.

< MMC RECORD STROBE >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts

recording.

< MMC PAUSE >

Reception

If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.

3.2 BULK DUMP

This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored

within the unit.

The basic format is as follows.

The CL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump.

*1) 0-300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),

*2) 1-199 Input EQ Library Number (1-40 Request Only)

*3) 1-199 Output EQ Library Number (1-3 Request Only)

*4) 1-199 Dynamics Library Number (1-41 Request Only)

*5) 0-199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)

*6) 1-199 Effect Library Number (1-27 Request Only)

*7) 512-583 Input 1-72,

*8) 584-599 STIN 1L-8R,

*9) 768-791 MIX 1-24,

*10) 1024-1031 MATRIX 1-8,

*11) 1280-1282 STEREO L-C,

*12) 512-530 GEQ 1-19, 531-538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8,

*13) 0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)

*14) 512-519 EFFECT 1-8,

*15) 512 Current Data,

*16) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,

*17) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,

*18) 0-199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),

*19) 0-199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),

*20) 512-527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B

*21) 0-100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)

*22) 1536-1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2),

*23) 1608-1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dynamics2),

*24) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)

Data is lost when you write to the preset library.

The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series.

To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE

COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary

complement, and set bit 7 to 0.

CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F

Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time

when a Bulk Dump Request is received.

A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump

Request.

STATUS 11110011 F3

Song select

Song number 0sssssss ss

Song number (0-127)

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing clock

STATUS 11111110 FE

Active sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

System reset

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000001 01

Stop(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000010 02

Play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000011 03

Deferred Play(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00000110 06

Record strobe

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real time System exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

COMMAND 00000110 06

Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id

00001001 09

Pause(MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Command rx/tx Function

F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd

dd ... ee F7

rx/tx

BULK DUMP DATA

F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx

BULK DUMP REQUEST

Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” *1) *15) *16) *17)

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” *2) *7) *8)

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” *3) *9) *10) *11)

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23)

INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” *18) *7) *8)

OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” *19) *9) *10) *11)

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” *5) *12)

8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” *13)

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” *6) *14)

Premium Effect “PEFFECT_” *20)

Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” *21)

Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” *21)

U76 LIB “U76_____” *21)

Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” *21)

EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” *21)

DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” *21)

Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” *21)

MBC4 LIB “MBC4____” *21)

Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” *24)

Mixer Setup “MIXERSET” Fix (512)

Outport Setup “OUT_PORT” Fix (512)

Monitor Setup “MONITOR_” Fix (512)

MIDI Setup “MIDI_SET” Fix (512)

Lib Number “LIB_NUM_” Fix (512)

Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_” Fix (512)

Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_” Fix (512)

Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR” Fix (512)

Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM” Fix (512)

Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST” Fix (512)

User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder

User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder

User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST” Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder

Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR” Fix (512)

Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM” Fix (512)

Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST” Fix (512)

User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR” Fix (512)

User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST” Fix (512)

Module Name(mm) Data Number(dd)

Data List

In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of

7-bit data.

[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]

d[0-6]: actual data

b[0-7]: bulk data

b[0] = 0;

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

if( d[I]&0x80){

b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);

}

b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;

}

[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]

d[0-6]: actual data

b[0-7]: bulk data

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

b[0] <<= 1;

d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);

}

3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE

Reception

This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.

This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is

received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER

REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be

transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].

Transmission

If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which

CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE

will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.

In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be

transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.

4 PARAMETER CHANGE details

4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP

4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.

Transmission

Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER

CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL

CHANGE EVENT LIST].

4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE

immediately the data is received.

4.1.3 Data category

4.2 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY STORE, RECALL -

4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.

Transmission

Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when

[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.

4.2.2 Function Name

Command rx/tx Function

F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7

RARAMETER CHANGE

rx/tx

CL series native parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7

PARAMETER REQUEST

rx/tx

CL series native parameter request

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA Category 0ccccccc cc

DATA 0eeeeeee eh

Element no High.

0eeeeeee el

Element no Low.

0iiiiiii ih

Index no High.

0iiiiiii il

Index no Low.

0ccccccc ch

Channel no High.

0ccccccc cl

Channel no Low.

0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA Category 0ccccccc cc

DATA 0eeeeeee eh

Element no High.

0eeeeeee el

Element no Low.

0iiiiiii ih

Index no High.

0iiiiiii il

Index no Low.

0ccccccc ch

Channel no High.

0ccccccc cl

Channel no Low.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Data Category Name

0x01 00000001

Current Scene /Setup/Backup/

User Setup Data

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Number Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Function Name

Store “LibStr__”

Recall “LibRcl__”

Unknown Factor Store “LibUnStr”

Unknown Factor Recall “LibUnRcl”

Store Undo (only Score) “LibStrUd”

Recall Undo (only Scene) “LibRclUd”

Data List

4.2.3 Module Name

*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72

72:ST IN 1L - 87:ST IN 8R

*2) 256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24

*3) 512:MATRIX 1 - 519: MATRIX 8

*4) 1024:STEREO L - 1026:STEREO C

*5) 512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.

*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B

38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,

40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B

*7) 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8

*8) 1280:CH1 - 1351:CH72

1352:ST IN 1L - 1367:ST IN 8R

*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,

2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B

4.3 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY EDIT -

4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is

received.

Transmission

PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.

If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

4.3.2 Function Name

4.3.3 Module Name

Module Name

Scene “SCENE___”

Input EQ “INEQ____”

Output EQ “OUTEQ___”

Dynamics “DYNA____”

Input CH “INCHNNL_”

Output CH “OUTCHNNL”

GEQ “GEQ_____”

8BandPEQ “8PEQ____”

Effect “EFFECT__”

Portico5033 “P5033___”

Portico5043 “P5043___”

U76 “U76_____”

Opt-2A “OPT-2A__”

EQP-1A “EQ-1A___”

Dynamic EQ “DYNAEQ__”

Buss Comp 369 “BSCMP369”

MBC4 “MBC4____”

Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”

Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx

“LibStr__” SCENE 1-300 *5)

tx/rx

INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 *1)

tx/rx

OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 *2) *3) *4)

tx/rx

Dynamics LIB 42-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)

tx/rx

INPUT CH LIB 1-199 *1)

tx/rx

OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4)

tx/rx

GEQ LIB 1-199 *6)

tx/rx

8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6)

tx/rx

EFFECT LIB 28-199 *7)

tx/rx

Premium Effect LIB 1-100 *9)

tx/rx

Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 *5)

tx/rx

“LibUnStr” SCENE 1-300 0

INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 0

OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 0

Dynamics LIB 42-199 0

INPUT CH LIB 1-199 0

OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 0

GEQ LIB 1-199 0

8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 0

EFFECT LIB 28-199 0

Premium Effect LIB 1-100 0

Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 0

“LibRcl__” SCENE 0-300 *5)

tx/rx

INPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *1)

tx/rx

OUTPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4)

tx/rx

Dynamics LIB 1-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)

tx/rx

INPUT CH LIB 0-199 *1)

tx/rx

OUTPUT CH LIB 0-199 *2) *3) *4)

tx/rx

GEQ LIB 0-199 *6)

tx/rx

8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6)

tx/rx

EFFECT LIB 1-199 *7)

tx/rx

Premium Effect LIB 0-100 *9)

tx/rx

Dante Input Patch LIB 0-10 *5)

tx/rx

“LibUnRcl” SCENE 0 *5)

INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1)

OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4)

Dynamics LIB 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8)

INPUT CH LIB 0 *1)

OUTPUT CH LIB 0 *2) *3) *4)

GEQ LIB 0 *6)

8BandPEQ LIB 0 *6)

EFFECT LIB 0 *7)

Premium Effect LIB 0 *9)

Dante Input Patch LIB 0 *5)

“LibStrUd” SCENE 0 0

“LibRclUd” SCENE 0 0

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

Function Number Channel*1) tx/rx

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss sh

number -source start High

0sssssss sl

number -source start Low

0eeeeeee eh

number -source end High

0eeeeeee el

number -source end Low

0ddddddd dh

number -destination start High

0ddddddd dl

number -destination to start Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Function Name

Copy “LibCpy__”

Paste “LibPst__”

Clear “LibClr__”

Cut “LibCut__”

Insert “LibIns__”

Edit Undo “LibEdtUd”

Module Name Function

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” Clear Only

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” Clear Only

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” Clear Only

INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” Clear Only

OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” Clear Only

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” Clear Only

8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” Clear Only

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” Clear Only

Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” Clear Only

Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” Clear Only

U76 LIB “U76_____” Clear Only

Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” Clear Only

EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” Clear Only

DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” Clear Only

Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” Clear Only

MBC4 LIB “MBC4____” Clear Only

Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” Clear Only

Data List

4.4 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE -

4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

When the message is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be

edited.

Transmission

PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.

If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Reception

The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately

the data is received.

4.4.3 Module Name

4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE

4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Transmission

When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer

will be sent back with the following Parameter change.

This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.

Top number is requested number or more.

-Example-

SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101

Request Number: 0

Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7

Request Number: 8

Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10

Request Number: 11

Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101

Request Number: 102

Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01000001 “A”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 “r”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Scene/Library number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Scene/Library number Low

0eeeeeee eh

Element High

0eeeeeee el

Element Low

0iiiiiii ih

Index High

0iiiiiii il

Index Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

0000dddd dd

Data28~31bit

0ddddddd dd

Data21~27bit

0ddddddd dd

Data14~20bit

0ddddddd dd

Data7~13bit

0ddddddd dd

Data0~6bit

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01000001 “A”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 “r”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Scene/Library number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Scene/Library number Low

0eeeeeee eh

Element High

0eeeeeee el

Element Low

0iiiiiii ih

Index High

0iiiiiii il

Index Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Module Name Number

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-300 (0:response only)

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 1-200 (1-40:response only)

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 1-200 (1-3:response only)

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 1-200 (1-41:response only)

INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 0-200 (0:response only)

OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNNL” 0-200 (0:response only)

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 0-200 (0:response only)

8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” 0-199 (0:response only)

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 1-200 (1-27:response only)

Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 0-100 (0:response only)

Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 0-100 (0:response only)

U76 LIB “U76_____” 0-100 (0:response only)

Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 0-100 (0:response only)

EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 0-100 (0:response only)

DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 0-100 (0:response only)

Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” 0-100 (0:response only)

MBC4 LIB “MBC4____” 0-100 (0:response only)

Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 0-10 (0:response only)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01000101 “E”

(ASCII CODE)

01111000 “x”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01110011 “s”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss ss

Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )

0nnnnnnn nh

Request Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Request Number Low

0ttttttt th

Top Number High

0ttttttt tl

Top Number Low

0eeeeeee eh

End Number High

0eeeeeee el

End Number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Module Name Number

Data List

4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Reception

The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately

the data is received.

4.5.3 Module Name

4.6 FUNCTION CALL - COLLECTION STORE -

4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Transmission

Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER

CHANGE Tx] is on.

4.6.2 Function Name

4.6.3 Module Name

4.7 FUNCTION CALL - MODULE -

4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received

(depending on the effect type).

4.7.2 Module Name

This will not work when the Effect Type is different.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “L”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “b”

(ASCII CODE)

01000101 “E”

(ASCII CODE)

01111000 “x”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “i”

(ASCII CODE)

01110011 “s”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Request Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Request Number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Module Name Number

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 1-300

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 41-200

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 4-200

Dynamics LIB “DYNA____” 42-200

INPUT CH LIB “INCHNNL_” 1-200

OUTPUT CH LIB “OUTCHNL” 1-200

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 1-200

8BandPEQ LIB “8PEQ____” 1-199

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 55-200

Portico5033 LIB “P5033___” 1-100

Portico5043 LIB “P5043___” 1-100

U76 LIB “U76_____” 1-100

Opt-2A LIB “OPT-2A__” 1-100

EQP-1A LIB “EQ-1A___” 1-100

DynamicEQ LIB “DYNAEQ__” 1-100

Buss Comp 369 LIB “BSCMP369” 1-100

MBC4 LIB “MBC4____” 1-100

Dante Input Patch LIB “DANTEIN_” 1-10

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001100 “C”

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 “o”

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 “l”

(ASCII CODE)

01010101 “U”

(ASCII CODE)

01101110 “n”

(ASCII CODE)

01010011 “S”

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 “t”

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 “r”

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0nnnnnnn nh

Number High

0nnnnnnn nl

Number Low

0ccccccc ch

Channel High

0ccccccc cl

Channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Function Number tx/rx

“ColUnStr” Setup 0

User Defined Key 0

Program Change 0

Control Change 0

Module Name

Mixer Setting “MIXERSET”

Outport Setting “OUT_PORT”

Monitor Setting “MONITOR_”

MIDI Setting “MIDI_SET”

Lib Number “LIB_NUM_”

Program Change Table “PRGMCHG_”

Control Change Table “CTRLCHG_”

Preference (Current) “PREF_CUR”

Preference (Admin) “PREF_ADM”

Preference (Guest) “PREF_GST”

User Defined Keys (Current) “UDEF_CUR”

User Defined Keys (Admin) “UDEF_ADM”

User Defined Keys (Guest) “UDEF_GST”

Custom Fader Bank (Current) “CFAD_CUR”

Custom Fader Bank (Admin) “CFAD_ADM”

Custom Fader Bank (Guest) “CFAD_GST”

User Level (Current) “UKEY_CUR”

User Level (Guest) “UKEY_GST”

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01001101 “M”

01101111 “o”

01100100 “d”

01000110 “F”

01111000 “x”

01010100 “T”

01110010 “r”

01100111 “g”

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0eeeeeee ee

Effect number (0:RACK1-7:RACK8)

0ppppppp pp

Release:0, Press:1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Module Name Number

Freeze Play button “FRZPLAY_” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7

Freeze Record button “FRZREC__” 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7

Module Name

Data List

4.8 FUNCTION CALL - CHANNEL -

4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

4.8.2 Module Name

*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72

256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24

512:MATRIX 1-519:MATRIX 8

4.9 LEVEL METER DATA

4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)

When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the

corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.

If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to

be sent in at least every 10 seconds.

Reception

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

Transmission

When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering

data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and

time will vary depending on devices).

When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.

When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)

Reception

Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device

number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.

The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.

The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for

a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).

If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will

stop (will be disabled) immediately.

Transmission

When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION NAME 01000011 “C”

01101000 “h”

01101100 “l”

01010000 “P”

01101001 “i”

01110010 “r”

01000011 “C”

01110000 “p”

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss sh

Source Channel Number H *1)

0sssssss sl

Source Channel Number L *1)

0ddddddd dh

Destination Channel Number H *1)

0ddddddd dl

Destination Channel Number L *1)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Module Name

Pair On (with Copy) “PAIRONCP”

Pair On (with Reset Both) “PAIRONRS”

Pair Off “PAIROFF_”

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ddddddd dd

Data1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00011001 19

CL Series

DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ccccccc ch

Count H

0ccccccc cl

Count L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

Data List

Input/output characteristics

ANALOG INPUT CHARACTERISTICS

*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V) or the nominal

output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are

maximum position.)

*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)

* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.

* All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128times oversampling.

* +48V DC ( phantom power ) is supplied to ONI IN (1-8) and TALKBACK XLR type

connectors via each individual software controlled switches.

ANALOG OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS

*1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)

*2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip= LEFT, Ring= RIGHT, Sleeve= GND)

*3. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.

*4. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max.

* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.

* All output DA converters are 24bit, 128times oversampling.

DIGITAL INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS

DIGITAL OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS

*1. Channel Status of DIGITAL OUT

*2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)

Input

Terminals

GAIN

Actual

Load

Impedance

For Use

With

Nominal

Input Level

Connector

Sensitivity

Nominal

Max. before

clip

OMNI IN

1-8

+66dB

7.5kΩ

50-600Ω

Mics &

600Ω

Lines

-82dBu

(61.6μV)

-62dBu

(0.616mV)

-42dBu

(6.16mV)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

-6dB

-10dBu

(245mV)

+10dBu

(2.45V)

+30dBu

(24.5V)

TALKBACK

+64dB

10kΩ

50-600Ω

Mics &

600Ω

Lines

-70dBu

(0.245mV)

-60dBu

(0.775mV)

-40dBu

(7.75mV)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

+20dB

-26dBu

(38.8mV)

-16dBu

(0.123V)

+4dBu

(1.23V)

Output

Terminals

Actual

Source

Impedanc

For Use

With

Nominal

GAIN

Output Level

Connector

Nominal

Max. before

clip

OMNI

OUT 1-8

75Ω

600Ω

Lines

+24dB

(default)

+4dBu

(1.23V)

+24dBu

(12.3V)

XLR-3-32 type

(Balanced)

+18dB

-2dBu

(616mV)

+18dBu

(6.16V)

PHONES 15Ω

8Ω

Phones

75mW

150mW

Stereo Phone Jack

(TRS)

(Unbalanced)

40Ω

Phones

65mW

150mW

Terminal Format

Data

length

Level Audio Connector

Primary/

Secondary

Dante

24bit or

32bit

1000Base

-T

64ch Input/64ch Output

@48kHz

EtherCON Cat5e

Terminal Format

Data

Length

Level Connector

DIGITAL

OUT

AES/EBU

AES/EBU Professional Use

24bit RS422

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

Byte Bit Field Name Fixed/Variable Data Description

0 Block Format

fixed

1 professional use

1Mode 0 audio

2-4 Emphasis 0x4 off

5 Fs Lock 0 lock

6-7 Sampling Frequency variable

0x0 others

0x3 32 kHz

0x2 44.1 kHz

0x1 48 kHz

0-3 Channel Mode

fixed

0x1 2ch mode

4-7 Users Bit Management 0x0 -

0-2 Use of AUX

fixed

0x1 24 bits Audio Data

3-7 Source 0x00 -

3 0-7 Multi Channel fixed 0x00 -

0-1 Digital Audio Reference Signal

fixed

0x0

2- 0

3-6 Sampling Frequency variable 0x0 others

7 Sampling Frequency Scan Flag fixed 0 -

Data List

I/O SLOT (1-3) CHARACTERISTICS

Each I/O Slot accepts a mini-YGDAI card. Only Slot1 has a serial interface.

CONTROL I/O CHARACTERISTICS

*1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up (47kΩ)

Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA)

Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA

*2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp rating 5W. Voltage control by software.

Terminal Format Level Connector

MIDI

IN MIDI - DIN Connector 5P

OUT MIDI - DIN Connector 5P

WORD

CLOCK

IN - TTL/75Ω terminated BNC Connector

OUT - TTL/75Ω BNC Connector

GPI (5IN/5OUT) - -

D Sub Connector 15P

(Female)

NETWORK IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100Base-TX RJ-45

LAMP (CL5: x3, CL3:

x2, CL1: x1)

0V-12V

XLR-4-31 type

USB HOST USB 2.0 - USB A Connector (Female)

DC POWER INPUT - - JL05 Connector

METER (CL3/CL1 only) - -

D Sub Connector 9P

(Female)

Data List

Electrical Characteristics

All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms

 Frequency Response. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz-20 kHz, referenced to

the nominal output level @1 kHz

 Total Harmonic Distortion. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz

* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz

 Hum & Noise. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise

* Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.

 Dynamic Range. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz

* Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.

 Sampling Frequency

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

OMNI IN 1-8

OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω

GAIN: +66dB

-1.5 0.0 0.5

PHONES 8 Ω -3.0 0.0 0.5

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω

+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB 0.1

+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: -6dB 0.05

Internal OSC

OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz 0.02

PHONES 8 Ω

Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level

Control: Max.

0.2

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω

Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB

Master fader at nominal level and one

Ch fader at nominal level.

-128

EIN

dBu

-62

Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB

Master fader at nominal level and one

Ch fader at nominal level.

-84 -79

All INPUTs OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω

Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB

Master fader at nominal level and all

OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level.

-70

- OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off -88

-PHONES 8 Ω

Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level

Control Min.

-88

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

OMNI IN 1-8 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: -6dB 108 dB

- OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter 112 dB

Parameter Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

External Clock

Frequency

Range

Fs= 44.1 kHz

Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)

Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)

Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz -0.1%)

Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz -4.0%)

-200 +200 ppm

Fs= 48 kHz

Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)

Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)

Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz -0.1%)

Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz -4.0%)

Jitter of PLL

DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz

DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz

10 ns

Internal Clock

Frequency

Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 44.1

kHz

Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 48

Accuracy

Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz

-50 +50 ppm

Word Clock : Int 48 kHz

Jitter

Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 4.429

Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 4.069

Data List

Mixer Basic Parameters

 Libraries

 Input Function

 Output Function

 Output Port

 Processor

Name Number Total

Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 301

Input CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Output CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199

Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199

Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199

Effect Library Preset 27 + User 172 199

GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Premium Rack Library

Portico5033

Portico5043

U76

Opt-2A

EQ-1A

Dynamic EQ

Buss Comp 369

MBC4

Preset 1 + User 199 200

Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 10 11

Function Parameter

Phase Normal/Reverse

Digital Gain -96 dB to +24 dB

L,R-MONO L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN

HPF

Slope= -12dB/Oct, -6dB/Oct

Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz

Attenuator -96 dB to 0 dB

4 Band

Equalizer

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type

II)

Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Direct Out Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Dynamics 1

Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander

Threshold=Gate: -72 dB to 0 dB

Others: -54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec

44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec

Dynamics 1

Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec

44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec

Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec

44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec

Range= Gate: -∞ dB to 0 dB

Ducking: -70 dB to 0 dB

Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24

Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)

Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF

Dynamics2

Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S

Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Compander: 1:1 to 20:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec

44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec

Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24

Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)

Width= 1 dB to 90 dB

Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz

TYPE= HPF, BPF

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

Pan/Balance

Position L63 to R63

Pan Mode: Pan/Balance

DCA Group 16 Groups

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix Send

24 sends

Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes

(Surround Pan can be set 1 to 6 mixes)

Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB

(Position L63 to R63, R63 to F63 for Surround)

Matrix Send

8 Sends

Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB

LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100%

DELAY 0 ms to 1000 msec

Function Parameter

Attenuator -96 dB to 0 dB

Function Parameter

4 Band

Equalizer

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type

II)

Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Dynamics 1

Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S

Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Compander: 1:1 to 20:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec

44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec

Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/

MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)

Width= 1 dB to 90 dB

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63

DCA Group 16 Groups

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix to Matrix

Stereo to Matrix

Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB

Oscillator

Level= 0 to -96dB (1 dB step)

On/Off= Software control

Function Parameter

Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec

Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse

Gain -96 to +24 dB

Function Parameter

GEQ 31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems

PEQ (8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 32(48) systems

AUTOMIXER 8(16) channels

Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems

Premium Rack

Parameter

Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x

8systems

Function Parameter

Data List

Pin Assignment

DC POWER INPUT GPI METER (CL3/CL1 only)

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1+24V13GND

2+24V14GND

3+24V15GND

4+24V16GND

5+24V17GND

6+24V18GND

7+24V19CAUTION(+)

8 +24V 20 CAUTION(-)

9 +24V 21 DETECT A

10 GND 22 DETECT B

11 GND 23 DETECT GND

12 GND Frame GND

6789

10111213

17181920

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1GPO19GPO2

2GPO310GPO4

3GPO511GND

4GND12GND

5 +5V 13 +5V

6 GPI114GPI2

7 GPI315GPI4

8GPI5

91011

123

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1 RESET 6 +3.3LD

2 SDA 7 +3.3LD

3 DGND 8 LDGND

4SCL9LDGND

5+3.3D

Data List

M IDI Implementation Chart

2102 .raM 1 :etaD] elosnoC gnixiM latigiD [ AHAMAY

Model: CL5/CL3/CL1

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default

Messages

Altered

**************

1, 3

Memorized

Note

Number

True Voice

0–127

Velocity

Note On

Note Off

O 9nH, v=0,127

O 9nH, v=1-127

Effect Control

After

Touch

Key’s

Ch’s

Pitch

Bend

Control

Change

0,32

6,38

98,99

1-31,33-95, 102-

119

Bank Select

Data Entry

NRPN LSB,MSB

Assignable Cntrl

Prog

Change :True#

O 0–127

**************

O 0–127

0–300

Assignable

2*,1* O1* OevisulcxE metsyS

Common

:Song Pos.

:Song Sel.

:Tune

Recorder Control

System

Real Time

:Clock

:Commands

Effect Control

Aux

Messages

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local ON/OFF

:All Notes OFF

:Active Sense

:Reset

Notes

*1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.

*2 MMC

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes

X: No

Published 04/2016 MA-E0

Manual Development Group

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com

Yamaha Pro Audio global website

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Documenttranscriptie

How to Use This Reference Manual The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text. Searching for terms To search for a term, use the search function of the software you’re using to view this document. If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term. Displaying the next/previous view Reference Manual If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to jump to a different page. Using the Function Tree A function tree for the CL series is provided on page 4 and following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on-screen display or function. EN Contents Contents EQ and Dynamics ..................................................................... 64 How to Use This Reference Manual .......................................................................... 1 Using EQ ................................................................................................................ 64 Using dynamics ...................................................................................................... 67 Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries ............................................................................. 70 Function Tree ............................................................................ 4 Channel Job ............................................................................. 71 DCA group ............................................................................................................. 71 DCA Roll-out function ............................................................................................ 74 Mute group............................................................................................................ 76 Using the Recall Safe function................................................................................. 79 Channel Link function ............................................................................................ 82 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel.............................................................. 87 About Mix Minus.................................................................................................... 91 SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................................................... 6 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section ....................................................... 6 Centralogic section ................................................................. 13 Operations in the Centralogic section .................................................................... 13 Input and output patching..................................................... 18 CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .......................... Changing the input patching ................................................................................ Changing the output patching .............................................................................. Inserting an external device into a channel ............................................................ Directly outputting an INPUT channel ................................................................... Scene memory ......................................................................... 92 18 19 20 23 26 Storing and recalling scenes ................................................................................... 92 Editing scene memories.......................................................................................... 97 Using the Global Paste function.............................................................................. 99 Using the Focus Recall function ............................................................................ 102 Using the Fade function........................................................................................ 103 Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) ................................................................................................. 105 Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall............................................. 106 Using Preview mode............................................................................................. 108 Input channels ........................................................................ 28 Signal flow for input channels................................................................................ Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... HA (head amp) settings ......................................................................................... Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ................... Added pan function (Monaural input channels only) ............................................. Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .............................. Channel name display indication ........................................................................... Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) .................................................. Surround output for input channels ....................................................................... Channel library operations ..................................................................................... 28 29 31 37 40 42 46 47 50 54 Monitor and Cue functions ................................................... 109 Using the Monitor function .................................................................................. 110 Using the Cue function......................................................................................... 116 Talkback and Oscillator......................................................... 125 Using Talkback ..................................................................................................... 125 Using the Oscillator function ................................................................................ 127 OUTPUT channels .................................................................... 55 Signal flow for output channels ............................................................................. Specifying the channel name/icon ......................................................................... Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ............................. Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to MATRIX buses............................................................................................. Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) ............................................... Channel library operations ..................................................................................... Meters.................................................................................... 130 55 56 57 Operations in the METER screen ........................................................................... 130 Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ..................... 134 Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK..... 135 59 62 63 About the virtual rack ........................................................................................... Virtual rack operations .......................................................................................... Graphic EQ operations ......................................................................................... About AUTOMIXER............................................................................................... Editing the internal effects .................................................................................... Effects and tempo synchronization ....................................................................... 2 135 136 139 146 148 155 Reference Manual Contents Word clock and slot settings ................................................................................. Using cascade connections ................................................................................... Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses .................................................... Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off.............................................. Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps ................................................................................................. Setting the date and time of the internal clock ..................................................... Setting the network address ................................................................................. Dante audio network settings ............................................................................... Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) .................................................................. Using the Premium Rack ...................................................................................... 156 Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries ............ 166 I/O devices and external head amps .................................... 167 Using an I/O device ............................................................................................. Remotely controlling an R series unit ................................................................... Third-party equipment’s HA control function....................................................... Remotely controlling an amp............................................................................... Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit..................................................................... Using an external head amp ................................................................................ 167 169 173 175 176 178 Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive ..................................................... 263 Viewing Help ........................................................................................................ 263 Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly................................................... 264 183 183 186 188 190 Other functions ..................................................................... 265 Initializing the unit to factory default settings ....................................................... Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) .............. Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) ........................................................... Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) ............................... Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)................................................ Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display .......................................... Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display .............................................. Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings ........................ Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware................................................... Update function to Dante firmware ...................................................................... Recorder................................................................................ 191 About the USB memory recorder ......................................................................... Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder ....................................... Recording audio to a USB flash drive.................................................................... Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive ..................................................... Editing the title list............................................................................................... Recording or playing back using a computer DAW .............................................. Using the CL console with Nuendo Live............................................................... 191 191 193 195 196 197 200 Setup ..................................................................................... 204 About the SETUP screen....................................................................................... User settings ........................................................................................................ Preferences .......................................................................................................... USER DEFINED keys ............................................................................................. Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys ........................................ USER DEFINED knobs........................................................................................... Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs ...................................... Assignable encoders ............................................................................................ Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders .................................. GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder) functions ..................................... Custom fader bank .............................................................................................. Master fader ........................................................................................................ Custom fader bank functions ............................................................................... Console Lock ....................................................................................................... Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive............................... Formatting a USB flash drive ................................................................................ 244 245 245 246 257 Help function......................................................................... 263 MIDI....................................................................................... 183 MIDI functionality on the CL series console.......................................................... Basic MIDI settings .............................................................................................. Using program changes to recall scenes and library items.................................... Using control changes to control parameters ....................................................... Using parameter changes to control parameters .................................................. 237 239 243 244 265 265 266 266 268 268 269 269 270 270 Warning/Error Messages ...................................................... 271 204 206 213 215 217 222 223 225 226 227 227 228 229 229 230 236 Index...................................................................................... 274 3 Reference Manual Function Tree Function Tree MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the Owner’s Manual(booklet). Main SELECTED CHANNEL OVERVIEW FUNCTION ACCESS AREA 6 14 (18) TO STEREO/MONO 57 169 169 57 AMP 175 CH1-48 58 WIRELESS 176 58 EXTERNAL HA 180 CH49-72/ST IN OUTPUT 58 SURROUND 50 20, 30, 56 CHANNEL LIBRARY 54 32 EQ LIBRARY 70 1ch 32 DYNAMICS LIBRARY 70 8ch 33 CH1-48 35 CH49-72/ST IN 35 INPUT DELAY I/O 8ch GAIN/PATCH OUTPUT OUTPUT PATCH 44 EXTERNAL HA RACK 180 EXTERNAL HA EDIT 180 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT 181 LIBRARY CHANNEL PARAMETER PATCH/NAME I/O DEVICE CHANNEL PARAMETER Indication only 47 GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY 166 EFFECT LIBRARY 166 Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/ EQ-1A/DynamicEQ/Buss Comp 369/MBC4 LIBRARY 166 DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 168 MONITOR MONITOR 110 CUE 120 MONITOR 112 OSCILLATOR 128 TALKBACK 126 METER 8ch 47 INPUT METER 130 CH1-48 48 OUTPUT METER 130 CH49-72/ST IN 48 RACK RTA METER 132 47 VIRTUAL RACK DELAY SCALE INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch 24 24, 26 8ch 25, 27 HPF/EQ 64 1ch 64 8ch 66 CH1-48 CH49-72/ST IN OUTPUT DYNAMICS 1ch 66 66 66 67 67 KEY IN SOURCE SELECT 136 RACK MOUNTER 139 GEQ EDIT 140 SETUP 140 USER SETUP RACK LINK EFFECT RACK EFFECT EDIT EFFECT TYPE PREFERENCE 213 150 USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP 215 150 PREMIUM RACK 156 69 CH1-48 70 CH49-72/ST IN 70 OUTPUT 70 USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List) USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP 215 222 PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER 156 USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List) 222 PREMIUM RACK EDIT 157 ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP 225 AUTOMIXER 146 CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER 228 PARAMETRIC EQ 143 FADER ASSIGN SELECT USER LEVEL/CREATE USER KEY 68 8ch 204 150 I/O DEVICE DANTE PATCH 167 DANTE INPUT PATCH 168 4 227 207 CREATE KEY 208 SAVE KEY 211 LOGIN 209 SAVE/LOAD 230 Reference Manual Function Tree SETUP WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH OUTPUT PORT MIDI/GPI PATCH 237 240, 242 62 PORT SELECT 25, 27, 113, 121, 168, 241 CH SELECT 22, 137, 192, 228 183, 257 MIDI SETUP 184 PROGRAM CHANGE 186 Others CONTROL CHANGE 189 CONFIRMATION 214 GPI 258 SOFT KEYBORD (21) FADER START 261 LOGIN 209 BUS SETUP 243 SURROUND SETUP 205 Startup Menu CONSOLE LOCK 229 MODE SELECT DATE/TIME 245 INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES 265 NETWORK 246 INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES 265 DANTE SETUP 247 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 265 INPUT PORT TRIM 267 OUTPUT PORT TRIM 267 SLOT OUTPUT TRIM 267 FADER CALIBRATION 266 LED COLOR CALIBRATION 268 SCENE SCENE LIST 94 GLOBAL PASTE 100 Fade time 104 SONG SELECT 107 FOCUS RECALL 102 265 NOTE • The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5. • In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models. RECORDER USB 191 NUENDO LIVE 200 CH JOB CH LINK MODE 83 DCA GROUP ASSIGN 72 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN 72 RECALL SAFE MODE 80 CH COPY MODE 87 CH MOVE MODE 89 CH DEFAULT MODE 90 5 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED CHANNEL section • Even if a different screen is selected, the channel selected with the [SEL] key can be set using the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob. The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel to set all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel. Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. STEP 1. Use the [SEL] key in the top panel INPUT section, ST IN section, or the STEREO/ MONO section, to select the channel to control. 2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 3. Use the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel. NOTE Channel number • To select a MIX or MATRIX channel, use the Bank Channel name Select keys to recall the desired channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the [SEL] key for the desired channel. • The number and name of the currently-selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen. • If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same [SEL] key. • You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access Area. Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to select the next channel. • If you have turned on the option “POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button), pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1 ch). 6 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen If the destination bus channels are two mono channels: 1 2 3 1 SEND knob Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus. 2 PRE indicator The type of the corresponding bus is indicated. If the type is VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE FADER], and if the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, the type is displayed. 3 ON button Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off. If the destination bus is a stereo channel: 1 2  SEND field 3 1 In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel. 1 SEND/PAN knob The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (evennumbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal. 1 Tabs 2 PRE indicator Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field. • MIX1-16 tab............................ displays MIX buses 1-16. • MIX17-24/MATRIX tab ........... displays MIX buses 17-24 and MATRIX buses 1-8. The type of the corresponding bus is indicated. 3 ON button Switches the send signal to the two buses on or off. NOTE • If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers 2 and 3 mentioned above will not be displayed. • Press the SEND knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window. 7 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section When using CUE B Indicates that channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined with CUE B. If patched to a wireless mic (SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen) 1 RX.GAIN knob NOTE For details about how to use CUE B, see the CUE screen (When configuring CUE B). Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point. This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp. 1 GAIN knob 1 Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window. Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on. 3 OVER indicator 2 2 OL indicator  GAIN/PATCH field 2 GC indicator 1 Sets the gain for the receiver. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window. 3 3 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter 3 45 6 Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled. 4 NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure. 2 4 Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. 5 6 7 NOTE 8 For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. Warns you when the signal is clipping. 5 MUTE indicator 4 Ø (Phase) indicator Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver. Indicates the status of the phase setting. 6 Frequency 5 +48V indicator Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal. Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. 6 HPF ON indicator Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp. 7 AG-DG LINK indicator Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp. 8 Digital/Analog gain value If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here. NOTE • For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 will not be shown. For an output channel, 1 - 7 will not be shown. • If a GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP  PREFERENCE screen, the digital gain knob will appear for 1, and 2, 5, 6, and 7 will not be displayed. For details, refer to “HA (head amp) settings” (page 31). 8 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section  PAN/BALANCE field When using Surround mode (MIX1- MIX6) This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance. The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel. 3 DOWN MIX This field enables you to view the downmix coefficient and L/R button settings. Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO window. When an input channel or MIX channel is selected: 3 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus. 1 2 Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.  INPUT DELAY field This field enables you to view the delay settings. 1 ON indicator Indicates the on/off status of the delay. 2 2 Delay time The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in the middle row. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window. NOTE • For mono input channels, the pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used. • For ST IN channels, if the PAN knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left or right and -3dB at center. If the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.  HPF field (input channels only) This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location 1, and 2 1 will not be displayed. 2 ST/MONO button Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR button appears in location 2.The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. 1 2 1 HPF knob 2 Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 2 ON button Switches the HPF on or off. When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected: 1 BALANCE knob If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels. If the channel signal is monaural, the BALANCE knob is not shown and cannot be used. Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch window. 1 9 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section  EQ parameter field  EQ graph field This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window. This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ. 1 Q knob Specifies the Q for each band. If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H.SHELF (highshelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L.SHELF (lowshelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type name will be displayed. NOTE • Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counterclockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving. • Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to lowshelving. 1 2 3 • If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF. • You can also switch the filter type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.  DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters. 1 2 3 2 FREQUENCY knob 4 Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band. 1 OVER indicator 3 GAIN knob Warns you when the signal is clipping. Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band. 2 Level meter NOTE • If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel. • If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel. Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line. 3 Threshold Specifies the threshold. NOTE 4 Parameters When the BYPASS button is on, the knobs turn gray. Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings. 10 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section  INSERT field  FADER field 1 This field enables you to make insert settings. This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off status and the level. 1 Popup button 2 ON button 3 2 1 Fader 2 Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch window. Displays the current level. Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels. 4 2 Level indicator Switches the insert on or off. 1 3 Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the Σ CLIP indicator will light. 3 RACK EDIT button Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack. 3 ON button 4 IN indicator Switches the channel on and off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel. Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the insert-in. NOTE For CL V2.0 and later, the TOUCH AND TURN function assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs enables you to control the fader in the FADER field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.  DIRECT OUT field This field enables you to make Direct Out settings. 1 Popup button Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the button. 4 CUE SETTINGS button 1 2 Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen. 2 ON button This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned.  RECALL SAFE field 1 Popup button Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE window. When two channels are used for CUE, and CUE OPERATION MODE is set to CH  DCA/MUTE field Switches the Direct Out on or off. This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings. 4 1 Tabs 1 3 2 ON button 1 Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window. 2 3 When the DCA group tab is selected: 2 DCA group select buttons Switches the Recall Safe status on or off. Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned. 3 PARTIAL indicator 2 3 Mute group indicators Lights only if some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe. Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned. 11 Reference Manual SELECTED CHANNEL section When the mute group tab is selected: 4 Mute group select buttons 5 Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned. NOTE If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights orange. 5 SAFE button 6 4 Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group. 6 DCA group indicators Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned. 12 Reference Manual Centralogic section Centralogic section Operations in the Centralogic section The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press one of the Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA groups that you want to control. 2. Use the faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the (up to) eight selected channels and switch them on/off. 3. Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the parameters for the group of up to eight channels. NOTE • When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1-8. This is convenient when you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control. • The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys of the Centralogic section. • The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogic section. Bank Select keys 13 Reference Manual Centralogic section  GAIN/PATCH field OVERVIEW Screen This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp. The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel. If the head amp is patched: 2 3 4 1 1 GAIN knob Sets the analog gain of the head amp. • Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network. • If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window. 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 3 +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel. 4 Ø (Phase) indicator (input channels only) Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp NOTE • If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed. • If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the DIGITAL GAIN knob will appear instead of knob 1, and indicator 3 will not be displayed. • Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. • You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN  DIGITAL GAIN to a USER DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then adjusting the USER DEFINED knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while ALTERNATE is on.  CHANNEL NAME field This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted. : Selected channel : Unselected channel NOTE If you have retained a specific channel (that is controlled by the faders or knobs in the Centralogic section) by pressing and holding down the corresponding Bank Select key, the channel name display at the top of the channel strip graphic may differ from the name displayed at the bottom of the same channel strip. 14 Reference Manual Centralogic section If patched to a wireless mic (OVERVIEW screen) 1 If the slot is patched: The slot name will appear. 2 If the rack is connected: The patch and module name will appear. If the output is connected: Only the patch will appear. 34 5 1 RX.GAIN knob  INPUT DELAY field (input channels only) Sets the gain for the receiver. Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window. • Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. • If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window. This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window. 1 2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled. 1 DELAY ON/OFF indicator Indicates the on/off status of the delay. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure.  INSERT/DIRECT OUT field This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 8ch window. 3 Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. NOTE 1 For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 2 4 OL indicator Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point. 1 INSERT ON/OFF indicator NOTE Indicates the insert on/off status. If the audio signal for the receiver is muted, 5 is displayed. 2 DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only) 5 MUTE indicator Indicates the Direct Out on/off status. Displayed only if the audio signal for the receiver is muted. NOTE If the audio signal for the receiver is not muted, 4 is displayed. 15 Reference Manual Centralogic section  EQ field  SEND field This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the HPF and EQ. This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16 buses. To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1-16] key/[MIX 17-24/ MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. To adjust the send level for each bus, use the SEND knob of the SELECTED CHANNEL section This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus. NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.  DYNAMICS 1/2 field This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics 1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch window. If the destination bus is VARI (mono): The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale color turns black. NOTE If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank. If the destination bus is VARI (stereo): If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the left-hand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob. If the destination bus is set to FIXED: The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob. 16 Reference Manual Centralogic section  TO STEREO/MONO field  Mute group field This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/ MONO bus. This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel. A mute group (1-8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field. If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the third row. If a dimmer level has been specified for a mute group, the color of the characters will change from red to orange. Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window. When an input channel or MIX channel is selected: 1 2 1 TO STEREO PAN knob Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus. Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo. 2 ST/MONO indicator Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus. If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed. 2 When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected: The Σ CLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel. For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the balance of the left/right channels.  DCA group field A DCA group (1-16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field. Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window. 17 Reference Manual Input and output patching Input and output patching Output port (jack/port) This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs. When the CL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to each input channel. For CL5 Input channels Input port (jack/port) Output channels SLOT2 (9)-(16) MATRIX1-8 SLOT3 (1)-(2) STEREO L/R SLOT3(3) MONO SLOT3 (4)-(5) MONITOR L/R SLOT3(6) MONITOR C SLOT3 (7)-(8) CUE L/R SLOT3 (9)-(16) NO ASSIGN CH1-48 DANTE1-48 OMNI OUT 1 - OMNI OUT 6 MIX 1-6 CH49-64 DANTE49-64 OMNI OUT 7 - OMNI OUT 8 STEREO L/R CH65-72 OMNI1-8 ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B) FX1L(A), FX2L(A), FX3L(A), FX4L(A), FX5L(A), FX6L(A), FX7L(A), FX8L(A) MIX17, MIX18, MIX19, MIX20, MIX21, MIX22, MIX23, MIX24 DIGITAL OUT L/R STEREO L/R RECORDER INPUT L/R STEREO L/R For CL3 Input channels Input port (jack/port) CH1-48 DANTE1-48 CH49-64 DANTE49-64 ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B) CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching For CL1 Input channels The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and Dante audio network. Input port (jack/port) CH1-48 DANTE1-48 ST IN 1L-8R FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B) I/O Device I/O Device ID #1 ID #3 Dante Network I/O Device When the CL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following output channels. ID #2 Dante-MY16-AUD SW Output port (jack/port) Output channels DANTE1-24 MIX 1-24 DANTE25-32 MATRIX1-8 DANTE33-34 STEREO L/R DANTE35 MONO DANTE36-37 MONITOR L/R DANTE38 MONITOR C DANTE39-40 CUE L/R DANTE41-64 NO ASSIGN SLOT1 (1)-(16) MIX1-16 SLOT2 (1)-(8) MIX17-24 Dante patching OMNI 8 MY 16 MY 16 MY 16 “Dante” (ports) 64 INPUT PATCH CL series internal patching CL series 18 Reference Manual Input and output patching Changing the input patching Input patching CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and CL console internal patching. For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this window, you can patch the CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels from a maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/ O device (up to 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console. Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen) to channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1-64 in the GAIN/PATCH screen. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels that you want to control. 2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and use the port select buttons to select the input port. NOTE By default, DANTE 1-64 are assigned to input channels 1-64. Output patching Use the OUTPUT PORT screen to patch the CL console’s output channels and Dante audio network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1-64 ports. NOTE By default, MIX 1 - 24 are assigned to DANTE 1 - 24, MATRIX 1 - 8 are assigned to DANTE 25 - 32, STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35. OVERVIEW screen Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1-64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT SETUP screen) to I/O rack outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH screen of the I/O RACK to make these assignments. PATCH/NAME screen NOTE You can also select an input port from the GAIN/PATCH screen. 19 Reference Manual Input and output patching PATCH/NAME screen 2 • PREMIUM RACK...PR1L(A) - PR2R(B) 3 5 Port select buttons 7 Select the input port that is assigned to the currently-selected channel. 6 Tabs Enable you to switch between items. 1 7 Close button Closes the screen. Changing the output patching 5 To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port. 4 Selecting the output port for each output channel STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels. 2. Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and use the port select buttons to select the output port. 6 1 PATCH button Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen. 2 Icon button Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name. 3 Channel name input box Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear. 4 Category select list Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type. • DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32 • DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64 • OMNI/PB OUT .......OMNI 1 - OMNI 8, PB OUT (L), PB OUT (R) • SLOT1....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16) • SLOT2....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16) • SLOT3....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16) • EFFECT RACK ......FX1L(A) - FX8R(B) OVERVIEW screen 20 PATCH/NAME screen Reference Manual Input and output patching 7 Port select buttons PATCH/NAME screen 3 4 From the category, these buttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the selection, press the button once again. 5 9 8 Tabs Enable you to switch between items. 1 9 Close button Closes the screen. Selecting the output channel for each output port 2 7 STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen. 3. In the tabs below the OUTPUT PORT screen, select the output port you want to control. 4. Press the channel select button of the port you want to operate. 5. Use the category select list and the channel select buttons to select the send-source channel. 6 8 1 PATCH button Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port. 2 Channel select button Selects the channel to set. NOTE Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console. 3 Channel icon button SETUP screen Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name. OUTPUT PORT screen NOTE If PATCH CONFIRMATION in the PREFERNCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere. 4 Channel number display box Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed. 5 Channel name input box Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear. 6 Category select list Select the type of port. 21 Reference Manual Input and output patching CH SELECT screen NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 2 Channel select button Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category. 3 CLOSE button Closes the screen. 2 1 3 1 Category select list Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels. They vary depending on the output port type. • MIX/MATRIX ............................. MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8 • ST/MONO/MONI/CUE .............. STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), MONI L, MONI R, MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON R, SMON C, SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs, MMTX L, MMTX R, MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX Ls, MMTX Rs • DIRECT OUT 1-32 .................... CH 1 - CH 32 Direct Outs • DIRECT OUT 33-64 .................. CH 33 - CH 64 Direct Outs • DIRECT OUT 65-72 .................. CH 65 - CH 72 Direct Outs • INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-CH32 Insert 1 Outs • INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-CH64 Insert 1 Outs • INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-CH72 Insert 1 Outs • INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX1-MIX24, MATRIX1-MATRIX8 Insert 1 Outs • INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 1 Outs • INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-CH32 Insert 2 Outs • INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-CH64 Insert 2 Outs • INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-CH72 Insert 2 Outs • INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX1–MIX24, MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Insert 2 Outs • INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert 2 Outs • CASCADE MIX/MATRIX ........... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8 • CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ...... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L, CUE R 22 Reference Manual Input and output patching Inserting an external device into a channel • If you exceed the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN limitation, the indicator will light up on the left. You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT, MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for each channel. STEP 1. Connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an I/O card installed in slots 1 - 3. 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel to which you want to assign the input source. 3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field. 4. Press the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button. 5. Select an output port or an input port. 6. Press the INSERT ON button. OVERVIEW screen • If the limit is exceeded, invalid ports will be marked with a strike-out line. • If the limit is exceeded, the following ports will take priority per channel group (listed in the table above). 1 INSERT 1 will take priority over INSERT 2. 2 Lower-number channel will take priority. INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch) NOTE • If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (page 237). • There is a limit to the sum of INSERT 1 and INSERT 2 for each channel group, as shown in the table below. You can select any output or input ports. CH1-16 CH17-32 CH33-48 CH49-64 (CL5 and CL3 only) CH65-72 MIX1-24/ (CL5 ST/ only) MONO MATRIX 1-8 INSERT OUT 16 16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8 INSERT IN 16 16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8 * When using Surround mode 23 Reference Manual Input and output patching  INSERT IN HA field INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch) 3 < 6 78 < This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in. 9 6 +48V button Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2) on or off. 1 7 A.GAIN knob 2 Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2. Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. NOTE 4 • If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the INSERT IN HA field. • Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal selected for insert-out will continue to be sent. 5 8 HA meter Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert 2.  INSERT field This field enables you to make insert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the insert position. 9 Close button Closes the screen. 0 Resource Meter NOTE You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block. Displays the settings for each channel for INSERT IN and INSERT OUT. 1 INSERT OUT button NOTE Displays the currently-selected output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port. If surround mode is set on the CL series console, the INSERT resources for output channels [MIX/ST MONO] are reduced from 30 to 24. 2 INSERT IN button Displays the currently-selected input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port. 3 INSERT ON/OFF button Switches the insert on or off. 4 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Specifies whether the insert position and direct out point setting will be applied to all input channels. 5 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only) Specifies whether the insert point setting will be applied to all output channels. NOTE Insert 1 and insert 2 are serial connections with fixed sequential numbers. 24 Reference Manual Input and output patching INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch) PORT SELECT screen Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for insertion. 1 2 3 4 2 1 3 1 Channel select button 1 Category select list Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear. Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type. • OMNI...................................... OMNI1 - OMNI8 • SLOT1.................................... SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16) • SLOT2.................................... SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16) • SLOT3.................................... SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16) • GEQ RACK............................ GEQ1L(A) - GEQ16R(B) (MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only) GEQ1L(A) - GEQ8R(B) (INPUT channels only) • EFFECT RACK...................... FX1L(A) - FX8R(B) • PREMIUM RACK................... PR1L(A) - PR8R(B) 2 INSERT ON/OFF button Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the button. 3 INSERT OUT button Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen, in which you can select an output port. 4 INSERT IN button Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen, in which you can select an input port. You can also view the insert-in level by checking the indicator located to the right of the this button. 2 Port select buttons Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected channel. NOTE If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off. 3 CLOSE button Closes the screen. 25 Reference Manual Input and output patching Directly outputting an INPUT channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch) 6 The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot. STEP 1. Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card installed in slot 1-3. 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel that you want to output directly. 3. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen. 4. Press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen. 5. Select an output port. 1 4 2 3 5 1 DIRECT OUT field OVERVIEW screen Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF (immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct output position. INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch) NOTE If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device (page 237). 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port. 3 DIRECT ON button Switches the Direct Out on or off. 4 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using the multifunction knob. 5 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels. 6 Close button Closes the screen. 26 Reference Manual Input and output patching INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch) PORT SELECT screen Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eightchannel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output. 4 1 2 1 2 3 3 1 DIRECT ON button 1 Category select list Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated above the button. Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type. • OMNI/REC .............OMNI1-OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R) • SLOT1....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16) • SLOT2....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16) • SLOT3....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16) • DANTE1-32............DANTE1 - DANTE32 • DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64 2 DIRECT OUT PATCH button Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port. 3 DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using the multifunction knob. 4 Close button 2 Output port select buttons Closes the screen. Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel. 3 CLOSE button Closes the screen. 27 Reference Manual Input channels Input channels STEREO channels These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1 - 8 is assigned. This chapter explains various operations for input channels. MIX 1 2 M O N O L R (C) ST 2324 MATRIX (USE 7-8 AS CUE B) CUE (A) 1 2 7 8 L R Signal flow for input channels INPUT PATCH The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1-3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus, MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows. MONO channels CUE(A) L These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned. MIX 1 2 2324 M O N O L R (C) ST CUE(A) R CUE B L MATRIX (USE 7-8 AS CUE B) CUE (A) 1 2 7 8 TRIM CUE B R • INPUT PATCH Assigns input signals to the input channels. L R • Ø (phase) Switches the phase of the input signal. INPUT PATCH • DIGITAL GAIN Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal. • HPF (High Pass Filter) Cuts the region below the specified frequency. • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. • DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating and ducking, or as an expander or compressor. CUE(A) L CUE(A) R CUE B L TRIM • DYNAMICS 2 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser. CUE B R • INPUT DELAY Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms. • LEVEL/DCA 1-16 Adjusts the input level of the effect. • ON (On/off) Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted. 28 Reference Manual Input channels Specifying the channel name/icon • Pan Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo. On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel. Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels. 2. Press the channel number/channel name field of the channel you want to specify on the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Switch between items in the tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel name and icon. • LCR (Left/Center/Right) Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel. • MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 - 24. • MIX LEVEL 1-24 (MIX send levels 1-24) Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. • MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8. • MATRIX LEVEL 1 - 8 (MATRIX send levels 1 - 8) Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. • INSERT (MONO channels only) You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen • DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only) This can be patched to any output port, and the input signal sent directly from that output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. • METER Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is detected (page 131). 29 Reference Manual Input channels  When selecting the ICON tab PATCH/NAME screen  When selecting the PATCH tab 2 3 5 1 1 2 3 1 Channel color select buttons Select a channel color. 4 2 Icon select buttons 1 PATCH button Select a channel icon. Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port. 3 Sample name setup buttons Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later. 2 Icon button NOTE Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name. • You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a consecutive number, such as “Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a number. • In CL V1.7 and later, you can set the channel color to black (OFF). The channel indicators on channels for which black is selected will go off. 3 Channel name input box Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name. 4 Tabs Enable you to switch between items. 5 Close button Closes the screen. 30 Reference Manual Input channels  When selecting the NAME tab HA (head amp) settings You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen. You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the input channel. • To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Setting the gain Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels. 2. Press the HA/PHASE field in the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window. 4. Make settings for the head amp. OVERVIEW screen GAIN/PATCH window (8 ch) NOTE • The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and +18 dB. • Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. • The GAIN knob, +48V button, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned input port is an INPUT jack on the I/O device, the OMNI IN on the CL unit, or a slot that is connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES). 31 Reference Manual Input channels GAIN/PATCH window (1 ch) 1 8 0 • Gain compensation meter Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation. 9 2 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic) • Frequency Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal. 2 3 4 5 6 • RX.GAIN knob Sets the HA gain for the receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. 7 1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator • MUTE indicator Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver. Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. • RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up. 2 HA section Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel. NOTE • If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed. • If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure. • +48V button Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off. • Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. • A.GAIN (analog gain) knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Adjust the gain by using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 3 INPUT PORT button • HA meter Displays the level of the HA input signal. Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port to patch. • GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed. If the Gain Compensation button is turned off, the compensation gain will be reset, while the analog gain will return to the level that was obtained before you turned on the button. Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the same. 4 Icon / Channel name button Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/ NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name. 5 AG-DG LINK button If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the digital gain to the analog gain operation. While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles. 32 Reference Manual Input channels 6 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob GAIN/PATCH window (8ch) Indicates the digital gain value. Adjust the digital gain by using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels. 7 9 7 Digital gain meter Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain. 1 8 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 2 9 Ø (Phase) button Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head amp. 3 0 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels simultaneously. You can also view the link status in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 8 4 5 : Link is on. : Link is off. 6 1 Channel select button Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light. 2 PATCH button Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the input channel. 33 Reference Manual Input channels • A.GAIN (analog gain) knob Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on. PORT SELECT window TAKE FROM CHANNEL button TAKE FROM PORT button • Level meter Indicates the input signal level . • GC (Gain Compensation) button Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel. 3 HA section (If patched to a wireless mic) • TAKE FROM PORT button The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA settings of the port will remain unchanged. • TAKE FROM CHANNEL button The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port. If the channel’s HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be specified. HA setting • Frequency Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal. Default value HA gain amount -6dB HPF on/off Off Phantom power on/off Off Gain compensation on/off Off • RX.GAIN knob Sets the HA gain for the receiver. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the signal, refer to the manual from Shure. NOTE • MUTE indicator Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver. If you’re newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified if the HA INFO field’s TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed. • RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up. 3 HA section Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel. NOTE NOTE If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the MY card will be displayed. For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure. • +48V button This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched. Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off. 34 Reference Manual Input channels GAIN/PATCH window (1-48, 49-72/ST IN (CL5), 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) • Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. NOTE This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section. For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 4 Ø (Phase) button 2 Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head amp. 1 2 1 3 5 D. GAIN (digital gain) knob Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels. 6 Digital gain meter Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain. 7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 8 AG-DG LINK button If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the digital gain to the analog gain operation. While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles. 1 Parameter select buttons Switch parameters to view in the window. • ANALOG GAIN...................... Analog gain • DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain • PATCH ................................... Patch selection NOTE If it is patched to a wireless mic, the battery indicator is displayed here. 9 AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons 2 GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels simultaneously. Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 3 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 35 Reference Manual Input channels  If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button: 1  If you press the PATCH parameter select button: 2 3 4 1 1 PATCH button 1 GAIN knob Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel. Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on.  HA section (If patched to a wireless mic) 2 2 OVER indicator Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 3 +48V indicator 3 Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel. 1 RX.GAIN knob 4 Ø (Phase) indicator Sets and displays and the gain for the receiver. Indicates the phase setting for each channel. NOTE 2 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized, the knob 1 will be replaced with the slot/port number of the patch destination. 3 will not be displayed. If the input channel is patched to a rack, the knob 1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack. If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob 1 will be replaced with a dotted line “----”. Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the signal, refer to the manual from Shure.  If you press the DIGITAL GAIN parameter select button: 1 4 1 3 Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. 2 NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 3 4 OL indicator 1 GAIN knob Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point. Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob. NOTE When the receiver is muted, 2 OVER indicator is displayed on the MUTE indicator. Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level. This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected. 3 Ø (Phase) indicator Indicates the phase setting for each channel. 36 Reference Manual Input channels Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain Compensation is on If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount. Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain. For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to +45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by -15 dB). The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.  ST/MONO mode This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently. • Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually. • The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.) • The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob. If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually (page 39). At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series console will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the CL series console. If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console, because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level. However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.  LCR mode This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously. • Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively. • The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. • The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus. NOTE You can perform this operation by assigning the Gain Compensation on/off function to one of the USER DEFINED keys. NOTE If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select “LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure. 37 Reference Manual Input channels STEP 1. Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus. 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus. 3. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again. 4. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/ MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel. 5. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level. 6. In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position. OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4. Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected 7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn on/off the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus. 8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. Channels for which LCR mode is selected 7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively. 8. Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. 9. Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus. 38 Reference Manual Input channels 6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch) For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from input channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels. 1 7 Tabs 2 3 Enable you to switch between windows. 8 4 9 5 6 8 LCR button 7 ST/MONO mode If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of 4. This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. LCR mode 1 Channel select button 9 CSR knob Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. (page 41). 2 Mode LEDs The LED of the currently-selected mode will light. 3 MODE select button For a MONO channel, the mode can be switched between ST/MONO and LCR. For a STEREO channel, the mode can be switched between PAN and BALANCE. 4 ST/MONO buttons These buttons are on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode. 5 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 39 Reference Manual Input channels 1 PAN LAW select button Added pan function (Monaural input channels only) This toggle button is used to set the PAN LAW for the Input Channel. The pan setting for signals sent to the STEREO bus enables you to select PAN LAW settings. You can select one of the following: CENTER NOMINAL The pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned 100% either left or right. LR NOMINAL The pan level is -3dB at center and nominal when panned 100% either left or right. For CENTER NOMINAL For LR NOMINAL NOTE PAN LAW settings are also enabled in LCR mode. They are also enabled in Surround mode. You can also check the status of PAN LAW settings in the window shown below. For channels where the mark is on, PAN LAW is set to LR NOMINAL. NOTE The settings are also applied to the signals sent to the stereo MIX buses. • TO STEREO/MONO window (CH1-48, CH49-72/ST IN(CL5), CH49-64/ST IN(CL3), ST IN(CL1)) STEP 1. Select a monaural input channel. 2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the OVERVIEW window, and then press the knob once again. Or, in the PAN/ BALANCE field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the SELECTED CHANNEL window, and then press the knob once again. 3. Use the PAN LAW select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to set the PAN LAW for each channel. • OVERVIEW window (STEREO/MONO field) • SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW window (PAN/BALANCE field) 1 40 Reference Manual Input channels TO STEREO/MONO window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) Signal level when LCR mode is selected Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/ MONO bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels.  When the CSR knob is set to 0% (MONO channel) If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob. The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. Signal level 1 2 3 4 Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus L C TO ST PAN knob R  When the CSR knob is set to 0% (STEREO channel) Signal level The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus. 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus 2 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob L C TO ST BALANCE knob R Signal level Adjusts the panning or balance. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ indicator to the right of the knob will light. 4 ST/MONO indicator If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus L 41 C R TO ST BALANCE knob Reference Manual Input channels  When the CSR knob is set to 100% Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/ MATRIX bus Signal level Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system. You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways. Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus  Using the Selected Channel section L C PAN knob R With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.  When the CSR knob is set to 100% (ST IN channel)  Using the Centralogic section With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously. Signal level Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus  Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus L With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously. C R TO ST BALANCE knob Signal level Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus L C R TO ST BALANCE knob 42 Reference Manual Input channels  If the MIX bus is a FIXED type Using the Selected Channel section This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses. STEP 1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects processor, or other device to the corresponding output port. 2. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX bus. 3. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section. 4. Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 5. Turn on the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MIX bus. 6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. A gray circle is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot adjust the send level.  For a VARI type MIX bus or a MATRIX bus The TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob is displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level.  If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will operate as a BALANCE knob). SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen NOTE NOTE • If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section. • For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. • For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO window, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob function will be the same as in BALANCE mode. MIX buses can be either a FIXED type whose send level is fixed, or a VARI type whose send level is variable. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP window. 43 Reference Manual Input channels Using the Centralogic section MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND window 3 You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus. STEP 1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the corresponding output port. 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control. 3. In the OVERVIEW scree, press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the desired send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus, and then press it again. 4. Use the SEND ON/OFF button in the MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND screen to turn the signal on/off and to adjust the send level. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 1 2 1 ALL PRE button Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light. 2 ALL POST button Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off. 3 Send destination indicator Indicates the currently-selected send destination. 4 Send destination select buttons Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination. OVERVIEW screen 5 Channel select button Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button. NOTE • If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel. • In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/ MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX/MATRIX that you want to adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it. 6 PRE/POST button Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE. NOTE • If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS SETUP window (page 243). • The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses. 7 SEND ON/OFF button Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off. 44 Reference Manual Input channels 8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear. If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob. If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode selected here will appear. Function access area NOTE • Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The most recently selected group of MIX/MATRIX buses will be assigned to the Centralogic section. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to indicate the send level of signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. • Alternatively, you can press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a window from which you can select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section. If you select the MIX buses or MATRIX buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button will be changed automatically. • If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again. 9 SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear. Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus. STEP 1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the corresponding output port. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button. 3. Use the MIX/MTRX ON select buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX. 4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus. 5. Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. 45 Reference Manual Input channels Channel name display indication SENDS ON FADER mode 1 In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON/OFF is indicated for the channel. CHANNEL ON 3 CHANNEL OFF 2 On the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is shown if NAME DISPLAY is set to “NAME ONLY”. Channel number display 1 MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button Use this button to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX for the bus displayed in the Function Access Area. 2 MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders. 3 Close button Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode. 46 Reference Manual Input channels Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay) INPUT DELAY screen (8ch) You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay. This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using the Input Delay function. This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a time gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV. 1 2 3 STEP 1. Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals to the MIX/MATRIX bus. 2. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section. 3. Press the INPUT DELAY field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 4. Press the 8 ch tab in the INPUT DELAY screen. 5. Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay. SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 5 4 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will appear as the units in the channel name display. INPUT DELAY screen NOTE 2 Channel select button If you are viewing the 8 ch INPUT DELAY screen, you can use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight. The currently-selected input channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the channel. 3 Delay setting knob (input channels only) You can use the multifunction knob to adjust the delay. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob. 4 Tabs Enable you to switch between windows. 5 Close button Closes the screen. 47 Reference Manual Input channels INPUT DELAY (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) Additional functions for stereo input channels With V3, you can temporarily set the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can select from the following three settings. 1  L-MONO 2 3 Only the L channel is temporarily set as a mono signal. ON PAN/BAL ON PAN/BAL STEREO L STEREO R STEREO IN Lch STEREO IN Rch  R-MONO Only the R channel is temporarily set as a mono signal. 1 DELAY SCALE button Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. ON PAN/BAL ON PAN/BAL STEREO L STEREO R STEREO IN Lch 2 Channel select button Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel. 3 Delay setting knob (input channels only) Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale). STEREO IN Rch NOTE If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the knob. 48 Reference Manual Input channels 1 LR-MONO SELECT field  LR-MONO Select one of the four buttons. The button you select lights up, and the others go off. Although the result is a monaural signal that is the summation of signals from both channels, the R channel of the stereo input channel is muted. Normal STEREO setting L-MONO R-MONO LR-MONO If a stereo input channel is selected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below. NOTE • When you set LR-MONO, the PAN mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the PAN knob is set to the center position. • When you set LR, L-MONO, or R-MONO, the BALANCE mode is selected at the same time. In addition, the BALANCE knob is set to the center position. 2  Setting procedure 2 LR-MONO SELECT button If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as shown below. This a toggle button. The setting switches each time the button is pressed. 1 49 Reference Manual Input channels Surround output for input channels SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen appears as shown below. Setting Surround mode 3 You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button (page 205). 3. Press the 5.1 SURROUND button. 4. Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. 5. Press the APPLY button. 6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box. 67 1 2 3 4 5 SETUP screen SURROUND SETUP screen NOTE When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2. However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 remain as MONO x2. 1 L/R knob This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position. Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 2 F/R knob This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position. Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 3 Assign buttons for each bus If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off. 50 Reference Manual Input channels 4 DIV knob This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center). Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 5 LFE knob 1 This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel. Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 2 3 6 Surround position The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting. Hard pan: Red Any other setting: Orange 7 Surround graph This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen. Adjusting F/R OVERVIEW screen 1 Surround graph If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown below. This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen. 2 L/R F/R switch button Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R. Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 3 LFE knob 1 This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel. Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 2 3 Adjusting L/R 51 Reference Manual Input channels 6 DIV knob SURROUND PAN 1CH screen This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center). Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen. 3 8 9 > 7 LFE knob This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel. Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 8 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all parameters to the initial values. 1 9 COPY button All parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory. 2 0 PASTE button Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current settings. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. 3 4 5 6 7 1 Surround graph This graph shows the surround positions. 2 Surround position You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph. 3 Assign buttons for each bus All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off. 4 L/R knob This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position. Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 5 F/R knob This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position. Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. 52 Reference Manual Input channels SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 4964/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) 1 2 If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen. 1 2 Adjusting F/R 1 Surround graph This graph shows the surround positions. 2 L/R F/R switch button Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R. Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments. Adjusting L/R 53 Reference Manual Input channels TO STEREO/MONO screen The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters. If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for MIX 1-8 appears as shown below. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes. 1 2 1 L/R buttons Use these buttons to set the output destination. 2 Coefficient Setting fader Channel library operations Use this fader to set the downmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator. The “INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters (including the head amp settings) for input channels. To recall a library item, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using libraries” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. LIBRARY button 54 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels OUTPUT channels STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels. This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels, MONO channels). MIX Signal flow for output channels 1 2 2324 M MATRIX O (USE 7-8 N O AS CUE B) CUE L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R ST (A) The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channels are provided. MIX channels These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus. MIX 1 2 2324 M O ST ON L R (C) CUE(A) ON TRIM CUE B ON MATRIX (USE 7-8 AS CUE B) CUE (A) 1 2 7 8 L R MATRIX channel KEY IN These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/ MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports. CUE(A) ON TRIM MIX CUE B ON 1 2 2324 M MATRIX O (USE 7-8 N O AS CUE B) L R (C) 1 2 7 8 ST CUE (A) L R MATRIX 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) CUE(A) ON 1-6 TRIM CUE B ON This section does not exist in MATRIX 7-8. • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. • DYNAMICS 1 This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander. • LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the channel. 55 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels Specifying the channel name/icon • ON (On/off) Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels. 2. On the OVERVIEW screen, press the channel number/channel name field of the channel for which you want to specify a channel name/icon. 3. Follow the steps for the input channels (page 29). • MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off) This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus. • MATRIX (MATRIX send level) This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1 - 8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key. If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses. • INSERT You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations. • METER Indicates the level of the output channel. You can switch the position at which the level is detected. OVERVIEW screen PATCH/NAME screen • KEY IN (MIX channels 21-24 only) You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21 - 24 to Dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to control the Dynamics. • RACK IN PATCH Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack. • OUTPUT PATCH Assigns an output port to an output channel. • MONITOR SELECT Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source. 56 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/ MONO bus There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for input channels. STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the MIX channel from which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus. 2. In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again. 3. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/ MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel. 4. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level. 5. In the Centralogic section, press an OUTPUT bank select key so that the MIX channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section. 6. Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Centralogic section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position. OVERVIEW screen TO STEREO/MONO window NOTE Refer to “Signal level when LCR mode is selected” (page 41) for details on how the signal level sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the TO ST PAN knob. TO STEREO/MONO window(8ch) You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels. The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 3. 1 Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected 7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off . 8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. 2 3 8 4 Channels for which LCR mode is selected 7. Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window. 8. Press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus. 9. Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and STEREO (L/R) bus. 9 5 6 7 ST/MONO mode LCR mode 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 2 Mode LEDs The LED of the currently-selected mode will light. 57 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels 3 MODE select button TO STEREO/MONO screen (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT) Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR. 4 ST/MONO buttons These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode. Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels. 5 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 1 2 3 4 6 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. 7 Tabs Enable you to switch between windows. 8 LCR button This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus. 9 CSR knob Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. 1 Channel select button Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously. 2 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. 3 TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob Adjusts the panning or balance. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light. 4 ST/MONO indicator If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location. The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus. 58 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/ MONO channels to MATRIX buses You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8 in the following two ways.  Using the Selected Channel section With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses. SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen  Using the Centralogic section With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus. NOTE • You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO channels. • If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section. Using the Selected Channel section Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses. STEP 1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect an external device. 2. Using the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section, assign the desired MIX channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section. 3. Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to select the input channel that will send signals to the MATRIX buses. 4. Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section. 5. In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MATRIX bus. 6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. 59 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels Using the Centralogic section MATRIX SEND screen 3 This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus. STEP 1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect an external device to that output port. 2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control. 3. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the desired send-destination MATRIX bus, and then press it again. 4. Set the SEND ON/OFF button to ON, and use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the send level. 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 ALL PRE button Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) 2 ALL POST button Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) OVERVIEW screen 3 Send destination indicator NOTE Indicates the currently-selected send destination. • If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel. • If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus. • In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/ MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the TO MIX/MATRIX that you want to adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it. 4 Send destination select buttons Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination. 5 Channel select button Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button. 6 PRE/POST button Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE. 7 SEND ON/OFF button Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off. 60 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels 8 SEND PAN/BALANCE knob Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear. If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob. If the send destination is stereo, this is fixed to BALANCE. 9 SEND LEVEL knob Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode) Function Access Area You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus. NOTE STEP 1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send • Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also change automatically. • If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus. • You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again. signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output port. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button. The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status. In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses. 3. Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX. Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/ MATRIX buses. 4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the send-destination MATRIX bus. 5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus. 6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way. 7. When you’re finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the Function Access Area. The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode. 61 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay) OUTPUT PORT screen 2 This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from each other. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the SETUP screen. 3. Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SETUP screen 0 OUTPUT PORT screen 1 Slot number/Card type If an output channel of slot 1 - 3 is selected for operations, this shows the slot number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot. 2 DELAY SCALE button Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time. 3 Output Port This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned. 4 Channel select button Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the currently-selected channel is displayed. 5 Delay time knob Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY SCALE window is indicated below the knob. NOTE If the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob. 62 Reference Manual OUTPUT channels 6 DELAY button Channel library operations Switches the output port delay on or off. The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters for output channels. To recall a library item, select an output channel and press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 7 Ø (Phase) button Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase (black) and reverse phase (yellow). 8 GAIN knob Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob in the screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1 - 8. Rotate the knob to set the value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob. LIBRARY button 9 Level meter Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port. 0 Tabs Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row. SURROUND MONITOR1-6 MONITOR MATRIX OUT1-6 MIX CASCADE OUT 1-24 STEREO CASCADE OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX CASCADE OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) CUE(A) CASCADE OUT L,R OMNI OUT DIRECT OUT 1-72{64,48} MIX OUT 1-24 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) OUTPUT PATCH PHONES OUT LR DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER SLOT1OUT DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER SLOT2OUT DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER OUTPUT PATCH DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER OMNI OUT OUTPUT PATCH DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER DANTE OUT OUTPUT PATCH DELAY (MAX:1000ms) METER CH INSERT 1,2 OUT 1-72{64,48} MIX INSERT OUT 1-24 STEREO INSERT OUT L,R,MONO(C) MATRIX INSERT OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) [PHONES] OUTPUT PATCH SLOT1 SLOT3OUT SLOT3 16 GAIN TRIM 8 DA GAIN + - 2 3 DANTE OUTPUT 64 DIGITAL OUT [SLOT] SLOT2 16 DIT [OMNI OUT] (1-8) [DANTE OUT] (1-64) [DIGITAL OUT] AES/EBU RECORDER CUE [2TR RECORDER] ENCODER GAIN 1 GAIN TRIM 2 METER 2 GAIN TRIM 16 RECORDER IN MONO(C) Tip Ring Sleeve DA PHONES LEVEL MONITOR OUT L,R,MONO(C) CUE(A) OUT L,R STEREO L 2 USB STEREO R 63 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics EQ and Dynamics NOTE • The EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can edit the parameter settings by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. • EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. • You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter (page 9). • Even when the HPF/EQ window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the EQ. Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics. EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander. HPF/EQ window (1ch) This lets you edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel. 78 9 < A B C D Using EQ E F G H 1 This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels. 2 3 4 STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you want to control. 2. Press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window. 4. Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters. I K 5 J M L N O 6 1 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel. 2 LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band. OVERVIEW screen 3 HPF ON/OFF button (Output channels only) HPF/EQ window Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a high pass filter. NOTE Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass filter button on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter. 64 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 4 EQ type select button D COMPARE button Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY. The following EQ types can be selected. PRECISE Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. NOTE This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that allow knee adjustments. AGGRESSIVE This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic expression. SMOOTH This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the original sound. LEGACY This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands). For details on how to use the ? - D buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. E EQ FLAT button Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB. F HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band. G LPF ON/OFF button Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band. H EQ ON/OFF button Switches the EQ on or off. I EQ IN/OUT level meters Indicates the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels. 5 ATT knob J EQ parameter setting knobs Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this. Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, GAIN parameters and BYPASS button for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this. 6 Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. NOTE 7 EQ graph • If the shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output channel, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear. • If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q parameter will not appear. • When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray. Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. 8 RTA button If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph. K HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only) 9 HOLD button Switches the HPF on or off. Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA. NOTE Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the HPF ON/OFF button, and use the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency. 0 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the EQ Library window. L HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only) A DEFAULT button Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this. Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values. B COPY button M HPF type select button (input channels only) All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory. Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct. C PASTE button N HA HPF ON indicator Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp. 65 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics O FREQUENCY HPF/EQ window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT) Indicates the HPF cutoff frequency of the external head amp. This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously. This window is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels. HPF/EQ window (8ch) This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings. 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. 2 EQ graph Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type appears below the graph. 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button. 3 EQ ON/OFF button Switches the EQ on or off. The Σ clipping indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the input signal is clipping. 2 EQ graph This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ and filters. 4 HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only) Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. Press this button to make adjustments using the multifunction knob. 5 HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only) Switches the HPF on or off. 66 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics Using dynamics DYNAMICS 1/2 window (1ch) All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel. Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor. 8 STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys to select the channel for which you want to control the dynamics. 2. Press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field in the OVERVIEW screen. 3. Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window. 4. Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters. 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 7 C A B 9 Dynamics 1 field D Dynamics 2 field 1 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library window. OVERVIEW screen DYNAMICS 1/2 window 2 DEFAULT button Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values. NOTE • The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction. • Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations. • You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings (page 10). • Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control the dynamics. 3 COPY button All dynamics parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory. 4 PASTE button Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. 5 COMPARE button Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. NOTE For details on how to use buttons 1 - 5, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. 6 Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel. 67 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 7 Dynamics type buttons A KEY IN SOURCE select button Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types. Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE window, in which you can select a keyin signal that will trigger the dynamics. • Dynamics 1 for an input channel GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER • Dynamics 2 for an input channel COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER • Dynamics 1 for an output channel COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S 8 Dynamics graph Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors. 9 Dynamics parameter setting knobs Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currentlyselected dynamics type. • • • • • GATE or DUCKING: • COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER: SELF PRE EQ ......... The pre-EQ signal of the same channel SELF POST EQ ....... The post-EQ signal of the same channel MIX OUT 21-24 ........ Output signals of MIX channels 21-24 CH 1-72 POST EQ, ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ, MIX 1-24 POST EQ, MTRX 1-8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ ........ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel *1 *1 Choose from a group of eight channels. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. B KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel) Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass. • Filter select buttons ............. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on. • Q knob................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • FREQUENCY knob ............... Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S: • DE-ESSER: C KEY IN CUE button (Displayed only for Dynamics 1 for an input channel) Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you move to a different screen. 0 Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter NOTE These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels. The cue monitoring does not support CUE B. D Tabs Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen. 68 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics 3 Dynamics graph DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch) Indicates the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that channel. This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right. 4 THRESHOLD knob Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this. 1 5 DYNAMICS ON/OFF button 2 3 Switches dynamics on or off. 4 5 1 Channel select button Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button. 2 DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears, indicating the open/close status of the gate. Type = Any type other than GATE Type = GATE If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following: Gate status Red Yellow Green Off (dark) On/Off status On On On Off Open/Close status Close Open Open - Amount of gain reduction 30 dB or more less than 30 dB 0 dB - 69 Reference Manual EQ and Dynamics Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 4964/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT) This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel. You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner’s Manual. 1 EQ library 2 There is an “INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ settings for input channels, and an “OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels. To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the /HPF/EQ window. LIBRARY button NOTE You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty (40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are read-only presets. Dynamics library Use the “Dynamics Library” to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on CL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input channel’s Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel’s Dynamics 1. You can’t recall a type that cannot be used. To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS 1/2 window. 1 Channel select button NOTE Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button. You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only presets. 2 Dynamics parameter area This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel. If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area. The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line. 70 Reference Manual Channel Job Channel Job This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels. DCA group CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously. DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the Centralogic section faders 1 - 8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group. A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped. Function Access Area CH JOB menu NOTE • You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window by pressing the DCA/ MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen. • You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders. • The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs. Assigning channels to a DCA group There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group. • You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or • You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned. NOTE • DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene. • With CL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus master, Mix bus master, and Matrix bus master channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups were formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use the DCA groups for output master channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous controls.  Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the DCA GROUP button. 3. Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to assign channels. 4. Use the [SEL] keys in the INPUT section or ST IN section to select the channels that you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed). 71 Reference Manual Channel Job 5 CLEAR ALL button DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group. Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group. 6 DCA ROLL-OUT button Enter the DCA ROLL OUT mode. This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader in the Centralogic section, you can access (roll-out) and control the faders (assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank on the left. 5 6 1 2 7 PRE&POST button 3 Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as PRE and POST. The PRE&POST indicator is shown below a DCA group that has this setting. 4 8 POST ONLY button Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as POST only. NOTE 7 9 • You can set the object of muting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group. • If you mute any of the DCA groups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal route for that channel (including sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted. 9 CLOSE button 8 Closes the window. 1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window. 2 DCA group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group. While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the onscreen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 NAME EDIT button Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group. When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text. The DCA group name is displayed on the DCA group select button. The registered group name is displayed on the PATCH/NAME tab in the RECALL SAFE MODE popup window. 4 DCA group select button Selects the DCA group that you want to assign. 72 Reference Manual Channel Job  Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong  Using DCA groups Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group. • Level adjustment: Faders .... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group can be adjusted while preserving the level differences of each channel. The input faders will not operate at this time. • On/Mute switch: [ON] key.... When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered to the -∞ dB position). • Cue Monitor: [CUE] key ....... When you press the Centralogic section [CUE] key to make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be enabled. For more information about cue, refer to “Using the Cue function” (page 116). STEP 1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to operate. 2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 3. Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple selections are allowed). SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen DCA/MUTE field Controlling DCA groups Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA groups. STEP 1. Assign input and output channels to DCA groups. 2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to the DCA group you want to use. 3. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the [DCA 1-8] key or the [DCA 9-16] key. 4. Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group. NOTE • You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1-8], or [DCA 9-16] key in the Channel Strip section to select the DCA group that you want to control. • In the DCA member display on the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to scroll through channels when there are 15 or more channels assigned. 73 Reference Manual Channel Job  Setting the DCA Roll-out function DCA Roll-out function You can now access all of the channels assigned to a DCA group simultaneously through the fader banks. This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader in the Centralogic section, you can use the Roll-out function to access (roll-out) and control the faders (assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank on the left. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window. 3. Press the DCA ROLL-OUT button. 4. Select a DCA group. If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group other than the selected one, the group selection will change. 5. Select a block (in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders) and the alignment. 6. Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.  DCA ROLL-OUT operation NOTE STEP 1. Use a bank select key to select the DCA group that you want to control, then press the You cannot turn DCA Roll-out mode on if one of the following popup windows is open. If DCA Roll-out mode is already turned on, opening one of the windows will cause DCA Roll-out mode to quit. - DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window - RECALL SAFE MODE popup window [SEL] key for that DCA group. DCA Roll-out mode is engaged, and the faders that have been assigned to the DCA group will be rolled out. 2. If you press the [SEL] key for another DCA group, faders that have been assigned to that DCA group will be rolled out. 3. Press the same [SEL] key again to exit DCA Roll-out mode. NOTE • You cannot turn Roll-out mode on while operating the DCA group (for example, while assigning channels or editing the group name). • Even if Roll-out mode is turned on while you are controlling a GEQ via faders, you cannot edit the DCA group using the faders. • If the number of channels assigned to the DCA group exceeds the number of faders in the block, you can use the multifunction knob or the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob to scroll the content of the block from left to right. While the knob is turned, the message “DCA ROLL-OUT: DCA members scrolling.” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. • If, for example, the DCA group to be operated is in the Centralogic section and the HPF/EQ window is displayed, the HPF/EQ parameters for the multifunction knob cannot be operated. To operate a parameter that is not assigned, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. • All bank select keys in the block (to which the displayed channels belong) will light up. • If the faders are rolled out to the Centralogic section (block B), the IN/OUT select keys in the Centralogic section will be disabled. • Bank select keys in blocks in which no faders are rolled out will operate normally. • When in DCA ROLL-OUT mode, you can exit this mode by pressing a Bank Select key. In that case, the screen will switch to the bank for the key that was pressed. Function Access Area 74 ASSIGN MODE popup window Reference Manual Channel Job DCA ROLL-OUT screen Using the temporary unmute function If one of the DCA group buttons on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled. Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assigned to DCA GROUP 1. Operation Example 1 2 1 1. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off. The indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted. 2. Press the ON key for CH 1. CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on. 3. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp comes on. DCA 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on. 3 Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigned to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1. Operation Example 2 1. Set MUTE MASTER 1 to ON (MUTE). CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes. 2. Press the ON key for CH 1. CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on. 3. Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off. CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes. 4. Press the ON key for CH 1. CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on. 5. Press the ON key for CH 1 again. CH 1 is muted again, and the ON key flashes. 6. Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE MASTER 1 to OFF. CH 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on. 1 ROLL-OUT BLOCK Enables you to select a block in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders. CL5 : Blocks A, B, C CL3/CL1 : Blocks A, B 2 ALIGN button Enables you to choose whether the DCA group is rolled out to the faders from the left or right. 3 DCA group select button Selects the DCA group that you want to control. 75 Reference Manual Channel Job Mute group NOTE • You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group. • The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs. CL series consoles feature eight mute groups. Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1 - 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same group. Assigning channels to mute groups As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups. • You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or • You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned. • If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, these numbers will light orange. For a channel for which the Mute Safe function (page 79) has been turned on, an “S” indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.  Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Use the mute group master buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels. 4. Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate (multiple selections are allowed). Function Access Area CH JOB menu 76 Reference Manual Channel Job 5 MUTE GROUP MASTER button DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off. Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group. 6 DIMMER LEVEL knob 7 Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled. NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange. 1 2 7 CLEAR ALL button Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group. 8 3 8 MUTE SAFE button 4 Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute groups. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are temporarily excluded from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to “Using the Mute Safe function” (page 79). 5 6 9 CLOSE button Closes the window.  Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong 9 STEP 1. Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to operate. 2. Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 3. Use the mute group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned. (Multiple selections are allowed.) 1 DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window. 2 Mute group assign field This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group. While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the onscreen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group. If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe (that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green. 3 NAME EDIT Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group. When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text. The mute group name is displayed on the mute group select button. SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen 4 Mute group select button Selects the mute group that you want to assign. 77 DCA/MUTE field Reference Manual Channel Job Using mute groups NOTE The USER SETUP window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make system-wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window. To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function for a mute group 1 - 8 to a USER DEFINED key.  Turning mute groups on/off with USER DEFINED keys  Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute On/Off function. The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups. To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab. 4. Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute On/Off function. 5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose“MUTE GROUP x” (where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column. 6. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER DEFINED key that you selected in step 4. SETUP screen NOTE Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.  Temporarily unmuting a channel You can unmute a muted channel in the mute group temporarily. USER SETUP window USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window 78 Reference Manual Channel Job Using the Recall Safe function Using the Mute Safe function Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs. “Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function (page 102), which you can apply to individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Press the MUTE SAFE button in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window. 4. Press a [SEL] key for the channel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple selections are allowed). CH JOB menu STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe operations. 4. Use the Safe Parameter select button in the RECALL SAFE MODE window to select the target for Recall Safe operations. 5. To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn the SAFE button on. (If you selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.) 6. To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE field. 7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the window. Then perform a Recall operation. DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window NOTE The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark. Function Access Area Using the temporary unmute function If one of the mute group master buttons on a channel is ON, press the [ON] key for that channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in PREVIEW mode, any operation during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled. CH JOB menu NOTE • Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off, you must also perform the operation described in step 5. • Channel Link (page 82) and bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe; they will always be reproduced in the recalled scene. This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated. You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter. • You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus Recall function (page 102). Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. 79 Reference Manual Channel Job 4 GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display section • If you perform a Recall operation while holding down a [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings for the corresponding channel will temporarily be enabled for that Recall operation. Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by the Recall Safe function for all scenes. Press this section to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. RECALL SAFE MODE window 2 14 INPUT PATCH All input patches OUTPUT PATCH All output patches CASCADE IN CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT PATCH settings INPUT NAME All input channel names OUTPUT NAME All output channel names HA All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps CUSTOM FADER BANK Custom fader bank settings GEQ RACK EFFECT RACK PREMIUM RACK Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 16, Effect racks 1 - 8, Premium racks 1- 8 individually. MIX Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-24 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one even-numbered channel). MATRIX The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously. Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one oddnumbered channel and one even-numbered channel). SURROUND SETUP Surround mode settings. NOTE CH LINK All channel link group settings MUTE GROUP NAME All Mute group names FADER BANK SELECT FADER BANK selection status, MASTER FADER assign status HA/PATCH 3 5 6 RACK 9 A 7 0 8 BUS SETUP 1 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button If you press the CLEAR ALL button, the Recall Safe function will temporarily be disabled. However, the parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change. OTHERs 2 Safe channel display section Indicates the channels that are currently set to Recall Safe. NOTE All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels. If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack A and B individually. For other racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked. 5 Channel select button Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels. Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels. NOTE Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel. 6 Selected channel display 3 SET BY SEL button This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel. Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel. 80 Reference Manual Channel Job 7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) • MONO channel Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels. Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels. 8 APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (shown only for output channels) If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green, as follows. Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels. Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels. 9 Safe parameter select button (excluding DCA groups) Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel. The button indication varies depending on the channel type. This figure indicates that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings. In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels: • Input channel NOTE ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button. Button name Corresponding parameter • MIX channel • MATRIX channel • STEREO channel 81 Input channel MIX channel MATRIX channel STEREO/ MONO channel WITH MIX SEND Send level to the MIX bus WITH MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus ALL*1 All parameters O HA HA-related settings O HPF HPF settings O EQ EQ settings DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings O MIX SEND Send level to MIX bus O MATRIX SEND Send level to MATRIX bus O FADER Fader settings O O O O CH ON [ON] key settings O O O O TO ST On/off setting for STEREO bus assignment, PAN, etc. O O MONO On/off setting for MONO bus assignment O O INPUT PATCH Input patch settings O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Reference Manual Channel Job Button name Corresponding parameter Input channel MIX channel MATRIX channel STEREO/ MONO channel DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings O INSERT Insert on/off O*2 O O O INSERT PATCH Insert patch settings O*2 O O O Channel Link function Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a “link group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels cannot coexist on the same link group. *2 DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings MIX ON MIX Send On/Off O MATRIX ON MATRIX Send On/Off O DELAY Delay settings O NAME Channel name O OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings BAL BLANCE parameter settings DCA ASSIGN*3 Settings registered in DCA group O O O O MUTE ASSIGN Settings registered in MUTE group O O O O O O The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices. For an input channel: • Head amp settings • Digital gain settings • HPF settings • EQ settings • Dynamics 1 settings • Dynamics 2 settings • Insert on and insert point settings • Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings • Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses • On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses • Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses • On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses • Fader operations • [ON] key operations • TO STEREO/MONO setting • DELAY setting • DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting • MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings O O O O O O O O O (STEREO only) *1. The default setting is ALL on. *2. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons. *3. When these buttons are turned on, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made. 9 Safe parameter select button (DCA) For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on, Recall Safe will apply to the DCA master level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall Safe will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button. For an output channel: • EQ settings • Dynamics settings • Insert on and insert point settings • Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1 • On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1 • Fader operations • [ON] key operations • TO STEREO/MONO setting *1 • DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting • MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings *1 MATRIX channel not applicable 0 SAFE button (excluding DCA groups) When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel. NOTE Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be enabled if this button is off. A CLOSE button Closes the window. 82 Reference Manual Channel Job Linking the desired input channels CH LINK MODE window (input channels) This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels. You can view the input channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked. NOTE 5 Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the CH LINK button in the CH JOB menu. 3. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel. 4. Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed). 5. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in step 4, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed). 1 2 3 4 1 Input channel display field Function Access Area When you create a link group, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link input channels in this window. CH JOB menu NOTE NOTE • Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked. • In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked. • When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the [SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink. • If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored. 2 Link indicator If an input channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings. While you hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed. 83 Reference Manual Channel Job 3 LINK PARAMETER field 4 SEND PARAMETER field Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can do this independently for each link group. The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field. If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es). Head amp settings However, for wireless devices, the GAIN parameter for the receiver side is not included. MIX 1-24 MIX buses 1-24 HA MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8 HPF HPF settings NOTE DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings EQ EQ settings DYNAMICS 1, 2 Dynamics 1 and 2 settings INSERT Insert settings DIRECT OUT Direct Out settings MIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses MIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses FADER Fader operations DCA DCA group assignment CH ON Channel on/off MUTE Mute group assignment TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses DELAY Channel delay settings If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked. 5 INPUT/OUTPUT button Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen.  Channel link operations • Linking three or more channels Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each input channel you want to add to the link group. • Adding a new channel to an existing link group Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group. NOTE If the link-destination input channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group. • Removing a channel from a link group Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove. NOTE • If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” (page 64). • Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading”phase of a recalled scene.) * Units of 8ch refers to Ch 1-8/Ch 9-16/Ch 17-24/Ch 25-32/Ch 33-40/Ch 41-48/Ch 49-56/Ch 57-64/Ch 65-72/ ST IN 1L-ST IN 4R/ST IN 5L-ST IN 8R. • If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked. • The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the channels. • In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together. 84 Reference Manual Channel Job 3 LINK PARAMETER field CH LINK MODE window (output channels) Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can do this independently for each link group. The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field. You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked. 5 1 2 3 EQ EQ settings DYNAMICS Dynamics settings INSERT Insert settings MATRIX SEND Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1 MATRIX ON On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1 FADER Fader operations CH ON Channel on/off TO STEREO On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1 DCA DCA group assignment MUTE Mute group assignment *1 MATRIX channel not applicable NOTE • If you link Dynamics for two or more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “EQ and Dynamics” (page 64). 4 * Units of 8ch refers to MIX 1 - MIX 8/MIX 9 - MIX 16/MIX 17 - MIX 24/MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8. • If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked. • In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together. 4 SEND PARAMETER field If you have turned on the MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es). 1 Output channel display field When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window. MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8 NOTE NOTE If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked. In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 5 INPUT/OUTPUT button 2 Link indicator Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen. If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings. While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed. 85 Reference Manual Channel Job 1 Channel select button  Channel link operations Select a channel that you want to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in blue, the selected output channel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear for linked channels. • Linking three or more channels Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output channel you want to add to the link group. • Adding a new channel to an existing link group Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group. NOTE If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group. When selecting a channel • Removing a channel from a link group Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove. When linking channels 2 LINK buttons Link the channel selected in, 1. • Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.) 3 UNLINK button Cancels the link selected in, 1. 4 UNSELECT ALL De-selects all selected channels. 5 CLOSE button Closes the window. CH LINK SET window NOTE Displayed when you press the channel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can also link channels in this window. If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model. 1 2 3 5 4 86 Reference Manual Channel Job Copying, moving, or initializing a channel You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings. Copying the parameters of a channel You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination. You can copy between the following combinations of channels. • Between input channels • Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel • Between MIX channels • Between MATRIX channels STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel. 4. Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are allowed). 5. If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy. 6. Press the COPY button to execute the copy. Function Access Area 1 4 2 3 1 SOURCE CH field Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field. If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field. Before selection After selection CH JOB menu CH COPY MODE window This window enables you to copy channel settings. 87 Reference Manual Channel Job Moving the parameters of a channel If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy. If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters will be copied: The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will move forward or backward by one. • MODULE PARAMETERS button Selected channel module parameters Move • WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel 1 2 3 4 5 1 5 2 3 4 Move by one. You can move settings between the following combinations of channels. • Between input channels • Between ST IN channels STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the MOVE button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Press a [SEL] key to select the move-source channel. 4. Press the [SEL] key for the move-destination channel. 5. To execute the move, press the MOVE button. 2 DESTINATION CHs field Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted. If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 COPY button Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copydestination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation. 4 CLOSE button Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen. Function Access Area 88 CH JOB menu Reference Manual Channel Job 3 MOVE button CH MOVE MODE window Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and movedestination channel, the channel settings move from the move-source to the movedestination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and movedestination will shift toward the move-source by one channel. 4 CLOSE button Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen. 1 2 3 4 1 SOURCE CH field Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field. 2 DESTINATION CH field Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel. When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you want to change the move-destination channel, press the [SEL] key for the desired input channel. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the DESTINATION CH field. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 89 Reference Manual Channel Job Initializing the parameters of a channel CH DEFAULT MODE window You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s). Enables you to initialize parameters. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button. 2. Press the DEFAULT button in the CH JOB menu. 3. Press the [SEL] key of the channel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple selections are allowed). 4. Press the DEFAULT button to execute the Initialization. 1 2 3 1 TARGET CHs field Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to deselect the channel. Function Access Area CH JOB menu NOTE • If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected. • In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. NOTE 2 DEFAULT button After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected). After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation. 3 CLOSE button Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen. 90 Reference Manual Channel Job About Mix Minus The Mix Minus function removes a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/ MATRIX buses. You can use this function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or announcer simply by removing his or her audio signal. NOTE This Mix Minus function is a shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between modes. Therefore, even after using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window without restrictions. STEP 1. Hold the [SEL] key while pressing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 2. The MIX MINUS popup window will open. 3. If you wish to remove an additional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL] key. 4. If necessary, in the DESTINATION field, select a bus. You cannot select a FIXED bus. 5. Press the OK button to set the parameters as follows: • The send level of the signals sent from the selected input channels is lowered to -∞dB. • The send level of the signals sent from all other input channels is set to nominal (0.0dB). • Send to the destination bus is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST. • For the stereo input channels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is set to -∞ dB. NOTE You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button. 91 Reference Manual Scene memory Scene memory 3 Scene title On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a “scene.” Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000-300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001-300 are writable scenes. Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters. 4 E symbol (EDIT symbol) • • • • • • • • • • • • • Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene. This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene. This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made. NOTE You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed. Input/output port patching Bus settings Head amp settings EQ settings Dynamics 1 and 2 settings Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings Pan/balance settings Insert/Direct Out settings On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses DCA group settings Mute group settings Channel link settings Storing and recalling scenes To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST window. Storing a scene  Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section STEP 1. Use the pad controls of the top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired. 2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene number. 3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. 4. Assign a title or comment to the scene in the SCENE STORE window as desired. 5. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window. 6. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store operation. The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function Access Area. SCENE field 1 2 2 4 3 You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, where you can view and edit more detailed settings for the scene. 1 Scene number Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different than the currently-loaded scene number. 2 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Writeprotected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol. SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys 92 SCENE STORE window Reference Manual Scene memory  Using the SCENE LIST window NOTE • If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number will increment or decrement continuously. • If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene. • You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear (page 213). In this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE STORE window. STEP 1. Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the mix parameters as desired. 2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-destination scene number. 4. Press the STORE button in the SCENE LIST window. 5. Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired. 6. Press the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window. 7. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store operation. SCENE STORE window 1 2 NOTE • You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. • If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings. • You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers. 1 SCENE TITLE field Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters). 2 COMMENT field Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters). NOTE For details on entering text, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual. 93 Reference Manual Scene memory SCENE LIST window • Protect (lock) symbol You will be unable to overwrite the scene. Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you press the SCENE field. C • R (READ ONLY) symbol Not only will the scene be protected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded from a USB flash drive. You can only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive scene numbers starting with scene #001. 1 • No symbol No scene will be protected. 2 5 4 3 NOTE The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled. 6 Current scene The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list. If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene. 6 7 SCENE SELECT knob Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive multiple scenes by pressing and rotating the multifunction knob. 8 MULTI SELECT button 7 You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the multifunction knob. 8 9>A 9 LAST SCENE button B Selects the scene that was recalled most recently. 0 SCENE STORE button 1 Scene list Press this button to display the SCENE STORE window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it. This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory. 2 NO./TITLE buttons A STORE UNDO button Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order. Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an Overwrite-store operation. 3 Scene number NOTE Indicates the scene number. • The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing. • You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215). 4 Scene title Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can edit the title. B Page switching tabs Switch the views for the right side of the SCENE LIST window. 5 R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol C PREVIEW button An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for write-protected scenes. To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol repeatedly will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol. Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. 94 Reference Manual Scene memory Recalling a scene 1 RECALL SCENE button  Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section 2 RECALL UNDO button Recalls the currently-selected scene. Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a Recall operation. STEP 1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number you want to recall. 2. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. 3. Press the OK button to execute the recall. NOTE • You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215). • You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes (page 186).  Using the SCENE LIST window STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number to recall. 3. Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window. 4. Press the OK button to execute the recall. SCENE LIST window 12 95 Reference Manual Scene memory Using USER DEFINED keys to recall You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key. • INC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene. • DEC RECALL Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene. NOTE SETUP screen If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled. USER SETUP window • DIRECT RECALL Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled immediately. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab. 4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function. 5. In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.” 6. Selects the function you want to assign. • To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column. USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window • To assign DIRECT RECALL Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose“SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column. 7. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window. 8. Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function. 96 Reference Manual Scene memory Editing scene memories • COMMENT Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of comment. This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste them. • TIME STAMP Sorts the list in order of date of creation. NOTE Sorting scene memories and editing titles By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or descending). STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select a scene. 4. Edit the scene. 2 Write-protect SCENE LIST window 4 COMMENT field 1 2 1 Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection. 3 TITLE field Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title for the scene. You can edit titles in this window. Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window. 1 5 STATUS field Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK (playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.) 6 TIME STAMP field Indicates the date and time the scene was stored. 3 7 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console. 6 5 4 8 Tabs Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the window between four different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/ PLAYBACK LINK). 7 8 1 Sort button The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press. • NO. Sorted in order of scene number. • TITLE Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title. 97 Reference Manual Scene memory Scene memory editing Copying and pasting a scene The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window. You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number. 1 2 3 4 5 NOTE The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory (page 99). 6 STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and then press the COPY button in the SCENE LIST window. 3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy. 4. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene number, and then press the PASTE button. 5. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste operation. 1 COPY button Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory. 2 PASTE button Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory. 3 CLEAR button Press this button to erase the selected scene. 4 CUT button NOTE Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory. • Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory. • You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source. • You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes. • A copied scene can also be inserted (page 99). • If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable. 5 INSERT button Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one. 6 UNDO button Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the previous state. Clearing a scene STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to clear, and then press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window. 3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear operation. NOTE • You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. • Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared. 98 Reference Manual Scene memory Cutting a scene Using the Global Paste function This section explains how to cut a scene. When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number. “Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that have already been stored. NOTE STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area. 2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to cut, and then press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window. 3. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation. 4. If desired, you can paste (page 98) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the buffer memory). The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings. STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window. 3. Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy. 4. Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel , and then press the button in the window to select a parameter. 5. Use multifunction knobs 7 and 8 to select the range of paste-destination scenes. 6. Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation. NOTE • Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut. • Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory. Inserting a scene You can insert a scene copied to buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number. STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Copy (page 98) or cut the scene you want to insert. 3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene number, and then press the INSERT button in the SCENE LIST window. 4. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert operation. SCENE LIST window GLOBAL PASTE window NOTE NOTE • If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times. • If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available. • The INSERT button will also be unavailable if the Insert operation would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300. • When you insert a scene, scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted. • A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted. • During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation. • You cannot select different parameters from different channels. 99 Reference Manual Scene memory 4 Tabs GLOBAL PASTE window Enable you to switch between items. • INPUT tab Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area. You can select the following parameters. 1 2 3 4 1 SET BY SEL button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. 2 CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 SEND PARAMETER field Press this field to open the SEND PARAMETER screen. In the SEND PARATMER screen, set whether to enable global paste for bus selection and send level. ALL All input channel parameters INPUT PATCH Input patch settings NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color HA Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel DELAY Input delay settings HPF HPF settings DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel EQ EQ settings DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER) DYNA 2 Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE) MIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus FADER Fader level CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys INSERT*1 Insert on/off status and insert point INSERT PATCH*1 Insert in/out patch settings DIRECT OUT Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings MIX ON Send on/off to a MIX bus MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus TO STEREO Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings MONO TO MONO on/off DCA ASSIGN*2 Settings registered in DCA group MUTE ASSIGN*2 Settings registered in MUTE group *1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together. *2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made. • OUTPUT tab Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area. You can select the following parameters. 100 ALL All output channel parameters OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings NAME Channel name, icon, and channel color EQ EQ settings Reference Manual Scene memory • PATCH/OTHERs tab You can select the following parameters. DYNA 1 Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER) INSERT*1 Insert on/off status and insert point INSERT PATCH*1 Insert in/out patch settings INPUT PATCH All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches FADER Fader level OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches, insert in/out patches CH ON On/off status of [ON] keys INPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels TO ST/BAL Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings (MIX 1-24 only) OUTPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels HA Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation settings MONO TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only) CH LINK Channel link settings MATRIX SEND Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus MUTE GROUP NAME Setting a MUTE group name WITH SEND FROM SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel SOURCE CHs CUSTOM FADER BANK*1 Custom fader bank settings DCA ASSIGN*2 Settings registered in DCA group CASCADE IN CASCADE IN PATCH and CASCADE IN ATT settings Settings registered in MUTE group CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT PATCH settings *2 MUTE ASSIGN *1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together. *2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made. *1. While in PREVIEW mode, changes that are made in CL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied after PREVIEW mode is exited. • BUS SETUP tab You can select the following parameters. MIX1/2 - 23/24 • DCA tab You can select ALL, LEVEL/ON, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. If NAME is selected, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the copy-source channels individually for each DCA group 1-16. For DCA, although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button. Sets Recall Safe for MIX 1-24 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel). Sets Recall Safe for MATRIX 1-8 in the BUS SETUP window. This setting is MATRIX1/2 - 7/8 applied to a channel pair (one odd-numbered channel and one evennumbered channel). SURROUND SETUP Surround mode settings. • RACK tab Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can select an individual rack for each effect used in dual mode. 101 Reference Manual Scene memory Using the Focus Recall function FOCUS RECALL window Sets the parameters that will be recalled. “Focus Recall” is a function that lets you specify the parameters that will be updated when you recall a scene. For example, it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene. 2 4 1 NOTE In contrast to Focus, the CL series console also features a “Recall Safe” function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However, while the Focus Recall function is specified individually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes. STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set. 4. Follow the procedure starting with step 3 in the “Using the Recall Safe function” (page 79) to make settings. 5. If you want to cancel the specified restrictions so that all parameters will be subject to recall, turn on the ALL button. 6. Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings. 3 5 7 9 6 8 0 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all the settings. 2 Focus channel display section Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the RECALL SAFE window. All parameters are affected by Recall on these SCENE field SCENE LIST window Some parameters are affected by Recall on NOTE • The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window. • Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window. • You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled. • For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator. Recall has been canceled on these channels. 3 SET BY SEL button Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add channels as the target, turn on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys for the channels you want to add. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 102 Reference Manual Scene memory 4 FOCUS PARAMETER display section Using the Fade function Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE window (page 80). “Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene. 5 Channel select button Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function. STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 3. In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set. 4. Press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed). 5. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the fade time. 6. Press the OK button to close the FADE TIME window. 7. Press the FADE button in the SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function. 8. Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on. The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time. NOTE Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel. 6 Selected channel display This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel. 7 APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only) Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels. This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all input channels. 8 Recall parameter select button Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel. Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE window (page 80). NOTE • If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. • DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene. 9 FOCUS button Switches the Focus Recall function on or off. 0 CLOSE button SCENE field Closes the window. SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field) NOTE • Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a “FADE” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window. • The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link. • You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving fader. • If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions. 103 Reference Manual Scene memory SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field) FADE TIME window You can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display this window, press the SET button in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window. 1 3 4 2 1 3 2 4 1 Channel display field The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel. 1 SET button Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value). 2 FADE TIME knob Sets the fade time. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec. 2 FADE button NOTE Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene. The fade time is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display field. 3 FADE TIME display 3 SET ALL button This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene. Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene. 4 CURRENT SETTING field 4 CLEAR ALL button Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console. Press this button to cancel the Fade function for all faders of that scene. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 104 Reference Manual Scene memory Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT) SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field) A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows. NOTE For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to “Using GPI OUT” (page 259). 1 STEP 1. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 2. Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT port. 4. Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals. 2 1 Output control signal select buttons These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT. Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions. • ---- (OFF).................. Nothing will be output. • TRIGGER................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled. • TALLY ...................... A tally will be output when the scene is recalled. SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field) 2 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console. 105 Reference Manual Scene memory Playing back an audio file that links to a scene recall NOTE • After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area. • If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is recalled, regardless of the offset time setting. You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene. SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field) NOTE • Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\. • You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode. • A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings. • Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases. 1 STEP 1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector. 2. Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area. 3. Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window. 4. Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file. 5. Press a list in the SONG SELECT window or use the multifunction knobs to select a file that you want to link to a scene. 6. Use the corresponding multifunction knob to set the offset (the time duration until the start of audio file playback). 7. Press the OK button. 8. Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file. 9. Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked. 3 2 4 1 PLAY button Sets the Playback Link function’s on/off status for each scene. 2 Song select button Press this button to open the SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of the selected song will appear on the button. 3 Offset time display Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT window. 4 CURRENT SETTING field Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console. SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field) 106 Reference Manual Scene memory 7 OFFSET knob SONG SELECT window You can use the multifunction knob 8 to set the time interval from scene recall until the start of audio file playback. The offset time can be adjusted in the range of 0.0-99.0 in 0.5 sec steps. You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This window will appear when you press the song select button. 2 3 8 Scroll knob Use the multifunction knob to scroll the list. 1 4 5 6 7 8 1 Change directory button Press this button to move to the next higher folder level. NOTE You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\. 2 PATH indicator This area indicates the current directory path. It will show only the \YPE\SONGS\ level. 3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons Switch between the song title list and the file name list. 4 SONG TITLE list button 5 ARTIST list button Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist name respectively. 6 List Displays the name of the folder or audio file, artist name, and audio file time duration. You can select an audio file by pressing the folder name or audio file name. 107 Reference Manual Scene memory Using Preview mode The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene. Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene. If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not occur while in Preview mode. Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it. The following functions will not operate in Preview mode. • Synchronization with CL Editor • Switching users • Changing the User Level • Load/Save functions • Cue changes • USER DEFINED KEY operations • USER DEFINED KNOB operations • Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display • Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings • Changing or viewing the recorder • Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings • FADE TIME • EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording • MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects • Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt2A, U76 and Buss Comp 369) STEP 1. Press the [PREVIEW] key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window. 2. Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys, multifunction knobs, or [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs in the SCENE MEMORY section to operate the SCENE SELECT knob in the SCENE LIST window, and select the scene number that you want to recall. 3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. Or, press the RECALL SCENE button in the SCENE LIST window. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button. 4. If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings. 5. If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. Or, press the SCENE STORE button in the SCENE LIST window. 6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the PREVIEW key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window. In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations. • While pasting scene or EQ settings • While executing Global Paste • While synchronizing with CL Editor • While saving/loading a file NOTE • PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters. • RECALL SAFE and FOCUS RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode. Functions in Preview mode NOTE The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations. • CL Editor • StageMix • MIDI Rx • GPI IN The scene titles shown in StageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store operation on a CL series console operated in PREVIEW mode. Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices. • CL Editor • StageMix • MIDI Tx • GPI OUT 108 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions Monitor and Cue functions CUE(A) The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. Below the front pad of the CL series console is a PHONES out jack which always outputs the monitor source signal that you’ve selected for monitoring. By assigning the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers. You can select the following signals as the monitor source. • STEREO channel output signal • MONO channel output signal • STEREO + MONO channel output signal • OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 channel input signal (for monitoring each two channel pair) • RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal • A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 input signals CUE(A) CUE(A) CUE(A) CUE(A) L CUE(A) L CUE(A) CUE(A) R CUE(A) R CUE(A) CUE(A) OUT L CUE(A) OUT R CUE(A) OUT LEVEL CUE(A) LOGIC CUE(A) MAXTRIX OUT 1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R) CUE(A) CUE(A) The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel/DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. There is also the Solo function. (Refer to page 121.) CUE(A) CUE(A) CUE(A) L CUE(A) L CUE(A) CUE(A) R CUE(A) R CUE(A) CUE(A) OUT L CUE(A) OUT R CUE(A) OUT LEVEL CUE(A) LOGIC NOTE The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor function. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES output jack. CUE(A) The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow. MAXTRIX OUT 1-6, 7-8(CUE B L,R) • MONITOR SELECT Selects the monitor source. • METER Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal. • DIMMER Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount. 109 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions Using the Monitor function • MONITOR LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack. This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers. • MONITOR FADER Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack. STEP 1. Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel. To monitor through headphones, connect your headphones to the PHONES Out jack below the front panel. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button. 3. Press the MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen. 4. Use the source select buttons in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source. 5. Press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify the port that will be the output destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple selections are allowed). 6. Turn the OUTPUT button on to enable monitoring. 7. To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel. 8. Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired. • ON (On/off) Switches the Monitor function on or off. • DELAY (Monitor delay) Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output. • PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level) Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack. • PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function) If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack. • CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function) If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers. MONITOR screen NOTE Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also be assigned to USER DEFINED keys. (page 215) 110 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 4 MONITOR FADER field MONITOR screen Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level. In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off. 2 3 4 • MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level. 5 • FADER ASSIGN display This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader. Indicator assignments are as follows. • ---- .......................................... No assignment • MASTER A ............................ Master A only • MASTER A+ .......................... Master A, Master B, Custom fader bank • MASTER B ............................ Master B only • MASTER B+ .......................... Master B, Custom fader bank • CUSTOM................................ A single fader in the Custom fader bank • CUSTOMs.............................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank 6 1 7 8 5 Meter field Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the MONITOR window. 6 MONITOR OUTPUT button Switches Monitor Out on or off. 7 PHONES LEVEL LINK button If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack. 1 MONITOR display button 8 MONO MONITOR button When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed monitor settings. Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono. 2 SOURCE SELECT field Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the MONITOR window to specify the source channel. 3 DIMMER field Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals. • DIMMER LEVEL knob Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on. • DIMMER ON button Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal. 111 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions MONITOR window  DIMMER field You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This window appears when you press the MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen. This field enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals. 2 3 4 6 B 7 8 2 DIMMER knob Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when the Dimmer function is on. 3 DIMMER ON/OFF button 9 Switches the Dimmer function on or off. 4 TALKBACK DIMMER knob 1 Adjusts the amount by which the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on. D 5 TALKBACK ON indicator Indicates the talkback on/off status. E 6 PHONES LEVEL LINK button Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level. Turn on this button to adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack by using the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob 0 or the fader A to which this knob function has been assigned. NOTE F If the PHONES LEVEL LINK button is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader, as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones. 7 CUE INTERRUPTION button 5 A 0 C Press this button to interrupt the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.  SOURCE SELECT field This field enables you to select the source signal for the MONITOR bus. 8 MONO MONITOR button 1 Source selection buttons Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono. Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus. STEREO L/R STEREO L/R channel signals MONO (C) MONO channel signal LCR STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals OMNI 1-2 - 7-8 OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 signals (per two channels) PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field 9 MONITOR OUTPUT button This button turns the monitor output on/off. When this button is turned on, the monitor source selected in 1 is sent to output destination E. NOTE The PHONES output jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off. 112 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions E MONITOR OUT PATCH button  MONITOR FADER field Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels. 0 MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob Indicates the monitor level. Press this knob to adjust the monitor level using the multifunction knob. Or, press the Centralogic section bank select [STEREO] key, and then use the monitor fader to adjust the level. A FADER ASSIGN indicator Indicates the fader(s) to which the monitor level is assigned. Indicator assignments are as follows: MASTER A MASTER A fader only MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank MASTER B MASTER B fader only MASTER B+ MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank CUSTOM One of the Custom fader bank faders CUSTOMs Multiple Custom fader bank faders DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network OMNI1-8 OMNI OUT jacks 1-8  MONITOR DELAY field DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed. SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3 NOTE B AUTO BYPASS button • You can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers. • If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R. Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on. C MONITOR DELAY knob Indicates the currently-specified delay time. The millisecond value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in currently-selected units and the currently-selected scale type are indicated below the knob. However, if the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. F ASSIGN field If you have selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field.  Meter field Indicates the monitor output level. D Meters This field indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels. MIX 1-24 Output signals of MIX channels 1-24 MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1 - 8 output signals STEREO STEREO L/R channel output signals MONO (C) MONO channel output signal OMNI 1-2 - OMNI 7-8 OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 input signals (per two channels) PB OUT Recorder’s PLAYBACK OUT signals NOTE You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources. 113 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode) SURROUND MONITOR window (Surround mode) If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below. You can make detailed settings for surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus settings in BUS SETUP, this window appears when you press the MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen. 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 1 5 1 SURROUND MONITOR display button 1 When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed surround monitor settings. 2 SOURCE SELECT field 6 Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field, use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel. 3 Speaker Mute field 7 You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored. 4 DOWNMIX field Select in which field to perform downmixes. • STEREO button Downmix in stereo mode. • MONO button Downmix in mono mode. 5 Meter field Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen. 1 SOURCE SELECT field Select one of the following as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR bus. MIX1-6 Surround signals in the current mix EXT5.1-1-3 Surround signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels) 2CH MONITOR Stereo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP 2 MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button Use this button to open the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EXTERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO). 114 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3 DOWNMIX field MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen Select in which field to perform downmixes. Press the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen. •STEREO button Downmix in stereo mode. 1 2 •MONO button Downmix in mono mode. 4 DOWNMIX SETUP button Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for downmixes. 5 Meter field Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen. 6 Speaker Mute field You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored. 7 SOLO button Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a different speaker button, the other buttons go off. NOTE If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 62.) 1 1 NAME field Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter the source name in the Keyboard screen. 2 PATCH field Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select the port to patch. 115 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions DOWNMIX SETUP screen Using the Cue function Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen. About Cue groups Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups. 3 1 INPUT CUE group The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on. 1 Input channel [CUE] key NOTE If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group. 2 2 DCA CUE group The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, assign the DCA groups to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to turn Cue on. 1 Output channel field [CUE] key in the Centralogic section (When using DCA groups) Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/ off. 2 Downmix parameter field Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the master channel monitors. 3 APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO). 116 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3 OUTPUT CUE group The following illustration shows the priority order of the [CUE] keys. After Other CUE group you have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat cue for the upper group, the previous INPUT CUE group [CUE] key status of the group immediately below will be restored. DCA CUE group For example, if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group  DCA CUE group  INPUT CUE group OUTPUT CUE group  Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously-selected group. The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To switch Cue on or off for this group, press the [CUE] key in the Master section, or assign MIX channels or MATRIX channels to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section. [CUE] key in the Master section [CUE] key in the Centralogic section (When operating the MIX channel or MATRIX channel) NOTE If STEREO/MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group. 4 Other CUE group These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding window. On-screen CUE button NOTE You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated. However, if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previously-selected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated. 117 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions Operating the Cue function NOTE • The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack, regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting. • When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel (page 45). • If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP window, choose the PREFERENCE tab, and then turn on [CUE]  [SEL] LINK (page 214). • You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215). • If PHONES LEVEL LINK (page 111) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the PHONES LEVEL knob. • To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it. • If you turn on the [CUE] key or the CUE button on the display, the CUE meter is displayed in the Function Access Area, indicating the CUE output level. The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning. This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals. NOTE The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the Monitor function. However, the PHONES Out jack below the front pad will always output cue signals regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See “Using the Monitor function” (page 110) for details about the Monitor function. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button. 2. Press the CUE display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR screen. 3. Use the CUE MODE button in the CUE screen to specify what will happen when multiple [CUE] keys within the same CUE group are turned on. 4. Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify the output position and output level for each CUE group. 5. Press one of the CUE OUT PATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port as the output destination for cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed). 6. Press the [CUE] key of the channel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on. 7. Adjust the Cue signal level by using the [MONITOR LEVEL] knob located in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel. 8. To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue selections, press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field. IN INPUT CUE group DCA DCA CUE group OUT OUTPUT CUE group EFFECT CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows (Other CUE groups) KEY IN KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window (Other CUE groups) REC/PB RECORDER INPUT CUE button or PLAYBACK OUT CUE button (Other CUE groups) CUE meter MONITOR screen 118 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions MONITOR screen • If CUE is set to 2 channels, the CUE meter is displayed as shown below. The CUE field of the MONITOR screen lets you check the current Cue settings, and turn Cue on/off. 2 3 4 1 Only CUE A Only CUE B 5 CUE A&B 1 CUE display button When you press this button, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make detailed cue settings. 2 CUE MODE buttons Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued). 3 INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE section Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE window. 4 CUE OUTPUT button Switches the cue output on or off. 5 CLEAR CUE button Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the selected channels will be cleared. 119 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3 PFL TRIM knob CUE window Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob. You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB. You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field. 1 2 4 7 A B C  DCA CUE field This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue. 4 Cue point select button Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST PAN (immediately after PAN). 5 DCA TRIM knob E Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob. You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB. F 6 UNITY button G H I Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain). 3 56 8 D  OUTPUT CUE field 9 > This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue. 1 CUE MODE buttons 7 Cue point select button Select one of the following two cue modes: Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL (immediately after fader). • MIX CUE All selected channels will be mixed and monitored. 8 PFL TRIM knob • LAST CUE Only most recently selected channel will be monitored. Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob. You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB. NOTE All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.  Meter field 9 ACTIVE CUE indicator  INPUT CUE field Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output: orange). This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue. 2 Cue point select button 0 CLEAR CUE button Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or POST PAN (immediately after PAN). Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. NOTE NOTE If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared. Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode. A Meter section This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels. 120 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions B CUE OUTPUT button  FADER CUE RELEASE field Switches the cue output on or off. Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for releasing the cue. C CUE LEVEL knob Indicates the output level of the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. E ON button Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off. D CUE OUT PATCH button F THRESHOLD knob Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L/R channels. Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with this knob, the cue is released.  SOLO field Determines the Solo function parameters. With the Solo function, only the signal of the input/output channel or DCA for which the [CUE] key is pressed is output from MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO on each bus. All other channels or DCA are muted. G SOLO SAFE popup button When the SOLO SAFE popup button is pressed, the SOLO SAFE popup window (which specifies soloed channels that are not muted) appears. DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network OMNI1-8 OMNI OUT jacks 1-8 DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3 Here you can specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more than one.) The channels that are selected here will not be muted when SOLO mode is enabled. This function is convenient if, for example, you want to protect certain channels from being set to SOLO mode accidentally, such as the main STEREO channels and MIX channels that send signals to an external recorder. 121 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions H SOLO ON button  CUE screen (When configuring CUE B) Turns Solo operation on or off. A popup window will ask you to confirm Solo operation. To execute Solo operation, press the OK button. The button will light up and SOLO mode will be enabled. To use the Solo function, make sure this button is on, and then turn on the [CUE] key of the desired channel or DCA. Only the corresponding channel or DCA will be output to the buses and output jacks; the remaining channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same signal will also be output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks. When you press this button, the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area will flash as shown. When the USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button is pressed, a confirmation popup window appears. If you press the OK button, the screen expands so you can configure the CUE A/B settings. CUE A field 1 NOTE CUE OPERATION MODE field If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal will be sent only to the corresponding bus. 2 To defeat Solo, press the currently-on SOLO ON button once again. NOTE 3 If you press [LAST CUE] to switch the CUE MODE from LAST to MIX (or vice versa), all previously-enabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated. CUE B field  CUE B field I USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button 1 USE MATRIX 7/8 AS CUE B button When this button is pressed, channels 7 and 8 on the MATRIX bus are combined and used as a two-channel CUE. When this button is pressed to turn it off, the CUE will be only a single channel.  CUE A field Configures the settings for CUE A. If the CH/REMOTE switch button (2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will be linked with CUE A/B. In Surround mode, a 5.1 SOLO button is added to the CUE MODE field. 122 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions 3 CUE SETTINGS button  CUE B field Use this button to open the CUE SETTINGS screen. Configures the settings for CUE B. If the CH/REMOTE switch button (2) is set to “CH”, switching of the CUE MODE button will be linked with CUE A/B. 1 2  CUE OPERATION MODE field 3 2 CH/REMOTE switch buttons This section explains how to use a two-channel CUE. For example, when a single operator wants to use two separate CUEs, they can be set separately to an in-ear monitor signal and a floor monitor signal. If a single operator wants to use a two-channel CUE, select the “CH.” Select the desired CUE SETTINGS for each channel. You can select from A, B, or A+B. To use one CUE each for the console and CL Editor/StageMix, select the “REMOTE.” The console is fixed to CUE A, while the CL Editor/StageMix is fixed to CUE B. NOTE When “REMOTE” is selected, the device where CUE is actually turned on and the corresponding targets are shown in the table below. Device Target Console CUE A Cascaded console CUE A MIDI CUE B CL Editor CUE B StageMix CUE B GPI CUE A 4 1 CUE A ALL button Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE A only. However, if the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE A only. 2 CUE B ALL button Press this button to set all channels displayed in the screen to CUE B only. However, if the selected tab is INPUT, all input channels are set to CUE B only. 3 A/B switch button Use this button to switch A and B on/off. However, both cannot be turned off at the same time. 4 Tab Use these to select the desired edit operation. NOTE If the ALTERNATE function is assigned to a USER DEFINED key and the [CUE] key is pressed while ALTERNATE is on, the channel settings will toggle between A  B  A+B each time the key is pressed. 123 Reference Manual Monitor and Cue functions  MONITOR screen (When using CUE B) CUE screen (Surround mode) When CUE B is enabled by setting, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below. If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make detailed cue settings) appears as shown below. 1 In Surround mode, the CUE field appears as shown below. MONITOR screen (CUE field in Surround mode) 1 5.1. SOLO Button If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below. 5.1 SOLO is only for input channels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued. 1 1 5.1. SOLO Button Used to cue only the input channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued. 124 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator Talkback and Oscillator Using Talkback The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus. Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I/O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback. CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall. The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button. 2. Press the TALKBACK display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen. 3. Connect a mic to the front panel TALKBACK jack, and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic. 4. Press a button in the ASSIGN field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed). 5. To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on. MATRIX (USE 7-8 AS CUE B) CUE(A) MONITOR screen NOTE • The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and +18 dB. • Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power. • You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case, you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only while you continue holding down the key) (page 215). • When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the talkback signal (page 112). 125 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 4 TALKBACK ASSIGN field MONITOR screen An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal. In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off. 5 TALKBACK ON button Switches talkback on or off. TALKBACK window You can make detailed settings for talkback. This window appears when you press the TALKBACK display button in the MONITOR screen. 3 54 6 7 8 9 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 A 1 TALKBACK display buttons When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make detailed talkback settings.  TALKBACK IN field 2 TALKBACK IN field This field enables you to make settings for the TALKBACK jack on the front panel. • +48V indicator ........................ Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the TALKBACK jack. • Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain at the TALKBACK jack. 1 +48V button Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack. 2 TALKBACK level meter This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. 3 INPUT TO TALKBACK field • INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button ........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback. The selected port name will appear on the button. • INPUT GAIN knob................. Sets the input gain of the selected port. • Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.  INPUT TO TALKBACK field This field enables you to route a signal from a mic (connected to a normal input jack) to talkback. If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback, select an input port here and set the input level. 3 INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port. 126 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator 4 +48V button Using the Oscillator function This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port. You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus. NOTE STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button. 2. Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen. 3. Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select the type of signal you want to output. 4. Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters. 5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed). 6. Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator. This button will not appear if no input port is selected. 5 ANALOG GAIN knob Indicates the analog gain value for the selected input port. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs. 6 Level meter Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port. 7 GC button Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched. 8 Level meter Indicates the level after gain compensation. This will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched. 9 TALKBACK ON/OFF button This switches talkback on/off. While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the send-destination bus.  ASSIGN field 0 Channel select buttons MONITOR screen These buttons enable you to select a channel on which the talkback signal is sent. A CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections. 127 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator MONITOR screen OSCILLATOR window In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off. You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen. 1 2 5 4 1 3 2 3 4 1 OSCILLATOR MODE buttons 5 Select one of the following four operating modes when the oscillator is turned on: 1 OSCILLATOR display button When you press this button, the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings. 2 OSCILLATOR LEVEL field Indicates the frequency and level of the currently-selected oscillator. A meter in this field indicates the output level of the oscillator. Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob. SINE WAVE A sine wave will be output continuously. SINE WAVE 2CH Two sine waves of different frequencies will be output separately. PINK NOISE Pink noise will be output continuously. BURST NOISE Pink noise will be output intermittently. 2 Parameter field Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode. Mode = SINE WAVE 3 OSCILLATOR MODE field Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes. 4 OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display. NOTE • LEVEL knob..........Indicates the output level of the sine wave. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • FREQ knob ...........Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator output on or off. 128 Reference Manual Talkback and Oscillator Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH • WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • INTERVAL .............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. Level INTERVAL • LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ........ Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • FREQ knob (ODD/L) .......... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) ...... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/ R side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • FREQ knob (EVEN/R)........ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. By default, ODD(L) is set to 1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are two meters (L and R). Mode = PINK NOISE Pink noise output WIDTH Turn BURST NOISE button on. Time 3 ASSIGN section Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three tabs below to select the type of channels displayed, and then press the button(s) for the desired channel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The “ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection. If the mode is set to SINE WAVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side) or even (EVEN(R) side) of the selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L) is output in MIX1, and the signal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2. You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 4 Meter section • LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. • HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off. • LPF knob...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob. Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off. Mode = BURST NOISE Indicates the oscillator output level. 5 OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button Turns the oscillator output on or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press the button again, the oscillator will turn off. • LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob ....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode. 129 Reference Manual Meters Meters INPUT METER screen This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels. This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge. Operations in the METER screen By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen, and switch the level meter’s metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function Access Area. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab OUTPUT METER screen Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and RTA screen. This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels. 130 Reference Manual Meters Fader level and meter display METERING POINT field This area displays the meter and fader for each channel. Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. The metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and output channels. 1 2 3 4  For INPUT METER • PRE GC .................Immediately before GAIN COMPENSATION • PRE D.GAIN ..........Immediately before DIGITAL GAIN • POST D. GAIN .......Immediately after DIGITAL GAIN • PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader (Immediately before INPUT DELAY) • POST ON...............Immediately after the [ON] key When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and the [ON] key for channel 8 is OFF 5  For OUTPUT METER 1 Channel number • PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ • PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader • POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key Indicates the channel number. 2 Σ clipping indicator Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel. NOTE On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge (MBCL). 3 OVER indicator Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section of the channel. 4 Meters PEAK HOLD button Indicates the input or output level of the channel. Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indication that had been held will be cleared. 5 Faders The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns gray. NOTE NOTE You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key (page 215). Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic section. Centralogic fader display This area displays the level of faders that are currently set in the Centralogic section. 131 Reference Manual Meters  For OUTPUT METER SHOW SEND LEVEL button Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color. If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status. RTA METER screen This is the real time analyzer screen. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected source are shown in the 1/6 octave band (61 band).  For INPUT METER 3 4 5 6 1 Fader color The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MASTER). The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus. The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF. 2 7 1 Frequency Response graph A graph of a frequency analysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band. 2 Source selection buttons Use these buttons to specify the output channel whose frequency response you want to see. 3 OVER display Data that exceeds 0dB is shown the same as the OVER indicator. 4 Cross-hair cursor display The frequency and level at the point you touch on the graph are displayed. 132 Reference Manual Meters 5 CUE OVERRIDE button METER screen (Surround mode) If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time analyzer, and an analysis is displayed. If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown below. • If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen. • If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel. • If CUE is set to 2 channels, buttons will be as shown below. 6 BALLISTICS field • BALLISTICS button Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph. • FAST/SLOW switch button Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW). 7 HOLD button Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response. RTA GEQ RACK 1-16 OUT EFFECT RACK 1-8 OUT CH 1-72{64,48} POST EQ 32 1 16 1 MONITOR 72{64,48} ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ 16 MIX1-24 POST EQ 24 STEREO L,R,MONO(C) POST EQ 3 MATRIX 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) POST EQ 8 MIX OUT 1-24 24 STEREO OUT L,R,MONO(C) 3 MATRIX OUT 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) 8 CUE(A) OUT L,R 2 2 Meters for MIX1-6. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen. 2 SURROUND METER select button Selects the meters displayed in the Function Access Area. RTA • MIX1-6 Source for MIX1-6. • MONITOR Source selected in SURROUND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1, but with meters only for L and R. 133 Reference Manual Meters METER screen (when using 2-channel CUE) Function Access Area screen If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access Area appears as shown below. The display specifications are as follows. • The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen. When cue is operating 1 • EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual. 1 CUE • The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible. Meters for CUE A and CUE B. • Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual. Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console If an optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels, in the same way as in the meter section of CL5. The MBCL meters indicate the MIX channel and MATRIX channel output levels in 12-segment steps (OVER, -3dB, -6dB, -9dB, -12dB, -15dB, -18dB, -24dB, -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, -60dB). You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following choices. For information on how to change the metering point, refer to “Operations in the METER screen” (page 130). • PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ • PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader • POST ON...............immediately after the [ON] key 134 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effects, and Premium Rack. MATRIX 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L,R) About the virtual rack CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters. You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers seven types of processors. In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ or PEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1-16 and EFFECT, an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8. Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However, if the “31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.) The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks. MATRIX 1-6,7-8 (CUE B L,R) MATRIX INSERT 1,2 IN 1-6,7-8(CUE B L,R) NOTE • In addition to the virtual racks for GEQ, PEQ, effects and Premium Rack, the CL console also provides racks for mounting an I/O device (such as an R series) or external head amps (Yamaha AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.). For details, refer to “I/O devices and external head amps” (page 167). • With CL V1.7 and later, you can use the [SEL] key to switch channels in the EFFECT popup window, GEQ popup window, and PREMIUM RACK popup window. Pressing a top panel [SEL] key in the EFFECT popup window while operating the effect parameter will switch to the window of the effect that is inserted in that channel. The same applies to the GEQ popup window and the PREMIUM RACK popup window. You can also switch from the EFFECT popup window to the GEQ popup window or PREMIUM RACK popup window. The following items change according to the target channel. • Selected channel display in the Function Access Area • Operated channel in synchronized CL Editor If there are no insert settings on a channel that has been selected, a notification dialog box will be displayed. 135 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Virtual rack operations VIRTUAL RACK screen 1 This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output of the rack as an example. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button. 2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or EFFECT tab. 3. To mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack. 4. Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button. 5. Press the INPUT PATCH button. 6. In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button. 7. Press the OUTPUT PATCH button. 8. In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK button. 23 4 6 1 5 23 4 6 5 1 Rack tabs Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16 (GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), or PREMIUM (Premium Rack). 2 Rack mount button Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount. Function Access Area 3 SAFE button VIRTUAL RACK window Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more information on Recall Safe, refer to “Using the Recall Safe function” (page 79). The Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or outputdestination channel. NOTE • In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear (page 214). • The type of GEQ, PEQ, or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the inputsource and output-destination settings are saved as part of the scene. 136 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 4 INPUT PATCH button 5 OUTPUT PATCH button If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear. Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input. If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear. Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output. The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below. • OUT CH .................................... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 *1 • ST/MONO ................................. STEREO L/R, MONO *1 • INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-32 *1 • INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-64 *1 • INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-72 *1 • INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 • INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L/R, MONO • INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-32 *1 • INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-64 *1 • INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-72 *1 • INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 • INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L/R, MONO The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below. • CH1-32 ................................... CH1-32 *1 • CH33-64................................. CH33-64 *1 • CH65-72................................. CH65-72 *1 • INSERT 1 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32 *1 • INSERT 1 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64 *1 • INSERT 1 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72 *1 • INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 • INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO • INSERT 2 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32 *1 • INSERT 2 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64 *1 • INSERT 2 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72 *1 • INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 • INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO *1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK. *1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK. NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off. • For effects, if you select “DYNAMICS&EQ” for EFFECT TYPE, the operation is the same as for GEQ above. • For PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as for GEQ above. • For more information on insert-in/out, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (page 23). NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model. 137 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 6 Rack container • If 16ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-8): Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER window. • If nothing is mounted: Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. • If 31BandGEQ is mounted: This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings. • If Flex15GEQ is mounted: This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B. • If 8ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-4): • If 8BandPEQ is mounted: This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B. • If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only): Press this area to open the AUTOMIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the automixer settings. This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which you can modify the effect settings. 138 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK NOTE • Input/output patching will be defeated when you change the item mounted in a rack. • The 16ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 8, and the 8ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 4. 7 4 CANCEL button 7 Link indicator Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window. Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other. 5 OK button Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window. NOTE RACK MOUNTER window Be aware that if you remove a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the RACKMOUNTER window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ, PEQ, or effect once again. Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount button in the VIRTUAL RACK window. 1 2 1 2 Graphic EQ operations 3 4 5 3 4 The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a STEREO/ MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insertout/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys. The following two types of GEQ are provided. 5 1 Rack number  31BandGEQ Indicates the number for the selected rack. This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted. If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack. 2 Virtual rack This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons. 3 MODULE SELECT field Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function. • BLANK button....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty. • 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack. • Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack. • 8BandPEQ button................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack. • EFFECT button (only for EFFECT rack) ........................ Mounts an effect in the rack. • 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only) ........................ Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack. • 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only) ........................ Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack. INPUT Rack OUTPUT 31BandGEQ  Flex15GEQ This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 INPUT OUTPUT Rack octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB. Flex15GEQ (A) The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands Flex15GEQ (B) of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you have used up fifteen bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.) A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output. 139 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 2 INPUT button Inserting a GEQ in a channel Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field. This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use. STEP 1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount a GEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination. 2. In the GEQ field, press the rack container in which you mounted the GEQ. 3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ units. 4. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on. 3 OUTPUT button Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field. 4 RACK LINK button Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ units. In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be linked. NOTE • If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step. • You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field. • For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “Using the 31BandGEQ” (page 141) or “Using the Flex15GEQ” (page 142). GEQ EDIT window NOTE The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack. 2 3 • GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B) The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked. 4 5 6 • GEQ y x button The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked. • RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked. • CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the window. NOTE The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status. 5 FLAT button Returns all bands of the currently-selected GEQ to 0 dB. 6 GEQ ON/OFF button 1 Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off. 1 Rack select tabs Switch among GEQ 1-8 or among GEQ 9-16. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number). 140 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK For GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ) • With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB. • If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the faders will automatically move to the group of bands you had previously been controlling. • When you close the GEQ EDIT window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off. 1 2 GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ) 4 1 1 RTA button 2 Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ. 2 HOLD button Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA. 3 Using the 31BandGEQ You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ. 1 EQ graph STEP 1. In the GEQ field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the 31BandGEQ. 2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on. 3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control. 4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band. 5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field. Indicates the approximate response of the current 31Band GEQ. 2 Faders Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below. Faders can be controlled by the TOUCH AND TURN function. The area of a fader you touched will turn pink as shown below. NOTE • When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state. 141 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 3 FADER ASSIGN field STEP 1. Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ. 2. Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on. 3. Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you will control. 4. Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band. 5. When you’ve finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field. In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section’s faders. The buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands. 20-100 The eight bands 20.0 Hz--100 Hz 63-315 The eight bands 63.0 Hz--315 Hz 200-1k The eight bands 200 Hz--1.00 kHz 630-3.15k The eight bands 630 Hz--3.15 kHz 2k-10k The eight bands 2.00 kHz--10.0 kHz 4k-20k The eight bands 4.00 kHz--20.0 kHz NOTE • The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band is being modified. • To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark. • With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB. • If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders. • When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off. When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the bands. NOTE The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state. 4 Tool buttons Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. GEQ EDIT window (Flex 15GEQ) NOTE • Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ. • GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. Using the Flex15GEQ You will use the Centralogic section’s faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ. A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B) in the VIRTUAL RACK window. NOTE If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack. However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit. This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled in the current GEQ. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number). 142 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Parametric EQ operations PEQ EDIT window 12 In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, CL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section’s faders and [ON] keys. The following type of PEQ is provided. 4 35 6 7 8 9 0 D E F A 8BandPEQ This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters. Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as “A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack. B  Inserting a PEQ in a channel This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use. STEP 1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount a PEQ in a rack and set its input source and output destination. 2. In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the PEQ. 3. If you’re using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units. 4. Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on. C 1 PEQ graph Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filter. NOTE 2 INPUT button • You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field. • For details on PEQ operations, refer section “PEQ EDIT window” (page 143). Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the GEQ field. 3 OUTPUT button Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field. 4 LIBRARY button Press this button to open the PEQ Library window. 5 DEFAULT button Press this button to restore the default parameter setting. 143 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 6 COPY button B PEQ IN/OUT level meters All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory. Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the PEQ. 7 PASTE button C Rack select tabs Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. Switch among GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number). NOTE 8 COMPARE button For details on how to use the buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen. D RTA button 9 RACK LINK button Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ. Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ units. In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked. E HOLD button Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA. F EQ type select button Switches the EQ type to PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, or LEGACY. The following EQ types can be selected. • GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and alphabetical character A or B) The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked. • GEQ y x button The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked. • RESET BOTH button The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked. PRECISE This EQ type features “precision” and “controllability.” It can be used to precisely adjust the desired points, to flexibly respond to a variety of music production needs. The Low/High shelving filters have “Q” parameters that allow knee adjustments. AGGRESSIVE This EQ type features “effective musical” characteristics. It allows you to create an aggressive tone, making it a very powerful tool for artistic expression. SMOOTH This EQ type focuses on a “smooth sound quality.” It allows you to create natural sounds without significant modifications to the atmosphere of the original sound. LEGACY This is the standard EQ type found in classic Yamaha digital mixers, such as the PM1D and the PM5D. On the left side of the EQ graph, you can switch between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands). • CANCEL button Cancels the link and closes the window. NOTE The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status. 0 PEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off. A PEQ FLAT button Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB. All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off. All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset. 144 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK PEQ EDIT window (8PEQ) PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH) 3 4 3 4 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 5 1 BYPASS button 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 1 Attenuation select button You can bypass each band. When the BYPASS button is on, the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN knobs for that band turn gray. There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct. 2 8PEQ button 2 HPF/LPF NOTCH button Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ. Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters. 3 HPF/LPF frequency knob 3 EQ parameter setting knobs This knob is used to adjust the HPF/LPF frequency. Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this. 4 ON button There is an ON button for the HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters. 5 Notch Filter Q knob Adjusts the Q of the notch filter. 6 Notch Filter frequency knob Adjusts the frequency of the notch filter. 145 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK About AUTOMIXER Inserting Automixer in channels post-fader This section explains how to mount Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and output into channels (excluding ST IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on Automixer operations, refer to the following section “Using Automixer.” Automixer is included as a standard feature on the CL series. Automixer searches for enabled mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts. This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer from making constant fader adjustments. STEP 1. Refer to steps 1-8 in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136) to mount Automixer in rack 1 and set its input source and output destination. 2. Refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (page 23) to insert Automixer in post-fader (POST ON field). Automixer operating principle With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the automix gain for up to 16 mics used for speeches. When 1 person speaks on multiple mics When 2 people speak on multiple mics Using Automixer Mic input audio (dB) Mic input audio (dB) Master field Channel control field Gain (dB) in Automix When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic being used is immediately increased and the gain on all other mics is reduced. The same operation occurs even if another person is speaking. Gain (dB) in Automix If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is automatically distributed so that the total gain is consistent across both mics, and the gain on the remaining mic is reduced. The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust the each level using the faders as normal. Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically distributes gain. Therefore, faders can be left in their raised positions. Channel display The auto mix gain meter for each channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red) settings are shown for channels 1-8 and channels 9-16. If you select the channel 1-8 or 9-16 region, the display channel for the channel control field will switch to 1-8 or 9-16. (For 8ch Automixer, only channels 1-8 are shown.) 146 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 3 weight  Channel control field Adjusts the correlative sensitivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust the weight setting so that all auto mix gain meters are at about the same level. For example, if you can hear noise near one mic (such as noise from a computer ventilation fan or an air conditioner), you can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for that channel. To change the channel weight settings, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the weight slider. Automixer calculates the ratio of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in the group. The following example explains the weight control mechanism. Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET button in the master field. 1 2 3  When increasing the weight setting in one channel • The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the values for other channels are reduced. • Channels with high weight setting values receive a higher automix gain than other channels. 5 4 6 8  When reducing the weight setting in one channel • The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel decreases, while the values for other channels are increased. • When speaking into multiple mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between different mics. 7 4 group 1 Level indicator Each channel can be assigned to three groups (a/b/c). This group function is convenient for the following uses. • Using multiple rooms: Assign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a different Automixer for each. • Stereo pan: Assign mics panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to maintain a stable stereo field. Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix. NOTE • If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain. • If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain. 2 Meter indicator There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch modes. gain Displays the gain for Automixer. Green input Displays the input level. Yellow output Displays the output level. Blue 5 override If you turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field, the channel will switch to man mode or mute mode according to the settings for that channel’s override button. • When the channel’s override button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on. • When the channel’s override is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on. • When the master OVERRIDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous mode. NOTE Meters should normally be set in gain mode. The override function is convenient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to control the system. Follow the instructions below to change the settings. 1. Turn on the override button on the moderator’s channel. 2. Turn off the override button on all other channels. 3. Turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field as needed. 147 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 6 Channel number Editing the internal effects Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted. The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1-8, and patched to an output channel’s output or input channel’s input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect. With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17-24 are input to racks 1-8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1-8 (L/R). 7 man/auto/mute Toggles between man/auto/mute. man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for singing with a mic. auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations. mute: Mutes channels. NOTE Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7. 8 preset To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel. Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.  Master field Rack 1 EFFECT 2 3 1 OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE EFFECT Rack 7 INPUT PATCH Output of the output channel OUTPUT PATCH Rack 2 1 Input of the input channel EFFECT Rack 8 Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only the selected group. • OVERRIDE When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be muted. • PRESET When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator. • MUTE When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds). EFFECT Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel. Insert-out of a desired channel* EFFECT Insert-in of a desired channel* * Excluding a ST IN channel The internal effects fall into two categories; “STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels before processing them. If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows. 2 meters Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input, and output each time you press the button. NOTE Meters should normally be set in gain mode. 3 reset Initializes the Automixer settings. 148 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK  STEREO type effects NOTE INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN • If you’re using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the rack. • If you’re using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected in step 3 to the R output of the rack. • You can select more than one output destination for the effect. • For more information on setting the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters” (page 150).  MIX type effects INPUT L L RETURN EFFECT INPUT R  Adjusting the effect send level of a input channel R RETURN In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the OVERVIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set as the input source for the rack, and use the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to that MIX bus. If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/ stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK. INPUT L or R NOTE • If a MATRIX bus is shown in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field, use the [MIX 1-16] key or the [MIX 1724/MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the MIX bus at the input source for the rack. • When adjusting the effect send level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation. • If you press the knob once again, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus will appear. This window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) (page 44 ). L RETURN EFFECT R RETURN Using an internal effect via send and return This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration. NOTE • If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel. • If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the senddestination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to page 57.) STEP 1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136), to mount an effect in a rack. 2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX channel as the input source for the rack (page 136). 3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack (page 136). 4. Adjust the send level from each channel in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the OVERVIEW screen. 5. Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the input source for the rack. 6. Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack. 149 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK  Adjusting the master level of the effect send NOTE To adjust the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack, first call it up to the Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader. Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point. • If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output of the effect in the same way as step 3. • For more information about how to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “Inserting an external device into a channel” (page 23). • The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window. • Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect. NOTE The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window.  Adjusting the effect return level Editing the internal effect parameters To adjust the effect return level, first call up the ST IN channel you specified as the output destination for the rack to the Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader. This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in which an effect is mounted, the following information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window. 1 2 Inserting an internal effect into a channel This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to “Editing the internal effect parameters.” 1 Effect title/type Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. STEP 1. Follow steps 1-3 described in “Virtual rack operations” (page 136), to mount an effect in a rack. 2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insertout for one of the channels as the input source for the rack (page 136). 3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insert in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack (page 136). 4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen for the channel into which you inserted the effect. 5. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen. 6. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect. 7. Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect parameters. 8. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step 3, adjust the level as appropriate. 2 Input/output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect. STEP 1. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to edit is mounted. 2. To change the effect type, press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and select the effect type in the EFFECT TYPE window. 3. Press a knob in the effect parameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it, and turn the multifunction knob to edit the effect parameters. 4. Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary. 150 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK EFFECT EDIT window Allows you to adjust the effect parameters. NOTE For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual. 3 42 5 0 6 7 1 NOTE • You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting. • Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8. 8 4 EFFECT CUE button Cue-monitors the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen. 9 A NOTE If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.) The cue monitoring does not support CUE B. 1 INPUT L/R buttons Press this button to open the CH SELECT window. 2 OUTPUT L/R buttons Press this button to open the CH SELECT window. 5 Special parameter field 3 Effect type field Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types. Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown. Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type. 151 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK  TEMPO • FLAT button This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB. This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected. 6 BYPASS button • MIDI CLK button If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port. Temporarily bypasses the effect. 7 Input/output meters Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.  PLAY/REC 8 Effect parameter field This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type. This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs. You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down. • PLAY button/REC button Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using the freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “Using the Freeze effect” (page 155). 9 MIX BAL. knob Adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only).  SOLO This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type. • HIGH/MID/LOW buttons Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple selections are allowed). 0 Tool buttons Copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner’s Manual. • Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band. NOTE Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library. A Rack select tabs  Gain reduction meter Enable you to switch between EFFECT 1–8. This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as the effect type. • Gain reduction meters Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.  Type This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type. • Type Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects. DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion. CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital. 152 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Using the Tap Tempo function “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function can be used for delay-type and modulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is included, and specify the delay time or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key. NOTE For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.  Assigning the Tap Tempo function to a USER DEFINED key SETUP screen USER SETUP window STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen. 3. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window. 4. On the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function. 5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK button. USER DEFINED KEYS page USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window NOTE • If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack). • If you specify “RACK x” (x=1-8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack). • For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “USER DEFINED keys” (page 215). 153 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK  Using the Tap Tempo function The average interval (BPM) at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter. The average interval will be input to the parameter. (the average of a, b, and c) a b c Tap Tempo pop-up window First tap Second tap Third tap NOTE Fourth tap • If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not displayed. • With CL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window. NOTE • If the average value is outside the range of 20-300 BPM, it will be ignored. • If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button. 2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window. 3. Press the rack container in which the effect you want to control is mounted. 4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window. 5. In the EFFECT TYPE window, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter. 6. Set the SYNC parameter ON in the effect parameter field. 7. At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you assigned the Tap Tempo function, to set the BPM parameter. 154 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Effects and tempo synchronization Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • Value shared with all effects (However, this applies only if SYNC is ON and if the MIDI CLK button is ON when MIDI clock is input to the MIDI IN jack.) • You cannot store it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example. Store the effect: TEMPO=120  Change TEMPO to 60  TEMPO=60  Recall the effect: TEMPO=60 Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the CL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored. * The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values. Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect: delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo. Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization. 1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ. SYNC: ..............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization. NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization. DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects. How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value*a from the TEMPO and NOTE. Turn SYNC ON Change NOTE DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6 = 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 Using the Freeze effect This section explains how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and play back a sound. Change TEMPO DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz NOTE Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button. 2. Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window. 3. Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. 4. Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE window, and select “FREEZE.” 5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY button. 6. To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button. Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = (1/4) x 4 x (60/120) = 0.5 (sec) = 500 ms Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms. Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY= NOTE x 4 x (60/new TEMPO) = (1/8) x 4 x (60/121) = 0.2479 (sec) = 247.9 (ms) Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms. *a Rounded values are used for the calculation results. NOTE • The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off. • You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the parameters, refer to the data list at the end of this manual. 155 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK Using the Premium Rack • The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off the power to the CL unit. The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack (page 148). EFFECT EDIT window (when FREEZE is selected) If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field. 1 3 STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button. 2. Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window. 3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in the PREMIUM RACK field. 4. Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button. 5. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the input source. 6. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the insert-in of the same channel as the output destination. 7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel into which you inserted the effect. 8. Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen. 9. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the processor. 10. Adjust the processor parameters. 11. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack’s output destination in step 6, adjust the level as appropriate. 2 1 PLAY button 2 REC button 3 Progress bar NOTE As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall settings that use the “FREEZE” effect type from the effect library. Using the Premium Rack In addition to the graphic EQ and the internal effects, the CL series provides “Premium Rack” processors that faithfully emulate carefully selected vintage analog processors as well as newly developed processors. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers eight types of processors. Name Outline Portico 5033 Models RND’s analog 5-band EQ. Portico 5043 Models RND’s analog compressor/limiter. U76 Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter. Opt-2A Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor. EQ-1A Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ. Dynamic EQ Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level. VIRTUAL RACK window (PREMIUM RACK field) NOTE • If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and 6. • For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack parameters.” • Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor. Buss Comp 369 Models a 1970s compressor/limiter with discrete circuitry. MBC4 PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window Four-band compressor with intuitive controls 156 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 1 ASSIST button  Mounting a processor Press this button to indicate the numbers of the multifunction knobs that control each parameter. There are two ways to mount each processor: • DUAL .....................The processor is used on two mono channels. • STEREO ................The processor is used on one stereo channel. 2 LIBRARY button Press this button to display the Library window for each Premium Rack. The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the Premium Rack processor. 3 DEFAULT button Restores the default parameter setting. 4 Multifunction knob access field Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs. To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window. The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a two-space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered rack. NOTE • If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them. • You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.  Portico 5033 Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the “1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve. Yamaha’s VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears. Editing the Premium Rack parameters Each Premium Rack window includes the following items: 1 2 3 8 5 3 1 2 7 4 157 6 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 1 ALL BYPASS button 1 Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. 2 3 4 2 TRIM knob Adjusts the input gain of the effect. 3 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs Adjust the frequency for each band. 4 LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band. 5 LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band. 5 6 LMF/MF/HMF IN button 6 7 8 9 1 IN button Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively. Turns the compressor’s bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits. 7 LF/HF IN button Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously. 8 Graph 2 INPUT meter Indicates the graphical EQ response. Indicates the input signal level. One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.  Portico 5043 3 FB button Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND’s analog compressor. The actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the 5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type (which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications. Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (FeedBack) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected. The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to apply consistent compression while maintaining a consistent tonal color. The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such devices. 4 GAIN REDUCTION meter Indicates the amount of gain reduction. 5 THRESHOLD knob Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied. 6 RATIO knob Adjusts the compression ratio. If you rotate the knob fully clockwise, the unit will operate as a limiter. 7 ATTACK knob Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. 8 RELEASE knob Adjusts the compressor’s release time. 158 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 9 GAIN knob • +4/+8.............Each meter uses -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates “0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or +8 dB. • OFF...............Turns off the meter display. Adjusts the output gain.  U76 U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain. The “All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones. 1 6 OUTPUT knob Adjusts the output level. If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level. 2  Opt-2A Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. To control the level, it uses optical components such as a CdS cell and an EL panel to apply smooth compression, with beautiful high-range overtones generated by warm-sounding vacuum tube distortion, delivering an elegant and sophisticated sound. 3 4 5 6 1 INPUT knob Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied. 1 2 ATTACK knob Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time. 2 3 4 1 GAIN knob Adjusts the output level. 3 RELEASE knob 2 PEAK REDUCTION knob Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time. Adjusts the compression amount of the signal. 3 RATIO knob 4 RATIO switch buttons Adjusts the compression ratio. Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio. A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound. 4 METER SELECT knob Switches the meter display. GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor. With -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT +4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as “0VU” on the meter. 5 METER switch buttons Switch the meter display. • GR.................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor. 159 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 7 (HIGH) BOOST knob  EQ-1A Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH FREQUENCY knob. EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high and low). Its frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, producing a unique character that is distinctive of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced. 3 4 5 7 8 8 (HIGH) ATTEN knob Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN SEL knob. 9 9 (HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.  Dynamic EQ Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources. 1 2 6 1 IN switch Turns the processor on or off. When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits. C 2 LOW FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency of the low range filter. 1 3 4 3 (LOW) BOOST knob Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob. 6 4 (LOW) ATTEN knob 5 Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW FREQUENCY knob. 9 5 BAND WIDTH knob 0 Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter. As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost. 28 6 HIGH FREQUENCY knob A 7B 1 BAND ON/OFF button Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost. Turns each band on or off. 160 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 2 SIDECHAIN CUE button B THRESHOLD meter Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters. Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level. C Graph area 3 SIDECHAIN LISTEN button Displays the equalizer response. In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses. Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus (such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters. 4 FILTER TYPE buttons Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows: Dynamic EQ graph FILTER TYPE Main EQ Sidechain filter (Low Shelf) (Bell) (Hi Shelf) Low Shelf Bell Hi Shelf LPF BPF HPF Reference EQ graph If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter response. 5 FREQUENCY knob Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter. 6 Q knob Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter. As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider. Sidechain filter graph 7 THRESHOLD knob Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect. 8 RATIO knob Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal. Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut. Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect. 9 ATTACK/RELEASE buttons Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost. Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency ranges. 0 MODE buttons Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW). A EQ GAIN meter Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain. 161 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 1 INPUT ADJUST  Buss Comp 369 Used to adjust the input gain. However, the output gain is linked to change in the opposite direction, to prevent changes in pass-through volume (the volume when COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB. See below for more information about how to use INPUT ADJUST. Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality. 1 2 3 4 5 6 • If the level of the input signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold, increase the input gain. • Adjust the sound quality by changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio transformer and Class A amplifier). 7 INPUT ADJUST structure Buss Comp 369 Linked in reverse COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION INPUT GAIN IN 8 > A B OUTPUT GAIN LIMITER OUT OUT COMPRESSOR INPUT CIRCUIT OUTPUT CIRCUIT IN C STEREO mounting 1 3 4 5 6 INPUT ADJUST 7 COMP THRESHOLDLIMIT THRESHOLD dBFS dBFS Since there are substantial changes in threshold, the changing display values are linked. However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION do not actually change. 2 LINK (STEREO mounting) Stereo link on/off 3 COMP IN Compressor on/off 4 COMP THRESHOLD Compressor threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST. 9 > A B 5 COMP RECOVERY C Compressor release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec. DUAL mounting 162 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 6 COMP GAIN Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter. 7 COMP RATIO Compressor ratio 8 METER SELECT (STEREO mounting) Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU. 8 When“METER” is OUT 9 VU SELECT (DUAL mounting) Selects the signal source for the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level. 0 LIMIT IN Limiter on/off A LIMIT ATTACK 8 Limiter attack time. FAST: 2ms, SLOW: 4ms When“METER” is IN B LIMIT THRESHOLD Limiter threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST. C LIMIT RECOVERY Limiter release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec. 8 When“METER” is GR 163 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 6 CROSSOVER RANGE  MBC4 This horizontal bar for the band color indicates the range for the CROSSOVER parameter for each band. This high-quality four-band compressor utilizes VCM technology and features a GUI that offers operability and visibility. All of the advantages of the musical behavior of analog compressors have been built into the gain reduction circuitry of the MBC4. This allows smooth control of dynamics while keeping the sound image. You can also use the graphical display to visually manipulate the sound image. 123 4 7 CROSSOVER BAND WIDTH This horizontal bar for the band color changes according to the CROSSOVER parameter for each band. 567 8 INPUT meter Indicates the level of the input signal. One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO. 9 OUTPUT meter Indicates the level of the output signal. One meter appears in DUAL, while two meters appear in STEREO. 8 9 7 8 1 9 2 > A 3 4 1 GAIN LINE This horizontal red line indicates the GAIN parameter for each band. B C D 5 6 2 MAXIMUM GR GUIDELINE This horizontal orange line is a guideline for maximum gain reduction. This is only a guideline, and not a strict limitation for maximum gain reduction. 3 GR ZONE 1 GAIN This red area changes according to the amount of gain reduction for each band. Adjust the output gain for each band. 4 CROSSOVER LINE 2 THRESH These vertical lines indicate the CROSSOVER parameters for each band. Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied for each band. This value is also indicated by a red marker in the 0 INPUT meter. 5 CROSSOVER ZONE 3 RATIO These areas, in the color of the band, change according to the CROSSOVER parameter for each band. Adjusts the compression ratio for each band. 164 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK 4 ATTACK B IN button Adjusts the compressor’s attack time for each band. Turns each band on or off. When this button is off, the band color for the selected area changes to gray as shown below. 5 RELEASE Adjusts the compressor’s release time for each band. 6 LINK knob Links and adjusts the four bands for the selected parameter. However, if a parameter in any frequency region reaches its maximum or minimum value, the link operation is disabled. Parameters that can be linked and adjusted are displayed in band colors as shown below. Also, when this button is off, the COMPRESSOR field for the selected band turns gray. 7 CROSSOVER Adjusts the crossover frequency when splitting the frequency range into multiple bands. 8 CUE button Cue-monitors the corresponding band output for each band. When the CUE button is on, the button changes to the color shown below. If the IN button is off, the uncompressed sound is cue-monitored. The CUE buttons for multiple bands can be turned on at the same time. 9 MASTER GAIN knob You can adjust each parameter even when this button is off. Adjusts the gain for the final output signal. C FLAVOUR button 0 INPUT meter Switches the type of compressor between accurate VCA operation and natural OPTO operation. Indicates the input level for the audio signals sent to each band. A KNEE knob D HARMONICS button Adjusts the compressor’s knee. Switches on/off the analog circuitry that emulates musical overtones. 165 Reference Manual Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK  Premium Rack library Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries You can use the Premium Rack library to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The library contains 101 items (from #000 through #100). Item #000 is a preset. All library items other than #000 can be freely read and written. To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the window for the corresponding type.  GEQ/PEQ library Use the “GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ and PEQ units used in the CL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library. Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ. 200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written. To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the GEQ EDIT window. Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the PEQ EDIT window. NOTE • Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B. • To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ field.  Effect library Use the “Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library items 1-27 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect types 1-27 respectively. The remaining library numbers can be freely read or written. To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the EFFECT EDIT window. 166 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps I/O devices and external head amps I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page) This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” (page 251). 2 Using an I/O device 3 CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector. 1 I/O device patching Here’s how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network. 4 STEP 1. Connecting CL series consoles and I/O devices 2. In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button. 3. Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen. 4. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). 5. Press the AUTO SETUP button. If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button. 6. Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). 7. Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window. 8. In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port. 1 I/O device list This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from the console’s output ports to the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not currently exist on the Dante audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at the lower left of that device. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs but share the same ID, a red “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the device. If multiple devices share the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will appear to the right, below the device. 2 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. 3 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O device to the console. 4 OUTPUT PORT SETUP button Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console’s output ports to I/O devices. 167 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps DANTE INPUT PATCH window NOTE • If you’ve connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash “-” , and the channel number (decimal). • If a CL series console is mounted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “CL#X” (where X is the ID number of the mounted CL unit). • If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will be displayed in the lower row. • You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console. 1 2 PORT SELECT window Displayed when you press the port select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or OUTPUT PATCH window. When you change a patch, select the I/O port. 3 2 1 LIBRARY button Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library. You can store ten sets of settings in the library. 2 AUTO SETUP button The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O device list. When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen. 1 3 1 Category select list Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign. 2 Port select buttons 3 Port select buttons Select the input port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window. “Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number (decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button. The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button. If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate“---” and the lower row will indicate nothing. 3 CLOSE button Completes the settings and closes the window. 168 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps OUTPUT PATCH window I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page) 1 Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set the output patch. 2 3 4 1 1 Port select buttons Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window. Remotely controlling an R series unit This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that’s connected to the Dante connector. 1 Display switch buttons Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink. For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1 on P.167, “I/O device list”. STEP 1. In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page). 2. Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted. 3. Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device. 4. To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. 5. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH window will appear. 6. Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window. 7. When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window. 8. Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted. 9. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary. Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167). 2 ID/Model name display This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device. If the WITH RECALL button is turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “w/RECALL” is displayed. If the +48V MASTER switch for the mounted device is turned ON,“+48V MASTER” is displayed. 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. 4 SYSTEM/SYNC indicators Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Refer to the list (page 271) for detailed information about messages. 169 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps  HA display  RMio64-D display This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings. Displays the RMio64-D panel. You can press the buttons to change settings. 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 5 8 If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.) 5 Analog GAIN knob 9 Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be edited. 6 +48V indicator Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port. 7 OVER indicator 6 Warns you when the input signal is clipping. 8 HPF indicator 7 8 1 MADI SRC ON indicator Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port. MADI SRC ON button Switches the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) on and off.  INPUT display 2 MADI SRC WCLK IN indicator This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN. MADI SRC WCLK IN button Use this button to select whether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word clock input from the MADI WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D as a standard clock for SRC. 3 MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1kHz indicator MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator Automatically detect and indicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Both indicators remain off if there is no valid MADI input signal. If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.) 4 MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs indicator  OUTPUT display MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs indicator MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs indicator MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2Fs/4Fs button Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For example, if the MADI input signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is on and then select “4Fs”. NOTE This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device. When “2Fs” is selected, the unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of the MADI input signal. If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.) 170 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 5 MADI STATUS INPUT status  RSio64-D display MADI STATUS OUTPUT status Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/ number of channels). 1 2 3 45 B 6 WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator WORD CLOCK MADI indicator WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons Used to select the word clock source. WCLK IN Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input. MADI Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input. DANTE Uses the word clock of the Dante network. 7 WORD CLOCK Fs indicator Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not synchronized. 8 EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only externally by remote control. Refer to “Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner’s Manual for details about parameters that can be operated by remote control. 6 7 8 9 0 A 1 CARD NAME 9 OUTPUT PATCH button This indicates the names of the cards installed in slots 1 to 4. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear. Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for RMio64-D. 2 IN/OUT PORT This indicates the number of input and output ports for the cards installed in slots 1 to 4. If no card is installed, “--” will appear. 171 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 3 SLOT 1 - 4 LOCK indicators Indicates the word clock source status for the RSio64-D. This indicates the word clock status for slots 1 to 4. If the word clock is operating normally, this indicator will be green. Off Green (On) LOCK WCLK IN On when using the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of the RSio64-D. Flashes*1 if there is no valid word clock input. SLOT1 1/2 On when using the word clock for channels 1/2 of slot 1 for the RSio64-D. Flashes*1 if there is no valid word clock input. When using MY8-AEB*2, the word clock for channels 7/8 is used. DANTE On when using the word clock for the Dante network*3. (If there is no valid Dante signal input, the internal Dante module will generate a clock.) There is no card in the slot. Or, an unsupported card is in the slot. Indicates that a clock synchronized with the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key is being input from the card. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the RSio64-D. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized. Green (Flashing) SYNC ERROR A valid clock is being input from the card, but is not synchronized with the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the RSio64-D. Turn SRC ON for correct input/output. Red (On) UNLOCK A valid clock is not being input from the card. If an external device is connected to the corresponding slot, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the RSio64-D. Red (Flashing) WRONG WORD CLOCK The frequency of the clock source selected with the [WORD CLOCK] select key is outside of the operating frequency range for the card inserted in the slot. Either set the frequency of the clock source within the operating range for the card, or turn [SRC] ON. For an analog card, if you turn [SRC] ON, the frequency is set to the 48kHz built into the RSio64-D. *1 When flashing, Dante word clock*3 input/output is used. *2 If you are using MY8-AEB, set the AERSVD switch for the card to RSVD. *3 If you make changes to the frequency of the Dante word clock, use Dante Controller. 7 CURRENT PATTERN button If you press this button, the currently selected routing pattern on the RSio64-D is displayed. If you switch the routing pattern on the RSio64-D, it will be applied in 3 seconds. 4 SLOT 1 - 4 SRC indicators Indicate the Sampling Rate Converter (SRC) status for slots 1 to 4. Off Green (On) Red (On) SRC is off. SRC is on, and the clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D is being input correctly. SRC is on, but an appropriate clock is not being input. The clock selected with the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D is either not being input or is not within the operating range. Either turn SRC off, or change the DIP switch settings. NOTE Use the SRC WCLK DIP switches on the RSio64-D to set the SRC clock sent to the Mini-YGDAI card inserted in the slot. 5 SLOT 1 to 4 SRC buttons Used to turn SRC on/off at both IN and OUT for each slot. 6 WORD CLOCK select button Used to select the word clock source for the RSio64-D. • WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator • WORD CLOCK SLOT1 1/2 indicator • WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator 172 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 8 USER PATTERN button Third-party equipment’s HA control function Press this button to open the window for setting the audio routing user pattern in the RSio64-D. Patch to the desired output ports of the slots and Dante. It is possible to control supported third-party equipment’s head amps (HA) from the console. You can control HA by registering supported devices in the DANTE SETUP window. NOTE NOTE Patching from one slot to another is also available (including patching to the same slot). However, you cannot patch from Dante to Dante. While in PREVIEW mode, changes made to HA parameters from the console are not applied to the device. You can turn “WITH RECALL” on and off in the REMOTE HA ASSIGN window. You can store/recall scene libraries and save/load files. You can register up to 8 devices, including R series units. You can also register a device that has the same UNIT ID as a device that is already registered, including R series units. You can adjust HA parameters in advance, even when a connection is not established with the device to be controlled. You can control the following parameters. 1 2 3 1 HA phantom power (+48V) on/off 9 OUTPUT PATCH button 2 HA gain Press this button to open the OUTPUT PATCH window, in which you can set the 64 Dante channels that will be output from the console to the RSio64-D. 3 Head amp HPF on/off 0 POWER INT indicator Indicates the status of the AC IN power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power switch is off, no power is supplied to AC IN and the indicator remains off. A POWER EXT indicator Indicates the status of the EXT DC INPUT power supply for the RSio64-D. If the power supply is on, this indicator will be on. This indicator is not affected by the status of the power switch. B Control status indicator Indicates the control status of the device. Searching for device to be controlled Found device to be controlled, but connection refused Connecting to device Synchronizing with device Device can be controlled 173 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps I/O DEVICE HA window NOTE The indicator on the right side of the rack indicates the control status of the device. Displayed when you press the rack in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted. In this window, you can remotely control the head amp of the I/O device from the CL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs. 7 Searching for device to be controlled 1 Found device to be controlled, but connection refused 2 3 8 4 Connecting to device 5 Synchronizing with device 6 1 +48V MASTER Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device’s master phantom power. (Switching this on or off is performed on the I/O device itself.) Device can be controlled 2 +48V button These switch phantom power on/off for each channel. You can perform the following operations from input channels patched to the target device: • Store/recall input channel library • Channel jobs (channel link, etc.) • HA controls at user level (only when operating HA from an input channel) • AG-DG LINK 3 GAIN knob Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use the multifunction knobs. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port. 4 GC button NOTE Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network. You cannot perform this operation on devices that do not support Gain Compensation. 5 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O device, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. 6 Displayed port switch tabs These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window. 7 GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously. 8 GC indicator Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on. 174 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps  Remotely controlling from the input channels I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page) To remotely control the I/O device’s head amp from an input channel of the CL series console, operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control. 1 2 3 Remotely controlling an amp This section explains how to remotely control an AMP unit that’s connected to the Dante connector. STEP 1. Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen. 2. Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page). 3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary. Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167). 1 Display switch buttons Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1 on P.167, “I/O device list”. 2 ID/Model name display This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device. 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network. 175 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 1 Display switch buttons Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink. For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this button, refer to 1 on P.167, “I/O device list.” This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that’s connected to the Dante connector. NOTE The following two products are supported by CL series V4: • Shure ULXD4Q • Shure ULXD4D For both of these products, use V1.6.6 or later for both the receiver and the microphone. SPLIT mode cannot be used with Dante network mode. Use the CL series settings. Also note that remote operation is not possible if the REDUNDANT connection is used and the SECONDARY network is in operation. 2 ID/Model name display This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device. 3 DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.  Shure ULXD4Q/ULXD4D display STEP 1. Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen. 2. Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page). 3. Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary. Refer to step 7 in “I/O device patching” (page 167). 4 3 5 6 I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page) 1 8 1 2 2 7 3 NOTE The number of channels varies according to model. 1 Channel name Indicates the channel name that is set on the receiver. Only the first 4 characters are shown. 2 Frequency Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal. 3 RX.GAIN knob Displays the gain for the receiver. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be edited. 4 OL indicator Lights if the audio signal level of the receiver reaches the overload point. 5 MUTE indicator Indicates the mute status (on/off) of the audio signal for the receiver. 176 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 6 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter  WIRELESS DEVICE screen Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up. This screen is displayed when you select the desired wireless device in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page). Here you can set the channel name and HA. You cannot set when the device is offline. Note that when the device is online, the settings on the device are applied. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and the actual strength of the RF signal, refer to the manual from Shure. 7 Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. 1 NOTE 2 For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 3 8 Control status indicator Indicates the control status of the device. 4 5 Searching for device to be controlled 6 Found device to be controlled, but connection refused Connecting to device 1 Channel name button Synchronizing with device Press this button to display the NAME screen for setting channel names on the receiver side. Up to 8 characters can be set. Device can be controlled 2 Frequency Indicates the frequency that is currently set for the RF signal. NOTE When control on the receiver side is possible, the parameter values for the receiver are sent to the console. NOTE To change the frequency of the RF signal, change directly in the wireless device. 3 GAIN knob Sets the HA gain for the receiver. To adjust the value, touch the screen, then press the knob to select it, and use the multifunction knobs. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level. 4 MUTE button Mutes the audio signal. 5 RF (Radio Frequency) signal meter Shows bars to indicate the level of the RF signal. An active antenna indicator is shown on the right side. It indicates which antenna is enabled by lighting up. 6 Battery indicator Shows bars to indicate the remaining battery power. NOTE For more information about the relationship between the number of bars and maximum operation time, refer to the manual from Shure. 177 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps Using an external head amp CL5 Audio signal If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the CL’s slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF. For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the Owner’s Manual for the I/O card. Remote signal Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console. To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL OUT A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the CL series console via the MY16-ES64 card. Alternatively, you can use a “daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second AD8HR’s HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six AD8HR units. In this case, to input AD8HR’s audio signals into the CL series console, install two MY16-EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals. Then, connect each two of the third and subsequent AD8HRs to each AES/EBU connector using a D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. MY16-EX MY16-EX MY16- ES64 NAI48-ES HA REMOTE connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 1 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 2 HA REMOTE 2 connector DIGITAL OUT A connector HA REMOTE 1 connector AD8HR 3 HA REMOTE 2 connector Up to six units 178 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps  Ring connection Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64 EtherSound card in Slot 1 of the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console. Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units simultaneously. CL5 Audio signal Remote signal NOTE Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the CL series console. MY16ES64  Daisy chain network MY16EX MY16EX CL5 Audio signal OUT Remote signal IN SB168-ES OUT MY16ES64 MY16EX MY16EX IN SB168-ES OUT OUT IN SB168-ES OUT IN SB168-ES OUT NOTE IN Please refer to the SB168-ES Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/ MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network. SB168-ES OUT IN SB168-ES 179 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps Remotely controlling an external head amp VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page) An external head amp ( “external HA” ) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be remotely controlled from the CL series console. For details on how to connect a CL series console with an external head amp, refer to “Using an external head amp” (page 178) and the external head amp’s operating manual. 5 STEP 1. Connect the CL series console to an external HA. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button. 3. Press the EXTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK screen. 4. Press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page). 5. Use the PORT SELECT buttons in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected. 6. Press the CLOSE button to close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window. 7. In the VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the external HA you want to control is mounted. 8. Remotely control the external head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window. 6 1 2 3 4 1 EXTERNAL HA field This displays the state of the connected external HA. 2 ID/Model name/+48V master This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 6. This field also enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power. VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page) 3 Virtual racks These are up to six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the EXTERNAL HA window for that rack. 4 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input port for the external head amp mounted in the rack. NOTE If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels. 180 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps 5 VIEW switch buttons EXTERNAL HA window Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that’s appropriate for the connected device. Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page). 6 COMM PORT switch buttons Specify whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select “SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA. 1 2 EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window 3 Select the input port for the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page). 1 4 5 1 +48V MASTER If an external HA is connected, the master phantom power on/off status is shown here. (The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.) 2 +48V button These switch phantom power on/off for each channel. 3 GAIN knob These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you can make adjustments to gain using multifunction knobs 1-8. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port. 4 FREQUENCY knob/HPF button These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. 1 PORT SELECT buttons Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected. 5 Rack select tabs These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window. NOTE • If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used. These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected. • Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions. 181 Reference Manual I/O devices and external head amps  Remotely controlling an external HA from the input channels on a CL series console You will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or on the CL console. For details on the GAIN/PATCH window, refer to “HA (head amp) settings” (page 31). STEP 1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen that includes the channel for the head amp that you want to control. 2. Press the HA/PHASE field of the channel whose external HA you want to adjust. 3. Press the PATCH button in the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port assigned to the external HA. 4. Remotely control the external head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window. OVERVIEW screen GAIN/PATCH window 182 Reference Manual MIDI MIDI NOTE As the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select. This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console to control the CL console’s parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you operate the unit. The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN Basic MIDI settings You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel. MIDI OUT STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the MIDI/GPI button in the center of the SETUP screen. 3. Press the MIDI SETUP tab in the MIDI/GPI screen. 4. Press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI SETUP page. 5. In the MIDI SETUP window for port selection, select the port type and port number that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button. 6. Press the channel select button in the MIDI SETUP page. 7. In the MIDI SETUP window for channel selection, select the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button. 8. In the MIDI SETUP page, turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI message. External device CL5 MIDI functionality on the CL series console The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.  Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device.  Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console, the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later. SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)  Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception NOTE When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed, “Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter Changes are received from an external device. Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another CL console. • For details on Program Change operations, refer to the following section “Using program changes to recall scenes and library items” (page 186). • For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “Using control changes to control parameters” (page 188). 183 Reference Manual MIDI 3 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page) Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. • SINGLE.............. If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode). • MULTI ................ If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). • OMNI.................. If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception and Single mode transmission are disabled. • BANK................. If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of Program Change messages to be used.) You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used. 1 2 3 4 5 4 CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off. • Tx....................... Switches control change transmission on/off. • Rx ...................... Switches control change reception on/off. • ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages. (If this function is on, Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.) 6 7 5 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. • NRPN button ..... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode). • TABLE button ... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel (TABLE mode). 1 PORT/CH field Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. • Tx PORT/Tx CH..................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit MIDI messages. • Rx PORT/Rx CH.................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive MIDI messages. 6 PARAMETER CHANGE field Enables you to turn transmission/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These are special messages used to control the parameter of the CL console.) • Tx....................... Switches parameter change transmission on/off. • Rx ...................... Switches parameter change reception on/off. • ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages. (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.) NOTE When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit). 2 PROGRAM CHANGE field Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off. • Tx ........................................... Switches program change transmission on/off. • Rx........................................... Switches program change reception on/off. • ECHO..................................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages. (If this function is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.) 7 OTHER COMMAND field Switches on or off echo output of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other MIDI messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.) 184 Reference Manual MIDI MIDI SETUP window (for port selection) MIDI SETUP window (for channel selection) Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the PORT/CH field. This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. This window appears when you press the channel select button in the PORT/ CH field. 1 1 2 2 3 1 CH field 1 TERMINAL field Enables you to select CH1-CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages. Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages. You can choose from the following items. NONE No port will be used. MIDI MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel SLOT1 A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel 2 OK button Confirms the settings and closes the window. 2 PORT NO. field If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1-8 in this field. (The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The currently-available card is valid only for port 1. 3 OK button Confirms the settings and closes the window. 185 Reference Manual MIDI Using program changes to recall scenes and library items 1 The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device. STEP 1. Connect the CL series console to an external device. 2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive program changes. 3. Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen. 4. In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output. 5. To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event in the list and select an event type and the recall target. 2 3 5 4 6 1 PROGRAM CHANGE field Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE section of the MIDI SETUP page. • Tx..................If this is on, the corresponding Program Change messages will be transmitted when events on the list are executed. • Rx .................If this is on, the corresponding events will be executed when Program Change messages are received. • ECHO............If this button is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without change. 2 PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page) Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page. • Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on): Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/ receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed. NOTE Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page) In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number. When you execute a specific event on a CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on multiple MIDI channels/multiple program numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.) 186 Reference Manual MIDI 4 Scroll knob • Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on): Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed. When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.) Press this knob to scroll the list upward or downward using the multifunction knob. 5 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to erase all events from the list. 6 INITIALIZE ALL button Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state. MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window • When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode: Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission. You can specify the event assigned to each program number. Display this window by pressing the list in the PROGRAM CHANGE page in the MIDI/GPI screen. 1 2 3 • When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select (Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single MIDI channel. When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed. When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.) NOTE • The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode. • If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used. • If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case, Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received. 4 3 List 1 TYPE field Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI Program Change number. The list shows the following items. • CH/BANK...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1-16) on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the BANK button is on, this will be labeled “BANK,” and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number (1-128). • NO. .........................Indicates the program number 1-128. • PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT .........................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign. Enables you to select the type of event. The following table lists the events you can select. 187 NO ASSIGN No assignment SCENE Scene memory recall operations EFFECT Effect library recall operations PREMIUM RACK Recall operations for the corresponding Premium Rack library Reference Manual MIDI 2 DESTINATION field STEP 1. Connect the CL series console to an external device. 2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels that will be used to transmit/receive control changes. 3. Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen. 4. Switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/ reception mode, and set echo output. 5. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the desired event in the list and select an event type and the recall target. Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall. If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate - - -, and is not used. 3 LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field Enables you to choose the library that you want to recall. If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown. 4 OK button Confirms the settings and closes the window. Using control changes to control parameters You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later. You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.  Using Control Changes MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page) This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1-31, 33-95, 102-119). You can freely assign an event to each control number.  Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) NOTE Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes. This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN. NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter. The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed. NOTE For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the data list at the end of this manual. 188 Reference Manual MIDI MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page) NOTE The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/ CH field on the MIDI SETUP page (page 184). You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. 3 List 1 Shows the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. • NO..........................This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers 131, 33-95, and 102-119. • CONTROL CHANGE EVENT .........................Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment. 2 4 CLEAR ALL button 3 Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list. 5 INITIALIZE ALL button Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state. 4 6 6 Scroll knob 5 Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this. 1 CONTROL CHANGE field Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page. • Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off. • Rx button............................... Switches control change reception on/off. • ECHO button......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port. 2 CONTROL CHANGE MODE field This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page. • NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on): Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the list will be ignored. • TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on): Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the list. 189 Reference Manual MIDI Using parameter changes to control parameters MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window, you can specify the event assigned to each control number. On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called “Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or NRPN messages. For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to the data list at the end of this manual. STEP 1. Connect the CL series console to an external device. 2. As described in “Basic MIDI settings” (page 183), select the ports and MIDI channels (device number) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes. 3. Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI SETUP page to turn on parameter change transmission/reception. 2 1 NOTE • Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device. The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number. • Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored. • Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time. Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems. 3 1 MODE field Enables you to select the type of event. 2 PARAMETER 1/2 field In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event. 3 OK button Confirms the settings and closes the window. NOTE • The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. • If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored. • For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the data list at the end of this manual. 190 Reference Manual Recorder Recorder Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder. Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel. About the USB memory recorder The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive. As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported. By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button. 2. Press the USB tab in the RECORDER screen. 3. Press the RECORDER INPUT L or R button. 4. Use the category list and the port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input. 5. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button. 6. Assign a channel to the other input in the same way. 7. Press the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button. 8. Use the category list and the channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output. 9. When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button. 10. Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.  Signal flow for the USB memory recorder MIX1-24 MATRIX1-8 RECORDER INPUT L STEREO L/R MONO R USB memory recorder L PLAYBACK OUT INPUT1-72* ST IN 1L1R-8L8R R INPUT1-72* DIRECT OUT * CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48 NOTE • Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously. • The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel. RECORDER screen NOTE • The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel. • You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output. • In steps 4 and 8, if you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box. • In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 191 Reference Manual Recorder RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab) 6 PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations. 7 PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder. Press this button to monitor the signal output from the recorder. NOTE You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously. The cue monitoring does not support CUE B. 8 Meters Indicate the level of the signals output to the recorder. CH SELECT window Display this window by pressing the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button. 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 2 5 1 RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons 1 Category List Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R input channels. Enables you to select the type of channel. 2 Channel select button 2 RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder’s inputs and outputs. The channels that can be patched at input or output are different. Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s inputs • MIX 1-24................................. MIX channels 1-24 • MTRX 1-8 ............................... MATRIX channels 1-8 • ST L/R.................................... STEREO channel L/R • ST L+C................................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel • ST R+C .................................. STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel • MONO.................................... MONO channel • CH1-72 ................................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1-72 Channels that can be patched to the recorder’s outputs • CH1-72 ................................... INPUT channels 1-72 • STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R ........ ST IN channels 1-8L/R Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder. 3 RECORDER INPUT CUE button When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder. NOTE You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously. The cue monitoring does not support CUE B. 4 Meters Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder. 5 PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder’s L/R output channels for playback. 192 Reference Manual Recorder RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab) NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. Recording audio to a USB flash drive You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display. STEP 1. Refer to “Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder” (page 191) to assign channels to the input/output of the recorder. 2. Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector. 3. To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are patched to the input of the recorder. 4. Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded. 5. Press the REC () button located at the bottom of the screen. 6. To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button in the lower part of the screen. 7. To stop recording, press the STOP () button. 8. To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows. 8-1. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the recording. 8-2. To stop playback, press the STOP () button. 1 2 7 8 9 0 A 34 5 6  TRANSPORT field NOTE This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song. • The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive. • The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT). • The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder. If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel. • In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder. • The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later. 1 Current song Indicates the currently-selected song’s track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording. The unit is currently playing back. The unit is currently recording. 2 Elapsed time display Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed recording time during recording. 3 Remaining time display Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback, and the available recording time during recording. 4 Current song format Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back). 193 Reference Manual Recorder 5 REC RATE button  Directory structure of a USB flash drive Switches the recording rate. You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data. When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive. The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently-selected folder below that level. NOTE YPE folder The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file. Root directory 6 Display Switch Button Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT fields at the bottom of the song list. Songs folder 7 REW button Song (audio file) Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been selected for playback. If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point. If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released. 8 STOP button The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode. 9 PLAY button Changes the recorder mode as follows. Stop modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song. Playback modePlayback-pause mode Playback pause modePlayback mode, then starts playback from the paused point. Recording standby modeRecording mode Recording modeRecording-pause mode Recording-pause modeRecording mode, then starts recording from the paused point. 0 FF button Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol. The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button will light. A REC button Places the recorder in recording standby mode. NOTE You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key (page 215). 194 Reference Manual Recorder Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive RECORDER screen 35 You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive. The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA (Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps. 4 1 2 NOTE • If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized. • The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters. If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly. • A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed. A 0 C B STEP 1. Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button. 3. You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file. 4. Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file. 5. Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode. 6. If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song you want to play. 7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to play back the song. 8. To stop playback, press the STOP () button. 6 7 8 9  Title list This list enables you to perform operations related to the songs and directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. 1 Selected song NOTE The currently selected song will appear in a blue frame. • Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly. • If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback. 2 Status indicator Displays a symbol to indicate whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused. : Playing, : Paused 3 Track number Indicates the file number in the title list. 195 Reference Manual Recorder 4 Sub-directory C REPEAT button Indicates each song’s track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected). • Upper level............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than the current one. If this button is on, after playback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play the first song on the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). If this button is off, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete (unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One of the following playback methods is selected according to the on/off settings of the SINGLE button and the REPEAT button. • Sub-directory ................Press this to move to that sub-directory. SINGLE button NOTE • If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination. • The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder. 5 PLAY check symbol REPEAT button The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback. On On On Off The currently-selected song will play once and then stop. Off On Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are played again from the first song in the title list. The currentlyselected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback. Off Off Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in the title list is played, playback stops. Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively. 6 SELECT knob Mode Use the multifunction knob to select a song. 7 NOW PLAYING button Editing the title list Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list. 8 MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names. Change the order of the selected song in the list. 9 Display switch buttons STEP 1. Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button. 3. Press the No. button and the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file. 4. If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button. 5. Edit the title or artist name, and press the OK button. 6. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button, and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list. 7. When editing is complete, press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes. Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display. 0 SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist. A RELOAD button Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous state.  PLAY MODE field Sets the playback method of the currently selected song. B SINGLE button If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete. If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the current song is complete. NOTE • If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into ? for display. • The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files. 196 Reference Manual Recorder Recording or playing back using a computer DAW RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab) 3 4 1 If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a CL console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software. DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check. This section explains the steps required when adding DAW software to an audio network. 2 Required devices and software • CL series console and I/O devices • A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software • A GbE-compatible network switch • CAT5e cable • Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software • Dante Controller control software 5 6 NOTE • You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed to acquire the license ID is included in the CL unit package. • The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the following website: http://proaudio.yamaha.co.jp 1 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list. 2 ARTIST EDIT button Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list. NOTE A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, scroll horizontally. 3 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title. 4 ARTIST SORT button Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name. 5 SAVE LIST button Saves the order of the list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on the USB flash drive. 6 SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/ FILE NAME field. 197 Reference Manual Recorder Word clock settings Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take over as the clock master. To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window. Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and V3.7 and earlier Dante Controller in the computer that you want to use for audio recording. Make the following settings before turning DVS on. • Connect the GbE-compatible network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. • Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). • Set the audio format. (Example: 48kHz, 24 bit) • Set the Dante latency. (Use a high setting to V3.7 ensure stability when using multiple channels.) • In the Advanced settings, select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8). NOTE Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User’s Guide for more information on ASIO settings (Windows). Dante Accelerator settings After mounting a Dante Accelerator card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver and make the following settings. For information about how to install the driver, refer to the Installation Guide included with the driver. • Use a network cable to connect the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante network, and then connect the computer’s network port to the same network. • Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). NOTE For more information about selecting a computer for remote control from a CL series console, refer to “Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator” in “When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS” (page 202). 198 Reference Manual Recorder Setting up Dante Controller Setting up DAW software Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting). You must make the following settings for Dante Controller. • For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante Accelerator card. • For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console. (page 168). The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1-16 of an I/O device are patched to DVS. You must make driver settings in your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your DAW software. In the device setting window, select “Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante” for Mac) or “Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output. Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For more information, refer to the DAW software manual.  Setting up Nuendo Live If you install the “Yamaha Console Extension” software for linking Nuendo Live to a console, and then start up Nuendo Live and create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number of channels specified in DVS will be created automatically, and the channel names and colors from the CL series console will automatically be assigned as each track name. Audio recording and playback After you have made driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio. For multi-track recording, set the input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O devices. For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the CL console. To do so, use Dante Controller to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to DANTE 1-64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the I/ O device to monitor during a virtual sound check. In this case, you’ll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console depending on whether you’re performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you’ve saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY (page 168), you’ll be able to switch between them conveniently. NOTE Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the Dante Controller. 199 Reference Manual Recorder Using the CL console with Nuendo Live RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab) The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg’s Nuendo Live DAW software. The “Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily perform multi-track recording operations. Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console. 1 2 Preparing the project Refer to “Recording or playing back using a computer DAW” (page 197) to make the following settings. • Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard • Setting up Dante Controller • Setting up Nuendo Live 3 4 F I Recording into a project 5 G STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button. 2. Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen. 3. Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording. 4. When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP button. 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E H 1 Nuendo meter display field This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live. 2 PEAK CLEAR button Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function. 3 Marker list field Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project. The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction knobs. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to edit the marker information will appear. 4 Nuendo Live SETUP button Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live. (page 201). RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab) 5 DANTE INPUT PATCH button Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH window (page 168). 6 Location information display This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format. 200 Reference Manual Recorder  Transport field Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details, refer to “Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network” (page 251). 7 GO TO PROJECT START button Returns the location to the start of the project. STEP 1. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button. 2. In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP screen, press the setting method select button. 3. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings. 4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window. 8 GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button Returns the location to the previous marker. 9 GO TO NEXT MARKER button Advances the location to the next marker. 0 GO TO PROJECT END button NOTE Advances the location to the end of the project. • You can specify either DVS or Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window. • However, do not select the same DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple CL series consoles. A CYCLE button Turns repeat on/off for the project. NUENDO LIVE SETUP window B STOP button In this window, specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live. Stops playback/recording of the project. C PLAY button Starts playback of the project. D RECORD button 1 Starts/stops recording of the project. E EASY RECORDING button Immediately starts recording on all tracks. When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively. (Default setting: 10 seconds) F ADD MARKER button Adds a marker to the project at the current location. G RECALL LINK button Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on, the button will be lit. H Record lock button Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording. NOTE Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys (page 215). I DVS information display Shows the device label of the selected DVS. 201 Reference Manual Recorder 1 Setup method select buttons  When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator. • NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned • DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list • SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS field. Since the IP address of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used by Yamaha Console Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.  When setup method selection button = DVS To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field. 1 1 1 IP ADDRESS knobs Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address. 2 NOTE • As the IP address, specify the IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live. • Set the address of that computer in the range of 169.254.0.0 - 169.254.255.255, and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0. • For the computer in which Dante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as well as the Ethernet port of the computer must both be connected to the same network. Refer to the illustration below. 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network. From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live. Computer 2 DEVICE LIST select knob Dante Accelerator Operate the multifunction knob to choose the DVS that you want to select. CL SW (Primary) Ethernet P S Dante SW (Secondary) P S 202 Reference Manual Recorder NOTE • Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking. Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware supports redundant networking. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Playing a multi-track project STEP 1. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page). 2. In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live. 3. In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you’re using with Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to. 4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and assign a DVS port to it in the same way. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the window. 6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close it. 7. In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button. 8. Operate the channels so that sound is output. 9. To stop playback, press the STOP button. RECORDER screen DANTE INPUT PATCH window (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab) PORT SELECT window NOTE If you save the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the CL series console can be switched conveniently (page 168). 203 Reference Manual Setup Setup 4 PASSWORD CHANGE button About the SETUP screen 5 SAVE KEY button Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change the password. Press this button to open the SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the user authentication key (page 211). The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console. To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the following items. 1 3 2 54 6  STORAGE field This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key. 7 6 CREATE USER KEY button Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new user authentication key. 7 SAVE/LOAD button Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files. 8 A E B 9 D 0  SYSTEM SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL series console. 8 +48V MASTER button Switches the console’s master +48V master phantom power on or off. When this button is off, +48V phantom power for all the head amps turns off. F H G C NOTE If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel is on. 9 WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window, in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot. I J 0 CASCADE button K Press this button to open the CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections.  CURRENT USER field A OUTPUT PORT button This field enables you to make various user-related settings. Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output port settings. 1 USER SETUP button Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various settings for each user. B MIDI/GPI button Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPIrelated settings. 2 CURRENT USER button Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users. C DANTE SETUP button Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; DANTE device ID and device type settings for devices controlled via the I/O RACK screen). 3 COMMENT EDIT button Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments that will be displayed in the comment area. 204 Reference Manual Setup  BUS SETUP field This field enables you to make bus-related settings. D BUS SETUP button Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/ MATRIX bus-related settings. E SURROUND SETUP button Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6. For Surround mode Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to open the CONFIRMATION dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround mode. NOTE • When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2. • When you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 remain as MONO x2. • When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are turned off. For Stereo mode 205 Reference Manual Setup  CONSOLE LOCK button If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below. This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to execute Console Lock. If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock immediately.  CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast. I BANK A/BANK B buttons Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired. J CONTRAST NAME knob Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display. K BRIGHTNESS NAME knob Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display. BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display. BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob Adjusts the brightness of the display. BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs. BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.  DATE/TIME button Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.  NETWORK button Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address. User settings  Indicator field User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user. Settings for each user can be stored as a “user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations. • Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented. • The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited. • In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations. • Preferences of each operator can easily be switched. This field displays various information about the console. F BATTERY indicator Indicates the status of the internal battery. NOTE The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual (separate document) to have the backup battery replaced. G POWER SUPPLY indicator Indicates the currently-running power supply. • INT .........................Internal • EXT ........................PW800 H Version indicator Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and Dante module. 206 Reference Manual Setup User types and user authentication keys Setting the Administrator password There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in as a user. • Administrator.... The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality. Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users. • Guest...... A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console. • User ........ A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name. A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level. With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button. 3. In the keyboard window, enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button. When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information. • Password (except for Guest) • User Level settings (except for Administrator) • Preferences • USER DEFINED keys • USER DEFINED knobs • Assignable encoders • Custom fader bank • MASTER fader Privileges for each user are as follows. Logged-in user Administrator User Guest Editing user setup data, such as USER DEFINED keys and Preferences Editing User Level settings Available (Can edit the settings for Administrator and for Guest.) Available (Cannot edit the user level, since the administrator can always perform all operations. Can edit the settings for Guest.) Available SETUP screen NOTE • The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the Administrator password will be set. • For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner’s Manual. User authentication key Editing Password commen setting ts - Create new Available Keyboard window Creating a user authentication key Overwrite-save You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console’s internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power User. The user level can be specified when the authentication key is created, but the USER DEFINED key settings and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in. - NOTE Power user Available Available Available Available Available Normal user (User without Power User privileges) Available N/A (Viewing only) Available Available - Available (Excluding User Level settings) Available N/A (Viewing only) - Available - - • You can store ten keys in the console’s internal memory. • The file name of the user authentication key will be specified as the current user name, and its location will be specified as the root directory. Available 207 Reference Manual Setup CREATE USER KEY window STEP 1. To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button. 4. In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment, password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button. 5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console’s internal memory, press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive, press the PATCH button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field. 6. Press the CREATE TO button. 7. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box. 2 3 4 1 5 1 USER NAME SETUP screen Displays the user name. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a user name of up to eight characters. CREATE USER KEY window 2 COMMENT Displays a comment about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a comment of up to 32 characters. 3 PASSWORD Enables you to specify a password. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a password of up to eight characters. 4 POWER USER Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user. 5 ACCESS PERMISSION These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on each item, refer to page 211. CREATE KEY window NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 208 Reference Manual Setup  Logging-in as Guest Logging-in To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User. User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button. 3. In the LOGIN window, press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button. NOTE If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.  Logging-in as Administrator STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button. 3. In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button. 4. Enter the password and press the OK button. SETUP screen LOGIN window  Logging-in as a User To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different CL series console. With a user authentication key stored in the console SETUP screen STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button. 3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button. 4. Enter the password and press the OK button. LOGIN window NOTE • If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password. • If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen. 209 Reference Manual Setup NOTE SETUP screen • If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD button. • If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen. • If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to “Editing a user authentication key” (page 211). • For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from a USB flash drive” (page 233). LOGIN window NOTE Changing the password • If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button. • If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen. Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account does not have a password. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button. 3. In the keyboard window, enter the current password and press the OK button. 4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK button. 5. Refer to “Editing a user authentication key” (page 211) to overwrite the user authentication key. With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive STEP 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button. 4. In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU FILE) button. 5. In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want to log in. 6. Press the LOAD button. 7. Enter the password and press the OK button. LOGIN window NOTE After you change the password, if you log out from the console without saving the user authentication key, the changed password will be discarded. SAVE/LOAD window 210 Reference Manual Setup Editing a user authentication key Changing the user level If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your USER DEFINED keys, preference settings, comments and password, and save them onto your user authentication key. If you are loggedin as a Power User, you can also change the user level. You can view or change the user level. • Administrator................The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the user level setting of the Guest account. • Guest.............................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account. It cannot be changed. • Normal user ..................A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her User account. It cannot be changed. • Power User ...................A power user can view and change his or her User account. STEP 1. Log-in as a user, and edit the USER DEFINED keys (page 215) and Preference settings (page 213). 2. Close the USER SETUP window. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button. 4. In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the SAVE TO button. 5. If you selected the same location as the current user authentication key, press the OK button in the dialog box that asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite that user authentication key. SETUP screen STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the Administrator, press the FOR GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest page.) 4. Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted. 5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. SAVE KEY window NOTE • If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level. • If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button, load the user authentication key again. SETUP screen 211 USER SETUP window Reference Manual Setup USER SETUP window (USER LEVEL page) • WITH SEND........................ Restricts operation of that channel’s send parameters. (From MIX, From MATRIX) • DCA MASTER .................... Restricts operation of that channel’s DCA group fader, ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME. • DCA GROUP ASSIGN........ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group. • SET BY SEL ....................... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned operating restrictions for that channel. 8 2 CURRENT SCENE 1 2 3 6 4 7 Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory. • INPUT PATCH/NAME ......... Restricts operations for input channel patching and names. • OUTPUT PATCH/NAME ..... Restricts operations for output channel patching and names. • BUS SETUP ....................... Restricts operations for bus setup. • GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK ..................... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set this restriction. However, there will be no restriction on operating the MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect. • MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MASTER ..................... Operations for mute group assignment and mute group master will be restricted. 5 1 CH OPERATION Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currentlyselected channel. Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings. The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group. • INPUT channel................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] • MIX/MATRIX channel......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] • STEREO/MONO channel ......................... ............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON] • DCA group ......................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN] • HA ....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel. • PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (excluding the fader, [ON] key, and send level). • FADER/ON.......................... Restricts operation of that channel’s fader, [ON] key, and send level. NOTE In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 3 SCENE LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories. • STORE/SORT operations • RECALL operations 4 LIBRARY LIST Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries. • STORE/CLEAR operations • RECALL operations 212 Reference Manual Setup 5 FILE LOAD Preferences Specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB flash drives. The user authentication key contains the user level, USER DEFINED keys, and Preference settings. Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest. • USER SETUP (USER DEFINED keys and Preferences settings) • SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP • CURRENT SCENE • SCENE LIST • LIBRARY LIST Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment, such as how windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the PREFERENCE tab. 4. Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings. 5. When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. 6 MONITOR SETUP Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed. • OSCILLATOR • TALKBACK • SOLO NOTE If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account. 7 SYSTEM SETUP Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed. • MIXER SETUP • OUTPUT PORT • MIDI/GPI • DANTE SETUP USER SETUP window (PREFERENCE page) NOTE 1 • The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below. • Changing the CONSOLE ID • Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting • Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE CONTROLLER) • Changing BIT DEPTH • Changing LATENCY • Changing DEVICE MOUNT • Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN • Changing the Dante Input Patch • Changing the Dante Output Patch • Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name) • If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. • With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions). 2 5 3 4 8 SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button Permits/clears all items. 1 STORE/RECALL field Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations. 213 Reference Manual Setup • STORE CONFIRMATION • RECALL CONFIRMATION If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation respectively. • IDENTIFY I/O RACK PORT BY [SEL] Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel. If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings. 2 PATCH field Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations. • POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear. If the ON button is lit, a window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob. • PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch. • STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port. NOTE If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a window (8ch) will open. • GAIN KNOB FUNCTION Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the panel. When ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console. 3 LOCALE SETUP field Enables you to select the language used in Help files. Select “EN” to display Help files in English. 4 ERROR MESSAGE field • SCENE UP/DOWN Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the SCENE windows. When the SCENE +1/-1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or decrement the scene number. When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list upward or downward. Enables you to specify whether certain error messages should be displayed. • DIGITAL I/O ERROR If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs. • MIDI I/O ERROR If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI I/O error occurs. 5 PANEL OPERATION field • LIST ORDER Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list. When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order. Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation. • AUTO CHANNEL SELECT Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the [ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels). • NAME DISPLAY Specifies the content of the name display in the Channel Strip section. When the NAME ONLY button is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear. Select GR METER to display the GR meter and fader level value. Select ENCODER INFO to display the information of a function that has been assigned to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the channel fader strip. This option is the same as the FULL FUNCTION option in CL version 1.7 or earlier. • [CUE][SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected. • [FADER BANK][SEL] LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and CUSTOM (Custom fader bank). If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light. NOTE • You can now view the gain reduction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information, on the channel name display. • In addition, if a channel is off during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be highlighted. • The GR meters function enables you to easily view the movement of the gain reduction. 214 Reference Manual Setup GR meter indicator Highlighted display - The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER mode. - The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and that DCA [ON] key is off. - The channel is assigned to a mute group, and that mute group master is on. USER SETUP screen (USER DEFINED KEYS page) USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window NOTE • If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account. • The 16 buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “---” is shown. • The list shown in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. • If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the key is operated. USER DEFINED keys This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the defined function. If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account. NOTE For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys” (page 217). Using the Alternate function STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab. 4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a function. 5. In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function you want to assign. 6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way. 7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window. 8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[16] key on the panel. If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key. The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light). The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH. • UNLATCH ..............Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key. • LATCH ...................Each press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode on or off. You do not need to hold down the key. NOTE • If you select LATCH for the Alternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a window. • In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area. 215 Reference Manual Setup Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior. • [GAIN] knob Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp. You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (16 keys for CL series consoles) to a maximum of four banks. • [MIX/MATRIX] knob Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal. Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off. • [HPF] knob Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off. • [DYNAMICS 1] knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off. • [DYNAMICS 2] knob Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off. • [CUE] key Each time this key is pressed, the channel’s CUE SETTING switches as follows: A  B  A+B. NOTE In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled. Use the four BANK SELECT buttons on the left to select a bank. The selected bank name is displayed in the field in the bottom right side of the Function Access Area. You can press the CLEAR ALL button on the top right side to clear the content of the selected bank. 216 Reference Manual Setup Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys FUNCTION NO ASSIGN PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 - No assignment. LATCH - Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. UNLATCH - Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. group a OVERRIDE ON - Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off. - Switch the channels in group a to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator. group b OVERRIDE ON - Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off. group b PRESET ON - Switch the channels in group b to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator. - Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off. - Switch the channels in group c to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator. group a PRESET ON AUTOMIXER group c OVERRIDE ON group c PRESET ON PARAMETER 1 INPUT CUE POINT B A DCA CUE POINT B A CUE OUTPUT CUE POINT B A CUE SETTING DANTE INPUT PATCH LIB DCA ROLLOUT Directly recalls the desired number of the DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does not function during a scene recall. LAST DCA SEL - DCA1 - : - DCA16 - MASTER CH ON SPECIFIC CH *4) Switch the CH ON/OFF. SENDS ON FADER Increment or decrement the selected channel number. SPECIFIC CH *1) Select a channel from list 1). OUTPUT - Switch CUE on/off. A This clears the CUE for CUE A. CLEAR CUE B This clears the CUE for CUE B. A+B This clears the CUE for CUE A and CUE B. CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1} CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1} CH49-64 {CL5/CL3} CH65-72 {CL5} OVERVIEW EDITOR CONTROL ST IN MIX1-16 *2) CUE the channel selected from list 2). MATRIX A Switches the CUE MODE for CUE A. In Surround mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST, and 5.1 SOLO with each press. When set to MIX, the lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp is on. When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes. B Switches the CUE MODE for CUE B. CUE INTERRUPTION - Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on or off. FADER CUE RELEASE - Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off. CUE CUE MODE This function rolls out or retracts the selected DCA group. CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1} MIX17-24 SPECIFIC CH For CUE A or CUE B, press the [CUE] key while holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for the selected channel to A or B, and to turn on the CUE. LIBRARY #000-#010 Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B. - Selects the cue point for the output channel for CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL (before fader) and AFL (immediately after fader) with each press. DIRECT RECALL - INC Selects the cue point for DCA for CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) and POST PAN (immediately after PAN) with each press. Press the [CUE] key while holding this key to switch the CUE SETTING for the selected channel to A and B, and to turn on the CUE. BANK CHANGE DEC B Description Selects the cue point for the input channel for CUE A or CUE B. It toggles between PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), and POST PAN (immediately after PAN) with each press. A+B BRIGHTNESS CH SELECT PARAMETER 2 A Description - ALTERNATE FUNCTION FUNCTION Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor. STEREO/MONO DCA A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1} CUSTOM FADER BANK A2 {CL5/CL3} A3 {CL3} B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1} 217 Reference Manual Setup FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 B3 {CL1} GROUP/LINK B4 {CL1} C1 {CL5} CUSTOM FADER BANK C2 {CL5} CHANNEL LINK SCENE MEMORY SCENE C4 {CL5} RECALL SAFE FADE TIME C6 {CL5} EFFECT RACK 1-8 - - PREMIUM RACK 1A - PREMIUM RACK 1B - DYNAMICS LIBRARY EFFECT BYPASS INPUT EQ LIBRARY : - OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY PREMIUM RACK 8A - EFFECT LIBRARY PREMIUM RACK 8B - FADER BANK SNAPSHOT OUTPUT CH LIBRARY - - LATCH - Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is selected. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. - Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held down. * However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. - Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ EDIT screen. PEQ LIBRARY Portico5033 LIBRARY Portico5043 LIBRARY U76 LIBRARY PREMIUM RACK LIBRARY Opt-2A LIBRARY Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor. GAIN KNOB FUNCTION EQ-1A LIBRARY DynamicEQ LIBRARY UNLATCH Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY MBC4 LIBRARY INPUT PATCH GEQ FREQ BANK OUTPUT PATCH PATCH EDITOR INPUT INSERT PATCH OUTPUT INSERT PATCH GPI OUT DIRECT OUT PATCH INC DEC LATCH UNLATCH PORT1-PORT5 HELP - - SELECTED CH VIEW - Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen. OVERVIEW - Displays the OVERVIEW screen. TOGGLE - Each press of the key will alternately display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the OVERVIEW screen. GEQ 1-16 EFFECT 1-8 RACK EDITOR PREMIUM 1A PREMIUM 1B HOME : PREMIUM 8A Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active. Make GPI OUT active only while pressed. Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating the controllers on the panel (excluding faders), or controllers on the screen, while holding down this key will display the related information. PATCH LIST RACK Turns BYPASS for each RACK on and off. Lit when ON. Takes a snapshot of the bank settings for all A, B, and C blocks (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or displays the last bank for which a snapshot was taken (press and release the key within two seconds). GEQ LIBRARY INPUT CH LIBRARY EDITOR CONTROL Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor. FOCUS RECALL C5 {CL5} LIBRARY Description MUTE GROUP OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK EDITOR CONTROL C3 {CL5} SELECTED CHANNEL PARAMETER 2 DCA GROUP B2 {CL3/CL1} PREMIUM 8B METER INPUT METER OUTPUT METER 218 Reference Manual Setup FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description - Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when ON. SURROUND METER - For Surround mode, toggle between the content to be shown in meters displayed in the Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 16, and on for SURROUND MONITOR. PROGRAM CHANGE PGM 1-128 CONTROL CHANGE CC 1-31, 33-95, 102-119 Transmit the corresponding MIDI message. NOTE ON C-2 (0) For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is switched. : PEAK HOLD ON METER MIDI NOTE ON FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 SELECTED CH ASSIGN DIMMER ON REWIND GO TO NEXT MARKER GO TO PROJECT END CYCLE NUENDO LIVE STOP START - While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. EASY RECORDING OSCILLATOR PEAK CLEAR - Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen. ADD MARKER - This function executes ADD MARKER of NUENDO Live. OSCILLATOR ON - Switch the OSC on/off. SELECTED CH ASSIGN - While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. DIRECT ASSIGN *1) Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1). - Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (Hold down the key, then release it within two seconds). Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized. Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal. MONO (C) LCR PB OUT SOURCE SELECT OMNI1-2 BOOKMARK Recall the selected signal to the monitor. OMNI3-4 PAGE CHANGE OMNI5-6 BOOKMARK with “SEL” - OMNI7-8 PREVIOUS PAGE DEFINE SURROUND SOURCE SELECT *6) Recall the selected signal to the surround monitor. SURROUND DOWNMIX STEREO MONO When this function is off (the lamp is off), the setting returns to 5.1 monitor. SOLO When this function is on (the lamp is on), the SURROUND MONITOR screen opens. When this function is off (the lamp is off), the SURROUND MONITOR screen closes. L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE This functionality is the same as the SPEAKER MUTE function in the SURROUND MONITOR screen. When the SOLO button is on, it functions as a SOLO key. - Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off. - Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off together. SURROUND SPEAKER Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live. REC Switch the monitor output on/off. STEREO L/R MONITOR Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live. FAST FORWARD TRANSPORT - - Description GO TO PREV MARKER NOTE ON G 8 (127) OUTPUT PARAMETER 2 GO TO PROJECT START NEXT PAGE CLOSE POPUP Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status. - Display the previous/next page. - Close the displayed window. MUTE GROUP 1 MUTE MASTER : MUTE GROUP 8 ALL MUTE 219 Reference Manual Setup FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 TRANSPORT RECORDER PARAMETER 2 Recorder transport functions. AUTO REC Shortcut function for STOP  REC  PLAY. Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file. REC & START Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode. NO ASSIGN (TITLE 1) DIRECT PLAY : INC RECALL SCENE SEND MODE - FUNCTION SET DEFAULT VALUE The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning. Audio files to be played should be saved in the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\. PARAMETER 1 - - SOLO SOLO ON - Switches solo mode on/off. *5) In Surround mode, this is used to switch the bus assign on and off for the channel selected in list 5). *5) In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5). *5) In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5). *5) In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the settings for hard panning for the channel selected in list 5). With each press, the setting is toggled in the following order: Center  L  Front Center  R  Side R  Rs  Back, Ls  Side L  (Center). L ON R ON C ON Recall the scene of the next existing number. LFE ON - Recall the scene of the previous existing number. Ls ON Directly recall the scene of the specified number. Rs ON RECALL UNDO - Execute RECALL UNDO. PANNING L STORE UNDO - Execute STORE UNDO. PANNING R INC - Select the scene of the next existing number. DEC - Select the scene of the previous existing number. PANNING Front Center SURROUND PAN PANNING Ls PANNING Rs RECALL - This function recalls the currently-selected scene. STORE - Store the current settings. PANNING Back PANNING Side L - If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function of the Selected Channel section’s send encoders from TO MIX1-16, TO MIX17-24, and MATRIX. NORMAL/WITH CUE This function switches between the normal function on/off (NORMAL), and the function with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH CUE option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON FADER mode is engaged or if you switch mode during SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the WITH CUE option, cue for all output channels will be canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is disengaged. MIX ON FADER MATRIX ON FADER SENDS ON FADER - - SCENE #000-#300 MTRX 1-MTRX 8 PANNING Side R PANNING Center PANNING TOGGLE TALKBACK ON +48V LATCH Switch TALKBACK on/off. UNLATCH Turn TALKBACK on while pressed. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. - While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF. The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. Ø INSERT ON DIRECT OUT ON PRE SEND SET BY SEL TO STEREO TO MONO TO LCR GAIN COMPENSATION - Description Press and hold this key, and then press any of the following knobs on the panel to reset that knob to its default value: a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or a knob in the Centralogic section. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. SET NOMINAL VALUE DIRECT RECALL MIX1-16/MIX17-24, MTRX PARAMETER 2 While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level. You can also push a knob in the SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the send level to nominal level. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. DEC RECALL MIX1-MIX24 SENDS ON FADER Description PLAY/PAUSE, STOP, FF/NEXT, REW/PREVIOUS, REC Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off. If [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding down the [SEL] key. Press SEL to switch between auto/man if [AUTOMIXER AUTO/MAN] is selected. It goes OFF when the bank is switched. TALKBACK SELECTED CH ASSIGN AUTOMIXER AUTO/ MAN 220 Reference Manual Setup FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 *3) DIRECT ASSIGN WITH ON *3) The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows. - Assignments other than for the channel selected in list 3) are removed. - If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF and the channel assignment is removed. - Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the channel assignment will be ON. At this time, the LED display is as shown below. - If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, the LED will be on. - Otherwise, the LED will be off. CURRENT PAGE - Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen. DIRECT ASSIGN TALKBACK WITH POPUP TAP TEMPO EFFECT RACK 1-8 WITHOUT POPUP USER DEFINED KEYS Description The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows. - Toggle assignment of channel selected in list 3) ON and OFF. At this time, the LED display is as shown below. - If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on. Otherwise, the LED will be off. Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not displayed. BANK A When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on. BANK B When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on. BANK C When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on. BANK D When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on. PREVIOUS BANK Switches to the previous bank. If the current bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D. NEXT BANK Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is BANK D, it switches to BANK A. BANK SELECT *1) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO *2) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C) *3) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO *4) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO(C), DCA1-DCA16 *5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R *6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6, MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MIX17/18, MIX19/20, MIX21/22, MIX23/24, MATRIX1/2, MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO, MONO, PB OUT 221 Reference Manual Setup USER DEFINED knobs NOTE • If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account. • The 4 knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page correspond to USER DEFINED knobs [1]-[4] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “---” is shown. • The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model. • If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED knob, nothing will occur when the knob is operated. This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the defined function. If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account. NOTE For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs” (page 223). STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab. 4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to assign a function. 5. In the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is enclosed by a frame, then select the function that you want to assign. 6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way. 7. Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window. 8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4] knob on the panel. USER SETUP screen (USER DEFINED KNOBS page) About TOUCH AND TURN The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4] knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs, you can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then immediately use the USER DEFINED knob to operate it. At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating that you can operate that knob. USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window 222 Reference Manual Setup Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs Function PARAMETER 1 Function PARAMETER 1 LOW Q LOW FREQUENCY PARAMETER 2 NO ASSIGN - - LOW GAIN AUTOMIXER WEIGHT *1) LOW MID Q LAMP - PANEL - BRIGHTNESS CUE - CH COLOR - HIGH MID FREQUENCY NAME - HIGH MID GAIN A HIGH Q B HIGH FREQUENCY DCA TRIM HIGH GAIN A EXTERNAL HA GAIN1-GAIN8 *10) A HPF FREQUENCY *4) B I/O DEVICE GAIN1-GAIN32 *11) CUE LEVEL - INPUT DELAY DELAY TIME *3) LEVEL *14) INPUT GAIN THRESHOLD *2) RANGE *4) ATTACK HOLD DECAY MIDI CONTROL CHANGE *2) *4) MONITOR RELEASE OUTGAIN *2) DIGITAL GAIN *4) CTRL 1-CTRL 31 - CTRL 33-CTRL 95 - CTRL 102-CTRL 119 - DIMMER LEVEL - TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL - MONITOR DELAY - MONITOR FADER - FREQUENCY - THRESHOLD LEVEL(EVEN) - RATIO FREQUENCY(EVEN) - HPF - WIDTH *13) OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY ATTACK RELEASE *4) OUTGAIN EFFECT ANALOG GAIN LEVEL KNEE DYNAMICS 2 *2) B RATIO DYNAMICS 1 LOW MID GAIN SCREEN OUTPUT PFL TRIM DIRECT OUT LEVEL LOW MID FREQUENCY EQ HIGH MID Q INPUT PFL TRIM PARAMETER 2 ATT KNEE OUTPUT LEVEL WIDTH OUTPUT PORT Displays the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for the target operation as well as the name of the mounted EFFECT TYPE or the name of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a). Displays the names of the 32 parameters for the EFFECT TYPE *b). Displays “----” if a GEQ/PEQ is mounted. PREMIUM RACK 223 LPF - WIDTH - INTERVAL - LEVEL *6) DELAY TIME GAIN Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A8B) for the corresponding operation, as well as the name of the mounted PROCESSOR *a). *12) Displays the names of the 64 parameters for the PROCESSOR *b). Reference Manual Setup Function RECORDER PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 INPUT GAIN - OUTPUT GAIN - SCENE SELECT - TO MIX LEVEL MIX1-MIX24 *3) TO MATRIX LEVEL MTRX1-MTRX8 *7) TO MIX PAN MIX1/2-MIX23/24 *3) TO MATRIX PAN MATRIX1/2-MATRIX7/8 *7) TO ST/MONO TOUCH AND TURN PAN/BAL CSR - *5) - *1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16 *2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C) *3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R *4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8 *5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24 *6) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO *7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, ST L, ST R, MONO *10) # 1-# 6 *11) REMOTE HA #1-#8 *12) DANTE 1-DANTE64, OMNI 1-OMNI 8, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1-SLOT3 16, DIGITAL OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R *13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C) *14) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48 *a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is displayed. *b) If there are no parameters, “----” is displayed. 224 Reference Manual Setup Assignable encoders • The CL3 and CL1 have only one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key, so the function of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously. On the CL5, you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and block C/Master fader section (right side) independently by using the corresponding [GAIN/ PAN/ASSIGN] keys. • This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section, since these knobs are used to control on-screen parameters. You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel, and control the function using the knob. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to “Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders” (page 226). STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab. 4. Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field on the USER DEFINED KNOB page. 5. In the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window, select the function you want to assign. 6. Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window. 7. Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN. 8. Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each channel strip. USER SETUP screen (USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page) ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window NOTE • If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account. • SELECTED SEND is the default setting. If SELECTED SEND is selected, you can use the assignable encoders to adjust the send level to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area. 225 Reference Manual Setup Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders PAN GAIN ASSIGN O Function PAN/BALANCE HPF FREQUENCY HPF *4 DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD THRE1 *5 PAN O DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD THRE2 *6 BAL O DIGITAL GAIN D.GAIN O EQ ATT ATT A.GAIN *1 D.GAIN *1 MTRX8 PARAMETER 2 O PARAMETER 2 DIGITAL GAIN SELECTED SEND PARAMETER 1 O PARAMETER 1 ANALOG GAIN O Function ASSIGN MATRIX8 SEND O NO ASSIGN GAIN O O O PAN *3 Units of scale are m, ms, ft, and fr. No description for samples. (Nothing will be displayed.) O Depends on status *2 O DIRECT OUT LEVEL D.OUT O SURROUND L-R PAN L/R *7 *8 INPUT DELAY DELAY MIX1-MTRX8 O MIX1 SEND MIX1 *3 O SURROUND F-R PAN F/R O MIX2 SEND MIX2 *3 O SURROUND ROUND PAN L/R and F/R O MIX3 SEND MIX3 *3 O SURROUND DIV DIV O MIX4 SEND MIX4 *3 O SURROUND LFE LFE O MIX5 SEND MIX5 *3 O MIX6 SEND MIX6 *3 O MIX7 SEND MIX7 *3 O MIX8 SEND MIX8 *3 O MIX9 SEND MIX9 *3 O MIX10 SEND MIX10 *3 O MIX11 SEND MIX11 *3 O MIX12 SEND MIX12 *3 O MIX13 SEND MIX13 *3 O MIX14 SEND MIX14 *3 O MIX15 SEND MIX15 *3 O MIX16 SEND MIX16 *3 O MIX17 SEND MIX17 *3 O MIX18 SEND MIX18 *3 O MIX19 SEND MIX19 *3 O MIX20 SEND MIX20 *3 O MIX21 SEND MIX21 *3 O MIX22 SEND MIX22 *3 O MIX23 SEND MIX23 *3 O MIX24 SEND MIX24 *3 O MATRIX1 SEND MTRX1 *3 O MATRIX2 SEND MTRX2 *3 O MATRIX3 SEND MTRX3 *3 O MATRIX4 SEND MTRX4 *3 O MATRIX5 SEND MTRX5 *3 O MATRIX6 SEND MTRX6 *3 O MATRIX7 SEND MTRX7 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 226 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or digital gain. The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected. The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed. The state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off. The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on/off. The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on/off. The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to F/R. The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to L/R. Reference Manual Setup GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder) functions Custom fader bank Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called “fader banks.” There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types. This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank. In CL V1.7 and later, the following functions have been added to SENDS ON FADER mode. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab. 4. Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels you want to add to the custom fader bank. 5. In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the bank select button for the custom fader bank you want to set up. 6. In the FADER field, press the select button for the fader you want to set up. 7. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected in step 6. 8. To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.  When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select ASSIGN Use assignable encoders to adjust the level of channels. Channel name display indication Channel levels Adjust with assignable encoder. Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus Adjust with the fader on the top panel.  When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select PAN Use assignable encoders to adjust PAN sent from channels to the MIX/MATRIX bus (bus set for Stereo send in the BUS SETUP screen). Channel name display indication USER SETUP window (CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page) PAN sent from channel to MIX/MATRIX bus Adjust with assignable encoder. NOTE • If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account. • You can also press the fader assign select buttons to assign channels to faders. Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus Adjust with the fader on the top panel. 227 Reference Manual Setup  FADER field USER SETUP screen (CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page) 4 Fader select button Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank. 5 Fader assign select button 1 3 Opens the Fader assign select window, in which you can change the channel assigned to the fader. 6 CLEAR ALL button 2 Clears all the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting. 6 4 Master fader 5 You can set the channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button. 3. In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab. 4. In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the MASTER button. 5. In the FADER field, press the number button for the fader you want to set up. 6. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected in step 5.  CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER field 1 Bank select buttons Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels. The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model. CL5: A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6 CL3: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2 CL1: A1, B1, B2, B3, B4 2 MASTER button Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section. 3 Block indicators Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for editing. The graphics vary depending on the console model. CL5: A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER CL3: A (16 faders), B, MASTER CL1: A (8 faders), B, MASTER USER SETUP window (CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page) NOTE If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings for the Guest account. 228 Reference Manual Setup Custom fader bank functions Console Lock Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes. Custom fader bank settings are stored in scene data in separate regions for each model. You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting disables operations of the panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break. If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console Lock function. When the Console Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable. Custom fader bank settings CL5 Recall Store CL5 console CL3 Recall Store CL3 console CL1 Recall Store CL1 console NOTE Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, custom fader bank settings included in scenes stored in CL5 cannot be reproduced if that same scene is recalled in CL3 or CL1. You must create and store custom fader bank settings in CL3 and CL1. NOTE Precautions for when Loading Console Data • If you have forgotten the password, refer to “Initializing the unit to factory default settings” (page 265). • The Guest cannot set a password. • Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor will still operate as usual. In V2.0 and later, custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in scene data as well. The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the logged-in user, the type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points: • If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings for the saved Administrator are called up. If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved current scene are called up. • If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank. 229 Reference Manual Setup Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive Locking the console STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the CONSOLE LOCK button. 3. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the user. 4. Press the OK button to enable Console Lock function. You can connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive. CAUTION An ACCESS indicator is shown in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the CL unit. Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive. NOTE • Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives. • The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.  Basic operation STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button. 3. Save/load/edit the data. SETUP screen Unlocking the console STEP 1. Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen. 2. If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the user, then press the OK button. NOTE If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen. SETUP screen Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the CONSOLE LOCK screen. In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “Loading a file from a USB flash drive” (page 233). NOTE Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be converted into 16-bit for display. 230 Reference Manual Setup SAVE/LOAD window The file list contains the following items. When you press an item name, it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order. • FILE NAME................. Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type. • COMMENT ................. The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here. You can press this area to open a keyboard window, allowing you to enter a comment for the file. • READ ONLY ............... A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting. Protected files cannot be overwritten. • TYPE........................... Indicates the file type. ALL: File containing CL internal settings KEY: User authentication key XML: Help file BMP: Bitmap image file MP3: MP3 file [DIR]: Directory NOTE The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved. 5 123 4 6 7 8 9 0 C A B 1 COPY button • If the file format version is earlier than V1.70, “old” is displayed in the second line of this field. Data can be loaded even if “old” is displayed. • If the console version is V2 or later, data from any version can be loaded. Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area). 2 PASTE button Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory. 3 DELETE button • TIME STAMP .............. Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently. Deletes the currently selected file. 8 File selection knob NOTE Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob. A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message “Directory Not Empty!” will appear. 9 SAVE button 4 MAKE DIR button Saves all of the CL console internal settings together (page 232). Creates a new directory. 0 LOAD button 5 PATH Loads the selected CL setting file (page 233). Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed. A CREATE USER KEY button 6 VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE Creates a user authentication key (page 207). Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field. B FORMAT button Initializes the USB flash drive (page 236). If an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB REMOUNT button. Press this button to remount a USB flash drive (page 237). 7 File list This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations. C WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK button If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded. 231 Reference Manual Setup 1 TYPE field NOTE The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the “WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK” button is on. Specifies the types of data to be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending on the tab you select. Saving the CL console’s internal data on a USB flash drive • ALL tab This button selects all the items. All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file. The saved file will have an extension of “.CLF”. • SCENE tab This button selects scene memories. • INPUT/OUTPUT tab The following table lists the items that you can select. STEP 1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button. 2. In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save destination. 3. In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button. 4. Enter a file name and comment. 5. Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation. Button IN CH LIB SAVE SELECT screen Data content Input channel library OUT CH LIB Output channel library IN EQ LIB Input EQ library OUT EQ LIB Output EQ library DYNA LIB Dynamics library • EFFECT/GEQ tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button 1 Data content EFFECT LIB Effect library GEQ LIB GEQ library 8PEQ LIB 8Band PEQ library • PREMIUM tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button 5033 LIB 3 2 4 5 6 7 Data content Portico 5033 library 5043 LIB Portico 5043 library U76 LIB U76 library Opt-2A LIB Opt-2A library EQ-1A LIB EQ-1A library DynaEQ LIB DynamicEQ library BussComp LIB Buss Comp 369 library MBC4 LIB MBC4 library 4 232 Reference Manual Setup Loading a file from a USB flash drive • SETUP tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button Follow the steps below to load a CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the CL series console. You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as settings files. Data content MIXER SETUP Mixer setup OUTPUT PORT Output port MONITOR CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK .CLF ALL CL console internal setting file MIDI SETUP MIDI setup .CLU KEY CL console user authentication key MIDI PGM MIDI program changes .XML XML XML file for displaying Help MIDI CTL MIDI control changes .TXT TEXT Text file for displaying Help Dante In Patch Dante input patch library BMP Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more colors, uncompressed bitmap format) Extension .BMP NOTE Type Contents of file CAUTION When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment as well. Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the CL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the CL console. 2 SOURCE field Indicates the internal data of the CL series console. NOTE • When the file has finished being loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading operation and the type of data will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded. • Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation. 3 DESTINATION field Indicates the save destination. 4 Data selection knob This knob selects the data shown in the field. STEP 1. To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. 2. If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to the CL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on. 3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the LOAD button. 4. In the LOAD SELECT screen, select the data to load, the data type, and the load destination. 5. Press the LOAD button to load the selected file. 5 MULTI SELECT button Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data. 6 SELECT ALL button Press this button to select all items. 7 CLEAR ALL button Press this button to clear all selections. NOTE • To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field. • If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite. • You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters. • You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name, and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again. 233 Reference Manual Setup LOAD SELECT screen • EFFECT/GEQ tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button EFFECT LIB 1 Data content Effect library GEQ LIB GEQ library 8PEQ LIB 8Band PEQ library • PREMIUM tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button 5033 LIB 3 2 4 5 6 7 Data content Portico 5033 library 5043 LIB Portico 5043 library U76 LIB U76 library Opt-2A LIB Opt-2A library EQ-1A LIB EQ-1A library DynaEQ LIB DynamicEQ library BussComp LIB Buss Comp 369 library MBC4 LIB MBC4 library • SETUP tab The following table lists the items that you can select. 4 Button 1 TYPE field Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you select. NOTE The console version at the time when the data was saved is displayed on the top right side. If no data has been saved, “NO DATA” will be displayed. If data has been saved but the version cannot be determined, “later than V4.00” will be displayed. • ALL tab This button selects all the items. Mixer setup OUTPUT PORT Output port MONITOR CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK MIDI SETUP MIDI setup MIDI PGM MIDI program changes MIDI CTL MIDI control changes Dante In Patch Dante input patch library NOTE • SCENE tab This button selects scene memories. When the output port items are loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be applied. To prevent this, load and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment. • INPUT/OUTPUT tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Button Data content MIXER SETUP Data content IN CH LIB Input channel library OUT CH LIB Output channel library IN EQ LIB Input EQ library OUT EQ LIB Output EQ library DYNA LIB Dynamics library 234 Reference Manual Setup Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive • ADMIN tab The following table lists the items that you can select. Type Follow the steps below to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting. Data content ADMIN PREF PREFERENCE (for the Administrator) ADMIN UDEF USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Administrator) ADMIN FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator) GUEST PREF PREFERENCE (for the Guest) GUEST UDEF USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest) GUEST FADER CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest) GUEST LEVEL USER LEVEL (for the Guest)  Sorting files To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,” “TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press. 1 2 SOURCE field 2 3 4 5 1 FILE NAME This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive. Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names. 3 DESTINATION field 2 COMMENT Indicates the load destination. Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment. 4 Data selection knob 3 READ ONLY This knob selects the data shown in the field. Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status. 5 MULTI SELECT button 4 TYPE Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data. Sort the list by file type. 6 SELECT ALL button 5 TIME STAMP Press this button to select all items. Sort the list by date and time of update. NOTE 7 CLEAR ALL button By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or descending order) in which the list is sorted. Press this button to clear all selections.  Editing file names/comments STEP 1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each file. 2. Enter a file name or comment in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME button or SET button. NOTE You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file. 235 Reference Manual Setup  Copying and pasting a file Formatting a USB flash drive Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name. Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16. STEP 1. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY button in the SAVE/LOAD window. 2. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the directory into which you want to paste the file. 3. Press the PASTE button. 4. Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button. 3. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FORMAT button. 4. Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button. 5. To execute the Format operation, press the OK button. NOTE You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.  Deleting a file STEP 1. Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE button in the SAVE/LOAD window. 2. To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button. NOTE SAVE/LOAD window You cannot delete a protected file.  Creating a directory STEP 1. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/ LOAD window to change the directory. 2. Press the MAKE DIR button. 3. Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button. NOTE You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists. 236 Reference Manual Setup Word clock and slot settings Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the console power off and back on. “Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same. Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master. If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained). This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button. 3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window, select a clock source. 4. Press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.  Recovery procedure After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows “USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window. Remount function to USB flash drives If USB flash drive is not mounted, the FORMAT button will become a USB REMOUNT button. Press this button to mount a USB flash drive. Use this button if a USB flash drive is not recognized after it has been removed and reinserted. SETUP screen 237 WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window Reference Manual Setup WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window • DANTE 48 k • DANTE 44.1 k The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source. 4 1 NOTE With CL V2.03 and later, if you initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the word clock is set to DANTE 48k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using multiple CL and QL consoles at their default settings. 2 • SLOT 1-3 The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot. 3 7 6 8 5 3 Clock status Indicator Indicates the console’s status as a master or a slave in the Dante audio network. Master Slave NOTE When is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized with a device acting as a Dante master, the audio might cut out. 4 Clock status display  MASTER CLOCK SELECT field Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below: 1 Master clock frequency display Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear. • LOCKED (light blue) Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized. NOTE • If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante Controller application, this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and +4.1667%. • To change the master clock when sample rate pull-up/down has been specified, disable the pullup/down in the Dante Controller, change the master clock, then specify pull-up/down again. • LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (yellow) A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console. 2 Master clock select buttons • SRC ON (green) This is a special status that applies only to SLOT1-3. It indicates that SCR (Sample Rate Converter) is enabled for the corresponding channel. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring. Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the following options: • INT 48 k • INT 44.1 k The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source. • UNLOCKED (red) A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console. • WORD CLOCK IN The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source. 238 Reference Manual Setup Using cascade connections • UNKNOWN (black) This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established. Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enables buses to be shared among the devices. This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs. This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL units are connected in a cascade configuration. NOTE • If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data. • Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting. • If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled. About cascade connections To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit (the cascade master). The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.  SLOT SETUP field This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console. 5 Card name Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear. Audio signals of A+B Audio signals of unit A 6 SRC buttons The SCR (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear. DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL IN CL A CL B 7 FREQUENCY display Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear. (Cascade slave) 8 EMPHASIS STATUS display (Cascade master) Digital I/O card Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear. In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1-24, MATRIX bus 1-8, STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the devices.) When the required settings are made for the cascade slave and for the cascade master, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series console will be followed by the other CL console. You must specify bus assignments for each slot or channel on each CL unit. The procedure below is given separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master. 239 Reference Manual Setup CASCADE window (CASCADE OUT PATCH page) NOTE • In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses1-6. In addition, if you have selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade slave at the cascade master. • If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D’s CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked. • You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer. • There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master. You can select the slot and output port that will output each bus. 2 Operations on a cascade slave CL unit 3 STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button. 3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab. 4. In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which you want to assign the port. 5. Use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button. 6. In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link. 7. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link. 1 4 1 OUT PATCH buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section) Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port. NOTE • You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled. • Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. 2 CASCADE LINK buttons Used to select the operations to be linked when making cascade connections between CL series consoles. Multiple selection is possible. • DCA 1-8 The following parameters related to DCA 1 to 8 will be linked. • DCA 1 - 8 level • DCA 1 - 8 on/off • DCA 1 - 8 cue • DCA 1 - 8 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets) NOTE Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time for consoles linked by cascade connections. • DCA 9-16 The following parameters related to DCA 9 to 16 will be linked. • DCA 9 - 16 level • DCA 9 - 16 on/off 240 Reference Manual Setup PORT SELECT window • DCA 9 - 16 cue • DCA 9 - 16 DCA MUTE TARGET (DCA group mute targets) Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window. NOTE Even if the cue mode is LAST CUE, the cue for the target DCA will come on at the same time for consoles linked by cascade connections. • MUTE MASTER Links ON/OFF for mute masters. NOTE The settings of Dimmer function are not linked. Make these settings individually on each console. 2 • SENDS ON FADER Links SENDS ON FADER behavior. • SENDS ON FADER mode • The send destination bus • CUE The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked. • Cue enable/disable • Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE, 5.1 SOLO) 1 1 Slot select list NOTE Regarding 5.1 SOLO, no links are made if the console at the cascade destination is set to Stereo mode. This list selects slots 1-3. 2 Port select buttons • Cue point settings for input channels and output channels • Solo mute These buttons select the port of the specified slot. NOTE Solo operation is used for all cascaded consoles (MASTER and SLAVE). • OTHERS The following parameters will be linked. • Scene recall operations • Scene store operations • Edit scene titles • DIMMER (MONITOR window) operations • Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP window) operations 3 CASCADE COMM PORT buttons Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when cue operations or scene store/recall operations are linked on the CL series consoles in a cascade connection. • NONE.....................No link operation • MIDI........................Use MIDI port • SLOT1....................Use SLOT1 4 Tabs Switches between pages (CASCADE IN PATCH, CASCADE IN ATT, and CASCADE OUT PATCH). 241 Reference Manual Setup CASCADE window (CASCADE IN ATT page) Operations on the cascade master CL unit STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button. 3. In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab. 4. In the CASCADE IN PATCH page, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you want to assign the port. 5. In the PORT SELECT screen, use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and input ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button. 6. As described in step 6 of “Operations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 240), in the CASCADE LINK PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control signals for cascade link. 7. As described in step 7 of “Operations on a cascade slave CL unit” (page 240), in the CASCADE COMM LINK field, select the same item as the cascade slave. 1 NOTE • You can assign the same input port to two or more buses. • Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings. 1 ATT knobs Display the attenuator values (-96.0dB to 0.0dB) for cascade input signals. You can adjust these values using multifunction knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogic section or the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob. NOTE You can use these knobs as SUB IN with adjustable input level. Doing so allows you to sum the signals from other consoles to a bus, without using up inputs and buses. 242 Reference Manual Setup Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses BUS SETUP window You can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses. Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene. 1 2 4 1 3 4 STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button. 3. Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the MIX bus or MATRIX bus. 4. Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels). 5. Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position from which the signal of the input channel will be sent. 6. As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off. 5 5 MIX 1-16 page MIX BUS 17-24/MATRIX BUS page 1 SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO (stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2). 2 Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only) For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. SETUP screen BUS SETUP window Button Bus type Pre-fader send point VARI [PRE EQ] VARI Immediately before the EQ VARI [PRE FADER] VARI Immediately before the fader FIXED FIXED --- 3 Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only) Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters. Button 243 Pre-fader send point PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader Reference Manual Setup 4 PAN LINK button Specifying the brightness of the touch screen, LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and VARI is set. If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting. Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired. 5 Tabs Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the BANK A or BANK B button. 3. Use the multifunction knob to adjust the brightness of each item. Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field’s ON button or OFF button. If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on. NOTE You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B. SETUP screen (brightness setting field) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 BANK A/B buttons Switch between the brightness settings.  CONTRAST field SETUP screen 2 NAME Adjusts the contrast of the characters of the channel name displays on the top panel. NOTE This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/ O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.  BRIGHTNESS field 3 NAME Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel. This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob. 4 CH COLOR Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel. This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness. 244 Reference Manual Setup 5 SCREEN 3 FORMAT (Display format) This knob adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. If you have set the brightness to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen. Specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed. You can select from the following display formats. • Date MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year) DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year) YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day) 6 PANEL Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge. NOTE • Time 24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0-23) 12-Hour (hours shown from 0am-11am, and 0pm-11pm) If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR’s LEDs will also change. 7 LAMP This knob adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks. Setting the network address Setting the date and time of the internal clock This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer. If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you use the following default values. IP Address: 192.168.0.128 Gateway address: 192.168.0.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network. This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen. 3. In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several times to select the desired format for date and time display. 4. Use multifunction knobs 1-6 in the Centralogic section to specify the current date and time. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. NOTE • Only the Administrator can change network settings. • For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide. STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 2. Press the NETWORK button at the lower part of the SETUP screen. 3. Press a knob in the NETWORK screen to select it, and use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to specify the address. 4. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button. 5. Restart the CL series console. DATE/TIME window Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window. 1 2 3 1 DATE This field specifies the date of the internal clock. 2 TIME This field specifies the time of the internal clock. 245 Reference Manual Setup NETWORK window Dante audio network settings 1 3 You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings. 2 4 5 STEP 1. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen. 2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to open the DANTE SETUP window. 3. Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window. 6 1 IP ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network. 2 GATEWAY ADDRESS Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network. 3 SUBNET MASK Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network. 4 MAC ADDRESS SETUP screen Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited. DANTE SETUP window 5 UNIT NAME Sets the name to be shown on the network. 6 PIN for MonitorMix Sets the PIN (4-digit numeric password) to be entered when using the MonitorMix application to connect to a CL series console. MonitorMix is an iOS application that musicians can use on stage to adjust their own monitor balance. You can register a PIN with all 4 digits blank. In that case, PIN authentication with MonitorMix is not required. However, you cannot leave only 1, 2, or 3 of the PIN digits blank. NOTE The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX (transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps). 246 Reference Manual Setup DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page) • 32bit................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data (when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit. 1 2 7 LATENCY select buttons Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, or 5.0 ms. The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For details, refer to “Setting the Dante audio network latency” (page 248). 3 8 DANTE PATCH BY select buttons If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console. If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network. 5 4 6 8 7 9 PREFERRED MASTER button If this button is turned ON, the console’s status as a master is given greater priority in the Dante audio network. If this button is turned OFF, the console’s status as a master is given less priority in the Dante audio network. 9 • If there is only one CL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the master. • If there are multiple CL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become the master. • If this button is turned OFF for all CL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O devices, will become the master. 1 STATUS indicators Show the operating status of the CL series console and the Dante network. 2 CONSOLE ID select buttons Set the IDs for the CL series consoles. If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID. NOTE • Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1. • If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message “This Operation is Not Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen. • DANTE patch information is applied to the device if the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) is loaded under the following conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current state will be maintained. • In the SAVE/LOAD window (page 230), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is on. • Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CONSOLE ID select button is on. • The THIS CONSOLE button of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on. • With CL V2.03 and later, when settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or a firmware update is installed, the Preferred Master setting is turned on. This setting is not changed when console settings are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned off using the Dante Controller, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word clock settings for anything other than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock master for the Dante network to prevent clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller to clearly specify the master by turning on only Preferred Master for the device that will always be running (off for all other devices). 3 SECONDARY PORT select buttons Specify how the Dante audio network is configured. 4 CANCEL button When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to cancel the changes you made. 5 APPLY button After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the changes you made. 6 BIT select buttons Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit. • 24bit................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this setting. 247 Reference Manual Setup Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT • When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE CONTROLLER.” Also, patching cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. • When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “virtual.” You can edit HA GAIN and other settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not be sent to the device. This is the same as when the devices are not connected. STEP 1. In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the SECONDARY PORT. 2. Press the APPLY button. 3. In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button. Setting the Dante audio network latency An appropriate latency setting for signals transmitted over a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console. DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page) The button you switched is shown in red. When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to its original appearance.  Relationship between the switches and the number of hops An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network. One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series). Switches mean switching hubs as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops. Number of hops Latency (ms) Up to 3 0.25 Up to 5 0.5 Up to 10 1.0 Up to 20 2.0 21 or more (or if a problem occurs) 5.0 NOTE • Depending on network conditions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small. • If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem. NOTE • If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting. • The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the CL series console. • When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a CL series console, the console’s BIT/ LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window for the CL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1. 248 Reference Manual Setup  Connection examples and latency settings Redundant connections Simple 64-in/48-out Daisy chain connections Simple 64-in/48-out 3 3 2 4 2 3 1 1 2 1 4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms Redundant connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out. Daisy chain connections FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out. 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 1 1 4 hops = 0.5 ms 1 2 4 hops = 0.5 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms 249 Reference Manual Setup Daisy chain connections 256-ch HA remote (maximum size) Redundant connections Two CL series consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size) 9 8 3 4 7 6 5 4 5 4 2 3 3 2 1 9 hops = 1.0 ms 1 1 4 hops = 0.5 ms 2 5 hops = 0.5 ms 250 Reference Manual Setup 3 I/O device select buttons Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing. For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons, refer to P.167, (1) “I/O device list.” Here’s how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console. STEP 1. Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window. 2. Press the I/O device select button. 3. In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button. 4. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings. 5. When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window. DANTE SETUP window 1 DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page) 1 2 1 Setup method select buttons Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device. • NO ASSIGN ........................ Not mounted • DEVICE LIST ...................... Select and mount from the device list • SUPPORTED DEVICE ....... Select and mount a supported device • DVS..................................... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS) • MANUAL............................. Enter a device label and mount 3 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state. 2 REFRESH button Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network. 251 Reference Manual Setup  When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST  When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field. If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network. 3 1 3 1 2 4 2 1 DEVICE LIST 1 DEVICE TYPE Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network. From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount. This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series. From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount. 2 DEVICE LIST select knob 2 DEVICE TYPE select knob Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount. Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount. 3 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the inputs and outputs will be entered and displayed automatically. 3 I/O device indication This area shows the selected I/O device. The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device. The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. 4 UNIT ID knob Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the UNIT ID. The indicator shows the UNIT ID. 252 Reference Manual Setup NOTE  When the setup method select button is DVS or MANUAL • If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device’s UNIT ID to “1.” • If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices. • For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap. • If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller. • An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows. Y###-********** # is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 - 9 and uppercase A to F (000 FFF) * indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen) may be used) • If you are controlling the CL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the R unit’s START UP MODE to “REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.” With the “RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output. • A single CL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units. If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between multiple CL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to “RESUME.” If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS/MANUAL field. 2 1 3 1 DEVICE LABEL Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard. 2 INPUT/OUTPUT knobs Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the Dante audio network. 3 Device label entry keyboard Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device. NOTE • If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button. • If DEVICE LABEL is left blank, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted. • If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified. 253 Reference Manual Setup 3 HA device select buttons REMOTE HA settings Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing. For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons, refer to P.167, (1) “I/O device list.” Here’s how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console. STEP 1. Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window. 2. Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window. 3. Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button. If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button. REMOTE HA SELECT window DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page) 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 DEVICE LIST Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network. 2 WITH RECALL button If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled. 3 DEVICE LIST select knob Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount. 1 CLEAR ALL button NOTE • Do not specify “WITH RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different CL series console. • The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.” Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state. 2 REFRESH button Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network. 254 Reference Manual Setup Displaying the device status  R-series You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected CL series or R-series unit (except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP. The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE screen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units and the Dante network. For firmware that predates support for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the indicator will be unlit.  CL series The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the CL series console and the Dante network. Messages Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field. Each indicator lights or flashes as described below: 255 No call-out Unlit Lit The indicator remains lit steadily. Blinking The indicator continues to flash. Flash x2 The indicator flashes twice cyclically. Flash x3 The indicator flashes three times cyclically. Reference Manual Setup  Error messages  Warning messages The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been resolved. If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the CL5/CL3/CL1 Owner’s Manual. The indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically until the problem has been resolved. If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined. [SYSTEM] indicators Meaning [SYNC] indicators Possible solution Possible solution An internal error has occurred. Flash x2 Meaning The word clock is not set correctly. Set the word clock master and the sampling frequency correctly on the CL5/CL3/CL1-native device or in Dante Controller. Dante Network circuit is broken. Make sure that the Ethernet cables are not removed or shortcircuited. Dante Network is connected incorrectly. Other Dante devices cannot be found. Make sure that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly. Blinking The device has failed. Contact your Yamaha dealer for repair. The MAC address setting has been corrupted and no communication can occur via Dante. Flash x2 Flash x3 The internal memory has been corrupted. Lit Flash x3 UNIT ID is not unique. If the problem persists after setting START UP MODE back to RESUME and turning the power on again, consult your Yamaha dealer. Flash x3 If the green indicator is blinking, the unit is operating as the word clock master. If the green indicator lights, the unit is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the word clock. Set a unique UNIT ID number for the Dante network. Lit [SYNC] indicators The DIP switches are not set correctly. Check the DIP switch settings, and set them correctly. flash Lit or blinking Dante flow number limit was exceeded. Lit Blinking 256 Possible solution A non-GbE-compatible device is connected. If audio is transmitted over the Dante network, use a GbEcompatible device. The SECONDARY connector has taken over communications during redundant network operation. Check the circuit connected to the PRIMARY connector. Lit Examine the Dante network routing. Lit or blinking Meaning Blinking Reference Manual Setup Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) Lit or blinking Flash x2 An abnormality has occurred on the circuit connected to the SECONDARY connector during redundant network operation. The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external device. For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer to “Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)” (page 105). Check the circuit connected to the SECONDARY connector.  Information messages The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status. If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly. If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device’s word clock is not defined. [SYNC] indicators Lit Meaning Using GPI IN You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL series console’s Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes. Possible solution Syncing the Dante network Please wait until started has completed or until the unit has finished synchronization. It may take up to 45 seconds for completion. Waiting to receive setting data Use REMOTE HA ASSIGN in the system to sync with a console or R Remote set to “WITH RECALL.” For an R series console with the START UP MODE set to REFRESH, after startup both input and output are muted until the setting data is received. For a single R series console, do not set “WITH RECALL” from multiple consoles. The device is operating correctly as a word clock master. This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock master. The device is operating correctly as a word clock slave. This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the word clock. STEP 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button. 4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab. 5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using. 6. To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN SETUP button. 7. In each field of the GPI IN SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter, then press the OK button. Blinking SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen Lit 257 Reference Manual Setup 3 GPI IN SETUP button NOTE • With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch. • With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs. • Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data. The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI IN SETUP window. MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page) 3 1 2 NOTE The items that can be selected in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER DEFINED keys (page 215). 4 4 Switch attribute select button This button selects the switch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication will alternate between LATCH and UNLATCH. ................. LATCH (a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed) is selected. ................. UNLATCH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when released) is selected. 1 GPI IN status indicator This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port. 2 POLARITY MODE select button This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port. ............... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is grounded. ............... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input. 258 Reference Manual Setup Using GPI OUT MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page) 4 The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the CL series console. STEP 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button. 4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab. 5. Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of the external device you’re using. 6. To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT SETUP button. 7. In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter, then press the OK button. 3 2 1 1 GPI OUT status indicator This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port. 2 POLARITY MODE select button SETUP screen This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port. ............... (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active. MIDI/GPI screen ............... (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active. 259 Reference Manual Setup 3 GPI OUT SETUP button Using FADER START The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window. Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations. STEP 1. Connect an external device to the CL series console’s GPI connector. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button. 4. In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the FADER START tab. 5. For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to operate, and the type of operation. You can assign the following functions. Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description NO ASSIGN - - No assignment CUE ACTIVE CUE ON - Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel DCA ONLY - Turn on the DCA [CUE] key INPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel OUTPUT ONLY - Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel REDUNDANCY IND. PRIMARY This function activates when the unit is operating on the primary Dante audio network with a star connection (redundancy network). SECONDARY This function activates when the unit is operating on the secondary Dante audio network with a star connection (redundancy network). DANTE GPI IN ACTIVE IND. SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 - 5 becomes active POWER ON - - The power of the CL series console is turned on USER DEF. KEY ACTIVE IND. SPECIFIC NUMBER USER DEFINED KEY 1 to USER DEFINED KEY 16 The function assigned to the USER DEFINED key becomes active SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen 4 TEST button While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal. 260 Reference Manual Setup  THRESHOLD field MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page) 1 4 UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the DOWNSTROKE level. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this. NOTE • The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all channels (faders) and all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port. • Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid. 2  MODE field 3 Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the GPI OUT port. You can choose from the following fader modes. 5 FADER START 4 8 5 6 A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to+10.0 dB) from a point below it. 7 6 FADER STOP A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB). 1 CLEAR ALL button Clears all selections. 7 FADER TALLY A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger.  OUTPUT DESTINATION field 2 GPI OUT1 to GPI OUT5 buttons Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings. 3 Fader indicator This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader. 8 NO ASSIGN NOTE Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output. In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. 261 Reference Manual Setup The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the THRESHOLD field is set to -60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to -∞. (This illustration shows the case in which is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is , the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.) FADER START 250 msec FADER STOP 250 msec FADER TALLY NOTE At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited; For details, refer to the control I/O specification in the CL data list (at the end of this manual). 262 Reference Manual Help function Help function NOTE By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file. The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets /languages). • Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.) • Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese) • Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the “Notepad” included with Microsoft Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*. * We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha. Viewing Help STEP 1. Load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive. Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive NOTE 2. In the Function Access Area, press the A help file for only one language is stored in the console’s internal memory. Once you load the help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly. (Help) button. 3. To close the HELP window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP window.  Operation in the HELP window STEP 1. Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash drive. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button. 4. To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section. 5. Press the LOAD button. 6. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file. You can use the multifunction knob or screen buttons to access the HELP window. • Turn multifunction knobs 1 and 2. .............Scrolls the index area at the left. • Turn multifunction knobs 3 - 8. .............Scrolls the main area at the right. • Pressing a link (underlined text) in the text .............Scrolls to the linked destination. • Pressing a window link (a location with an  symbol and underlined text) .............Closes the HELP window and opens the corresponding window. • Pressing the button ........ Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currentlydisplayed location. • Pressing the button ........ Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed. • Pressing the button ........ Advances to the next item in the history of links you pressed. SAVE/LOAD window 263 Reference Manual Help function  Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.  Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys STEP 1. Load the Help file from your USB flash drive. 2. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button. 3. Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen. 4. Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window. 5. In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function. 6. In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button. 7. Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page. 8. In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen. NOTE • Panel controllers (other than the faders and the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. • If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations.  Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. NOTE • The on-screen controllers will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. • If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations. SETUP screen USER SETUP window (USER DEFINED KEYS page)  Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. 264 Reference Manual Other functions Other functions NOTE • Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete. • Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters. Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) Initializing the unit to factory default settings If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory. There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below. INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default settings. INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its factory default settings. Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button. 3. Press the START button in the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen. 4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start calibration. 5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each location at which it appears. 6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. CAUTION The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory. However, the settings in DANTE SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to “Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings” (page 269). STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method. 3. Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization. 4. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization. 5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen. Startup menu screen TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen NOTE • If you are unable to start calibration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [STORE] key to start. • To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit. • Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. Startup menu screen 265 Reference Manual Other functions Adjusting the faders (Calibration function) NOTE • Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3. • If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again. • Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies. NOTE The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the CL is starting up. Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button. 3. Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate. 4. Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen. 5. Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box. 6. Each of the specified faders will move to -∞ (all the way down). If the fader positions are not correct, move them manually to -∞ (all the way down). 7. After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button. 8. Repeat steps 6 to 7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB (all the way up). When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts. 9. When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button. 10. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. In the MODE SELECT field on the startup menu screen, press the button for the item you want to adjust. 3. Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction knob to adjust the value. 4. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. Startup menu screen NOTE • If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB. The factory settings are also 0 dB. • Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. Startup menu screen 266 Reference Manual Other functions • INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain) Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps. • SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain) Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps. • OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain) Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps. 267 Reference Manual Other functions Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function) Adjusting the brightness of the channel name display If necessary, you can adjust the channel colors. Adjust the channel colors one by one. If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button. 3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust the color. 4. Press one of the color buttons in the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen to select the desired color. 5. While comparing the color of the selected channel’s indicator with the color of the other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use multifunction knobs 6, 7, and 8 to adjust the color. 6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change. 7. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button. 3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust. Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the brightness. 4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change. 5. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. NOTE Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen NOTE • In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown. • You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously. • The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values. • To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting, press the RESET ALL button. • Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 268 Reference Manual Other functions Adjusting the contrast of the channel name display Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display. It is possible for Dante-related settings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error occurs on the Dante audio network. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power CAUTION When you initialize, all console settings including the Dante audio network settings that had been previously saved in memory will be lost. Disconnect all connections from the Dante audio network before initializing. to the CL unit. 2. On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button. 3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multifunction knob 1 in the Centralogic section. STEP 1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key and [INC] key on the panel, turn on the power to the CL unit. 2. A message indicates that initialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button. Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels. 4. If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels, hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key. Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast. 5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the right of the screen to confirm the change. 6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal operating mode. NOTE • The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting. • Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button. 269 Reference Manual Other functions Update procedure for NAME SUB CPU firmware Update function to Dante firmware If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the NAME SUB CPU firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “CL5/CL3/CL1 Firmware Update Guide”. Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding. To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button. If the following window is displayed, the console has entered the mode for updating the Dante module firmware. For details about this operation, refer to the “CL5/CL3/CL1 Firmware Update Guide”. Do not power-off the console while the update is proceeding. To exit this mode, press the CANCEL button. 270 Reference Manual Warning/Error Messages Warning/Error Messages Message Message Meaning Meaning DANTE is working at Secondary. The Dante audio network is working on a secondary port. DANTE module Error! An error has occurred in a Dante module. DANTE switched to secondary port. Only the SECONDARY PORT is used, even though a CL series console is being used via a redundancy connection. DCA ROLL-OUT : DCA members scrolling. In DCA ROLL-OUT mode, the content is scrolled left to right in the block. Different File Format! Some Data was not Loaded. Data in an unsupported format was loaded. Directory Not Empty! You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory. 5.1SOLO : Only input cue is enabled. If switched to Surround mode, only the input channel can be cuemonitored when CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO. (Attempted to cuemonitor a different channel.) xxx Parameters Copied. Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer. xxx Parameters Initialized. Parameter xxx was initialized. xxx Parameters Pasted. Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer. xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy Buffer. Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer. ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off! ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off. Editor: Data Framing Error! Editor: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor. Cannot Assign! In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model. Editor: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at CL Editor’s input port. Cannot Bookmark This Popup. This popup window cannot be bookmarked. Editor: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from CL Editor’s output port. Cannot Mount This Type of Device in This Position. You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted. EFFECT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen. Cannot Open This Page. This window cannot be opened. Error occurred at Secondary Port. The network cable of a redundant secondary port has been disconnected. Cannot Paste to Different Parameter Type! The parameter cannot be pasted to a different type. External HA Connection Conflict! Cannot Paste! Cannot paste the character string. External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored. Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library. External Power Supply is Cut Off! The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console has stopped operating. Cannot Select This Channel. You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason. Fader Bank Snapshot is Done. A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings. Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library. File Access is Busy! The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB flash drive is being accessed. Cannot Undo! You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available. Channel Copied. Channel settings have been copied. File Already Exists! The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create. Channel Moved. Channel settings have been moved. File Error [xx]! Internal file access error Channel Returned to Default Settings. Channel settings have been returned to the default settings. File Protected! Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write-protected. Console initialized due to memory mismatch. All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to an update or failure of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document). Flash Memory Initializing Finished. Memory initialization has been completed. Help File Not Found! The help file has not been loaded. Corrupted data fixed! The data was fixed. Illegal Address! The IP address or gateway address settings are invalid. Illegal DIP Switch Setting. The R series DIP switch settings are invalid. Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use Ethernet. Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document). Illegal MAC Address! The MAC Address is invalid. Illegal Storage Format! The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported. Couldn’t Access File. File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason. Couldn’t Write File. File could not be saved to the USB flash drive. Current User Changed. [xxx] Current user was changed to [xxx]. DANTE audio resource overflow. There are insufficient audio resources on the Dante audio network. DANTE Connection Error! The primary and secondary connections are incorrect in the daisy chain connections. DANTE is not working by GIGA bit. GIGA bit is not working on the Dante audio network. 271 Reference Manual Warning/Error Messages Message Internal Power Supply is Cut Off! Meaning Message The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document). Meaning Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding now. You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible. Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned! The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner’s Manual (separate document). Internal Power Supply is Turned On. The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally. Invalid value The MonitorMix application PIN that is set on the CL series console must be a 4-digit numeric password. PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This Function. The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview. KEY IN CUE: Turned Off. KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen. PREVIEW Mode : Disabled Preview was disabled. PREVIEW Mode : Enabled Preview was enabled. Processing Aborted. Processing was interrupted. Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted! The button operation was canceled because recorder processing required time. LIBRARY #xxx is Empty! No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall. Loading Aborted. Loading from USB flash drive was aborted. Loading Finished. Finished loading from USB flash drive. Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low. RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] ! A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen. Maximum Number of Audio Files Exceeded! The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded. RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off. CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen. Memory Error. The R series backup memory is corrupted. Re-Enter Password! MIDI: Data Framing Error! MIDI: Data Overrun! When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a second time. An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port. Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port. REMOTE: Data Framing Error! REMOTE: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the Remote connector. MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port. REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the Remote connector. REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the Remote connector. Monitor Assignment is Restricted to Max. 8 Sources! The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight. No Access From Recorder! In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\. No Channel Selected. A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen. No Copy Item Selected. No Corresponding Help Items. Removed from the Channel Link group. The channel was removed from the link group. Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted. Saving Finished. Finished saving to USB flash drive. SCENE #xxx is Empty! No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled. In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste. SCENE #xxx is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene. The corresponding section was not found in the Help file. SCENE #xxx is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene. No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit. The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag. Scene Playback Link Canceled! The audio playback link for the scene was canceled. No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR. SLOT x: Data Framing Error! SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port. No Response from I/O DEVICE. The I/O devices not responding. SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port. Operating as the word clock master. This console is the Clock Master. SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port. Page Bookmarked. The current screen or popup has been bookmarked. Some data could not be loaded because the parameters do not match. Some Song Files Are Unidentified. Parameter out of range! Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK. Password Changed. The password has been changed. Song File Not Found! The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a USER DEFINED key does not exist. PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy! Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress. STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error! STAGEMIX: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix. PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen. STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port. STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port. Please use Dante Controller. The Dante Patch settings from the console are not valid. 272 Reference Manual Warning/Error Messages Message Meaning Message Meaning STEREO Mode : Cannot Use This Function. You cannot use this function in Stereo mode. USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating. STEREO MODE ON. The console has switched to Stereo mode. USB Memory is Protected! The USB flash drive’s Protect setting is turned on. Storage Full! The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the USB flash drive. USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder Stopped. Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating. Storage Not Found! The USB flash drive could not be recognized. Storage Not Ready! Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready. USB over current Error! Disconnect USB device. The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current. SURROUND Mode : Cannot Use This Function. You cannot use this function in Surround mode. USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x]. The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B, C, or D.) SURROUND MODE ON. The console has switched to Surround mode. Version Changed. All Memories were Initialized. The current memory was initialized when the version was updated. Sync Error! [xxx] The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal. Version mismatch. The versions of this console and the R series console do not match. Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen. Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped! Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost. Target device is in WGM Mode. Operation Denied. Attempted to operate RMio64-D when the mounted RMio64-D is in WGM mode (RMio64-D operating as a member of the NUAGE Workgroup). Wrong Audio File Format! The format of the audio file is invalid. Wrong Password! The password you input was incorrect. This Operation is Not Allowed. This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission. Wrong Word Clock! This Operation is Not Allowed in This View. The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate. This function is not allowed in this screen. You Cannot Create User Key. The current user does not have permission to create a user authentication key. Too Large File! Loading Failed. Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes. Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes. Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Compare. Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source. Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to Flex15GEQ. Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source. Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value. Unassigned Encoder. Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated. Unit Fan has Malfunctioned The fan in the R series console has malfunctioned. Unit ID Duplicated! The UNIT ID is duplicated on the Dante audio network. Unsupported File Format! The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format. USB Currently Active for Recorder function! Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing. USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD! The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive. USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped! Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing. USB Memory Full ! Can’t save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive. 273 Reference Manual Appendices Index EQ.................................................................. 64 Libraries ..................................................... 70 External head amps ............................. 167, 178 Numerics 8BandPEQ .................................................. 143 F A Factory set ................................................... 265 Fade function ............................................... 103 Focus Recall function................................... 102 Function Tree................................................... 4 Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders............................. 226 Assignable encoders ................................... Audio file (links to a scene recall)................ AUTOMIXER ............................................... Automixer .................................................... 225 106 146 146 B BUS SETUP window ................................... 243 C Calibration ................................... 265, 266, 268 Cascade connections .................................. 239 Centralogic section........................................ 13 Channel color ........................................ 30, 268 Channel colors ............................................ 244 Channel Job .................................................. 71 Channel library ........................................ 54, 63 Channel Link ................................................. 82 Console Lock............................................... 229 Control change control parameters................................... 188 Copying, moving, or initializing a channel ..... 87 Cue...................................................... 109, 116 Operating................................................. 118 Custom fader bank ...................................... 227 D Dante audio network ................................... 246 Dante audio network ..................................... 18 DAW ............................................................ 197 DCA group..................................................... 71 Directly outputting.......................................... 26 Dynamics................................................. 64, 67 Libraries..................................................... 70 E Effect ........................................................... 135 Libraries................................................... 166 Effects and tempo synchronization ............. 155 G Gain ............................................................... 31 Analog gain ................................................ 31 Gain Compensation ....................................... 37 Global Paste function..................................... 99 GPI............................................................... 257 Graphic EQ .......................................... 135, 139 Libraries ................................................... 166 H HA .................................................................. 31 Head Amp ...................................................... 31 Help function ................................................ 263 I I/O devices ................................................... 167 Initializing ..................................................... 265 INPUT channels Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus ..................... 42 Sending to STEREO/MONO bus ............... 37 Input channels................................................ 28 Channel library ........................................... 54 Specifying channel name and icon ............ 29 Input Delay..................................................... 47 Input patch ..................................................... 19 Inserting ......................................................... 23 Internal clock................................................ 245 Internal effects ............................................. 148 L Lamp brightness .......................................... 244 LED .............................................................. 244 Libraries ................................................. 70, 166 Library .......................................................... 186 M S Master fader ................................................ 228 MATRIX buses ...................................... 59, 243 MBCL (option) ............................................. 134 Meter bridge (option) ................................... 134 METER screen ............................................ 130 Meters.......................................................... 130 MIDI ............................................................. 183 MIX buses.................................................... 243 MIX channels Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 59 Sending to STEREO/MONO bus............... 57 MIX MINUS.................................................... 91 MIX/MATRIX buses ....................................... 42 Monitor................................................. 109, 110 Mute group .................................................... 76 Scene Editing ....................................................... 97 SELECTED CHANNEL section....................... 6 SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen ............. 7 Setup ........................................................... 204 SETUP screen............................................. 204 Slot .............................................................. 237 Solo function................................................ 121 STEREO/MONO bus............................... 37, 57 STEREO/MONO channels Sending to MATRIX buses ........................ 59 Surround...................................................... 114 SURROUND SETUP screen....................... 205 N Name displays ............................................. 244 Network address.......................................... 245 Nuendo Live ................................................ 200 O Oscillator.............................................. 125, 127 Output channels ............................................ 55 Channel library........................................... 63 Specifying channel name and icon ............ 56 Output Delay.................................................. 62 Output patch .................................................. 20 OVERVIEW Screen....................................... 14 P Patching......................................................... 18 Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)................ 222 Preferences ................................................. 213 PREMIUM RACK......................................... 156 Premium Rack Libraries ................................................... 166 Using........................................................ 156 PREVIEW mode .......................................... 108 Program change recall operation ........................................ 186 T Talkback ...................................................... Title list ........................................................ TOUCH AND TURN .................................... Touch screen............................................... 125 196 222 244 U USB flash drive Formatting ............................................... Help/text file loading ..................................................... Loading a file ........................................... Playing back audio files ........................... Recording ................................................ Saving and loading setup data ................ USB memory recorder................................. Assigning channels ................................. USER DEFINED keys ................................. Functions that can be assigned............... Recalling Help ......................................... USER DEFINED knobs ............................... Functions that can be assigned............... User settings ............................................... 236 263 233 195 193 230 191 191 215 217 264 222 223 206 V Viewing Help ............................................... 263 Virtual rack .................................................. 135 operations................................................ 136 R Recall Safe function....................................... 79 274 Reference Manual Appendices W Warning/Error Messages............................. 271 WIRELESS.................................................. 176 Word clock................................................... 237 275 Reference Manual Table of Contents Data List EQ Library List.................................................................... DYNAMICS Library List ...................................................... Dynamics Parameters......................................................... Effect Type List.................................................................... Effects Parameters.............................................................. Premium Rack Processor Parameters ................................ Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ............................................................. NRPN Parameter Assignments .......................................... Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability........................... MIDI Data Format ............................................................... Input/output characteristics................................................. Electrical Characteristics .................................................... Mixer Basic Parameters...................................................... Pin Assignment Chart......................................................... MIDI Implementation Chart................................................. 2 3 5 7 8 20 23 26 30 36 43 45 46 47 48 EN EQ Library List # • Libraries created by the user also include type parameters and BYPASS parameters (ON/OFF) for each band. • The type parameter for all read-only presets is “LEGACY (TYPE1).” # 01 Bass Drum 1 02 Bass Drum 2 03 Snare Drum 1 04 Snare Drum 2 05 Tom-tom 1 06 Cymbal 07 High Hat 08 Percussion 09 E. Bass 1 10 E. Bass 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB -3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 1.25 10.0 0.90 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80.0 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz Q - 10.0 0.70 0.10 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz Q 1.4 10.0 1.25 0.28 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz Q - 8.0 0.90 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz Q - 0.50 1.0 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz Q - 4.5 0.56 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz Q - 5.0 4.5 - 11 Syn. Bass 1 +0.5 dB 4.00 kHz 0.10 5.0 6.3 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 8.0 4.5 - PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz 1.6 8.0 2.2 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz - 8.0 0.90 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz 5.6 10.0 0.70 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz 0.18 10.0 6.3 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz 8.0 0.40 0.16 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz - 9.0 10.0 - L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +6.0 dB -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 20 A. G. Stroke 1 0.10 PEAKING G Q 19 E. G. Dist. 2 H.SHELF +2.5 dB Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 PEAKING 2.24 kHz Q 17 E. G. Crunch 2 PEAKING 0.0 dB Q 16 E. G. Crunch 1 PEAKING 112 Hz Q 15 E. G. Clean HIGH 112 Hz Q 14 Piano 2 H-MID +3.0 dB Q 13 Piano 1 L-MID F Q 12 Syn. Bass 2 LOW G Q Parameter Title Parameter Title - 10.0 4.0 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 - 2 # Parameter Title 21 A. G. Stroke 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz Q 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz - 4.5 4.5 0.125 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz - 7.0 4.5 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 10.0 5.6 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz - 0.16 0.20 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 30 Total EQ 1 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz Q 31 Total EQ 2 7.0 PEAKING 190 Hz Q 29 Chorus & Harmo 0.70 PEAKING -0.5 dB Q 28 Female Vo. 2 2.0 PEAKING F Q 27 Female Vo. 1 2.8 PEAKING G Q 26 Male Vocal 2 PEAKING -0.5 dB Q 25 Male Vocal 1 4.5 PEAKING F Q 24 Brass Sec. 9.0 PEAKING G Q 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 L.SHELF 7.0 2.2 5.6 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95.0 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz Q 7.0 2.8 5.6 - Data List # 32 Total EQ 3 33 Bass Drum 3 34 Snare Drum 3 37 Piano Low 39 Fine-EQ Cass HIGH PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67.0 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz Q - 0.28 0.70 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40 PEAKING L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz - 4.5 2.8 0.10 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz - 4.5 1.25 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz 10.0 6.3 2.2 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 0.10 H.SHELF L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 40 Narrator H-MID L.SHELF Q 38 Piano High L-MID +1.5 dB Q 36 Piano 3 LOW G Q 35 Tom-tom 2 DYNAMICS Library List Parameter Title - 4.5 1.8 - PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4.0 7.0 0.63 - # Title Type 1 Gate GATE 2 Ducking DUCKING 3 A. Dr. BD GATE 4 A. Dr. SN GATE 5 6 7 8 9 De-Esser Comp Expand Compander (H) Compander (S) DE-ESSER COMPRESSOR EXPANDER COMPANDER-H COMPANDER-S 3 Parameter Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) Hold (ms) Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Frequency (kHz) Type Q Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) # Value -26 -56 0 2.56 331 -19 -22 93 1.20 S 6.32 S -11 -53 0 1.93 400 -8 -23 1 0.63 238 -8 2.00 HPF 1.6 -8 2.5 30 0.0 2 250 -23 1.7 1 3.5 2 70 -10 3.5 1 0.0 6 250 -8 4 25 0.0 24 180 Title Type 10 A. Dr. BD COMPRESSOR 11 A. Dr. BD COMPANDER-H 12 A. Dr. SN COMPRESSOR 13 A. Dr. SN EXPANDER 14 A. Dr. SN COMPANDER-S 15 A. Dr. Tom EXPANDER 16 A. Dr. OverTop COMPANDER-S 17 E. B. Finger COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value -24 3 9 5.5 2 58 -11 3.5 1 -1.5 7 192 -17 2.5 8 3.5 2 12 -23 2 0 0.5 2 151 -8 1.7 11 0.0 10 128 -20 2 2 5.0 2 749 -24 2 38 -3.5 54 842 -12 2 15 4.5 2 470 Data List # Title Type 18 E. B. Slap COMPRESSOR 19 Syn. Bass COMPRESSOR 20 Piano1 COMPRESSOR 21 Piano2 COMPRESSOR 22 E. Guitar COMPRESSOR 23 A. Guitar COMPRESSOR 24 Strings1 COMPRESSOR 25 Strings2 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value -12 1.7 6 4.0 hard 133 -10 3.5 9 3.0 hard 250 -9 2.5 17 1.0 hard 238 -18 3.5 7 6.0 2 174 -8 3.5 7 2.5 4 261 -10 2.5 5 1.5 2 238 -11 2 33 1.5 2 749 -12 1.5 93 1.5 4 1.35 s # Title Type 26 Strings3 COMPRESSOR 27 BrassSection COMPRESSOR 28 Syn. Pad COMPRESSOR 29 SamplingPerc COMPANDER-S 30 Sampling BD COMPRESSOR 31 Sampling SN COMPRESSOR 32 Hip Comp COMPANDER-S 33 Solo Vocal1 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value -17 1.5 76 2.5 2 186 -18 1.7 18 4.0 1 226 -13 2 58 2.0 1 238 -18 1.7 8 -2.5 18 238 -14 2 2 3.5 4 35 -18 4 8 8.0 hard 354 -23 20 15 0.0 15 163 -20 2.5 31 2.0 1 342 # Title Type 34 Solo Vocal2 COMPRESSOR 35 Chorus COMPRESSOR 36 Click Erase EXPANDER 37 Announcer COMPANDER-H 38 Limiter1 COMPANDER-S 39 Limiter2 COMPRESSOR 40 Total Comp1 COMPRESSOR 41 Total Comp2 COMPRESSOR Parameter Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Width (dB) Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) Value -8 2.5 26 1.5 3 331 -9 1.7 39 2.5 2 226 -33 2 1 2.0 2 284 -14 2.5 1 -2.5 18 180 -9 3 20 -3.0 90 3.90 s 0 ∞ 0 0.0 hard 319 -18 3.5 94 2.5 hard 447 -16 6 11 6.0 1 180 * At fs=44.1 kHz 4 Data List  DUCKING Dynamics Parameters Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE). Dynamics Parameters are the following types. Input channels DYNAMIC section 1 DYNAMIC section 1 GATE COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR DUCKING COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard) EXPANDER COMPRESSOR COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft) COMPANDER-H (Compander Hard) DE-ESSER COMPANDER-S (Compander Soft) EXPANDER Parameter THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points) RANGE (dB) -70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated. ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec active once the trigger signal has fallen below 48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points) This determines how long ducking remains A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE). the THRESHOLD level. Description THRESHOLD (dB) -72 to 0 (73 points) This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied. RANGE (dB) -∞, -69 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes. ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec once the trigger signal has fallen below the 48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points) DECAY (ms) • I/O Characteristics This determines how long the gate stays open threshold. 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. Input Level Input Signal THRESHOLD This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • Time Series Analysis Input Signal THRESHOLD Output Signal ATTACK HOLD DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE • Time Series Analysis Output Level • I/O Characteristics 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points) Output Level Range Output Level Parameter Output Level Description This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.  GATE DECAY (ms) Range Input Level Type Output channels DYNAMIC section 2 Input Level Output Signal Time Time HOLD ATTACK DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level Time Time 5 Data List  COMPRESSOR  EXPANDER The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter's output level never actually exceeds the threshold. An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. Parameter THRESHOLD (dB) Range Parameter Description This determines the level at which compression is applied. -54 to 0 (55 points) Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of expansion. ATTACK (ms) 0-120 (121 points) This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. 0-120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) ATTACK (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) This sets the expander's output signal level. 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. Hard, 1-5 (6 points) This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB) THRESHOLD RATIO • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB) • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) Input Signal Output Signal ATTACK Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD RATIO Time Input Signal RELEASE THRESHOLD Input Level THRESHOLD • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) Output Level Hard, 1-5 (6 points) This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. Input Level This sets the compressor's output signal level. KNEE Output Level KNEE 0.0 to +18.0 (181 points) Output Level OUT GAIN (dB) Input Level RELEASE (ms) Input Level Time Time Time 6 Data List  COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S) Effect Type List Output Level The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter. THRESHOLD WIDTH 0dB Input Level The companders function differently at the following levels: 1 0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter. 2 Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor. 3 Below the threshold and width ..........Functions as an expander. The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2. * The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB. * The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes. Parameter Range Description Title Type Description REV-X Hall REV-X HALL REV-X Room REV-X ROOM REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback Chorus CHORUS Chorus Flange FLANGE Flanger Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo Auto-panner THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points) This determines the amount of compression. 0-120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. Auto Pan AUTO PAN OUT GAIN (dB) -18.0 to 0.0 (181 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level. Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation 1-90 (90 points) This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width. Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel RevChorus REVCHORUS Reverb and chorus in series Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel RevFlange REVFLANGE Reverb and flanger in series Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel ATTACK (ms) WIDTH (dB)  DE-ESSER This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal. Parameter THRESHOLD Range Description -54 to 0 (55 points) Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied. FREQUENCY 1kHz-12.5kHz (45 points) Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies. TYPE HPF, BPF Q 10.0-0.10 (41 points) RevSympho. REVSYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series RevPan REVPAN Reverb and auto-pan in series Type of filter used to detect the frequency band. Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF. DelayEr. DELAYER. Delay and early reflections in series 7 Data List Title Type Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel Effects Parameters Description DelayRev DELAYREV Delay and reverb in series  REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE DistDelay DISTDELAY Distortion and delay in series Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave) Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler Distortion DISTORTION Distortion Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Parameter COMP276 This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios. REV TIME 0.28-27.94 s INI. DLY 0.0-120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Comp276 Range *1 Description Reverb time Comp276S COMP276S This is a stereo model of COMP276. HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio Comp260 COMP260 This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter 1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR. LO. RATIO 0.1-1.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz-18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) Comp260S COMP260S This is a stereo model of the COMP260. Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive. ROOM SIZE 0-28 Size of room DECAY 0-53 Gate closing speed HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 1.00 kHz-18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency OpenDeck OPENDECK This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck. M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor *1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting. M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor  REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density E/R DLY 0.0-100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0-100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0-120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD *1 Gate open time DECAY *2 Gate closing speed *1. 0.02 ms-2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms-1.96 s (fs=48 kHz) *2. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 8 Data List  STEREO REVERB  GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE Two input, two output stereo reverb. One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time TYPE REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 INI. DLY 0.0-100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) DIFF. 0-10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio E/R BAL. 0-100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency  EARLY REF. TYPE Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing  MONO DELAY One input, two output early reflections. Parameter Type-A, Type-B Description REV TIME Range S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 One input, one output basic repeat delay. Description Parameter Range Description Type of early reflection simulation DELAY 0.0-2730.0 ms Delay time Reflection spacing FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency DIFF. 0-10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY FB GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)  STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Description 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY *1. 9 Range DELAY L (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Data List  MOD. DELAY  ECHO One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time DELAY L 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain DELAY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel delay time HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FB.DLY L 0.0-1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed FB.DLY R 0.0-1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth FB. G L -99 to +99% WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency FB. G R -99 to +99% LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LR FBG -99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY RL FBG -99 to +99% MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY NOTE FBL *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback DELAY NOTE FBR *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback DELAY *1. *2. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)  DELAY LCR One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0-2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0-2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0-2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0-2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level  CHORUS LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level Two input, two output chorus effect. FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Parameter HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth 0-100% Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Range 0.05-40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency PM DEPTH SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform NOTE C *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY NOTE FB *1. *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 10 Data List  FLANGE  PHASER Two input, two output flange effect. Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Parameter Range FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz DEPTH MOD. DLY Description Parameter Range Description Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed 0-100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ SYNC OFF/ON LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1.  DYNA.FLANGE *1. Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.  SYMPHONIC Parameter Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Description Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth DECAY *1 Decay speed MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time OFFSET 0-100 Delay time offset WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) *1. 11 Data List  DYNA.PHASER  DUAL PITCH Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Two input, two output pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift FINE 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 -100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) DECAY *1 Decay speed PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan OFFSET 0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset DELAY 1 0.0-1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G 1 -99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages MODE 1-10 Pitch shift precision LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency PITCH 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain FINE 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency LEVEL 2 -100 to +100% HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan *1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) DELAY 2 0.0-1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time  HQ.PITCH FB. G 2 -99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay Parameter Range Description PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0-1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1-10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY *1. *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)  TREMOLO Two input, two output tremolo effect. Parameter (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Range Description FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 12 Data List  AUTOPAN  RING MOD. Two input, two output autopanner. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter Range FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz DEPTH DIR. Description Parameter Range Description Modulation speed SOURCE OSC, SELF 0-100% Modulation depth OSC FREQ 0.0-5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency *1 Panning direction FM FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform FM DEPTH 0-100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ FM NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ LSH F 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency  MOD.FILTER EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth Two input, two output modulation filter. HSH F 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency Parameter HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth PHASE 0.00-354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0-100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0-20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0-100 Output level SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. *1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R *2.  ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter Range Modulation source: oscillator or input signal Description Range Description ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW 0.05-10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05-10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed  DYNA.FILTER DRIVE 0-100 Overdrive level Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. ACCEL 0-10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0-100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0-100 High-frequency filter *1. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0-100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0-100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0-20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0-100 Output level *1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 13 Data List  REV+CHORUS  REV+FLANGE One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density REV/CHO 0-100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) REV/FLG 0-100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth PM DEPTH 0-100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. *1.  REVCHORUS  REVFLANGE One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Parameter Range One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Description REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time Parameter INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Diffusion (spread) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DIFF. 0-10 Range Description DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density DIFF. 0-100% Reverb density 0-100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) DENSITY REV.BAL REV.BAL 0-100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed LPF AM DEPTH 0-100% Amplitude modulation depth FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEPTH Pitch modulation depth DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz 0-100% MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time MOD. DLY WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform FB. GAIN -99 to +99% SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. *1. 14 Data List  REV+SYMPHO.  REVPAN One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect. Parameter Range Parameter Description Range Description REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) 0-100% Reverb density DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density DENSITY REV/SYM 0-100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) REV.BAL 0-100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth *1 MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time DIR. Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *2 NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. *1. LR, LR, LR, Turn L, Turn R *2.  REVSYMPHO.  DELAY+ER. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range Parameter Description Range Description REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) FB. GAIN -99 to +99% DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio 0-100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) HI. RATIO REV.BAL DLY/ER 0-100% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Modulation delay time ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF/ON NOTE L *1 NOTE R *1 NOTE FB *1 Tempo parameter sync on/off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY *1. *1. 15 Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Data List  DELAYER. Parameter One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY Parameter Range Description Range Description DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio DLY.BAL 0-100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Right channel delay time LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0 Reflection spacing DELAY HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio LIVENESS 0-10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DLY.BAL 0-100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency DENSITY 0-100% Reflection density LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ER NUM. 1-19 Number of early reflections REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins NOTE L *1 REV HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY *1.  DELAYREV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Parameter Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)  DELAY+REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Parameter Range (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *1. Range Description (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Description DELAY L 0.0-1000.0 ms DELAY R 0.0-1000.0 ms Left channel delay time Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0-1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio DLY/REV 0-100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1-1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0-10 Diffusion (spread) DENSITY 0-100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off 16 Data List  DISTDELAY  FREEZE One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. One input, two output basic sampler. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. REC DLY -1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. TRG LVL -60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive MASTER 0-100 Master volume TONE -10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) TRG MASK 0-1000 ms HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio START *1 Playback start point in milliseconds FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed END *1 Playback end point in milliseconds DEPTH 0-100% Modulation depth LOOP *1 Loop start point in milliseconds 0-100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) LOOP NUM 0-100 Number of times the sample plays PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE -50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF, C1-C6, ALL The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. START [SAMPLE] 0-131000 Playback start point in samples END [SAMPLE] 0-131000 Playback end point in samples LOOP [SAMPLE] 0-131000 Loop start point in samples DLY.BAL *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *2.  MULTI FILTER Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Parameter Range Description Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. TYPE 1 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency LEVEL 1 0-100 Filter 1 level RESO. 1 0-20 Filter 1 resonance  DISTORTION TYPE 2 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass One input, two output distortion effect. FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency LEVEL 2 0-100 Filter 2 level RESO. 2 0-20 Filter 2 resonance TYPE 3 LPF, HPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz LEVEL 3 0-100 RESO. 3 0-20 *1. 0.0-5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms-5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz) Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0-100 Distortion drive Filter 3 frequency MASTER 0-100 Master volume Filter 3 level TONE -10 to +10 Tone control Filter 3 resonance N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction 17 Data List  AMP SIMULATE  COMP276S One input, two output guitar amp simulator. This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters. Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE *1 Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0-100 MASTER 0-100 BASS MIDDLE Parameter Range Description INPUT -180 to 0 dB Distortion drive OUTPUT -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the output gain Master volume RATIO 1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor 0-100 Bass tone control ATTACK 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor 0-100 Middle tone control RELEASE 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of the compressor TREBLE 0-100 High tone control MAKE UP OFF, ON N. GATE 0-20 Noise reduction Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is applied CAB DEP 0-100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100 Hz-8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency SIDE HPF OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0-0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth  COMP260 *1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via stereo links.  COMP276 This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural channels independently. Parameter Range Adjusts the input level Parameter Description Range Description THRE.1 -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH compressor KNEE1 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH1 compressor ATTACK1 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor Release time of CH1 compressor INPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 input level RELEASE1 6.2-999 ms OUTPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain RATIO1 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio for CH1 compressor RATIO 1 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor OUTPUT1 -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH1 output gain ATTACK 1 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH1 compressor THRE.2 -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of CH2 compressor 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH1 compressor KNEE2 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of CH2 compressor OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied ATTACK2 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor RELEASE2 6.2-999 ms Release time of CH2 compressor SIDEHPF1 OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. RATIO2 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio of CH2 compressor OUTPUT2 -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain INPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 input level ST LINK OFF, ON OUTPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB Adjusts the CH2 output gain Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor ATTACK 2 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor RELEASE2 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor MAKE UP2 OFF, ON Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied OFF, ON When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range. RELEASE1 MAKE UP1 SIDEHPF2  COMP260S This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters. Parameter 18 Range Description THRE. -60 to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD Knee of the compressor ATTACK 0.01-80.0 ms Attack time of the compressor RELEASE 6.2-999 ms Release time of the compressor RATIO 1.0-500, ∞ Ratio of the compressor OUTPUT -20 to 40 dB Adjusts the output gain Data List  EQUALIZER601  OPENDECK This effect emulates the characteristics of 70's analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound. It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a playback deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description LO TYPE HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2 Type of EQ1 LO F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Cut-off frequency of EQ1 LO G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ1 MID1 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ2 MID1 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ2 MID1 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB MID2 Q 0.50-16.0 MID2 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ3 MID2 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ3 INPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB OUTPUT -18.0 to +18.0 dB MID3 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ4 MID3 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ4 MID3 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ4 MID4 Q 0.50-16.0 Q of EQ5 MID4 F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz Center frequency of EQ5 MID4 G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ5 HI TYPE LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2 Type of EQ6 HI F 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz *1 Cut-off frequency of EQ6 HI G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6 LO SW OFF, ON Switches EQ1 on/off MID1 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ2 on/off Parameter MID2 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ3 on/off L-M XOVER MID3 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ4 on/off M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope REC DEC Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70 Selects the recording deck type REC LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound. Gain of EQ2 REC HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck Q of EQ3 REC BIAS -1.00 to +1.00 Adjusts the bias of the recording deck REPR DEC Swss70, Swss78, Swss85, Amer70 Selects the playback deck type Input gain REPR LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB Adjusts the output level of the playback deck Output gain REPR HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck REPR LO -6.0 to +6.0 dB Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck MAKE UP Off, On When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change, maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level. TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips Selects the tape speed TP KIND Old, New Selects the tape type  M.BAND DYNA. Two input, two output 3-band dynamically controlled processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Range 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Description Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands MID4 SW OFF, ON Switches EQ5 on/off SLOPE HI SW OFF, ON Switches EQ6 on/off LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain CLEAN, DRIVE Selects the equalizer type. The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits. TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level CMP.THRE -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the compressor CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the compressor CMP.ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the compressor CMP.REL *1 Release time of the compressor CMP.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the compressor CMP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the compressor EXP.THRE -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB Threshold of the expander EXP.RAT 1:1 to 5:1 Ratio of the expander EXP.REL *1 Release time of the expander EXP.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the expander LIM.THRE -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the limiter TYPE *1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2) 19 Data List Parameter LIM.ATK Range 0-120 ms Premium Rack Processor Parameters Description Attack time of the limiter LIM.REL *1 Release time of the limiter LIM.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the limiter LIM.BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the limiter PRESENCE -10 to +10 Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band. Negative (-) values do the opposite. If this is set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way. ALL BYPASS OFF, ON Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay TRIM -12.0 to 12.0 dB Input gain MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level LF FREQ 30.00 to 300.0 Hz Center frequency of the LF band LF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LF band  Portico5033 This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company. Parameter *1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) Range Description LMF IN OFF, ON Switches the LMF band on/off  M.BAND COMP LMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the LMF band Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz Center frequency of the LMF band LMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the LMF band MF IN OFF, ON Switches the MF band on/off MF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the MF band MF FREQ 330.0 to 2500 Hz Center frequency of the MF band MF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the MF band HMF IN OFF, ON Switches the HMF band on/off HMF Q 0.70 to 5.00 Q of the HMF band HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz Center frequency of the HMF band HMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HMF band LF/HF IN OFF, ON Switches the LF/HF bands on/off HF FREQ 2.50k to 25.0k Hz Center frequency of the HF band HF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB Gain of the HF band Parameter L-M XOVER Range 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz Description Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Low band gain MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Mid band gain HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB High band gain TOTAL -72.0 dB to +12.0 dB Overall gain CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level LOW THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the low band compressor LOW RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the low band compressor LOW ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the low band compressor LOW REL *1 Release time of the low band compressor LOW KNEE 0-5 Knee of the low band compressor LOW BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the low band compressor MID THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the mid band compressor MID RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the mid band compressor MID ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the mid band compressor MID REL *1 Release time of the mid band compressor MID KNEE 0-5 Knee of the mid band compressor MID BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the mid band compressor HI. THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Threshold of the high band compressor HI. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Ratio of the high band compressor HI. ATK 0-120 ms Attack time of the high band compressor HI. RAT *1 Release time of the high band compressor HI. KNEE 0-5 Knee of the high band compressor HI. BYP OFF/ON Bypasses the high band compressor LOOKUP 0.0-100.0 ms Lookup delay MAKE UP OFF/ON Automatically adjusts the output level  Portico5043 This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company. Parameter Range Description Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. IN OFF, ON FB OFF, ON Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type THRESHOLD -50.0 to 0.0 dB Threshold level RATIO 1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio ATTACK 20 to 75 ms Attack time RELEASE 100 ms to 2.50 sec Release time GAIN -6.0 to 20.0 dB Output level *1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) 20 Data List  U76  Dynamic EQ This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations. This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander. Parameter Range Description INPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Input level OUTPUT -96.0 to 0.0 dB Output level ATTACK 5.50 to 0.10 ms Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack. RELEASE 1100.0 to 56.4 ms Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release. RATIO METER Parameter Range Description BAND ON/OFF OFF, ON Turns the corresponding band on/off SIDECHAIN CUE OFF, ON If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20 Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect. SIDECHAIN LISTEN OFF, ON If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/ MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent. OFF, +4, +8, GR Switches the meter display FILTER TYPE Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter FREQUENCY 20.0 to 20.0k Hz Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter  Opt-2A Q 15.0 to 0.50 Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor. THRESHOLD -80.0 to 10.0 dB Threshold value at which processing begins to apply RATIO ∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50 Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal MODE BELOW, ABOVE Specifies whether the processor will operate when the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW) ATTACK/RELEASE FAST, SLOW, AUTO Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied Parameter Range Description GAIN -56.0 dB to 40.0 dB Output level PEAK REDUCTION -48.0 dB to 48.0 dB Amount of gain reduction RATIO 2.00 to 10.00 Compression ratio METER SELECT OUTPUT+10, GAIN REDUCTION, OUTPUT+4 Switches the meter display  Buss Comp 369 Parameter  EQ-1A This processor emulates a vintage EQ that's considered a classic example of a passive EQ. Parameter Range Range Description INPUT ADJUST -15.0 to +15.0dB Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB. Stereo link function (STEREO only) Description LOW FREQUENCY 20, 30, 60, 100 Hz Frequency range of the low range filter LINK ON, OFF (LOW) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the low range filter METER IN, GR, OUT Meter switch (STEREO only) (LOW) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter VU IN, OUT Meter switch (DUAL only) HIGH FREQUENCY 3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter COMP IN ON, OFF Compressor on/off (HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0 Boost amount of the high range filter COMP RATIO 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1 Ratio of the compressor (HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0 Band width of the high range filter COMP GAIN 0.0 to +20.0dB Compressor gain (HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter (HIGH) ATTEN 0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the high range filter COMP RECOVERY 100ms, 400ms, 800ms, 1500ms, a1, a2 OFF, ON Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit. Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec. COMP THRESHOLD -40 to -5dBFS Threshold of the compressor LIMIT IN ON, OFF Limiter on/off LIMIT ATTACK FAST, SLOW Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms LIMIT RECOVERY 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 800ms, a1, a2 Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec. LIMIT THRESHOLD -16 to -5 dBFS Threshold of the limiter IN 21 Data List  MBC4 Parameter Parameter LOW CROSSOVER Description -18.0dB to 12.0dB Crossover frequency between the low and low mid bands KNEE HARD, 1, 2, 3, SOFT Knee of compressor VCA, OPTO Compressor type Range 20 to 500Hz Range MASTER GAIN Description Master gain MID CROSSOVER 80 to 10kHz Crossover frequency between the low mid and high mid bands FLAVOUR HIGH CROSSOVER 1k to 15kHz Crossover frequency between the low high mid and high bands HARMONICS ON, OFF Switches the harmonics on/off LINK GAIN - Links and controls the gain of the four bands LOW GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB Low band gain LINK THRESHOLD - Links and controls the threshold of the four bands LOW THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of low band LINK RATIO - Links and controls the ratio of the four bands LOW RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of low band LINK ATTACK - Links and controls the attack time of the four bands LOW ATTACK 0.1 to 120ms Attack time of low band LINK RELEASE - Links and controls the release time of the four bands LOW RELEASE 5 to 1000ms Release time of low band LOW COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of low band on/off ON, OFF If this is on, the low band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. LOW CUE ON  Automixer Parameters Parameter Range Description Group a, b, c Channel control field group Override OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field ChMode man, auto, mute Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute) LOW MID GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB Low mid band gain LOW MID THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of low mid band ChModePreset man, auto, mute Preset setting of the channel control field LOW MID RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of low mid band Weight -100 to 15 Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel control field LOW MID ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of low mid band MeterType gain, input, output Meter type of the master field LOW MID RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of low mid band MasterOverride OFF, ON Turns on/off overriding of the master field LOW MID COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of low mid band on/off MasterMute OFF, ON Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field LOW MID CUE ON ON, OFF If this is on, the low mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. Gain 0 to 127 Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “gain” InputLevel 0 to 127 HIGH MID GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB High mid band gain Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “input” HIGH MID THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of high mid band OutputLevel 0 to 127 Output level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “output” HIGH MID RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of high mid band PostWeightingFilter 0 to 127 Level indicator of the channel control field HIGH MID ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of high mid band HIGH MID RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of high mid band HIGH MID COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of high mid band on/off HIGH MID CUE ON ON, OFF If this is on, the high mid band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. HIGH GAIN -18.0dB to 12.0dB High band gain HIGH THRESHOLD -80.0dB to 0.0dB Threshold of high band HIGH RATIO 1.0:1 to 20.0:1 Ratio of high band HIGH ATTACK 0.1ms to 120ms Attack time of high band HIGH RELEASE 5ms to 1000ms Release time of high band HIGH COMP IN ON, OFF Switches the compressor of high band on/off ON, OFF If this is on, the high band signal will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring. HIGH CUE ON 22 Data List Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes Mode NO ASSIGN BALANCE Parameter 1 INPUT ATT Parameter 2 ON ATTACK OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-STEREO R INPUT CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) OUTPUT — RATIO CUE MODE — KNEE SURROUND CUE MODE — GAIN H FADER CUE RELEASE ON — GAIN L INPUT CUE POINT — ON DCA CUE POINT — ATTACK OUTPUT CUE POINT — THRESHOLD DCA UNITY — RELEASE H OUTPUT LEVEL H — OUTPUT LEVEL L — ACTIVE CUE — GAIN H CLEAR CUE — GAIN L/Q KNEE/WIDTH SPECIFIC CH CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) DCA 1-DCA16 FADER H ON RANGE HOLD H INPUT DYNAMICS1 MIX BALANCE INPUT DYNAMICS2 DECAY/RELEASE H RELEASE L RATIO/TYPE LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q DCA 1-DCA 16 LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN CH 1-CH 72*1 INPUT EQ RACK1-8 HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQ HIGH Q HIGH GAIN OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) INPUT CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R HIGH TYPE OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) HIGH FREQ LPF ON LOW TYPE INPUT HPF ON A ON B GAIN 1A-GAIN 31A CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R HIGH MID GAIN *1 CH 1-CH 72 STIN1L-STIN8R FADER L CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R ON INPUT FADER H CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R FILTER FREQ PARAM 1 H - PARAM 32 L GEQ HOLD L DECAY/RELEASE L BYPASS EFFECT Parameter 2 CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R THRESHOLD FADER L DIRECT OUT INPUT — ON DCA Parameter 1 — CH ON CUE Mode INSERT GEQ RACK1-GEQ RACK16 EFFECT RACK1- EFFECT RACK8 ON FREQ CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R INPUT CH 1-CH 72*1 OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) GAIN 1B-GAIN 31B 23 Data List Mode Parameter 1 ON LCR CSR Parameter 2 Mode LOW FREQ MIX 1 ON - MIX24 ON LOW GAIN MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON LOW MID Q MIX 1 POINT - MIX 24 POINT LOW MID FREQ MIX 1 H - MIX24H MATRIX1 H - MATRIX8 H LOW MID GAIN CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R HIGH MID Q OUTPUT EQ HIGH MID FREQ MIX 1 L - MIX24L HIGH MID GAIN MATRIX1 L - MATRIX8 L HIGH Q MIX 1/2 PAN - MIX 23/24 PAN HIGH FREQ MATRIX1/2 PAN - MATRIX7/8 PAN HIGH GAIN MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT LOW TYPE MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON MIX TO MATRIX MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H LOW HPF ON HIGH LPF ON MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN PAN/BALANCE TO STEREO ON TO MONO ON MIX 1-MIX 24 SOURCE SELECT DEFINE ASSIGN MONITOR BAND1 BYPASS BAND1 GAIN H MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) OMNI 1-2-OMNI 7-8 PB OUT BAND1 GAIN L BAND1 FREQ BAND1 Q BAND2 BYPASS BAND2 GAIN H PHONES LEVEL LINK PEQ CUE INTERRUPTION MONITOR FADER H OUTPUT ATT BAND2 GAIN L BAND2 FREQ GEQ RACK 1A-16B EFFECT RACK 1A-8B BAND2 Q — BAND3 BYPASS MONITOR FADER L BAND3 GAIN H DELAY AUTO BYPASS BAND3 GAIN L DELAY ON MUTE MASTER CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R ON — DIMMER ON MONO MONITOR INPUT A/B LINK PAN OUTPUT MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) HIGH TYPE MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MIX TO STEREO Parameter 2 LOW Q MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT MIX/MATRIX SEND Parameter 1 ON CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R MIX 1-MIX 24 BAND3 FREQ ON MASTER 1-MASTER 8 BAND3 Q OUTPUT MIX1-MIX24 MATRIX1-MATRIX8 STEREO L-MONO(C) BAND4 BYPASS BAND4 GAIN H ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE H OUTPUT DYNAMICS1 RELEASE L RATIO MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) GAIN H GAIN L KNEE/WIDTH 24 Data List Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Mode Parameter 1 BAND4 GAIN L BAND4 FREQ BAND4 Q BAND5 BYPASS RECALL SAFE ON BAND5 GAIN H BAND5 GAIN L BAND5 FREQ BAND5 Q MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT BAND6 BYPASS MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON BAND6 GAIN H STEREO TO MATRIX MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L BAND6 FREQ MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN BAND6 Q SOURCE SELECT BAND7 BYPASS 2CH MONITOR ASSIGN BAND7 GAIN H DOWNMIX BAND7 GAIN L SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO BAND7 FREQ SURROUND MONITOR BAND7 Q BAND8 BYPASS PEQ MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H BAND6 GAIN L BAND8 GAIN H BAND8 GAIN L BAND8 FREQ Parameter 2 CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R MIX 1-MIX 24 MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8 STEREO L-MONO(C) GEQ RACK 1A-16B EFFECT RACK 1A-8B PREMIUM RACK 1A-8B DCA 1-DCA16 SURROUND SPEAKER L SURROUND SPEAKER R STEREO L-MONO(C) — SURROUND SPEAKER C SURROUND SPEAKER LFE GEQ RACK 1A-16B EFFECT RACK 1A-8B SURROUND SPEAKER Ls SURROUND SPEAKER Rs BAND8 Q LR PAN HPF ON FR PAN HPF FREQ FR PAN REVERSE HPF SLOPE DIV LPF ON L ON LPF FREQ SURROUND PAN LPF SLOPE R ON C ON NOTCH A ON LFE ON NOTCH A FREQ H Ls ON NOTCH A FREQ L Rs ON NOTCH A Q LFE LEVEL H NOTCH B ON LFE LEVEL L NOTCH B FREQ H NOTCH B FREQ L TO MONO ON CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R TO STEREO ON CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R NOTCH B Q NOTCH C ON NOTCH C FREQ H SELECTED CH CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R *1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48 NOTCH C FREQ L NOTCH C Q PHASE PREMIUM EFFECT A PREMIUM EFFECT B INPUT BYPASS PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L BYPASS PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L CH 1-CH 72*1 STIN1L-STIN8R RACK1-8 RACK1-8 25 Data List NRPN Parameter Assignments Parameter INPUT FADER MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1 - 4 LEVEL MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND INPUT ON MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 ON MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX ON MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1-8 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST PHASE INPUT From (HEX) 0000 To (HEX) 0057 0060 007D 007E 00DE 013E 019E 01FE 025E 02BE 031E 037E 03DE 043E 049E 04FE 0514 052A 0540 0556 056C 0582 0598 05B6 00D5 0135 0195 01F5 0255 02B5 0315 0375 03D5 0435 0495 04F5 0513 0529 053F 0555 056B 0581 0597 05AD 060D 0616 0633 0634 0694 06F4 0754 07B4 0814 0874 08D4 0934 0994 09F4 0A54 0AB4 0ACA 0AE0 0AF6 0B0C 0B22 0B38 0B4E 0B64 0B6C 068B 06EB 074B 07AB 080B 086B 08CB 092B 098B 09EB 0A4B 0AAB 0AC9 0ADF 0AF5 0B0B 0B21 0B37 0B4D 0B63 0B6B 0BC3 Parameter INPUT INSERT ON MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/ POST MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND INPUT to MATRIX1-4 PRE/POST MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND 26 From (HEX) 0BCC To (HEX) 0C13 0C2C 0C49 0C4A 0CAA 0D0A 0D6A 0DCA 0E2A 0E8A 0EEA 0F4A 0FAA 100A 106A 10CA 10D2 10DA 10E2 10EA 10F2 10FA 1102 110A 1112 111A 1122 112A 1132 113A 1142 114A 1152 115A 1162 116A 1172 117A 1182 118A 1192 119A 11A2 11AA 11B2 11BA 11C2 11CA 11D2 11DA 11E2 0CA1 0D01 0D61 0DC1 0E21 0E81 0EE1 0F41 0FA1 1001 1061 10C1 10D1 10D9 10E1 10E9 10F1 10F9 1101 1109 1111 1119 1121 1129 1131 1139 1141 1149 1151 1159 1161 1169 1171 1179 1181 1189 1191 1199 11A1 11A9 11B1 11B9 11C1 11C9 11D1 11D9 11E1 11E9 Parameter LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE INPUT57-64 HPF FREQ MIX1/2 MIX3/4 INPUT57-64 to MIX1/27/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 MATRIX5/6 INPUT57-64 to MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN MATRIX7/8 INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON INPUT57-64 RECALL ON SAFE INPUT57-64 to MONO ON RATIO INPUT49-64 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT49-64 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 ON RECALL SAFE ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q EQ INPUT, MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN ATT HPF ON LPF ON ON ATTACK THRESHOLD INPUT DYNAMICS1 RANGE HOLD DECAY/RELEASE INPUT DYNAMICS2 ON ATTACK THRESHOLD RELEASE MIX1-20, MATRIX, STEREO LR DYNAMICS1 RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH PAN/BALANCE INPUT INPUT57-64 EQ From (HEX) 11EA 11F2 11FA 1202 120A 1212 121A 1222 122A 1232 To (HEX) 11F1 11F9 1201 1209 1211 1219 1221 1229 1231 1239 123A 1241 1242 124A 125A 126A 127A 128A 1249 1259 1269 1279 1289 1299 129A 12A9 1304 1382 1400 147E 14FC 157A 15F8 1676 16F4 1772 17F0 186E 18EC 196A 19E8 1A66 1AE4 1B44 1BA4 1C04 1C64 1CC4 1D24 1DA2 1E20 1E9E 1F1C 1F9A 2018 2096 1381 13FF 147D 14FB 1579 15F7 1675 16F3 1771 17EF 186D 18EB 1969 19C1 1A65 1AE3 1B3B 1B9B 1BFB 1C5B 1CBB 1D1B 1DA1 1E1F 1E9D 1F1B 1F99 2017 2095 20ED Data List Parameter MIX9/10 INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16 MIX11/12 PAN MIX13/14 MIX15/16 MATRIX1/2 INPUT to MATRIX1/2, 3/4 PAN MATRIX3/4 MATRIX1/2 MATRIX3/4 MIX1-20, STEREO LR to MATRIX PAN MATRIX5/6 MATRIX7/8 MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST MIX1-20, MATRIX, BALANCE STEREO LR MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MIX, STEREO LR, MONO MATRIX4 SEND to MATRIX PRE/POST MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX ON MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND From (HEX) 20F6 2156 21B6 2216 2276 22D6 2336 234C 2362 2378 238E To (HEX) 214D 21AD 220D 226D 22CD 232D 234B 2361 2377 238D 2395 2396 23B3 23B4 23D0 23EC 2408 2424 2440 245C 2478 2494 249A 24A0 24A6 24AC 24B2 24B8 24BE 24C4 24D4 24E4 24F4 2504 2514 2524 2534 2544 2554 2564 2574 2584 2594 25A4 25B4 23CE 23EA 2406 2422 243E 245A 2476 2492 2498 249E 24A4 24AA 24B0 24B6 24BC 24C2 24D3 24E3 24F3 2503 2513 2523 2533 2543 2553 2563 2573 2583 2593 25A3 25B3 25C3 Parameter MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX4 SEND MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX1/2 INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MIX3/4 MIX1/2-7/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 BYPASS MIX BALANCE PARAM1 PARAM2 PARAM3 PARAM4 PARAM5 PARAM6 PARAM7 PARAM8 PARAM9 PARAM10 PARAM11 PARAM12 PARAM13 PARAM14 PARAM15 EFFECT RACK1-8 PARAM16 PARAM17 PARAM18 PARAM19 PARAM20 PARAM21 PARAM22 PARAM23 PARAM24 PARAM25 PARAM26 PARAM27 PARAM28 PARAM29 PARAM30 PARAM31 PARAM32 27 From (HEX) 25C4 25D4 25E4 25F4 2604 2614 2624 2634 2644 2654 2664 2674 26B4 26BC 26C4 26CC 26D4 26DC 26E4 26EC 26F4 26FC 2704 270C 2714 271C 2724 272C 2734 273C 2744 274C 2754 275C 2764 276C 2774 277C 2784 278C 2794 279C 27A4 27AC 27B4 27BC To (HEX) 25D3 25E3 25F3 2603 2613 2623 2633 2643 2653 2663 2673 2683 26BB 26C3 26CB 26D3 26DB 26E3 26EB 26F3 26FB 2703 270B 2713 271B 2723 272B 2733 273B 2743 274B 2753 275B 2763 276B 2773 277B 2783 278B 2793 279B 27A3 27AB 27B3 27BB 27C3 Parameter ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK1A-3B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 FADER MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 LEVEL MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND From (HEX) 27C4 27CA 27D0 27D6 27DC 27E2 27E8 27EE 27F4 27FA 2800 2806 280C 2812 2818 281E 2824 282A 2830 2836 283C 2842 2848 284E 2854 285A 2860 2866 286C 2872 2878 287E 28E4 28EA 292A 296A 29AA 29EA 2A2A 2A6A 2AAA 2AEA 2B2A 2B6A 2BAA To (HEX) 27C9 27CF 27D5 27DB 27E1 27E7 27ED 27F3 27F9 27FF 2805 280B 2811 2817 281D 2823 2829 282F 2835 283B 2841 2847 284D 2853 2859 285F 2865 286B 2871 2877 287D 2883 28E8 2929 2969 29A9 29E9 2A29 2A69 2AA9 2AE9 2B29 2B69 2BA9 2BE9 Data List Parameter MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX LEVEL MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND ON MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 ON MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST INSERT MIX21-24, MONO MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1-8 PRE/POST MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND ON DCA13-16 FADER BALANCE MIX21-24 (,MONO) ON LOW Q LOW FREQ LOW GAIN LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ MIX21-24, MONO EQ LOW MID GAIN HIGH MID Q HIGH MID FREQ HIGH MID GAIN HIGH Q HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN From (HEX) 2BEA 2BF0 2BF6 2BFC 2C02 2C08 2C0E 2C14 2C2A 2C30 2C70 2CB0 2CF0 2D30 2D70 2DB0 2DF0 2E30 2E70 2EB0 2EF0 2F36 2F46 2F4C 2F8C 2FCC 300C 304C 308C 30CC 310C 314C 318C 31CC 320C 324C 3252 3258 325E 3264 326A 3270 3276 327C 3282 3288 328E 3294 329A 32A0 32A6 To (HEX) 2BEE 2BF4 2BFA 2C00 2C06 2C0C 2C12 2C18 2C2E 2C6F 2CAF 2CEF 2D2F 2D6F 2DAF 2DEF 2E2F 2E6F 2EAF 2EEF 2F2F 2F45 2F4A 2F8B 2FCB 300B 304B 308B 30CB 310B 314B 318B 31CB 320B 324B 324F 3255 325C 3262 3268 326E 3274 327A 3280 3286 328C 3292 3298 329E 32A4 32AA Parameter HPF ON LPF ON LOW TYPE INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ HIGH TYPE LOW TYPE MIX, MATRIX, STEREO LR, MONO EQ HIGH TYPE LOW TYPE INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ HIGH TYPE INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 FREQ HPF DIRECT OUT INPUT65ON 72 MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 LEVEL MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 ON MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MATRIX5 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to MATRIX5/6 MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN MATRIX7/8 FADER SPEAKER MUTE SOLO SPEAKER MUTE L MONITOR SPEAKER MUTE R SURROUND MONITOR SPEAKER MUTE C SPEAKER MUTE LFE SPEAKER MUTE Ls SPEAKER MUTE Rs INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ ON ATTACK THRESHOLD MIX21-24, MONO RELEASE DYNAMICS1 RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH MIX1/2 MIX3/4 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MIX1/2-7/8 PAN MIX5/6 MIX7/8 MATRIX5/6 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN MATRIX7/8 MIX21-24, MONO EQ 28 From (HEX) 32AC 32B2 3440 3480 34C0 34E4 3508 3518 To (HEX) 32B0 32B6 347F 34BF 34E2 3506 3517 3527 3528 3537 3538 353F 3540 3550 3560 3570 3580 3590 35A0 35B0 35C0 35D0 35E0 35F0 3600 3610 3620 354F 355F 356F 357F 358F 359F 35AF 35BF 35CF 35DF 35EF 35FF 360F 361F 3620 3621 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3640 3680 3686 368C 3692 3698 369E 36A4 36AA 36EA 372A 376A 37AA 37EA 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 367F 3684 368A 3690 3696 369C 36A2 36A8 36E9 3729 3769 37A9 37E9 3829 Parameter MATRIX1/2 MATRIX3/4 MIX21-24, MONO to MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN MATRIX5/6 MATRIX7/8 MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK4A-6B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4, ON MIX1-16 CSR DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO ON STEREO ON DCA1-12 FADER MUTE MASTER ON RECALL SAFE ON From (HEX) 382A 3830 3836 383C 3842 3852 3858 385E 3864 386A 3870 3876 387C 3882 3888 388E 3894 389A 38A0 38A6 38AC 38B2 38B8 38BE 38C4 38CA 38D0 38D6 38DC 38E2 38E8 38EE 38F4 38FA 3900 3906 390C 3912 396A 39C2 To (HEX) 382E 3834 383A 3840 3851 3857 385D 3863 3869 386F 3875 387B 3881 3887 388D 3893 3899 389F 38A5 38AB 38B1 38B7 38BD 38C3 38C9 38CF 38D5 38DB 38E1 38E7 38ED 38F3 38F9 38FF 3905 390B 3911 3969 39C1 3A01 3A02 3A41 3A42 3A4E 3A5A 3A66 3A4D 3A59 3A61 3B05 Data List Parameter EXTERNAL GAIN1 INPUT GAIN 1 EXTERNAL GAIN2 INPUT GAIN 2 EXTERNAL GAIN3 INPUT GAIN 3 EXTERNAL GAIN4 INPUT GAIN 4 EXTERNAL GAIN5 INPUT GAIN 5 EXTERNAL GAIN6 INPUT GAIN 6 EXTERNAL GAIN7 INPUT GAIN 7 EXTERNAL GAIN8 INPUT GAIN 8 EXTERNAL +48V 1 INPUT +48V 1 EXTERNAL +48V 2 INPUT +48V 2 EXTERNAL +48V 3 INPUT +48V 3 EXTERNAL +48V 4 INPUT +48V 4 HA EXTERNAL +48V 5 INPUT +48V 5 EXTERNAL +48V 6 INPUT +48V 6 EXTERNAL +48V 7 INPUT +48V 7 EXTERNAL +48V 8 INPUT +48V 8 EXTERNAL HPF1 INPUT HPF1 EXTERNAL HPF2 INPUT HPF2 EXTERNAL HPF3 INPUT HPF3 EXTERNAL HPF4 INPUT HPF4 EXTERNAL HPF5 INPUT HPF5 EXTERNAL HPF6 INPUT HPF6 EXTERNAL HPF7 INPUT HPF7 EXTERNAL HPF8 INPUT HPF8 INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO ON MONO MIX1-16 TO MONO ON From (HEX) 3B06 3B0F 3B16 3B1F 3B26 3B2F 3B36 3B3F 3B46 3B4F 3B56 3B5F 3B66 3B6F 3B76 3B7F 3B86 3B8F 3B96 3B9F 3BA6 3BAF 3BB6 3BBF 3BC6 3BCF 3BD6 3BDF 3BE6 3BEF 3BF6 3BFF 3C06 3C0F 3C16 3C1F 3C26 3C2F 3C36 3C3F 3C46 3C4F 3C56 3C5F 3C66 3C6F 3C76 3C7F To (HEX) 3B0B 3B15 3B1B 3B25 3B2B 3B35 3B3B 3B45 3B4B 3B55 3B5B 3B65 3B6B 3B75 3B7B 3B85 3B8B 3B95 3B9B 3BA5 3BAB 3BB5 3BBB 3BC5 3BCB 3BD5 3BDB 3BE5 3BEB 3BF5 3BFB 3C05 3C0B 3C15 3C1B 3C25 3C2B 3C35 3C3B 3C45 3C4B 3C55 3C5B 3C65 3C6B 3C75 3C7B 3C85 3C86 3CC5 3CC6 3CD5 Parameter ON SLOT OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON OMNI OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON DIGITAL OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME LOW RATIO INPUT1-48, STIN1-4 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT1-48, STIN1-4 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GEQ RACK7A-8B GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 29 From (HEX) 3CD6 3D06 3D36 3D66 3D76 3D86 3D96 3D98 3D9A 3D9C 3DD4 3E0C 3E44 3E7C 3EB4 3EB8 3EBC 3EC0 3EC4 3EC8 3ECC 3ED0 3ED4 3ED8 3EDC 3EE0 3EE4 3EE8 3EEC 3EF0 3EF4 3EF8 3EFC 3F00 3F04 3F08 3F0C 3F10 3F14 3F18 3F1C 3F20 3F24 3F28 3F2C 3F30 To (HEX) 3D05 3D35 3D65 3D6D 3D7D 3D8D 3D97 3D99 3D9B 3DD3 3E0B 3E43 3E7B 3EB3 3EB7 3EBB 3EBF 3EC3 3EC7 3ECB 3ECF 3ED3 3ED7 3EDB 3EDF 3EE3 3EE7 3EEB 3EEF 3EF3 3EF7 3EFB 3EFF 3F03 3F07 3F0B 3F0F 3F13 3F17 3F1B 3F1F 3F23 3F27 3F2B 3F2F 3F33 Parameter MIX, MATRIX, STEREO ATT LR, MONO EQ INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO ON STEREO INPUT65-72, STIN5-8, ON MIX17-24 TO MONO ON LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8, MIX17-24 CSR RATIO INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 KNEE/WIDTH DYNAMICS1 GAIN reserved INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 DYNAMICS2 FILTER FREQ From (HEX) To (HEX) 3F34 3F56 3F58 3F67 3F68 3F7F 3F80 3F98 3FB0 3FC0 3FD0 3FE0 3FF0 3F97 3FAF 3FBF 3FCF 3FDF 3FEF 3FFF Data List Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter. It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.  Input channels Parameter HA Stereo*1 CHANNEL LINK RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8 ALL Channel Library USER LEVEL Parameter Select button Gain O*10 HA*10 O HA, GLOBAL HA HA Gain Compensation O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O +48V Phase AG-DG Link Digital Gain O O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O O HA O HA, GLOBAL HA HA O O*10 DIGITAL GAIN*10 O DIGITAL GAIN HA O Name, Icon, Color O INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME INPUT NAME O Input Patch O INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING INPUT PATCH LR-MONO SELECT Insert1, Insert2 * ST IN channels only ALL O Out Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH In Patch O INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA HA +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation On INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O Point INPUT INSERT O INPUT INSERT INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH INPUT PATCH Out Patch Direct Out O On, Level DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING Point DIRECT OUT O INPUT DIRECT OUT INPUT PROCESSING O O O HPF O INPUT HPF O INPUT HPF INPUT PROCESSING Att O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O EQ O INPUT EQ O INPUT EQ INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING Key-In Filter O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O Others O INPUT DYNAMICS1 O INPUT DYNA1 INPUT PROCESSING O O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING Others O INPUT DYNAMICS2 O INPUT DYNA2 INPUT PROCESSING On O Level O Pan/Balance O*11 Pre/Post O Key-In Source Dynamics1 Dynamics2 To Mix Key-In Source Pan Surround *2 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O SEND*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O INPUT MIX SEND*7 INPUT PROCESSING*4 O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O INPUT MIX ON INPUT MIX ON INPUT MIX SEND*2 O O INPUT MIX O INPUT MIX SEND*2 *7 O *4 O INPUT FADER/ON Divergence O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O LFE O O INPUT MIX SEND INPUT PROCESSING O 30 Data List Parameter To Matrix DELAY Stereo*1 RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE*8 CHANNEL LINK ALL Parameter Select button Channel Library USER LEVEL On O INPUT MATRIX ON*3 O INPUT MATRIX ON*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O Level O INPUT MATRIX SEND*3 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 O Pan/Balance O*11 O INPUT MATRIX SEND*7 INPUT FADER/ON*4 Pre/Post O O INPUT MATRIX SEND *7 ms O*10 INPUT O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O ON O INPUT DELAY O INPUT DELAY INPUT PROCESSING O *3 INPUT MATRIX SEND DELAY*10 O *4 INPUT PROCESSING O To Stereo O TO STEREO O INPUT TO ST INPUT PROCESSING O To Mono O TO STEREO O INPUT TO MONO INPUT PROCESSING O Pan/balance O*11 O INPUT TO ST INPUT FADER/ON O Pan Mode O O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O On O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O CSR O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O Mode O TO STEREO O *5 INPUT PROCESSING O On O INPUT CH ON O INPUT CH ON INPUT FADER/ON O Fader O*10 INPUT FADER*10 O INPUT FADER INPUT FADER/ON O LCR Mute Assign O INPUT MUTE O INPUT MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O DCA Assign O INPUT DCA O INPUT DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Channel Link O Cue O GLOBAL CH LINK Key In Cue Mute Safe O Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER Global Paste O *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11 *14 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1-8. Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1-24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled. Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1-8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled. These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Operates differentially Balance only Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected. 31 Data List  MIX Channels Parameters Linked for a stereo pair RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 CHANNEL LINK ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Name, Icon, Color O MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Out Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MIX PROCESSING Insert1, Insert2 Channel Library O On O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O Point O INSERT O MIX INSERT MIX PROCESSING O Att O EQ O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O EQ O EQ O MIX EQ MIX PROCESSING O O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING Dynamics1 To Matrix Key-In Source Others O DYNAMICS O MIX DYNA1 MIX PROCESSING O On O TO MATRIX ON O MIX MATRIX ON*7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O Level O*13 TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O SEND*7 MIX FADER/ON*4 O Pan/Balance O TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX Pre/Post O TO MATRIX SEND O MIX MATRIX SEND*7 MIX PROCESSING*4 O To Stereo O TO STEREO O MIX TO ST MIX PROCESSING O To Mono O TO STEREO O MIX MONO MIX PROCESSING O Pan/Balance O*11 O MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MIX FADER/ON O On O TO STEREO O *5 MIX PROCESSING O CSR O TO STEREO O *5 MIX PROCESSING O Mode O TO STEREO O *5 MIX PROCESSING O On O CH ON O MIX CH ON MIX FADER/ON O Fader O FADER O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON O WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 LCR From Input On O Level O Pan/Balance O Pre/Post O *11 WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MIX SEND*4 Mute Assign O MUTE O MIX MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O DCA Assign O DCA O MIX DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Channel Link O Cue O Mute Safe O GLOBAL CH LINK Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. 32 Data List *9 *11 *12 *13 *14 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Balance only For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. Linked only for stereo MATRIX Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.  MATRIX Channels Parameters Linked for a stereo pair RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 CHANNEL LINK ALL Parameter Select button USER LEVEL Name, Icon, Color O MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Insert1, Insert2 Out Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA MATRIX PROCESSING Channel Library O On O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O Point O INSERT O MATRIX INSERT MATRIX PROCESSING O Att O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O EQ O EQ O MATRIX EQ MATRIX PROCESSING O O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING O MATRIX DYNA1 MATRIX PROCESSING O O Dynamics1 Key-In Source Others O DYNAMICS On To Matrix TO MATRIX ON Level TO MATRIX SEND Pan/Balance TO MATRIX SEND Pre/Post TO MATRIX SEND Balance O O MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) MATRIX FADER/ON On O CH ON O MATRIX CH ON MATRIX FADER/ON O Fader O FADER O MATRIX FADER MATRIX FADER/ON O WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs WITH MATRIX SEND*4 On From Input Level From Mix From Stereo/Mono Pan/Balance Pre/Post O O O *11 O Mute Assign O MUTE O MATRIX MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O DCA Assign O DCA O MATRIX DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Channel Link O Cue O GLOBAL CH LINK Mute Safe O Recall Safe O EACH PARAMETER Focus Recall O EACH PARAMETER Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. 33 Data List *7 *8 *9 *11 *12 *14 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. Balance only For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.  STEREO, MONO Channels Parameter Linked for a stereo pair RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE *8, *12 ALL Channel Library USER LEVEL Parameter Select button Name, Icon, Color O STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME Output Patch O STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH Out Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH In Patch O STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA STEREO, MONO PROCESSING Insert1, Insert2 +48V, Gain, Gain Compensation O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING Point O O STEREO, MONO INSERT STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O O O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O O EQ O To Matrix O On Att Dynamics1 OUTPUT NAME Key-In Source O STEREO, MONO EQ STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O Others O O STEREO, MONO DYNA1 STEREO, MONO PROCESSING O On O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4 O O Level O*13 O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND*7 STEREO, MONO FADER/ON*4 Pan/Balance O O *7 *4 Pre/Post STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND STEREO, MONO FADER/ON *7 O *4 O O STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND STEREO, MONO PROCESSING Balance O O STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY) STEREO, MONO FADER/ON On O O STEREO, MONO CH ON STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O Fader O O STEREO, MONO FADER STEREO, MONO FADER/ON O O O Mute Assign O O STEREO, MONO MUTE ASSIGN MUTE GROUP ASSIGN O DCA Assign O O STEREO, MONO DCA ASSIGN DCA GROUP ASSIGN O Fade Time, On O*6 O *9 STORE O*6 Cue O Mute Safe O Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste O *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *12 *14 These parameters are available if “FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON. Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected. Applicable only to On/Off. Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel. Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME. Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT. Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected. 34 Data List  DCA Parameters  MUTE RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE ALL Parameter Select button Parameters USER LEVEL RECALL SAFE ALL Name, Icon, Color O DCA NAME DCA MASTER Name On O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER On MUTE GROUP MASTER Fader O DCA LEVEL/ON DCA MASTER Dimmer MUTE GROUP MASTER Fade Time, On O *9 STORE MUTE Assign MUTE GROUP ASSIGN Input DCA Assign *9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF. O USER LEVEL MUTE GROUP MASTER DCA GROUP ASSIGN  BUS SETUP Parameters RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE ALL Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan Link Parameter Select button MIX 1/2, …, MATRIX 7/8 USER LEVEL BUS SETUP  SURROUND BUS Parameters Stereo/Mono, Bus Type, Pan Link RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE ALL Parameter Select button SURROUND SETUP USER LEVEL BUS SETUP 35 Data List MIDI Data Format DATA This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able to understand, send, and receive. STATUS DATA 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE If [TABLE] is selected 1.1 NOTE OFF (8n) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored) 1.2 NOTE ON 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95, 102-119) * 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) * Numbers 0, 32, and 96-101 cannot be used. * Control number 6, 38 can be used. (9n) 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off) paramSteps add mod curValue = paramMax-paramMin + 1; = paramWidth / paramSteps; = paramWidth-add * paramSteps; = paramSteps * add + mod / 2; (1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value; (2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384; (2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low); (2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low); 1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN]. Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON. If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes” (page 23). If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter. Transmission If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes” (page 23). If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes” (page 23). CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks. STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1011nnnn Bn Control change * 01100011 63 NRPN MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB * The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted. STATUS DATA Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA STATUS DATA 00 Control number (00) 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) 1011nnnn Bn Control change 20 Control number (32) 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) (2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127); (3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152; (3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low); (3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128; (3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384; (3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); (3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low); 1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) Reception If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST]. Transmission If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted. PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.) You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH. If SINGLE is selected You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH. You can choose whether a bank select message will be added. A bank of up to 16 can be specified. If MULTI is selected The Rx and Tx channels will be the same. The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added. You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels. STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) (3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue-mod / 2) / add; If [NRPN] is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change 01100010 62 NRPN LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB 36 Data List 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE EOX 2.1 SONG SELECT (F3) Reception Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder. STATUS 11110011 F3 Song select Song number 0sssssss ss Song number (0-127) 2.2 TIMING CLOCK STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2.3 ACTIVE SENSING (FE) Reception Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms. This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2.4 SYSTEM RESET (FF) 11111111 FF System reset 3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3.1 MMC < MMC STOP > EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 01 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Stop(MCS) End of exclusive < MMC PLAY > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000011 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 03 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Deferred Play(MCS) End of exclusive < MMC RECORD STROBE > Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000110 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 06 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Record strobe End of exclusive < MMC PAUSE > STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00001001 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 09 F7 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id Pause(MCS) End of exclusive 3.2 BULK DUMP This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit. The basic format is as follows. Command Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops. STATUS ID No. Device ID COMMAND Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback. Reception If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses. Reception When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared). This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS < MMC DEFERED PLAY > (F8) Reception This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note. Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings. 00000010 02 Play(MCS) 11110111 F7 End of exclusive F0 7F dd 06 System exclusive message Real time System exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id rx/tx F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd rx/tx dd ... ee F7 F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx Function BULK DUMP DATA BULK DUMP REQUEST The CL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump. Module Name(mm) SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB 8BandPEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Premium Effect Portico5033 LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “8PEQ____” “EFFECT__” “PEFFECT_” “P5033___” 37 Data Number(dd) *1) *15) *16) *17) *2) *7) *8) *3) *9) *10) *11) *4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23) *18) *7) *8) *19) *9) *10) *11) *5) *12) *13) *6) *14) *20) *21) Module Name(mm) Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Buss Comp 369 LIB MBC4 LIB Dante Input Patch LIB Mixer Setup Outport Setup Monitor Setup MIDI Setup Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table Preference (Current) Preference (Admin) Preference (Guest) User Defined Keys (Current) User Defined Keys (Admin) User Defined Keys (Guest) Custom Fader Bank (Current) Custom Fader Bank (Admin) Custom Fader Bank (Guest) User Level (Current) User Level (Guest) *1) *2) *3) *4) *5) *6) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *12) *13) *14) *15) *16) *17) *18) *19) *20) *21) *22) *23) *24) “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “BSCMP369” “MBC4____” “DANTEIN_” “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” Data Number(dd) *21) *21) *21) *21) *21) *21) *21) *24) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) Fix (512) 0-300 Scene Number (0 Request Only), 1-199 Input EQ Library Number (1-40 Request Only) 1-199 Output EQ Library Number (1-3 Request Only) 1-199 Dynamics Library Number (1-41 Request Only) 0-199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only) 1-199 Effect Library Number (1-27 Request Only) 512-583 Input 1-72, 584-599 STIN 1L-8R, 768-791 MIX 1-24, 1024-1031 MATRIX 1-8, 1280-1282 STEREO L-C, 512-530 GEQ 1-19, 531-538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8, 0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only) 512-519 EFFECT 1-8, 512 Current Data, 768 Current Data with Recall Safe, 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data, 0-199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only), 0-199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only), 512-527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B 0-100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only) 1536-1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2), 1608-1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dynamics2), 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only) Data is lost when you write to the preset library. The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series. To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0. CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received. A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request. Data List In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit data. [Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } [Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON. This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH]. Transmission If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number. In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number. Command rx/tx F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7 RARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7 PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx Function CL series native parameter change rx/tx CL series native parameter request 4 PARAMETER CHANGE details 4.1.3 Data category Data Category 4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP 0x01 Name Current Scene /Setup/Backup/ User Setup Data 00000001 4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 19 cc eh el ih il ch cl dd : F7 System exclusive message Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series Element no High. Element no Low. Index no High. 4.2 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY STORE, RECALL 4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME Index no Low. Channel no High. Channel no Low. Data End of exclusive 4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) MODULE NAME Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00011001 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 19 cc eh el ih il ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) DATA n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Number High nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Element no High. Element no Low. 4.2.2 Function Name Index no High. Index no Low. Channel no High. Channel no Low. End of exclusive 38 Function Name Store Recall “LibStr__” “LibRcl__” Unknown Factor Store Unknown Factor Recall Store Undo (only Score) Recall Undo (only Scene) “LibUnStr” “LibUnRcl” “LibStrUd” “LibRclUd” Data List 4.2.3 Module Name Module Name Scene Input EQ Output EQ Dynamics Input CH Output CH GEQ 8BandPEQ Effect Portico5033 Portico5043 U76 Opt-2A EQP-1A Dynamic EQ Buss Comp 369 MBC4 Dante Input Patch Function “LibStr__” “LibUnStr” “LibRcl__” Function “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “8PEQ____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “BSCMP369” “MBC4____” “DANTEIN_” EFFECT LIB Number 1-199 *7) Premium Effect LIB 0-100 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 0-10 *5) SCENE 0 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 0 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 0 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 0 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 0 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 0 *6) 8BandPEQ LIB 0 *6) EFFECT LIB 0 *7) Premium Effect LIB 0 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 0 *5) “LibStrUd” SCENE 0 0 “LibRclUd” SCENE 0 0 “LibUnRcl” *1) SCENE Number 1-300 Channel*1) *5) INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 42-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 1-199 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 1-199 *6) 8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6) EFFECT LIB 28-199 *7) Premium Effect LIB 1-100 *9) Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 *5) SCENE 1-300 0 INPUT EQ LIB 41-199 0 OUTPUT EQ LIB 4-199 0 Dynamics LIB 42-199 0 INPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 OUTPUT CH LIB 1-199 0 GEQ LIB 1-199 0 8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 0 EFFECT LIB 28-199 0 Premium Effect LIB 1-100 0 Dante Input Patch LIB 1-10 0 SCENE 0-300 *5) INPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *1) OUTPUT EQ LIB 1-199 *2) *3) *4) Dynamics LIB 1-199 *1) *2) *3) *4) *8) INPUT CH LIB 0-199 *1) OUTPUT CH LIB 0-199 *2) *3) *4) GEQ LIB 0-199 *6) 8BandPEQ LIB 1-199 *6) tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx *2) *3) *4) *5) *6) *7) *8) *9) Channel*1) tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx 0:CH1 71:CH72 72:ST IN 1L 87:ST IN 8R 256:MIX 1 279:MIX 24 512:MATRIX 1 519: MATRIX 8 1024:STEREO L 1026:STEREO C 512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one. 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B 38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B, 40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8 1280:CH1 1351:CH72 1352:ST IN 1L 1367:ST IN 8R 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B, 2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B 4.3 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY EDIT 4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) 39 MODULE NAME DATA EOX 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0sssssss 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 ff ff ff ff mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm sh sl eh el dh dl F7 (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) number -source start High number -source start Low number -source end High number -source end Low number -destination start High number -destination to start Low End of exclusive 4.3.2 Function Name Function Name Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert Edit Undo “LibCpy__” “LibPst__” “LibClr__” “LibCut__” “LibIns__” “LibEdtUd” 4.3.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB 8BandPEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Buss Comp 369 LIB MBC4 LIB Dante Input Patch LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “8PEQ____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “BSCMP369” “MBC4____” “DANTEIN_” Function Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Clear Only Data List 4.4 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE - 4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) 4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. When the message is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be edited. Transmission PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request. If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 0000dddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “A” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) “r” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low dd Data28~31bit dd Data21~27bit dd Data14~20bit dd Data7~13bit dd Data0~6bit F7 End of exclusive STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000001 01110100 01110010 01100010 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “A” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) “r” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Scene/Library number High nl Scene/Library number Low eh Element High el Element Low ih Index High il Index Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Module Name DynamicEQ LIB Buss Comp 369 LIB MBC4 LIB Dante Input Patch LIB 4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE 4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Transmission When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change. This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only. Top number is requested number or more. -ExampleSCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101 Request Number: 0 Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7 Request Number: 8 Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10 Request Number: 11 Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101 Request Number: 102 Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 4.4.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB 8BandPEQ LIB EFFECT LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “GEQ_____” “8PEQ____” “EFFECT__” Number 0-300 (0:response only) 1-200 (1-40:response only) 1-200 (1-3:response only) 1-200 (1-41:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 0-200 (0:response only) 0-199 (0:response only) 1-200 (1-27:response only) Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 40 Number 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-100 (0:response only) 0-10 (0:response only) “DYNAEQ__” “BSCMP369” “MBC4____” “DANTEIN_” DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 0mmmmmmm F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “E” (ASCII CODE) “x” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “s” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee 0eeeeeee 11110111 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ss nh nl th tl eh el F7 (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) (ASCII CODE) Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data ) Request Number High Request Number Low Top Number High Top Number Low End Number High End Number Low End of exclusive Data List 4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) 4.6 FUNCTION CALL - COLLECTION STORE - Reception The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received. 4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01000101 01111000 01101001 01110011 01110100 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “L” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “b” (ASCII CODE) “E” (ASCII CODE) “x” (ASCII CODE) “i” (ASCII CODE) “s” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Request Number High nl Request Number Low F7 End of exclusive Transmission Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA 4.5.3 Module Name Module Name SCENE LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB Dynamics LIB INPUT CH LIB OUTPUT CH LIB GEQ LIB 8BandPEQ LIB EFFECT LIB Portico5033 LIB Portico5043 LIB U76 LIB Opt-2A LIB EQP-1A LIB DynamicEQ LIB Buss Comp 369 LIB MBC4 LIB Dante Input Patch LIB “SCENE___” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “DYNA____” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNL” “GEQ_____” “8PEQ____” “EFFECT__” “P5033___” “P5043___” “U76_____” “OPT-2A__” “EQ-1A___” “DYNAEQ__” “BSCMP369” “MBC4____” “DANTEIN_” Number 1-300 41-200 4-200 42-200 1-200 1-200 1-200 1-199 55-200 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-10 EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 01010101 01101110 01010011 01110100 01110010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “C” (ASCII CODE) “o” (ASCII CODE) “l” (ASCII CODE) “U” (ASCII CODE) “n” (ASCII CODE) “S” (ASCII CODE) “t” (ASCII CODE) “r” (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) nh Number High nl Number Low ch Channel High cl Channel Low F7 End of exclusive Module Name User Defined Keys (Admin) User Defined Keys (Guest) Custom Fader Bank (Current) Custom Fader Bank (Admin) Custom Fader Bank (Guest) User Level (Current) User Level (Guest) 4.7 FUNCTION CALL - MODULE 4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received (depending on the effect type). STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME 4.6.2 Function Name Function “ColUnStr” Number 0 Setup User Defined Key 0 Program Change 0 Control Change 0 tx/rx tx tx tx tx DATA 4.6.3 Module Name Module Name Mixer Setting Outport Setting Monitor Setting MIDI Setting Lib Number Program Change Table Control Change Table “MIXERSET” “OUT_PORT” “MONITOR_” “MIDI_SET” “LIB_NUM_” “PRGMCHG_” “CTRLCHG_” Preference (Current) Preference (Admin) Preference (Guest) User Defined Keys (Current) “PREF_CUR” “PREF_ADM” “PREF_GST” “UDEF_CUR” 41 “UDEF_ADM” “UDEF_GST” “CFAD_CUR” “CFAD_ADM” “CFAD_GST” “UKEY_CUR” “UKEY_GST” EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01001101 01101111 01100100 01000110 01111000 01010100 01110010 01100111 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0eeeeeee 0ppppppp 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “M” “o” “d” “F” “x” “T” “r” “g” mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) ee Effect number (0:RACK1-7:RACK8) pp Release:0, Press:1 F7 End of exclusive 4.7.2 Module Name Module Name Freeze Play button Freeze Record button “FRZPLAY_” “FRZREC__” Number 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7 0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7 This will not work when the Effect Type is different. Data List 4.8 FUNCTION CALL - CHANNEL - 4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME MODULE NAME DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00000000 01000011 01101000 01101100 01010000 01101001 01110010 01000011 01110000 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0sssssss 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 19 CL Series 00 OTHER DATA “C” “h” “l” “P” “i” “r” “C” “p” mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) sh Source Channel Number H *1) sl Source Channel Number L *1) dh Destination Channel Number H *1) dl Destination Channel Number L *1) F7 End of exclusive 4.8.2 Module Name Module Name Pair On (with Copy) Pair On (with Reset Both) Pair Off *1) “PAIRONCP” “PAIRONRS” “PAIROFF_” 0:CH1 - 71:CH72 256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24 512:MATRIX 1-519:MATRIX 8 4.9 LEVEL METER DATA 4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE) When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds. If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds. Reception The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled. When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00011001 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd : 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 19 21 mm mm mm dd : F7 System exclusive message Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Data1 End of exclusive 4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST) Reception Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match. The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on. The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices). If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will stop (will be disabled) immediately. Transmission When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00011001 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 19 21 mm mm mm ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer CL Series REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Count H Count L End of exclusive 42 Data List Input/output characteristics DIGITAL INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS ANALOG INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Input Terminals OMNI IN 1-8 GAIN For Use With Nominal 7.5kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines +66dB -6dB +64dB TALKBACK Input Level Actual Load Impedance 10kΩ +20dB *1 Nominal Max. before clip -82dBu (61.6μV) -62dBu (0.616mV) -42dBu (6.16mV) -10dBu (245mV) +10dBu (2.45V) +30dBu (24.5V) -60dBu (0.775mV) -40dBu (7.75mV) Sensitivity -70dBu 50-600Ω Mics & (0.245mV) 600Ω -26dBu Lines (38.8mV) -16dBu (0.123V) +4dBu (1.23V) Connector Terminal Format Data length Level Audio Connector Primary/ Secondary Dante 24bit or 32bit 1000Base -T 64ch Input/64ch Output @48kHz EtherCON Cat5e DIGITAL OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)*2 DIGITAL XLR-3-31 type OUT*1 (Balanced)*2 Byte Output Terminals 0 OMNI OUT 1-8 PHONES *1. *2. *3. *4. * * 75Ω 15Ω 600Ω Lines 8Ω Phones 40Ω Phones Output Level GAIN SW*3 Nominal Max. before clip +24dB (default) +4dBu (1.23V) +24dBu (12.3V) +18dB -2dBu (616mV) +18dBu (6.16V) - 75mW*4 65mW*4 AES/EBU 1 Connector 2 XLR-3-32 type 3 (Balanced)*1 Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) 150mW (Unbalanced)*2 24bit 4 Field Name 0 Block Format 1 Mode 5 Emphasis Level Connector RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)*2 Sampling Frequency 0-3 Channel Mode 4-7 Users Bit Management 0-2 Use of AUX 3-7 Source 0-7 Multi Channel 2 3-6 7 Fixed/Variable fixed Fs Lock 6-7 0-1 150mW AES/EBU Professional Use Bit 2-4 ANALOG OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS For Use With Nominal Data Length *1. Channel Status of DIGITAL OUT *1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are maximum position.) *2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD) * In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms. * All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128times oversampling. * +48V DC ( phantom power ) is supplied to ONI IN (1-8) and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switches. Actual Source Impedanc e Format Terminal Digital Audio Reference Signal Sampling Frequency Sampling Frequency Scan Flag variable fixed fixed fixed fixed Data Description 1 professional use 0 audio 0x4 off 0 lock 0x0 others 0x3 32 kHz 0x2 44.1 kHz 0x1 48 kHz 0x1 2ch mode 0x0 - 0x1 24 bits Audio Data 0x00 - 0x00 - 0x0 0 - variable 0x0 others fixed 0 - *2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD) XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD) PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip= LEFT, Ring= RIGHT, Sleeve= GND) There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max. In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms. All output DA converters are 24bit, 128times oversampling. 43 Data List I/O SLOT (1-3) CHARACTERISTICS Each I/O Slot accepts a mini-YGDAI card. Only Slot1 has a serial interface. CONTROL I/O CHARACTERISTICS Terminal MIDI WORD CLOCK Format Level IN MIDI - OUT MIDI - IN - TTL/75Ω terminated BNC Connector OUT - TTL/75Ω BNC Connector - - IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100Base-TX - 0V-12V*2 USB 2.0 - - - JL05 Connector - D Sub Connector 9P (Female) GPI (5IN/5OUT) NETWORK LAMP (CL5: x3, CL3: x2, CL1: x1) USB HOST DC POWER INPUT METER (CL3/CL1 only) - Connector DIN Connector 5P DIN Connector 5P D Sub Connector 15P (Female)*1 RJ-45 XLR-4-31 type*2 USB A Connector (Female) *1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up (47kΩ) Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA) Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA *2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp rating 5W. Voltage control by software. 44 Data List  Sampling Frequency Electrical Characteristics Parameter All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms  Frequency Response. Input OMNI IN 1-8 Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz-20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω PHONES Conditions GAIN: +66dB 8Ω  Total Harmonic Distortion. Input OMNI IN 1-8 Internal OSC Output 600 Ω OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω PHONES 8Ω Typ. Max. -1.5 0.0 0.5 -3.0 0.0 0.5 Unit External Clock Conditions Frequency Range dB Jitter of PLL Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz RL OMNI OUT 1-8 Min. Min. Typ. +4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB Max. Unit Frequency 0.1 +4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: -6dB 0.05 Full Scale Output @1 kHz 0.02 Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2 Internal Clock % Accuracy Jitter Conditions Fs= 44.1 kHz Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%) Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%) Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz -0.1%) Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz -4.0%) Fs= 48 kHz Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%) Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%) Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz -0.1%) Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz -4.0%) Min. Typ. -200 DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz Word Clock : Int 48 kHz Unit +200 ppm 10 ns 44.1 Word Clock : Int 48 kHz Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz Max. kHz 48 -50 +50 Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz 4.429 Word Clock : Int 48 kHz 4.069 ppm ns * Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz  Hum & Noise. Input OMNI IN 1-8 Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise Output OMNI OUT 1-8 RL 600 Ω Conditions Min. - Max. -84 -79 dBu OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB Master fader at nominal level and all OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level. -70 OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off -88 8Ω Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min. -88 PHONES Unit -62 Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level. All INPUTs Typ. -128 EIN Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB Master fader at nominal level and one Ch fader at nominal level. * Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.  Dynamic Range. Input OMNI IN 1-8 - Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz Output RL OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: -6dB Conditions Min. Typ. 108 Max. Unit dB OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter 112 dB * Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter. 45 Data List Mixer Basic Parameters Function Parameter Function Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec  Libraries Name Number Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec Total Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 300 301 Input CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Output CH Library Preset 1 + User 199 Input EQ Library Output EQ Library Dynamics 1 Range= Gate: -∞ dB to 0 dB Ducking: -70 dB to 0 dB Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB 200 Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Preset 40 + User 159 199 Key In: Preset 3 + User 196 199 Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block) Dynamics Library Preset 41 + User 158 199 Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF Effect Library Preset 27 + User 172 199 Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB Ratio= Premium Rack Library Portico5033 Portico5043 U76 Opt-2A EQ-1A Dynamic EQ Buss Comp 369 MBC4 Preset 1 + User 199 Dante Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 10 11 Parameter Insert Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block) Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Compander: 1:1 to 20:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Dynamics 1 Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/ MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block) Width= 1 dB to 90 dB Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB Width= 1 dB to 90 dB On On/Off Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63 TYPE= HPF, BPF DCA Group 16 Groups 8 Groups On On/Off Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On Mix to Matrix Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB Slope= -12dB/Oct, -6dB/Oct Pan/Balance Position L63 to R63 Pan Mode: Pan/Balance Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz DCA Group 16 Groups -96 dB to 0 dB Mute Group 24 sends Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes (Surround Pan can be set 1 to 6 mixes) Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Low Shelving (Low Band) Mix Send Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On 8 Sends Matrix Send Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Level= 0 to -96dB (1 dB step) On/Off= Software control Function Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB (Position L63 to R63, R63 to F63 for Surround) PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type II) Oscillator  Output Port 8 Groups Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Dynamics 1 PRECISE, AGGRESSIVE, SMOOTH, LEGACY(Type I/Type II) Mute Group -96 dB to +24 dB Direct Out High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN Insert -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB Low Shelving (Low Band) Q= 0.10 to 10.0 L,R-MONO 4 Band Equalizer Gain= Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Fader Normal/Reverse Digital Gain Attenuator 4 Band Equalizer Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec 44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec 200 Dynamics2 Function HPF Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec  Input Function Phase 1:1 to ∞:1 Compander: 1:1 to 20:1 Parameter Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz Parameter Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse Gain -96 to +24 dB  Processor Function Parameter Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100% GEQ Threshold=Gate: -72 dB to 0 dB Others: -54 dB to 0 dB DELAY 0 ms to 1000 msec PEQ (8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 32(48) systems AUTOMIXER 8(16) channels Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec 44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec  Output Function Function Attenuator Parameter 31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems Premium Rack Parameter Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x 8 systems -96 dB to 0 dB 46 Data List Pin Assignment 4 9 14 15 20 7 13 19 6 12 18 23 1 2 3 8 11 2 1 5 1 10 16 17 22 3 8 5 21 15 DC POWER INPUT 11 10 9 9 GPI 6 METER (CL3/CL1 only) Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name 1 +24V 13 GND 1 GPO1 9 GPO2 1 RESET 6 +3.3LD 2 +24V 14 GND 2 GPO3 10 GPO4 2 SDA 7 +3.3LD 3 +24V 15 GND 3 GPO5 11 GND 3 DGND 8 LDGND 4 +24V 16 GND 4 GND 12 GND 4 SCL 9 LDGND 5 +24V 17 GND 5 +5V 13 +5V 5 +3.3D 6 +24V 18 GND 6 GPI1 14 GPI2 7 +24V 19 CAUTION(+) 7 GPI3 15 GPI4 8 +24V 20 CAUTION(-) 8 GPI5 9 +24V 21 DETECT A 10 GND 22 DETECT B 11 GND 23 DETECT GND 12 GND Frame GND 47 Data List 48 :True# O: Yes X: No Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Aux Messages Effect Control *1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request. *2 MMC X X X X O O X X X X X X :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset IDI Implementation Chart Recorder Control Assignable Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB,MSB Assignable Cntrl Notes O X X X :Clock :Commands X O X System Real Time X X X O *1,*2 :Song Pos. :Song Sel. :Tune O *1 O 0–127 0–300 O O O O O O O O O 0–127 ************** X X X O 9nH, v=1-127 O X X X O 9nH, v=0,127 X Common System Exclusive Prog Change Control Change 0,32 6,38 98,99 1-31,33-95, 102119 Key’s Ch’s After Touch Pitch Bend Note On Note Off Velocity Effect Control True Voice Note Number 0–127 X Memorized 1, 3 X X X X ************** Default Messages Altered Mode 0–127 X Memorized 1–16 1–16 Remarks 1–16 1–16 Recognized Version: 1.0 Default Changed Transmitted MIDI Implementation Chart Date: 1 Mar. 2012 Basic Channel Function... Model: CL5/CL3/CL1 YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ] M Data List Yamaha Pro Audio global website http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com Manual Development Group © 2012 Yamaha Corporation Published 04/2016 MA-E0